——

ee ee ee Tt

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

ia

LIBRARY

OF THE

Museum of Comparative Zoology

'
i

t

tsi han
Pe Nb a
gaa

ORY ALT
AT a ae

i ti

lant)

aes

Ts
Prbboti

Be
my

OTTAWA

The CANADIAN
FIELD-NATURALIST

Volume 7D)
1958

Published by
THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

ONTARIO

PThe CANADIA:
FIELD. NAT URALIST

Published by The OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, Ottawa, Ontario

Articles

Phe Significance of Turtle Bones from Archaeological Sites in Southern
3 Ontario and Quebec SHERMAN BLEAKNEY |

‘The Supposed - Occurrence and Nesting of the Slaty-backed .
Gull in the Western Arctic Reeien of Canada E. Orro Honn’~ = 5

Birds y Cape Breton ea Nova yee co W. Eart Goprrey 7

The Distribution of te Western Dainead Turtle in Manitoba Cuar_es D. Biro 28

Reports |
Christmas Bird Census—1957 | 32
| Financial Statement of the Ottawa ee Club, 1957 48

“Report of neil Seventy-ninth Annual Meeting of the :
Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, 1957 2 49

Reviews

A Flora of the Marshes of California — aihe Dikeciburion of Minnesota Minnows — The
Warblers of North America 51

Can. Field Nat.

' Vol. 72 Ottawa, January-March 1958 |

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALIST Ss pe:

FouNDED IN 1879

ihe objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a ne of nature, to
encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observations in _
all branches of natural history. The patron is His Excellency, the Right Honorabie Vin-
cent Massey, C.H., Governor General of Canada. The club is a corpse member ot —
the Federation of Ghaue Naturalists. ;

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL
Loris S. Russet., President, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario
Epwarp L. Bousrietp, First Vice-President
J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY, Second Vice-President
Raymonp J. Moore, Treasurer, Science Service Building, Ottawa, Gatane :
A. W. F. BaNriEtp, Secretary, National Museum of Canada, Oe Ontario
I. L. Conners, C. Frankton, Auditors
Mrs. Joun W. Arnotp, Miss ANNE Banninc, Miss Anna Brown, Miss CHARLOTTE
Ditt, Mrs. JoHNn HAWKESBRIDGE, Miss RutTH Horwer, Miss ViIoLET HumPpuries, Miss |
PAULINE Snure, Miss Mary Sruart, THE Reverend F. E. Banim, Messrs. R. M.
ANDERSON, J. W. Arnotp, W. K. W. "BALDWIN, D. R. Beckett, B. Bown, A. E. Bour-
GUIGNON, K. Bow es, A. W. Cameron, W. J. Copy, I. L. Cries W. G. Dorg, C.
FRANKTON, R. Frirn, J. M. Giver, W. E. Goprary, H. Grou, J. WwW. Groves, R. A.
Hamuron, W. I. ILLMan, W. Hz. LANCELEY, H. Liovp, Ww. W. Marr, H. MarsHatt,
Dua: Munro, A. E. Porsixp, Pe A: RupveLt, D. B. O. SaviLe, Hes de Soca Re ey
SINCLAIR, V. E. F. SoLMaN.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Science Service ee Ottawa, Ontario —

Rosert A. Hamitton, Editor — W. J. Copy, Huan Manager
Associate Editors: F. J. ALcock (Geology), Jou~w W. ARNoLD (Entomology), W. A. Bett
(Paleontology), J. SHzERmMAN BieakNney (Herpetology), Austin W. CaMERON (Mam-
malogy), WiLL1AM G. Dore (Botany), J. R. DyMonp eae W. Eart Goprrey —
(Ouuthology): A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), A. LaRocqur (Conchology).
The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’
Club with the assistance of affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manuscripts _
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of na- —
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the most
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertising —
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIONS.
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879, 1886, and the OTTAWA ;
NATURALIST, 1886-1919, are obtainable from the ieee ae

/

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION |

The annual membership fee of $3.00 covers subscription to the journal. [seine
however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current numbers
of regular issues are ninety cents. Money orders should be made payable to the Ottawa
Field-Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of change of address should
also be sent to the treasurer.

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

VoLUME 72 JANUARY-MARCH 1958 Numser 1

THE SIGNIFICANCE OF TURTLE BONES FROM
ARCHAEOLOGICAL SITES IN SOUTHERN
ONTARIO AND QUEBEC

SHERMAN BLEAKNEY
Natural History Branch, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

Tue Avutuor’s interest in the present and past distribution of turtles in eastern
Canada has led him to examine the turtle bones and turtle shell rattles in the
collection of the National Museum of Canada. The bones examined are from
prehistoric archaeological sites in Ontario and Quebec and many of these
specimens have been reported already by Wintemberg (1928, 1936) but upon
re-examination I find that two species were overlooked and that one was
misidentified. It may, therefore, be of interest to archaeologists and ethnologists
to have these bones and rattles evaluated from the herpetologist’s point of view.

The bone fragments were identified by comparing them with skeletal
material of turtles in the herpetological collections of the National Museum
of Canada. Because the eight species of turtles which occur in Ontario belong
to seven distinct genera, it was relatively easy to make accurate determination
on many of the fragments. Approximately 100 fragments were determined as
follows: two pieces of Wood Turtle, four pieces of Box Turtle, 26 pieces of
Blanding’s Turtle, 33 pieces of Painted Turtle and 35 pieces of Snapping
Turtle shell.

Perhaps the most significant observation was that of the eight native
species of Ontario turtles only three were represented in any abundance in the
bone collections, and one of these species constituted the bulk of the material.
The dominant species was the Midland Painted Turtle Chrysemys picta margi-
nata, a ubiquitous pond turtle. (Although there are numerically more Snapping
Turtle bones many of them are from a single turtle). The two other species
are Blanding’s Turtle Emys blandingi and the Snapping Turtle Chelydra
serpentina serpentina, also turtles of the shallow water habitat. (Wintemberg
reported only the Painted, Snapping and Wood Turtle and I believe that the
bones of Blanding’s Turtle were mistaken for those of the Wood Turtle. They
are similar in size but not in structure). In southern Ontario there are two
other species of pond turtle, the Spotted Turtle Clemmys gutatta and Musk
Turtle Sternotherus odoratus, two species of river and lake turtle, the Map
Turtle Graptemys geographica and Spiny Softshell Turtle Trionyx ferox
spimifera,; and one terrestrial turtle, the Wood Turtle Clemmys insculpta. In
June the females of all these species leave the water in search of drier areas in
which to lay their eggs and during this sojourn on land they are easily caught.
There arises, then, the problem of why their shells are absent or scarce in the
Indian middens, graves, or other sites, as represented in National Museum
collections. To begin with, the adult Spotted and Musk Turtles are only four
inches long and for this reason they may not have been considered worth the
trouble of cooking. ‘The strong odor of the latter species would be a further

Mailing date of this number: 14 March 1958
1

2 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

deterrent. Some of the larger forms, such as the Map Turtle and Softshelled
Turtle, are faster, more secretive and very difficult to catch. The large but
meek terrestrial Wood Turtle must have been encountered by the Indians along
their trails; yet only two shell fragments (from Roebuck Site, Wintemberg,
1936) were evident in the material examined. If in truth this species was
avoided it may have been due to two factors. First, this turtle, and the Box
Turtle, eats mushrooms including poisonous ones and in the case of the latter
the poison will adversely affect persons eating the turtle. Secondly, the red
or orange color of the skin of the neck and legs of this turtle may have
encouraged the belief that it was poisonous, especially if a few cases of poisoning
had been experienced by the tribe.

The Midland Painted Turtle is without doubt the most conspicuous and
abundant of the three common species recorded and would be the one species
that could have been easily caught. It is probable that these three species were
caught in the lush plant and algal growths of shallow waters, chiefly by the
children, who must have quickly learned how to catch and hold a Snapping
Turtle by its tail.

Bones of one other species of turtle, the Box Turtle Terrepene carolina
were identified in the collections. This species is not native to Canada but is
common in eastern United States and ranges northwards to near the southern
short of Lake Erie. The bones are from three widely separated sites (see
accompanying list). In every case the bones have holes drilled through them
indicating that these Box Turtles shells were utilized as rattles (Figure 1, C).
In one instance (Kalton Co.) the entire carapace was intact. Perhaps rattles
were widely traded, and if so, it is reasonable to postulate that these rattles
were imported into Ontario from somewhere south of Lake Erie and that the
Box Turtle was never native to Ontario. There is the alternative explanation
that the species was present in Ontario during the Thermal Maximum and has
become extinct since that time. However, there is no supporting evidence and
even if the climate of southern Ontario were suitable during the Thermal
Maximum, the Great Lakes—St. Lawrence waterway would serve as an effective
barrier to the dispersal of this essentially terrestrial turtle.

It is perhaps of significance that the Indians of Ontario now construct
their rattles from Snapping Turtle shells. (There are 10 of these interesting
rattles in the ethnological collections of the National Museum of Canada).
Their relations to the south have continued to employ the shell of the Box
Turtle for rattle boxes. This is evident from two Box Turtle rattles at the
National Museum of Canada which were collected from the Seneca Tribe
on a reservation in Oklahoma, having been brought by them from their home
territory in New York State to this reservation.

Aside from the rattles only three bones showed signs of having been
utilized in some way. All these bones were from Blanding’s Turtle shells
and two are shown in Figure 1. The smaller bone is 2nd Right Peripheral Bone
of carapace (VIII-F-8754) and its original sharp edge has been worn down
considerably (Figure 1, B). The second bone was the anterior half of the left
Xiphiplastron Bone (VIII-E-1119) and it has been notched, possibly for the
purpose of marking on pottery (Figure 1, A). Notice how nicely the natural
shape suits the grip of the hand and how pressure could be exerted easily by
the thumb against the ridge. Blanding’s Turtle bones were found at six sites,

1958 BLEAKNEY: TURTLE BoNEs FROM ONTARIO AND QUEBEC 3

A

B C

Figure 1. Turtle bones showing evidence of having been utilized by Indians as (A) pottery
decorator, (B) scraper, and (C) rattle. (A) Xiphiplastron bone of Blanding’s Turtle
which has been notched, (B) Peripheral bone of Blanding’s Turtle which has had the
sharp margin worn down and (C) fragment of Box Turtle carapace with drilled hole.

five of them well within the species’ known range, but the fourth location,
that of the notched Xiphiplastron just mentioned, was near Lanoraie, Berthier
County, Quebec. This is 125 airline miles from Ottawa, which is the nearest
known locality for the species. Presumably an Indian fashioned this interesting
tool somewhere in southern Ontario or southern New England and carried it
about subsequently losing or discarding it near Lanoraie.

The third bone (VIII-F-1719b) consists of most of the left anterior half
of a plastron of Blanding’s Turtle and has one hole drilled at the left upper
margin and another drilled at the center line. This suggests that an attempt
had been made to create a rattle from a Blanding’s Turtle shell. The anterior
half of the plastron of this species is hinged, but the posterior half is fixed and
would present the problem of sealing the opening around the posterior half of
the shell. The Box Turtle has both halves of the plastron hinged and is
therefore ideally suited for conversion to a rattle box.

Wintemberg figured a turtle bone ornament and a partially reconstructed
Shell in his 1926 report on the Uren site. Unfortunately, these speciments
(VII-F-1719a and VIII-F-16601a-f) could not be found but the text figures are
most certainly of Blanding’s Turtle. The pendant was made from the anterior
half of a Blanding’s Turtle plastron, the portion which in life is hinged. ‘The
reconstruction consists of the posterior half of a turtle’s carapace.

Some rather interesting conclusions can be formulated from an analysis of
this chelonian archaeological material and they are presented here by way of a
summary. ‘hese conclusions are admittedly speculative, but they do indicate
the potential of information which lies dormant in archaeological bone
collections.

4 Tue CANADIAN FiIstp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

1. Because only three of the eight species of turtles native to Ontario were
consistently common in these bone collections, I conclude that the Indians of
the villages represented did not actively pursue turtles for food. If they had
hunted or trapped turtles diligently, there certainly would have been more
species represented in these bone collections.

2. The three turtle species in question, the Midland Painted Turtle, the
Snapping Turtle, and the Blanding’s Turtle, all inhabit shallow weed-choked
ponds and bays, precisely places where children are prone to explore. Probably
food supplies were supplemented with turtles caught by the children.

3. The Indians must certainly have encountered the terrestrial Wood
Turtle more often than is indicated by the only two bones found in the bones
examined. Dogs are, very adept at locating this species of turtle (bird dog
trainers often use Wood or Box Turtles to train Pointers) and it seems reasonable
to believe that the activities of the Indian’s dogs would reveal many Wood
Turtles that would otherwise be overlooked. One probable explanation is
that the Indians avoided this species because of known cases of poisoning from
it, due to its habit of feeding on poisonous fungi. The orange and red color
of the Wood Turtle’s skin would serve to strengthen any suspicion of its
being poisonous.

4. The Box Turtle and the Snapping Turtle are the only two northeastern
species whose shells can conveniently be modified into ceremonial rattles. A
few Box Turtle bones were identified from Ontario sites but this species is not
native in Canada. Because of this and the fact that all these bones had holes
drilled through them, it is concluded that these bones came from turtle shell
rattles imported from south of the Great Lakes. The shell of this turtle is
ideally suited for a rattle because both the anterior and posterior half of the
plastron are hinged and when shut they transform the shell into a box of bone.
No other northeastern turtle is similarly constructed and therefore all others
are difficult to convert to a closed container. However, the Snapping Turtle
has so little ventral shell and so much exposed skin that the skin can be cut, the
shell cleaned out, and the tough skin sewed together again. ‘The result is a
box which is half bone and half drum head. This is precisely what the Ontario
Indians now employ. There are ten of these recent Snapping Turtle rattles
at the National Museum of Canada.

The author is indebted to Mr. T. E. Lee of the Human History Branch of
the National Museum of Canada for suggesting this study and for his professional
advice from an archaeologist’s viewpoint.

LIST OF BOX, WOOD AND BLANDING’S TURTLE IDENTIFICATIONS

Terrepene carolina Box Turtle

1. WIII-F-14257. Lake Medal, Nelson Tp., Halton Co., Ontario, 1884.

2. WVIII-F-14270. East Gore, Northumberland Co., Ontario, 1884.

3. VIL-F-20527, 20528. Sidney Mackay site, Nottawasaga Tp., Simcoe Co.,
Ontario, 1926, (A, Figure 1, is 20528).
Clemmys insculpta Woop TurtLe

1. VIII-F-13926, 13992. Roebuck Site, Grenville Co., Ontario, 1915.

Emys blandingi BLaANviINe’s TURTLE :
1. VIUI-E-1119. Lanoraie, Berthier Co., Quebec, 1927. (Figure 1, C).

1958 BLEAKNEY: TURTLE BoNES FROM ONTARIO AND QUEBEC 5

2. VIII-F-17795 a,b,c,g. London Tp., Middlesex Co., Ontario, 1923.

3. VIII-F-5306. Bayham Tp., Flgin Co., Ontario, no date.

4. VIII-F-8754. Middleport, Onondago Tp., Brant Co., Ontario, 1921.
(Figure 1, B).

5. Eleven collections. Roebuck Site, Grenville Co., Ontario, 1915.

6. Nine collections. Uren Site, Oxford Co., Ontario, 1920.

REFERENCES
Wintemserc, W. J. 1928. Uren Prehistoric Village Site, Oxford County, Ontario. Bull.
nat. Mus. Canada No. 51.
———— . 1936. Roebuck Prehistoric Village Site, Grenville County, Ontario. Bull. nat.
Mus. Canada No. 83.

Received for publication 28 May 1957

_ THE SUPPOSED OCCURRENCE AND NESTING OF THE

SLATY-BACKED GULL IN THE WESTERN ARCTIC
. REGION OF CANADA
E. Orro HoHN

Department of Physiology and Pharmacology
University of Alberta, Edmonton, Alberta

Tue A.O.U. checklist of North American Birds (1931) lists the Slaty-backed
Gull Larus schistisagus as of casual occurrence in Alaska and in Franklin Bay,
N.W.T. The latter statement appears to be based on an adult reported to have
been collected June 9, 1901, and identified by Dr. A. K. Fisher in 1902 (Preble,
1908). When I informed Mr. W. E. Godfrey, National Museum of Canada,
of my intention to visit this area, he pointed out to me the following breeding
record in Bent (1921, p. 87): “There are two sets, of three eggs each, in Col.
John E. Thayer’s collection, taken by Capt. H. H. Bodfish in Harrowby Bay,
on the Arctic coast of northwestern Canada, June 11, 1901.” It is further
stated that the nests were “on a point making into the bay,” and that the parent
birds were collected and the skins identified by Mr. Robert Ridgway and Dr.
A. K. Fisher. Ridgway (1910), however, in his manual of North American
birds makes no reference to this breeding record.

I was able to spend the period July 18 to 23, 1955, on Harrowby Bay.
During this time, the coastline of the bay was covered in part on foot, while the
remainder was seen from a distance of not over half a mile from a boat by
Dr. J. R. Mackay, who was conducting a survey for the Geographical Branch,
Department of Mines and Technical Surveys, Canada, or by both of us
together. On July 23, I made a low-level airplane flight from the north shore
of Harrowby Bay over its apex and the old river channel which enters it and
across to the mouth of the Horton River, the valley of which was followed
for its lowermost twenty miles. Our flight altitude was such that Glaucous
Gulls seen below were readily identified. Throughout our stay in the area,
neither Mackay nor myself saw any large gulls other than Larus hyperboreus
barrovianus. An adult of this form was collected and a downy youngster was

6 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

seen on the Bay. Six other Glaucous Gulls collected in the mouth of the
Anderson River some thirty miles south of Harrowby Bay were also determined
to belong to this subspecies.

A. M. Bailey’s (1948, p. 240, 241) account of the Slaty-backed Gull as a
bird on the Alaskan list contains decisive information in connection with the
alleged Canadian records cited above. Bailey states there is only one skin
labeled ‘shot from the nest,” said to have been collected by Bodfish on June 9,
1901, in Harrowby Bay. On re-examination by Bailey the bird’s wing length
was found to be only 417 mm and he pronounced it definitely not a Slaty-
backed Gull but did not state his conclusions as to it’s actual identification.
The other ‘Bodfish gull’ apparently associated with this specimen in Bent’s
account, is said to have been taken in Alaska in 1903. This specimen Bailey
judged actually to be a Slaty-backed Gull.

Bodfish, in his biography (1936) states that he wintered at Baillie Islands
in 1900-1901 but although he reports finding Snowy Owl’s eggs in May and
early June and the taking of goose and swan eggs on June 26, 1901, in the
text covering this period he makes no mention of gulls or of Harrowby Bay.
Clearly, he did not find any gulls that seemed at all unusual to him in 1901, nor
is the Slaty-backed Gull mentioned anywhere in his book. It seems highly
probable in view of the identical dates of collection that the ‘Bodfish Harrowby
Bay Gull’ is the same as that cited by Preble as having been collected in
Franklin Bay; in any case, the specimen as shown by Bailey is not a Slaty-backed
Gull. Both the eggs and the skin may have been acquired by Bodfish from
natives from whom, according to his account, he bought game and curios. at
various times.

It follows from the above that there is no valid record of Larus schistisagus
for Canada or the adjacent seas nor any evidence that this gull has nested on
the North American continent.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

My field work in 1955 was supported by a research grant from the Banting
Fund to the Arctic Institute of North America.

i REFERENCES

AMerICAN OrwnitHo.ocists’ Union. 1931. BoprisH, Harston H. 1936. Chasing the
Check-list of North American birds. bowhead. Cambridge, Harv. Univ. Press.
4th ed. Preste, Epwarp A. 1908. A biological in-

Baitey, Arrrep M. 1948. Birs of arctic vestigation of the Athabaska—Mackenzie
Alaska. Pop. Ser. Colo. Mus. nat. Hist. 8. region. N. Amer. Fauna 27.

Bent, A. C. 1921. Life histories of North Ripeway, Rosertr. 1910. A manual of
American gulls and terns. Bull. U.S. nat. North American Birds. 4th ed. Phila-
Mus. 113. delphia, Lippincott.

Received for publication 13 September 1957

1958 Goprrey: Birps oF Care Breton IsLANpD 7

BIRDS OF CAPE BRETON ISLAND, NOVA SCOTIA

W. Ear_ GopFREY
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

Tue main sources of the following data, in addition to the scattered literature,
are two expeditions of the National Museum of Canada to Cape Breton Island,
Nova Scotia. In 1935, V. E. Gould, assisted by the writer, made.a survey of
the mammals of the island in the period August 18 to October 26. Although
bird studies were secondary to those of mammals, a considerable amount of
ornithological information was recorded and 229 bird specimens were collected.
Base camps were at Cape North, August 18 to September 25, Frizzleton,
September 26 to October 15; and St. Peters, October 16 to 26. Several attempts
to reach St. Paul Island, off the northern tip of the island, were unsuccessful
because of inclement weather.

The writer again visited Cape Breton Island in 1954 to study the summer
birds in the period June 4 to August 5. With the assistance of R. J. d’Entre-
mont, 326 bird specimens were secured and observations were made in various
parts of the island.

_ Other valuable sources of data were the meticulous notes made by J. E. V.
Goodwill, Canadian Hydrographic Service, Ottawa, in the summer of 1946
and 1947; a manuscript report of birds observed by Austin W. Cameron during
July, 1945, in Cape Breton Highlands National Park; and a manuscript list by
C. H. D. Clarke of birds observed by him in the Park between August 9 and
26, 1941.

Austin W. Cameron, Curator of Mammalogy, National Museum of
Canada, Ottawa, lived for several years at Port Hood, Cape Breton Island, and
furnished particularly useful seasonal information. Additional valuable data
were made available through the observations of Robie W. Thanks, ID). ea (Oy
Savile, P. A. Taverner, James Bond, R. M. Anderson, and J. S. Erskine. Mr.
Erskine’s list of 34 bird species he found on St. Paul Island, August 10 to 17,
1953, is especially useful.

Most of the available information on Cape Breton Island birds was secured
in spring, summer, and autumn. Adequate observation in winter would
probably add several species to the list and clarify the winter status of others.

Common Loon Gavia immer (Briinnich). Occurs regularly in summer
along the coast; breeds on freshwater lakes. A nest was observed by the writer
on the west side of Lake Ainslie on July 7, 1954.

Piep-BILLED GreBeE Podilymbus podiceps podiceps (Linnaeus). Breeds
locally. Nine were counted in the freshwater marshes near Scotsville, Inverness
County, on July 5, 1954. At Grande Anse, Richmond County, an adult was
seen passing food to a flightless young bird on July 19 and 20, 1954. Not previ-
ously recorded.

Soory SHEARWATER Puffinus griseus (Gmelin). Townsend (1906) saw
four south of Cape Breton Island between August 17 and September 5, 1905.
The writer noted two about ten miles at sea off Dingwell on August 24, 1935.

GREATER SHEARWATER Puffinus gravis (O'Reilly). One was seen at sea
south of Cape Breton Island by Townsend (1906) between August 17 and

8 Tue CaNnapiAN FIeELp-NaTURALIST Violea72

September 5, 1905. In 1953, Erskine (MS.) noted it occasionally in August
near St. Paul Island.

Leacu Perret Oceanodroma leucorhoa leucorhoa (Vieillot). Breeds in
colonies usually on coastal islands. In 1954, we located a small colony near
Louisburg on July 26. Some 23 pairs of wings were scattered about the ground,
the work of some predatory animal. Bayley (1925) stated that it breeds in
large numbers on Hertford and Hiboux (=Ciboux) islands. Gross (1937)
recorded a thriving colony on St. Paul Island, and Erskine (MS.) saw a nestling
there in August, 1952, which had been killed by a dog.

Witson Perret Oceanites oceanicus oceanicus (Kuhl). Probably a regular
summer nonbreeding visitor to offshore waters. Townsend (1906) apparently
observed it south of Cape Breton Island in late summer, 1905. Austin W.
Cameron (oral) noted several near Port Hawkesbury about August, 1943.

Brown Petican Pelecanus occidentalis subsp. Accidental. Whiteaves
(1904) recorded a male which was shot at Louisburg on May 19, 1904.

Gannet Morus bassanus (Linnaeus). Transient, sometimes common in
spring and autumn along the coast; uncommon nonbreeding summer visitant.
The writer noted 20 off Dingwall Bay on August 24, 1935, and two off Briton
Cove on June 13, 1954. Townsend (1906) saw one between Ingonish and
Sydney on September 1, 1905. Bayley (1925) states that a few visited Hertford
Islands occasionally. Austin W. Cameron (oral) has sometimes found it
common in November off Port Hood.

European Cormorant Phalacrocorax carbo carbo (Linnaeus). Perma-
nent resident, scarcest in winter. Breeds in colonies of various size along the
coast. Specimens examined—Dingwall Bay: 2 subadults, August 28, 1935.

DousLe-cresteD Cormorant Phalacrocorax auritus auritus (Lesson).
Common summer resident inhabiting both salt and fresh water. Breeds.

Great Biur Heron Ardea herodias herodias Linnaeus. Common summer
resident; breeds. In 1935, we observed it almost daily, 33 being the largest
number seen in a day (June 29). One was noted at St. Peters on October 21,
our latest autumn date.

American Ecrer Casmerodias albus egretta (Gmelin). Casual summer —
visitor. Grosvenor (1931) carefully identified two some four or five miles
from Englishtown on August 18 and 19, 1930.

AMerICAN Bitrern Botaurus lentiginosus (Rackett). Summer resident in
marshes. Noted by us near Baddeck, Scotsville, East Margaree, Strathlorne,
Grande Anse, and Cape North. Latest autumn observation September 18,
1935, at Cape North.

WuistLinc Swan Olor columbianus (Ord). Robie W. Tufts (oral) has
informed me that one was shot illegally by a hunter in Richmond County in late
autumn, 1919. One of two individuals near Louisburg on March 21, 1932,
was Captured in a weak condition and presented to the Sydney Park Commission.
Its wings were clipped but later when it regained its ability to fly it was
liberated.

ATLANTIC Canapa Goose Branta canadensis canadensis (Linnaeus). Regular
spring and autumn transient. At Judique, Inverness County, Cameron (oral)
observed about 200 in spring, 1954, and about 30 near Mabou on December 23,

1958 Goprrey: Birps oF Care Breton ISLAND 9

1954. Tufts (MS.) has found it wintering occasionally at Big Glace Lake,
Lingan Bay, and Mira Bay.

Brack Duck Anas rubripes Brewster. Common. Breeds. In 1954 we
saw 28 broods of young in well distributed localities. In 1935 also it was noted
in fair numbers at Cape North and Frizzleton. Specimen examined—Frizzle-
icon (Ne

GREEN-WINGED TEAL Anas carolinensis Gmelin. Scarce summer resident;
commoner in migrations. In 1935 at Cape North we saw two on September
7 and six on September 22. In 1954, we noted two at Cape North on June 20;
one at Strathlorne on July 8; and two at L’Ardoise on August 1.

BLuE-wIncep TEAL Anas discors Linnaeus. Uncommon summer resident;
breeds. In 1954 we noted it on Madame Island June 4(1); at Indian Bay near
Baddeck between June 6 and July 15 two adults were seen regularly and on July
12 there were three downies there. Noted also at Nyanza, June 6(4); Margaree
Forks July 7(1); East Margaree July 9 (2 ad., 2 broods of downies).

Rinc-NEcKED Duck Aythya collaris (Donovan). Although apparently
not previously recorded, this duck is locally not uncommon in summer, breeding
in freshwater marshes. In 1954, the writer counted 26 adults at Indian Bay
on June 6 but the number decreased somewhat subsequently. At Nyanza
three were observed on June 15; at Scotsville on July 5 six adults and broods of
nine and six downy young; on the west side of Lake Ainslie on July 7 four adults
and nine downies. Three broods of young were seen at Indian Bay on July
15 and an adult with seven young near Sydney on July 25 and 26.

AMERICAN GoLDEN-EYE Bucephala clangula americana (Bonaparte).
Common and widely distributed; breeds. In 1954, a total of 11 broods of
young were seen. On several occasions in early June, near Nyanza, one or
both of a pair were taken from a fireplace, having gained access by way of the
chimney presumably in search of a nesting place.

Oxp-squaw Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus). A fall, winter, and spring
visitor; rare in summer. On July 17, 1954, the writer observed four on Lennox
Passage, Madame Island. Each time the area was visited again on July 18,
22, and 28 these ducks were noted at about the same place. Bayley (1925)
says that it is common throughout the fall and winter, departing for the north
about the end of April.

Harteouin Duck Histrionicus histrionicus (Linnaeus). Bayley (1925)
recorded occasional flocks of from four to six about Hertford Islands during
November and December. Taverner (MS.) saw three locally-taken specimens
without further data.

AMERICAN Erper Somateria mollissima dresseri Sharpe. Permanent resi-
dent. Bayley (1925) said that it is common in winter about Hertford Islands.
V. E. Gould noted about 30 near Sea Wolf Island, Inverness County, and
collected a subadult male, on October 11, 1935. Bond (MS.) saw flocks at
Capstick in July, 1949. The writer saw two off Chimney Corner, Inverness
County, on July 4, 1954. Specimen examined—Sea Wolf Island: 1 subadult

October 11935.

[Kine Emer Somateria spectabilis (Linnaeus). Hypothetical. Bayley
(1925) states that it is of rare occurrence in winter. |

Wauite-winced Scorer Melanitta deglandi (Bonaparte). Common in

10 Tue CANADIAN Fie_p-NaATURALIST Vol. 72

autumn near Hertford Islands (Bayley, 1925). Taverner (MS.) saw a
mounted male and female at the Hertford Island Lighthouse. Clark (MS.)
saw a large flock at Aspy Bay on August 19, 1941.

AMERICAN ScoTER Oidemia nigra americana Swainson. A nonbreeding
permanent resident. Bayley (1925) says that it is common near Hertford
Islands in autumn, and Taverner (MS.) saw two mounted adults at the light-
house there. The writer saw 78 off Madame Island on June 4, 1954, and ten
there regularly from July 17 to 28.

Surr Scorer Melanitta perspicillata (Linnaeus). A nonbreeding perma-
nent resident. Bayley (1925) says that it is common near Hertford Islands in
autumn, and Taverner (MS.) saw two mounted adults at the lighthouse there.
The writer saw 78 off Madame Island on June 4, 1954, and ten there regularly
from July 17 to 28.

Hoopvep Mercanser Lophodytes cucullatus (Linnaeus). Bond (MS.) in
1949 observed a female at Warren Lakes and a male five miles south of Baddeck
in July, 1949.

AmeErIcAN Mercanser Mergus merganser americanus Cassin. Generally
less common than the Red-breasted Merganser. Breeds. On August 22, 1935,
the writer saw about 30 at Cape North and collected two flightless young. In
1954, he noted it at Madame Island (2 on June 4); at Nyanza (30); at Cape
North (5 on June 22); at East Margaree (2 adults on July 3, and 1 adult with
12 downies on July 8.)

Rep-BREASTED MerrGanser Mergus serrator serrator Linnaeus. Rather
common throughout the island; breeds. In 1954, I saw 12 broods of young in
various parts of the island. Gross (1937) recorded a brood at Port Bevis on
August 26, 1934. Specimen examined—Dingwell Bay: 1 juv.; August 29, 1935.

Turkey Vuttrure Cathartes aura septentrionalis Wied. Casual visitor.
Tufts (1927) recorded an immature specimen taken about ten miles from
Sydney on November 8, 1913, by J. N. McPhee. Goodwill (1948) observed
one near Bucklaw, Inverness County, on October 12, 1946.

Eastern GosHawk Accipiter gentilis atricapillus (Wilson). In 1935 the
writer took a specimen on September 9 and another on September 12 at Cape
North. In 1954 an adult was seen at Indian Bay on June 29 and another on
Sporting Mountain on July 19. Specimens examined—Cape North: 2 juv.;
September 9 and 12, 1954.

SHARP-SHINNED Hawk Accipiter striatus velox (Wilson). Breeds. The
writer has noted it at Cape North (August 22 and 28; September 21); at
Thibeauville on July 31; and near Grande Anse where an adult with two young
was seen on August 5, 1954.

[Cooper Hawk Accipiter cooperi (Bonaparte). Hypothetical. Towns-
end (1906) vaguely mentioned this species without giving details. Goodwill
(MS.) has a sight record of one near Whycocomagh on July 10, 1946.]

Eastern Rep-Tattep Hawk Buteo jamaicensis borealis (Gmelin). Fairly
common summer resident. In 1935 we observed 26 individuals between August
19 and October 12 at Cape North and Frizzleton. In 1954, we saw 18 individuals
between June 4 and August 2. One collected near Baddeck on July 13, 1954,
had five shrews Sorex cinereus and a wood frog Rana sylvatica in its stomach.
Specimen examined—Baddeck: 1 ad. unsexed, July 13, 1954.

1958 GopFrEY: Birps oF Care Breton IsLAnp 11

[RED-SHOULDERED Hawk Buteo lineatus (Gmelin). Erroneously recorded
by Townsend (1906).]

[Broap-wincep Hawk Buteo platypterus (Vieillot). Hypothetical.
Townsend (1906) vaguely reported seeing one. Later (im Burns, 1911) he
stated that the bird in question was observed at Ingonish on August 29, 1905.]

RoucH-LecceD Hawk Buteo lagopus s. johannis (Gmelin). One near
Baddeck on November 7, 1946, was observed by Goodwill (MS.)

NortTHERN Bap Eacte Haliaeetus leucocephalus alascanus Townsend. In
the rugged wooded hills of Cape Breton the Bald Eagle finds an abundance of
nesting places and the numerous waters contain an adequate supply of fish for
its food. Therefore, this fine bird is still a common sight in most parts of the
island. In spring, eagles are attracted to the rivers by the abundant alewives
Pomolobus pseudoharengus that ascend the rivers to spawn. On June 19, 1954,
the writer counted 12 Bald Eagles on a particularly favored 150 yards of
Baddeck River. Nests were seen near Indian Bay, Victoria Co.; Strathlorne,
Inverness Co.; and near Louisburg. The Strathlorne nest on July 14 contained
one large young. The Louisburg nest on July 26 contained a juvenal which
flew the following day. In August, 1953, Erskine (MS.) found it common on
St. Paul Island and saw one flock of eleven.

On July 5, 1954, a Bald Eagle was seen on the water some 110 feet from
shore. It progressed rather rapidly toward shore with occasional wing flaps
but it was propelled apparently mainly by the feet. On reaching shore it was
seen to have a fish in its talons.

At Whale Cove, near Margaree Harbour, on July 4, 1954, the writer saw
a Bald Eagle attempt an attack on a Double-crested Cormorant. Legs dangling,
the eagle hovered like an osprey some 60 yards above the cormorant then
swooped at it. The cormorant escaped by diving under water. The eagle left
the scene but returned a few minutes later and the procedure was repeated.

The smaller Southern Bald Eagle H. 1. leucocephalus may visit Cape Breton
Island in summer as is the case in other parts of Nova Scotia. Specimen
examined: Cape North: 1 subadult ¢ ; September 20, 1935.

Marsu Hawk Circus cyaneus hudsonius (Linnaeus). Not uncommon
summer resident about marshes, meadows, and hayfields. Specimen examined—
Cape North: 1 juv. unsexed,; August 27, 1935.

Osprey Pandion haliaetus carolinensis (Gmelin). A rather common
summer resident in most parts of the island near water. On June 5, 1954, at
Lake Ainslie, one repeatedly ‘dive-bombed’ a Bald Eagle as the latter sat in a
tree eating a fish. The eagle faced its attacker with open mouth but the Osprey
never actually struck it.

Duck Hawk Falco peregrinus anatum Bonaparte. Goodwill (MS.) saw
one at Gillis Point on September 16, 1946.

EastTern Pickton Hawk Falco columbarius columbarius Linnaeus. One was
seen by Bond (MS.) between July 3 and July 15, 1949. In 1935 we observed it
at Cape North on August 20(1), 22(1), 27(1); September 4(2), 5(1), 7(1),
12(2), 18(1), 21(2); and at Frizzleton one on October 8. Goodwill (MS.) saw
one on June 20, 1946, near Baddeck and another on July 24. Cameron (MS.)
noted one the actions of which suggested breeding on North Mountain, July 23,
1945. Specimens examined—Cape North: 2 juv. ? ; September 4-12, 1935.

12 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Eastern Sparrow Hawx Falco sparverius sparverius Linnaeus. Fairly
common summer resident throughout the island; breeds.

CanapA Spruce Grouse Canachites canadensis canace Linnaeus. Perma-
nent resident in coniferous forests throughout. In 1935 we recorded it at Cape
North on August 22(2) and September 11(1); at Frizzleton it was seen daily
October 1 to 6; and one was noted near St. Peters on October 19. In 1954 we
saw it only in the vicinity of Sporting Mountain where broods of well-grown
young were present on July 19 and 20. Specimens examined—Edge of Flat
Barren, Victoria Co.: 2 8,2 2; October 5-8, 1924. Cape North: 1 6; 192,
August 22-September 11, 1935. Frizzleton: 2 ¢ ; October 5-9, 1935.

Birds from the Maritime Provinces have been separated and named torridus
by Uttal (1939). Rand (1948), however, found the postulated characters not
consistently different from those of canace. The material from Cape Breton
examined in the present connection does not clearly suggest the recognition of
torridus although there is a tendency toward intensification of browns in females
from the Maritimes. /

Canapa RuFFep Grouse Bonasa umbellus togata (Linnaeus). Permanent
resident in most wooded parts of the island. Specimens examined—Cape North,
1 ad., 4 imm.; September 3-4, 1935.

B. u. thayeri Bangs, with type locality at Digby, Nova Scotia, does not
appear to be separable from B. u. togata; consequently Cape Breton Island
specimens are referred to togata.

RING-NECKED PuEasant Phasianus colchicus Linneaus. Introduced. The
writer observed a male at Grande Anse on July 19, 1954. Cameron (oral) saw
a male at Judique on May 21, 1953, and informed me that a female spent most
of December, 1954, at Port Hood.

[Vireta Raw Rallus limicola Vieillot. Hypothetical. This species was
doubtfully recorded by Dwight (1887).]

Sora Porzana carolina (Linnaeus). In 1954, the writer noted one indivi-
dual of this species at Indian Bay, Victoria County, on June 15; one at Scotsville
on July 5; and one at East Margaree on July 9.

PurPLe GaLLINuLE Porphyrula martinica (Linnaeus). Accidental. Robie
W. Tufts (im litt.) states that, according to the notes of the late Harry Piers,
one was taken on Scateri Island about July 1, 1915, and sent to F. C. Bell,
Sydney taxidermist, for mounting.

Lapwine Vanellus vanellus (Linnaeus). Accidental. A. J. Matheson
(in litt.)described and sketched very clearly a Lapwing taken at Lower
L’Ardoise, Richmond County, in late 1927 or early 1928. In as much as large
numbers of this Old World plover are known to have visited other points near
by on the Atlantic coast of Canada late in 1927, there is no reason to doubt
this record.

Eastern Pipinc PiLover Charadrius melodus melodus Ord. The only
record seems to be that of an immature taken by the writer at Dingwall Bay
on August 28, 1935. Specimen examined—Dingwall Bay: 1 juv. 9; August
ZSO LOZ.

SEMIPALMATED PiLover Charadrius semipalmatus Bonaparte. Common
migrant and rare local breeder. On June 13, 1954, we found a nest on a stony
heach at Jersey Cove, near Englishtown. This nest contained eight eggs,

1958 Goprrey: Birps oF Cape Breton IsLanp 13

aparently the product of two females. Specimen examined—Cape North:
lad. 6; August 28, 1935.

BLACK-BELLIED PLover Squatarola squatarola (Linnaeus). Migrant. Ob-
served regularly between August 17 and September 22, 1935, about 50 being
the largest number seen in a day (September 18). In 1954 it was first noted
on July 25 when one was seen at Louisburg. Specimens examined—Cape North:
2 ad. 9; August 19, 1935.

Ruppy Turnstone Arenaria interpres morinella (Linnaeus). Migrant.
Commonest in late summer and early autumn. Earliest autumn observation
July 18 (7 at L’Ardoise). Specimen examined—Dingwall Bay: 1 juv.; August
28, 1935.

American Woopcock Philohela minor (Gmelin). Fairly common sum-
mer resident. Judging by the number of flight songs heard, it was relatively
plentiful in the Baddeck region in 1954. Seasonally latest flight song heard on
June 23, 1954, near Cape North. Cameron (oral) has seen flightless young
on Port Hood Island. A Woodcock banded at Fairhope, Alabama, on
December 16, 1932, was recovered at Sydney, Cape Breton Island, on October
31, 1933.

Witson SNIPE Capella gallinago delicata (Ord). Common summer resi-
dent in freshwater marshes throughout. Specimens examined—Cape North:
2S, August 19-27, 1935.

[LonG-BILLED CurLEw Numenius americanus Bechstein. Hypothetical.
Bayley’s (1925) account of reports of curlews with long bills is not convincing
evidence of the occurrence of this species. |

Hupsonian Curtew Numenius hudsonicus Latham. Migrant. Taverner
(1942) quotes R. W. Tufts as follows: “Hundreds occur locally in Richmond
and Cape Breton counties and along the southwest shore of mainland during
July and August of each year.” In 1954, we observed more than 100 in the
extensive mats of Empetrum nigrum near Black Point at Louisburg on July 24
and there were seven at Port Morien on July 27. One at Grande Anse on July
22 was seasonally our earliest record. Bayley (1925) reports that it is an
occasional migrant on the Hertford Islands in flocks of from six to fifty.

SPOTTED SANDPIPER Actitis macularia (Linnaeus). Common summer
resident; breeds. Noted regularly in small numbers at all base camps.
Cameron’s (MS.) earliest spring date on Port Hood Island is May 16, 1941. Our
latest autumn date in 1935 was of one at Cape North on September 14.
Specimens examined—Cape North: 1 juv. 9, 1 ad. 3; August 21, 1936; June
25, 1954.

EAsTERN SOLITARY SANDPIPER Tinga solitaria solitaria Wilson. ‘Transient.
We observed two (one collected) at Cape North on August 26 and four there
on September 13. Another was taken at Frizzleton on October 4, 1935.
Erskine (MS.) observed six in August, 1953, on St. Paul Island.

EasTerRN WILEY Catoptrophorus semipalmatus semipalmatus (Gmelin).
Local summer resident; breeds. H. R. Webster (im litt.) saw Willets on
Madame Island in May, 1951, which were paired. Later, on August 6 he saw
this species at the mouth of Framboise River. In 1954, we observed two on
June 4 on Madame Island, and on July 17 we counted 11 adults there with four
flightless young, definitely establishing the breeding of this species on Cape

14 Tue CANnapDIAN FirLp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Breton Island. On July 18 two adults were seen at L’Ardoise and one was
noted there on August 1.

GreATER YELLOW-LEGS Totanus melanoleucus (Gmelin). Migrant and
uncommon summer resident; possibly breeds. In 1954, the writer observed
one on Madame Island and one at Baddeck on June 4; one between Baddeck and
Middle River on June 10; one at St. Anns, 3 at Jersey Cove, June 11; 5 at St.
Anns, 3 at Jersey Cove, July 11. Some of these seemed excited at our approach,
suggesting the presence of young. One at Point Michaud on August 3 circled
about me for some minutes calling loudly. Cameron (MS.) saw one on July
14, 1945, at Lake of Islands on the interior plateau, which behaved as though
it might have had young. After July 15 numbers increase as transients move in.
Specimens examined—Dingwall Bay: 1 ? ; August 23, 1935. Mouth of Ingonish
River: 1 juv. 6; October 11, 1924.

Lesser YELLow-LeEGs Totanus flavipes (Gmelin). Migrant. Clarke (MS.)
observed it at various places on the coast and about ponds in the interior barrens
where its behavior was similar to that of birds on the nesting ground. Cameron
(MS.) observed several at Ingonish and Pleasant Bay. In 1954, the writer
noted it first on July 11 when one was seen on mud flats at St. Anns. In later
July it became fairly common.

American Knot Calidris canutus rufa (Wilson). ‘Transient. The writer
observed it in 1954 at L’Ardoise, Richmond County, where two were present
on July 18; 16 on July 28, 15 on August 1. At Point Michaud there were
three on August 3. It does not appear to have been noted previously on the
island.

PecroraL SANDPIPER Evolia melanotos (Vieillot). Transient. An adult
was observed by the writer at Louisburg on July 27, 1954.

WHITE-RUMPED SANDPIPER Evolia fuscicollis (Vieillot). Transient. An
adult was observed at Dingwall Bay on August 23 and smaller numbers until
September 18, 1935. In 1954, eight were present on August 3 at Point Michaud.
Specimens examined—Dingwall Bay: 1 ad. 2, 1 juv. 3; August 23, 1935.

Least SaNpPIPER Evolia minutilla (Vieillot). Common transient. In 1954,
we first recorded it on July 7 after which its numbers increased rapidly.

Eastern DowircHer Limnodromus griseus griseus (Gmelin). ‘Transient.
In 1935, Gould saw one at Cape North on August 23 and five on September 13.
In 1954, the writer observed six at L’Archevesque and 30 at L’Ardoise on July
18. Other observations at Louisburg on July 24(5), 25(1), 26(2); and at
L’Ardoise July 28(2); August 1(7), 3(2). Specimen examined—Dingwall Bay:
1 post-juv. 6; August 23, 1935.

SEMIPALMATED SANDPIPER Ereunetes pusillus (Linnaeus). Common tran-
sient. In 1954 it was first noted on July 18 (2 at L’Ardoise) after which its
numbers rapidly increased along the coast. In 1935 it was noted until September
18 at Cape North. Specimens examined—Dingwall Bay: (2).

SANDERLING Crocethia alba (Pallas). Transient. In 1954, four were
observed at Point Michaud on August 3. In 1935 at Cape North one was seen
on August 28; one on September 7; 25 on September 11; and 150 on September
18. Specimens examined—Dingwall Bay: (1), Cape North (1).

Rep Puararope Phalaropus fulicarius (Linnaeus). An offshore migrant.
White (1891) noted three between Cape North and Cape St. Lawrence on
June 13.

1958 ‘Goprrey: Birps oF Care Breton IsLanp 15

NortTHerN Puararore Lobipes lobatus (Linnaeus). Migrant along the
coast. On August 29, 1935, Gould observed several flocks of phalaropes off
Dingwall Bay and collected one which proved to be this species. Whether or
not the specimen was preserved is unknown. Townsend (1906) saw several
at sea south of Cape Breton Island on August 17, 1905.

Griaucous Gutt Larus hyperboreus hyperboreus Gunnerus. One was
carefully observed by A. W. F. Banfield at Ingonish on March 21, 1947.

Great BLAcK-BACKED GuLL Larus marinus Linnaeus. Common; breeds.
Probably some winter on the coast. There is a large breeding colony near
Louisburg.

Herring Gui Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues. Common about
both salt and fresh water; breeds. Probably some winter. We noted it daily
in 1954.

Rinc-BILLED Gut Larus delawarensis Ord. Uncommon visitor. Towns-
end (1906) saw one at Ingonish in August, 1905. D. B. O. Savile (oral)
observed one yearling and two adults at Sugar Loaf (Aspy Bay) on August
17, 1956.

Biack-HEADED Gut Larus ridibundus Linnaeus. Goodwill (MS.) care-
fully observed one at Cheticamp on November 1, 1952. This species is now
known to occur in small numbers on the coast of the peninsula of Nova Scotia
in late autumn and winter.

Bonaparte Gut Larus philadelphia (Ord). Uncommon spring and fairly
common autumn transient. In 1935 as many as 50 were noted in late August
and mid-September at Dingwall Bay. Clarke (MS.) saw it regularly along the
National Park coast in August, 1941. In 1954, the writer observed five at
Nyanza on June 6. Specimens examined—Dingwall Bay: 1 ad., 2 juv.; August
23-28, 1935. 3

Ivory Gui Pagophila eburnea (Phipps). Casual autumn visitor. Piers
(1894) recorded a mounted specimen from Cape Breton Island (no further
locality) which was taken on October 15, 1889.

Atiantic Kirriwake Rissa tridactyla (Linnaeus). Migrant. Gould
(MS.) recorded three off Dingwall Bay on September 8 and two on September
9, 1935. Bayley (1925) stated that it is of common occurrence in October and
November in the vicinity of Hertford Islands. Taverner (MS.) saw a mounted
specimen taken there.

Common Tern Sterna hirundo hirundo Linnaeus. Common summer
resident. Breeds. In 1954 the writer visited small breeding colonies at St.
Anns, Jersey Cove, and near Baddeck. Specimens examined—Cape North: 1 ad.
2; August 19, 1935. Dingwall Bay: 1 ad. ¢; August 23, 1935.

Arctic TERN Sterna paradisaea Pontoppidan. Summer resident, less fre-
quently observed than the Common Tern in the writer’s experience. Breeds.
In 1954, the writer observed about 20 pairs nesting on small coastal islands near
Arichat, saw a number of adults at Petit-de-Grat, and noted several small
colonies on islands near Louisburg. “Townsend (1906) saw six at Ingonish in
August, 1905.

Razor-BILLED Auk Alca torda torda Linnaeus. Very local breeder and
coastal migrant. Bayley (1925) estimated 300 pairs nesting on Ciboux and
Hertford islands and stated that they arrive there in early May and depart

16 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

toward the end of August. On August 24, 1935, a young bird, still very small
and in the downlike juvenal plumage, was collected by V. E. Gould; and on the
same date the writer collected an adult male five miles at sea from Dingwall Bay.
Specimens examined—Dingwall Bay, 1 juv. ¢; Dingwall Bay (5 miles east)
aden:

Atiantic Murre Uria aalge aalge (Pontoppidan). Bayley (1925) stated
that probably not more than a dozen pairs of murres (sp.) nest on Ciboux and
Hertford islands, although he was told that they were much more plentiful in
former years. Taverner (MS.) visited these islands in 1929 and identified two
individuals, both Atlantic Murres.

Dovextr Plautus alle alle (Linnaeus). Dr. R. M. Anderson (MS.) remarks:
“Very abundant all along the coast from Ingonish to North Sydney in middle
of October, 1924.”

Arttantic Brack GuittemMor Cepphus grylle atlantis Salomonsen. Not
uncommon summer and winter resident along the coast; breeds. Bayley (1925)
mentions hundreds nesting at Hertford and Ciboux Islands at the time he wrote.
In 1935, Gould observed two off Dingwall Bay on August 24, and one there
on September 2. He collected the following two specimens. Specimens
examined—Dingwall Bay, 1 ad. ¢, 1 ad. unsexed, August 24-September 2, 1935.

Attantic Purrin Fratercula arctica arctica (Linnaeus). Bayley (1925)
stated that at the time he wrote there were certainly a thousand nesting on
Hertford and Ciboux Islands. They arrive there during the last week of April
or early May, and depart in late August. In 1935, we saw two (one collected)
in Dingwall Bay and another there on September 2. Specimens examined—
Dingwall Bay (1); Cape North (1).

Eastern Mourninc Dove Zenaidura macroura carolinensis (Linnaeus).
J. M. J[ones] (1870) stated that a specimen collected at Glace Bay was exhibited
at the March 8, 1869, meeting of the Nova Scotia Institute of Natural Science.
It was collected a short time prior to the meeting but the exact date is not given.
Taber (1952) reports one found dead October 28, 1950, at Mabou. A pair of
wings in the National Museum were found at Hillsboro, Inverness Co., on
November 24, 1950, by John W. Cameron who saw another at Port Hood on

December 10, 1956.

BLack-BILLED Cuckoo Coccyzus erythropthalmus (Wilson). Rare summer
resident; breeds. R. J. d’Entremont observed two near Thibeauville, Richmond
Co., on July 30, 1954, one of which he collected. It proved to be a female in
laying condition. Cameron (oral) saw one on Port Hood Island on July 17,
1941. C. americanus is listed by Dwight (1887) but probably the bird seen was
C. erythropthalmus. Specimen examined—Thibeauville: 1 ad. @ ; July 30, 1954.

Great Hornep Ow Bubo virginianus subsp. Not uncommon permanent
resident, breeds. The writer collected one near Cape North on August 26,
1935. In 1954, two young just capable of flight were seen on June 20 at
Baddeck Forks. Specimen examined—Cape North: 1 ad. 2; August 26, 1935.
This specimen approaches heterocnemis in its dark coloration, but is strongly
reddish as in virgimianus. Additional material is needed to determine more
closely the affinities of the Cape Breton Island population.

Snowy Ow Nyctea scandiaca (Linnaeus). Cameron (oral) has observed
this owl on Port Hood Island in winter.

NortTHern Barred Ow. Strix varia varia Barton. Moderately common

1958 Goprrey: Birps of Care Breton IsLAND 17

permanent resident. In 1935 we recorded individuals of this owl at Cape North —
on September 2 and 23 and at Frizzleton on October 1, 5, 6, and 14. Goodwill
(MS.) noted one on Kidston Island, off Baddeck, on November 3, 1946, and
August 31, 1947. Specimens examined—Cape North: 1 3, 19; September
2-23, 1935.

Saw-wHEer Ow Aegolius acadicus acadicus (Gmelin). Resident.
Macoun and Macoun (1909) record a pair at Sydney on June 12, 1902. In the
evening dusk of September 1, 1935, while the writer was engaged in setting
small mammal traps, one of these small owls alighted in an alder near by and
watched with obvious curiosity for fully a minute.

EasTerRN NiGHTHAWK Chordeiles minor minor (Forster). Not uncommon

_ summer resident; breeds. Cameron’s (oral) earliest spring record on Port Hood

Island is May 31, 1940. In 1935, we noted it until September 7 at Cape North.
It was recorded by Dwight (1887) and mentioned by Allen (1891). Specimens
examined—Cape North: 2 juv.; September 7, 1935. Margaree Forks: 1 ad. ¢ ;
July 5, 1954. :

Cuimney Swirt Chaetura pelagica (Linnaeus). Not uncommon summer
resident throughout the island. The writer recorded a total of 9i in the period
June 5 to July 27, 1954. Cameron’s earliest spring record at Port Hood Island
is May 16, 1939.

RuBy-THROATED Hummincsirp Archilochus colubris (Linnaeus). Un-
common summer resident. The writer noted a total of nine between June 6
and July 14, 1954. Specimen examined—Baddeck: 1 ad. 6; June 17, 1954.

EasterN BrL_tTep KINGFISHER Megaceryle alcyon alcyon (Linnaeus).
Common summer resident; breeds. In 1954 the writer observed a total of 104
from June 4 to August 3. Seasonally Cameron first noted it on May 1, 1938 and
1940, and we in 1935 saw it as late as October 3 at Frizzleton. A nest was seen
at Dingwall on June 24, 1954. Specimen examined—Cape North: 1 ¢; August
28, 1935.

NorTHern FLicker Colaptes auratus luteus Bangs. Common summer
resident; breeds. Spring arrival at Port Hood Island, April 14, 1938 (Cameron).
In 1935 we noted it seasonally as late as October 21 at St. Peters. Specimen
examined—Baddeck: 1 ad. ¢ ; July 10, 1954.

NortHEerN Pireatep Wooppecker Dryocopus pileatus abieticola (Bangs).
One was seen by Gould on October 22, 1935, at St. Peters. Clarke (MS.) in
1941 saw the work of this species at Long Lake as also did Cameron (MS.)
near Pleasant Bay in 1945. Bond (MS.) saw two near Baddeck in July, 1941.
The writer in 1954 observed two near Baddeck on June 19, collected one on
July 16; and saw one near Grande Anse on August 3. R. J. d’Entremont saw
one at Baddeck Forks on July 10, 1954. Specimen examined—Baddeck: 1 ad. ¢ ;
July 16, 1954.

YELLOW-BELLIED SAPSUCKER Sphyrapicus varius varius (Linnaeus). Un-
common summer resident; breeds. Macoun and Macoun (1909) considered it
a common summer resident at Sydney, stated that it was first seen on May 7,
and that eggs were far advanced by June 15. In 1954, we found a few
individuals in the Baddeck area and noted a nest with young on July 10. It
appears to be locally distributed on the island. Specimens examined—Baddeck:
2 ad. 6; June 7-29, 1954.

18 Tue CaNapDIAN FreLp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Eastern Hairy Wooprecker Dendrocopos villosus villosus (Linnaeus).
Fairly common permanent resident in wooded parts of the island. Specimens
examined—Cape North: 4 ¢; August 20-September 11, 1955; June 25, 1954.
Cleveland: 1 juv. ¢; July 23, 1954. All are unquestionably villosus. They
show very little tendency toward septentrionalis and none at all toward the
Newfoundland race terraenovae.

NortHern Downy Wooppecker Dendrocopos pubescens medianus (Swain-
son). Fairly common permanent resident in woodland throughout the island.
Specimens examined—Cape North: 1 ad. 3, 1 ad. 2; September 23, 1935; June
23, 1954.

Arcric THREE-TOED WoopPEcKER Picoides arcticus (Swainson). Uncom-
mon permanent resident in heavier coniferous forests of the island. Allen
(1891) observed one in June, 1890, in the Bras d’Or region. In 1935 we saw
two near Frizzleton on October 5 and one was seen at St. Peters on October
17, 19, 20, 21, and 22. In 1954, we recorded one near Baddeck on June 7, two
on June 30; one near Cleveland, Richmond Co., on July 23. Cameron (MS.)
noted one near Ingonish in July, 1945. Specimen examined—st. Peters: 1 ad.
2 ; October 29, 1935. Baddeck: 1 ad. g,1 ad. 2; June 30, 1954. The Baddeck
male listed above is slightly albinistic on dorsum and nape.

Eastern Kincpirp Tyrannus tyrannus (Linnaeus). Summer resident
frequenting tall shrubbery and trees of farms, roadsides, stream edges, and
similar open country. In 1954, we observed small numbers at Nyanza, English-
town, Baddeck Forks, Cape North, Whycocomagh, Margaree Forks, Scotsville,
Strathlorne, and Cleveland. Earliest spring record at Port Hood Island is May
17, 1941 (Cameron).

[EasterN Puorse Sayornis phoebe (Latham). Hypothetical. A sight
record of a pair at Sydney (Macoun and Macoun, 1909) requires confirmation. ]

YELLOW-BELLIED FLycatcuer Empidonax flaviventris (Baird and Baird).
Common summer resident in damper, mossy woodland often where alders are
present. In 1954, small numbers were seen or heard almost daily in suitable
habitat throughout the island. A nest, discovered by d’Entremont near
Baddeck on June 30, 1954, was located in moss on the forest floor and contained
four eggs. In 1935 our latest observation was at Cape North on August 31.
Clarke (MS.) stated that five were seen in the Park in 1945. Specimens
examined—Thibeauville: 1 ad. ¢, 2 ad. 2, 1 unsexed; July 29-31, 1954. Bad-
deck: 2 ad. 4, 1 ad. 9; June 7-30, 1954. Whycocomagh: 1 ad. 3; June 10,
1954.

Aber FiycatcHer Empidonax traillii traillii (Audubon). Rather uncom-
mon in alders and similar tall shrubbery throughout the island. In 1954 we
observed it from Port Hawkesbury to Cape North but always in small numbers.
Our latest autumn date was September 5, 1935, at Cape North. Specimens
examined—Cape North: I unsexed juv.,; August 27, 1935. Baddeck: 3 ad. 6,
lad. 9, 1 ad. unsexed; June 12-July 13, 1954.

Least FrycarcHer Empidonax minimus (Baird and Baird). Fairly com-
mon summer resident of more open woodland and wood edges; breeds. In
1935, one was collected at Cape North on August 27. In 1954, we found it
locally common near Baddeck where as many as eight were noted in a day and
in Aspy Valley where as many as five were observed in a day. A nest on a
horizontal branch of a beech near Baddeck was nearly completed on June 19.

1958 GopFrreyY: Birps or Care Breton IsLanp 19

Specimens examined—Cape North: 1 unsexed juv.; August 27, 1935. Baddeck:
3 ad. ¢, 1 ad. @, 1 ad. unsexed; June 12-July 13, 1954.

Eastern Woop Pewee Contopus virens (Linnaeus). Uncommon summer
resident; breeds. It does not seem to have been recorded previously. In 1954,
the writer observed several near Baddeck, one near Whycocomagh, one at
Middle River, and one near Scotsville. A female collected near Baddeck on
June 29 had an egg in the oviduct. Goodwill (MS.) observed one near
Baddeck on June 22 and 29, 1947. Specimens examined—Baddeck: 1 ad. ¢,
lad. 9; June 3-29, 1954.

Otive-sipeD FrycatcHer Nuttallornis borealis (Swainson). Fairly com-
mon summer resident in woodland throughout the island. In 1935 it was last
noted on August 29 at Cape North. In 1954 we observed it on most dates
during June and July. Specimens examined—Cape North: 1 ad. ¢; June 24,
1954.

Hornep Lark Eremophila alpestris subsp. Uncommon summer resident.
Cameron (MS.) observed a flock of adults and young near Cheticamp on August
1, 1945. The writer in 1954 saw two near Mabou on July 14, and on July 28
noted nine young and adults, at L’Ardoise. Goodwill (MS.) saw one near
North Sydney on May 28, 1946. Probably the breeding form is the Prairie
Horned Lark Eremophila alpestris praticola but no specimens are available to
determine this. The Northern Horned Lark E. a. alpestris probably is a
migrant; and perhaps a winter resident.

TREE SwWALLow Iridoprocne bicolor (Vieillot). Summer resident. Latest
autumn record August 18, 1935, at Cape North.

Bank Swattow Riparia riparia riparia (Linnaeus). Common summer
resident. Nesting colonies seen at Baddeck, St. Anns, Cape North, Dingwall,
Whycocomagh, and Margaree Harbour. Last seen on August 28, 1935, at Cape
North.

Barn SwaLLow Hirundo rustica erythrogaster Boddaert. Common sum-
mer resident particularly about farms. Latest autumn record, September 11,
1935, at Cape North. A pair noted on St. Paul Island (Erskine MS.).
Specimens examined—Thibeauville: 3 ad. 6, 1 ad. 9, 1 juv. 3; July 31, 1954.

NortHern Ciirr Swattow Petrochelidon pyrrhonota pyrrhonota
(Vieillot). An uncommon, local summer resident. Noted by the writer at
Baddeck, Nyanza, St. Anns, Orangedale, Sydney, River Inhabitants, Thibeau-
ville, and Cape North. Breeds. Latest autumn date, August 18. Specimens
examined—Thibeauville: 2 ad. 3, 1 ad. 2; July 29, 1954.

NEWFOUNDLAND Canapa Jay Perisoreus canadensis sanfordi Oberholser.
Not uncommon permanent resident of coniferous forests throughout the island.
Breeds. Specimens collected—Frizzleton: 3 ad. 6, 1 ad. 9 ; October 4-14, 1935.
Baddeck: 1 ad .¢, 1 ad. 9, 1 juv. 3; July 12-14, 1954. Cleveland: 1 ad. ¢;
July 23, 1954.

NortHern Biue Jay Cyanocitta cristata bromia Oberholser. Common
permanent resident. Breeds. Young just out of the nest were seen on June
29, 1954, near Baddeck. On July 1 an adult was seen there carrying in its bill
a nestling bird the species of which could not be determined. Specimens
examined—Cape North: 2 4; September 13, 1935; June 23, 1954. Baddeck:
1 9; June 16, 1954.

20 Tue CaNnapDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

NorTHERN Raven Corvus corax principalis Ridgway. Common permanent
resident. Breeds. First flying young noted June 19, 1954, near Baddeck.
One with a young bird in its beak was hotly pursued by several adult Bronzed
Grackles as it flew low over Baddeck on June 8. On July 5, five were observed
eating dead alewives on Margaree River. Erskine (MS.) noted a pair on St.
Paul Island.

Eastern Crow Corvus brachyrhynchos brachyrhynchos Brehm. Common
permanent resident. Frequently seen by Erskine (MS.) on St. Paul Island.

BLAcK-CAPPED CHICKADEE Parus atricapillus atricapillus Linnaeus. Fairly
common permanent resident. Specimens examined—Cape North: 1 ad. 9, 1
juv. unsexed; June 26, 1954, August 28, 1935. Baddeck: 3 ad. 6; June 17-19,
1954. Frizzleton: 1 ad. 6; September 30, 1935.

Acapian BoreaL Cuickaner Parus hudsonicus littoralis Bryant. Common
permanent resident. In August, 1953, Erskine (MS.) found it abundant on
St. Paul Island. Specimens examined (8)—Cape North, Baddeck, Frizzleton,
Sporting Mountain.

WHITE-BREASTED Nutuatcu Sitta carolinensis cookei Oberholser. In 1935,
one was seen in the vicinity of Cape North on August 18 and 28, and September
21; and two on September 22. Two were seen at Frizzleton on September 30
and several about mid-October. In 1954 we saw only one: at Baddeck Forks
on June 12.

Rep-BREASTED NutuHatcu Sitta canadensis Linnaeus. Permanent resident,
its numbers fluctuating from year to year. In 1935, we noted it in small
numbers in the vicinity of Cape North and near Frizzleton (where as many as
12 were seen on September 30). In 1954, we observed only five singles, all in
June in the vicinity of Baddeck. Erskine (MS.) heard it often and saw it
once in August, 1953, on St. Paul Island. Specimens examined (2)—Cape North,
Whycocomagh.

Brown Creeper Certhia familiaris americana Bonaparte. Uncommon per-
manent resident. We observed it, mostly in singles, at Cape North, Frizzleton,
Baddeck,. Baddeck Forks, Grande Anse, St. Peters, and Thibeauville. A family
group was seen near Baddeck on July 12, 1954. Specimens examined (7)—
Frizzleton, Baddeck, Baddeck Forks, and Thibeauville. i

EasterN WINTER WREN Troglodytes troglodytes hiemalis Vieillot. In
1954 we observed it in the vicinity of Baddeck on June 7(2), 9(2), 15(1), 19(1),
30(3); July 13(3), 16(1); near Whycocomagh, June 10(1); Cleveland, July
23(3); Louisburg, July 26(3); Thibeauville, July 30(1), 31(2); Grande Anse,
August 1(1), 2(3). Erskine (MS.) saw one on St. Paul Island. Specimens
examined (5)—Baddeck, Cleveland, Grande Anse.

Catsirp Dumetella carolinensis (Linnaeus). Rare summer resident. On
June 22, 1954, I collected a singing male in alders along the Aspy River near
Cape North. On July 5, 1954, one was observed at the outlet of Lake Ainslie
near Scotsville. Apparently these are the only records. Specimen examined

(1)—Cape North.

Eastern Rosin Turdus migratorius migratorius Linnaeus. Common in
spring, summer, and autumn; breeds. Specimens examined (5)—Englishtown,
Sporting Mountain, Cleveland.

Biack-Backep Rosin Turdus migratorius nigrideus Aldrich and Nutt.

1958 GoprFrey: Birps oF Care Breton IsLAND 21

Migrant. One was collected near Frizzleton on September 30, 1935, by V. E.
Gould. Specimen examined (1)—Frizzleton.

EasterN Hermir Turuso Hylocichla guttata faxoni Bangs and Penard.
Common summer resident. In 1935 our latest record was of one still partly in
juvenal plumage taken at Frizzleton on October 1. Specimens examined (10)—
Baddeck, Strathlorne, Thibeauville, Englishtown, Sporting Mountain, Frizzleton.

OLIvE-BACKED THRusH Hylocichla ustulata swainsoni (Tschudi). Common
summer resident. In 1935, our latest observation was on September 30. On St.
Paul Island in August, 1953, it was common (Erskine MS.). Specimens ex-
amined—Sporting Mountain (3), Cape North (7), Grande Anse (2), Baddeck
GE

GrAY-CHEEKED TurusH Hylocichla minima ssp. The writer heard two
calling on French Mountain on June 20 where Bond (MS.) noted the species
on July 6, 1949. It is mentioned by Allen (1895) as having been observed (no
further data) in Cape Breton by Frank Bolles. Goodwill (MS.) observed two
on Kidston Island on August 4, 1946. No specimens are available but probably
the resident population is bicknelli.

EASTERN GOLDEN-CROWNED KINGLET Regulus satrapa satrapa Lichtenstein.
Fairly common summer resident; probably winters. Erskine (MS.) saw a
‘flock’ on St. Paul Island in August, 1953. Specimens examined—Baddeck (3),
Ingonish (1).

EASTERN RuBY-CROWNED KincLet Regulus calendula calendula (Linnaeus).
Common summer resident. Specimens examined—Baddeck (3), Cape North
(1), Frizzleton (1).

American Pipir Anthus spinoletta rubescens (Tunstall). Migrant. In
1935, we observed 12 near Frizzleton on October 8.

Cepar Waxwine Bomby cilla cedrorum Vieillot. Uncommon summer resi-
dent. In 1935 we noted a total of 15 between August 21 and September 18 at
Cape North. In 1954 between June 22 and July 23 we observed 16 at several
points in Cape Breton. Erskine (MS.) found it common on St. Paul Island in
August, 1953.

NorTHERN SHRIKE Lanius excubitor borealis Vieillot. C.R. Harte saw this
species at Sydney on March 8, and April 13 and 18, 1902 (Macoun and Macoun
1909).

EuRoPEAN STARLING Sturnus vulgaris vulgaris Linnaeus. A nest was located
near Port Hawkesbury on June 20, 1934, and the species was said to have made
its first appearance in that vicinity in summer of 1932 (Gross, 1937). In 1945,
Cameron (MS.) found it only fairly common about the settled regions of Cape
Breton Highlands National Park. Goodwill (MS.) in 1946 observed the species
regularly near Baddeck while he was there between June 10 and November 16.
In 1954 we saw it regularly in most settled parts of the island; nests at Nyanza
and near Cape North.

BLuE-HEADED VirEO Vireo solitarius solitarius (Wilson). Fairly common
summer resident. In 1935 we last observed it on September 13. Specimens
examined—Baddeck (5), Cape North (4).

Rep-eyeD Vireo Vireo olivaceus (Linnaeus). Common summer resident.

Specimens examined—Cape North (7); Sporting Mountain (1); Whycocomagh
(1).

22 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Brack AND Wuite WarsLer Mniotilta varia (Linnaeus). Uncommon
summer resident. We observed a total of 17 from June 8 to July 23, 1954.
Specimens examined—Baddeck (3), Cape North (2), Lake Ainslie (1).

TENNESSEE WARBLER V ermivora peregrina (Wilson). Uncommon summer
resident. Clarke (MS.) states that Tufts recorded two in the National Park.
In 1954, the writer noted eight in the Aspy Valley and others on subsequent
dates. It was seen also on Madame Island; near Strathlorne, on Sporting Moun-
tain, near Sydney, and near Louisburg. Specimen examined—Sporting Moun-
tain (1).

NasHvitL—e Warsier Vermivora ruficapilla ruficapilla (Wilson). Not
uncommon summer resident. In 1954 we observed a total of 28 between June 3
and July 23. In 1935 our latest observation was of one collected on September
18. Specimen examined—Cape North (1).

ParuLa WarBLer Parula americana (Linnaeus). Rather common summer
resident. A total of 92 were recorded in 1954 between June 3 and July 30.
Specimens examined—Baddeck (3).

NEWFOUNDLAND YELLOW WarsLeR Dendroica petechia amnicola Batch-
elder. Common summer resident. In 1935 our latest observation was of one
(collected) on September 10. Specimens examined—Cape North (4). Of the
four specimens listed above, three were taken in the breeding season. “They are
somewhat intermediate between amznicola and aestiva but are nearer to the
former.

Macnoiia WarsLer Dendroica magnolia (Wilson). Very common sum-
mer resident. Our latest observation date was September 11 when three were
seen. Common on St. Paul Island in August, 1953, according to Erskine (MS.).
Specimens examined—Cape North (4), Baddeck (3), Sporting Mountain (2),
Thibeauville (1), Grande Anse (1).

Cape May Warster Dendroica tigrina (Gmelin). One was collected by
R. W. Tufts (MS.) in the Park on June 20, 1941. Bond (MS.) found a male
near Cheticamp in July, 1949.

BLACK-THROATED BLUE WaArBLER Dendroica caerulescens caerulescens
(Gmelin). Rather local summer resident, usually about mature hardwoods.
In 1954 we recorded it as follows: June 4, one near Johnstown; June 9, one near
Baddeck;, June 10, four males near Whycocomagh. Singles were seen near
Baddeck on June 12, 15, 17, 18, July 10 and 16, Cape North, June 22, 25, and
26. Latest autumn date September 13, 1935, at Cape North. Specimens ex-
amined—Baddeck (3), Cape North (2).

Myrrie Warsier Dendroica coronata coronata (Linnaeus). Very com-
mon summer resident. In 1935 our latest observation was of one at St. Peters
on October 20. Specimens examined—Cape North (6), Baddeck (3), Grande
Anse (1).

BLACK-THROATED GREEN WarBLer Dendroica virens virens (Gmelin).
Common summer resident in coniferous forest or mixed wood. Our latest
autumn record is of one at Frizzleton on October 1, 1935. Specimens examined
—Baddeck (12), Cape North (3), Thibeauville (1), Whycocomagh (1), Ma-
dame Island (1), Cleveland (1).

BLACKBURNIAN WarsLeR Dendroica fusca (Miller). Fairly common
summer resident. Specimens examined—Cape North (3), Baddeck (3).

1958 Goprrey: Birps oF Care Breton IsLANpD 23

Bay-BREASTED WARBLER Dendroica castanea (Wilson). Uncommon sum-
mer resident. In 1954, we observed three at Port Hawkesbury on June 3 and
near Baddeck on June 4(1), 30(2); July 1(1), 12(1), 14(1); Englishtown, June
14(3); Cape North, June 21(2), 26(2); south side of Lake Ainslie, July 5(5, one
carrying food); Strathlorne, July 6(2). Ome was seen on June 4, 1890, by
Allen (1891). Specimens examined—Englishtown (2), Baddeck (1).

BLACK-POLLED WARBLER Dendroica striata (Forster). Local summer resi-
ent. In 1954, several were heard and seen in coniferous woods on French
Mountain on June 20; four singing males in spruce bogs near Louisburg on July
26. Three singing males near Baddeck on June 7 were probably migrants for
they were not observed later. Our latest autumn observation in 1935 was of
one collected on September 18 at Cape North. Erskine (MS.) found it common
and still singing August 10-17, 1953, on St. Paul Island.

YeLttow Parm Warsier Dendroica palmarum hypochrysea Ridgway.
Uncommon summer resident. In 1954 we found it at Madame Island, June
4(1), 18(1); near Strathlorne July 6(2), 7(2), 8(1), 14(4); Sporting Mountain,
July 19(5), 20(2), 22(1); Louisburg, July 26(2); and Thibeauville, July 30(3),
31(1). Our latest autumn date in 1935 was October 5 when one was collected
at Frizzleton. Specimens examined—Strathlorne (1), Thibeauville (1), Frizzle-
ton (1).

NorTHERN Oven-Birp Seiurus aurocapillus aurocapillus (Linnaeus). Locally
fairly common summer resident. In 1954, we recorded a total of 37 between
June 4 and July 26. In 1935, our latest autumn date was September 24 at Cape
North. Specimens examined—Cape North (5), Baddeck (3), Whycocomagh
Gi

NEWFOUNDLAND OVveEN-BIRD Seiurus aurocapillus furvior Batchelder. Mi-
erant. The writer secured a specimen of this race at Cape North on August
30, 1953. Specimen examined—Cape North (1).

NortTHEeRN WaArtTER-THRUSH Seiurus noveboracensis noveboracensis
(Gmelin). Uncommon summer resident. In 1954 we observed a total of 18
at well distributed localities. In 1935 our latest autumn record was of one on
August 31 at Cape North. On St. Paul Island, Erskine (MS.) noted it fre-
quently August 10-17, 1953. Specimens examined—Cape North (3), Baddeck
Forks (2).

Mourning WarBLER Opororis philadelphia (Wilson). Common summer
resident. In 1954 we noted it almost daily in June and July, eight being the
largest number seen in any one day. An adult carrying food was observed
near Baddeck on July 18. Young out of the nest were first seen on July 29.
Our latest date in 1935 was September 6 when one was taken at Cape North.
Erskine (MS.) found it “frequent” on St. Paul Island in August, 1953. Speci-
mens examined—Baddeck (4), Cape North (2), Whycocomagh (1), Thibeau-
ville (1), Grande Anse (1).

NorTHERN YELLOW-THROAT Geothlypis trichas brachidactyla (Swainson).
Common summer resident. Latest autumn date in 1935 was October 5 when
one was noted at Frizzleton. Specimens examined—Strathlorne (9), Grande
Anse (4), Baddeck (3), Sporting Mountain (2), Thibeauville (1), Orangedale
(1), Cape North (1).

Witson Warscer Wilsonia pusilla pusilla (Wilson). “One was seen on
the Clyburn on August 12, 1941” (Clarke, MS.). Goodwill (MS.) noted one

24 Tue Canadian Fretp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

near North Sydney on June 1, 1946. Dwight (1887) observed it, probably
near Baddeck, in early August.

Canapa WarsLerR Wilsonia canadensis (Linnaeus). R. J. d’Entremont
collected an adult male near Grande Anse on August 3, 1954. Clarke (MS.)
states that the species was “seen up the Clyburn on August 12-13, 1941.”
Goodwill (MS.) saw one at Baddeck on September 8, 1946. Specimen ex-
amined—Grande Anse (1).

NorrHeRN AMERICAN Repstart Setophaga ruticilla tricolora (Miller).
Common summer resident. Latest autumn date, September 21, 1935, when one
was seen at Cape North. Specimens examined—Baddeck (2), Cape North (2),
Thibeauville (1), Englishtown (1).

Enc LisH Sparrow Passer domesticus domesticus (Linnaeus). According
to Coues (1890) this species made its first appearance in Cape Breton during
November 1889, coincidentally with the completion of the Cape Breton Rail-
road. By 1905, Townsend (1906) found it common in August and early Sep-
tember at Hawkesbury, St. Peters, Sydney, Baddeck, and Englishtown. It has
now, of course, spread over the entire island where settlement exists.

Bosouink Dolichonyx oryzivorus (Linnaeus). Local summer resident. In
1935, we observed a total of about 45 at such points as Johnstown, Baddeck,
Nyanza, Middle River Valley, Margaree, Lake Ainslie near Strathlorne, and
near Cape North. Our latest autumn date in 1935 was September 5 on which
date three were seen at Cape North. Specimen examined—Cape North (1).

Eastern Meapow ark Sturnella magna magna (Linnaeus). According to
Tufts (MS.) one was found dead at Donkin on January 21, 1941.

EasTerRN Rep-wine Agelaius phoeniceus phoeniceus (Linnaeus). In as
much as this species was not recorded by Dwight (1887), Allen (1891, 1895),
or Townsend (1906) one wonders if it is a recent arrival on the island. In 1954
we observed it at Florence, Baddeck, Nyanza, Strathlorne, Mabou, Grande
Anse, and Cleveland. At Scotsville about 45 were observed on July 5. Speci-
mens examined—Strathlorne (6).

Rusty Biacksirp Euphagus carolinus nigrans Burleigh and Peters. Local
summer resident; breeds. In 1954, we observed a total of 47 between June 5
and August 2 at several points on the island. In 1935 it was last noted on
October 6 when one was seen at Frizzleton. On July 6, 1954, first flying young
were observed at Strathlorne. Specimens examined—Baddeck (4), Strathlorne
(2), Sporting Mountain (1).

BRONZED GRACKLE Quiscalus quiscala versicolor Vieillot. Common summer
resident. Breeds. In 1954, we noted it in the vicinity of most towns and
villages throughout the island including Cape North. ‘Two nests were seen at
Baddeck, one on June 9, the other on June 15. About 125 birds were observed
on July 9 at Strathlorne. As is the case in Prince Edward Island (Godfrey,
1954) the Bronzed Grackle seems to be a recent arrival on Cape Breton Island
for it was not seen by Dwight (1887), Allen (1891, 1895), or Townsend (1906).
Specimens examined—Baddeck (1), Strathlorne (1).

EasterN Cowsirp Molothrus ater ater (Boddaert). Two males and a
female were observed at Port Hood on April 25, 1954, by A. W. Cameron (oral).
ROSsE-BREASTED GrosBEAK Pheucticus ludovicianus (Linnaeus). Rare sum-
mer resident. The writer observed a male in mature hardwood near East

1958 Goprrey: Birps oF Care BReETON ISLAND 25

Margaree on July 9, 1954, and heard another near Baddeck on June 19. The
species was noted near Whycocomagh and Margaree Forks by Bond (MS.).
Goodwill (MS.) saw one on Kidston Island, off Baddeck, on August 31, 1947.

DickcisseL Spiza americana (Gmelin). A specimen, now in Nova Scotia
Museum of Science, was killed by a car near Sydney on December 3, 1929. It
had been feeding with English Sparrows in the middle of a road (Smith, 1938).

Eastern Purpte Finca Carpodacus purpureus purpureus (Gmelin).
Common summer resident. Possibly some winter. Specimens examined—
Baddeck (6), Cape North (2).

NEWFOUNDLAND Pine GrosBeak Pinicola enucleator eschatosa Oberholser.
Uncommon summer resident, sometimes common in winter. Breeds. In 1954,
we observed it as follows: Baddeck, June 7(2), 9(2), 16(4), 17(1), 19(1), July
16(2); near Pleasant Bay, June 20(2); French Mountain, June 20(1); Cape
North, June 22(1), 23(1), 24(1), 26(1); near Louisburg, July 26(1); Thibeau-
ville, July 29(2). Specimens examined—Baddeck (8), Cape North (1), Frizzle-
ton (2), Thibeauville (1).

Reppoti Acanthis sp. On November 3, 1946, Goodwill (MS.) saw ten on
Kidston Island, off Baddeck, and in Baddeck on November 7 of that year he saw
five. Probably they were Common Redpolls Acanthis flammea flammea.
Harte (Macoun and Macoun, 1909) intimated that it was probably common
at Sydney in winter and stated that he saw a flock on December 10, 1901.

NorTuerN Pine Siskin Spinus pinus pinus (Wilson). In 1954, we saw
small flocks irregularly in June and July at Englishtown, Baddeck, Cape North,
Main-a-Dieu, and Grande Anse. In 1935 it was very common in the vicinity
of Cape North in late August and early September and small numbers were
seen also at Frizzleton and St. Peters. Specimens examined—Cape North (5).

Eastern GoupFincu Spinus tristis tristis (Linnaeus). Fairly common sum-
mer resident. Breeds. Possibly some winter. We observed it at many points
throughout the island. Macoun and Macoun (1909) state that it breeds.
Cameron (MS.) located a nest with one egg on the Aspy meadows July 23,
1945. Specimens examined—Cape North (4).

Rep Crosspitt Loxia curvirostra subsp. Macoun and Macoun (1909) state
that it was common at Baddeck and Margaree in July, 1898. “Townsend (1906)
found it abundant in August 1905.

WHITE-WINGED CrosspitL Loxia leucoptera leucoptera Gmelin. In 1935,
we observed two on September 27 and nine on September 2 at Cape North. In
1954, the writer noted two on August 3 at Grande Anse. Townsend (1906)
found it abundant in August, 1905. Goodwill (MS.) observed small numbers
several times in the Baddeck area between October 20 and November 12, 1946.
Common on St. Paul Island in August 1953 (Erskine MS.).

EAsTERN SAVANNAH Sparrow Passerculus sandwichensis savanna (Wilson).
Common summer resident about hay meadows, pastures, marsh edges, and
similar grassy open places throughout the island. Breeds. A female was taken
at Cape North with an egg in the oviduct on June 25, 1954. Specimens ex-
amined—Grande Anse (5), Frizzleton (1), Cape North (6), Thibeauville (7),
Margaree Harbour (3), south side Lake Ainslie (1), Orangedale (1).

LABRADOR SAVANNAH SPARROW Passerculus sandwichensis labradorius Howe.
Migrant. The writer collected a female at Cape North on September 5, 1935.
Specimen examined—Cape North (1).

26 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. .72

ACADIAN SHARP-TAILED SPARROW Ammospiza caudacuta subvirgata
(Dwight). Local summer resident in salt and brackish marshes. In 1954 we
found it at Cape North, June 20(2), 22(1); Indian Bay, June 29(6), July 12(5),
15(4), 18(1); Strathlorne July 6(5), 9(5); Margaree Harbour, July 7(2);
Whycocomagh, July 2(8); Margaree River, July 3(10); Mabou, July 10(7),
Johnstown, July 24(3). Macoun and Macoun (1909) state that a nest was
taken near Baddeck on July 26, 1898.

[VesPer Sparrow Pooecetes gramineus (Gmelin). Hypothetical. Allen
(1895) lists this species without any details. ]

SLATE-COLORED JuNco Junco hyemalis hyemalis Linnaeus. Very common
summer resident. Probably winters. Breeds. A nest was located at Thibeau-
ville with three eggs on July 31, 1954. Specimens examined—Baddeck (3),
Englishtown (1), Sporting Mountain (2).

Eastern TREE Sparrow Spizella arborea arborea (Wilson). Migrant and
probably winter resident. Goodwill (MS.) observed two on November 3 and
three on November 8, 1946, at Baddeck. Adequate observation at the appro-
priate season would denyless show it to be a common migrant and winter
resident.

Eastern Curppine Sparrow Spizella passerina passerina (Bechstein). Fairly
common summer resident. In 1935 our latest autumn record was on October
11 when 20 were seen at Frizzleton. In 1946 Goodwill (MS.) saw two near
Baddeck on October 13. Specimens examined—Cape North (2).

[FreELD Sparrow Spizella pusilla Wilson. Hypothetical. Harte’s statement
(Macoun and Macoun, 1909) that a few were seen on June 8, 1902, at yan,
is probably due to samvtasiom with some other species. |

WHITE-THROATED SPARROW Zonotrichia albicollis (Gmelin). Common
summer resident. Breeds. Specimens examined—Cape North (3), Cleveland
(1), Englishtown (1), Grande Anse (3), Baddeck (3), Frizzleton (1).

EasterRN Fox Sparrow Passerella iliaca iliaca (Merram).. Spring and
summer transient. Macoun and Macoun (1909) mention a specimen collected
at Sydney on May 18, 1902. In 1935 we noted small numbers from September
22 to October | at Cape North; October 6 to 14 at Frizzleton; and on October
21 one was seen at St. Peters. Specimens examined— Frizzleton @).

LincoLn Sparrow Melospiza lincolnii lincolnii (Audubon). Not uncom-
mon summer resident. In 1954, we observed it near Baddeck on June 9(2),
30(4); July 1(1), 4(1), July 12(1), 13(1), 14(1), 18(2); south side of Lake
Ainslie, July 5(3); Cape North, June 21(5), 22(5), 23), 244), e256);
Strathlorne, July 6(4), 7(6), 8(5), 9(2); Sporting Mountain, July 20(2); Cleve-
land, July 23(1); Louisburg, July 26(3); Thibeauville, July 29(1), 30(3), 31(3);
Grande Anse, August 2(3). In 1935 our latest autumn date was September
30 at Frizzleton.

SouTHERN Swamp Sparrow Melospiza georgiana georgiana (Latham).
Fairly common summer resident about freshwater marshes and similar wet
places. Breeds. A nest was found at Sydney on May 25, 1901 (Macoun and
Macoun, 1909). In 1935 we noted the species until October 8 on which date
several were present at Frizzleton. Specimens examined—Strathlorne (8), Cape

1958 Goprrey: Birps of Cape Breton IsLanp 27
North (2). These specimens are intermediate between georgiana and ericrypta
but average slightly nearer the former.

NortTHERN Swamp Sparrow Melospiza georgiana ericrypta Oberholser.
Migrant. The writer took single specimens at Cape North on September 5
and 11, 1935, and at Frizzleton on October 6. Specimens examined—Cape
North (2), Frizzleton (1).

Eastern Sone Sparrow Melospiza melodia melodia (Wilson). Very
common summer resident. Breeds. Probably a few winter as in other parts
of Nova Scotia. Specimens examined—Cape North (10), Ingonish Centre (1),
Thibeauville (3), Baddeck (1), Orangedale (2), Grande Anse (2), Strathlorne
(3), Frizzleton (1).

Snow Buntine Plectrophenax nivalis nivalis (Linnaeus). Migrant. Prob-
ably winters. We observed ten near Port Hawkesbury on October 26, 1935.

REFERENCES

ALLEN, Francis H. 1891. Summer birds of | Gross AtFrrep O. 1937. Birds of the Bow-

the Bras d’Or region of Cape Breton Is-

land, Nova Scotia. The Auk 8: 164-166.

1895. Some notes on Cape Bre-
ton summer birds. The Auk 12: 89-90.

Bay ey, Ivan A. 1925. The birds of Bird
Islands, Nova Scotia. Can. Field Nat. 29:
183-187.

Bent, A. C. 1922. Life histories of North
American petrels and pelicans and their
allies. Bull. U.S. nat. Mus. 121, p. i-xii, 1-343.

Boties, Frank. 1894. From Blomidan to
Smoky. Boston.

Brewster, WILLIAM. 1883. Notes on the
birds observed on a summer cruise in the
Gulf of St. Lawrence. Proc. Boston Soc.
nat. Hist. 22: 364-412.

BurweicH, THomas D., anp Haroxp S. Peters.
1948. Geographic variation in Newfound-
land birds. Proc. biol. Soc. Wash. 61: 111-
126.

Burns, Frank L. 1911. A monograph of
the Broad-winged Hawk (Buteo platyp-
terus). Wilson Bull. 23: 143-320.

Coves, W. P. 1890. Passer domesticus in
Cape Breton. The Auk 7: 212.

Dwicut, JoNATHAN, Jr. 1887. Summer birds
of the Bras d’Or region of Cape Breton
Island, Nova Scotia. The Auk 4: 13-16.

1889. Sterna paradisea—a correc-
tion. The Auk 6: 186.

Goprrey, W. Earr. 1954. Birds of Prince
Edward Island. Bull. nat. Mus. Canada,
126: 142-175.

Goopwit, E. V. 1948. Turkey Vulture in
Cape Breton Island, N.S., Can. Field Nat.
62: 41.

doin-MacMillan arctic expedition. The
Auk 54: 12-42.

Grosvenor, GiLBertT. 1931. Egrets at Cape
Breton Island, N.S. The Auk 48: 111-112.
J. M. Jfones]. 1870. Ordinary meeting,
March 8, 1869. Proc. N.S. Inst. nat. Sci.
for 1867, 1868, 1869, 1870; Vol. 2, Part 3,

Pas

Macoun, JoHN, AND JamMEs M. Macovun. 1909. —
Catalogue of Canadian Birds. Canada Dept.
of Mines, Geol. Surv. Branch, 973: 1-761.

Piers, Harry. 1894. Notes on Nova Scotian
Zoology. Trans. N.S. Inst. Sci., Ser. 2, Vol.
1, p. 395-410.

Ranp, A. L. 1948. Variation in the Spruce
Grouse in Canada, The Auk 65: 33-40.
SmitH, Ronatp W. 1938. Noteworthy re-
cords for Nova Scotia. The Auk 55: 548-

550.

Taper, WENDELL. 1952. Mourning Dove in
Nova Scotia. Bird-Banding 23: 73.

Taverner, P. A. 1942. The distribution and
migration of the Hudsonian Curlew. Wil-
son Bull. 54: 3-11.

Townsenpb, Cuartes W. 1906. Notes on the
birds of Cape Breton Island. The Auk 23:
172-179.

Turtrs, R. W. 1927. Turkey Vultures in
Nova Scotia. Can. Field Nat. 41: 65.

Urrat, Leonarp J. 1939. Subspecies of the
Spruce Grouse. The Auk 56: 460-464.

White, Harry Gorvon. 1891. Migration of
the Red Phalarope (Crymophilus fuli-
carius). The Auk 8: 233-235.

Wuiteaves, J. F. 1904. The Brown Pelican
on Cape Breton Island. Ottawa Nat. 18:
108.

Received for publication 4 June 1957

28 Tue CaANnabIAN Fie_p-NaATuURALIST Vol. 72

THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE WESTERN PAINTED
TURTLE IN MANITOBA

CuHartes D. Biro

Department of Botany and Plant Pathology
Oklahoma State University, Stillwater, Oklahoma

In 1851 Richardson commented on the geographical distribution of reptiles east
of the Rocky Mountains and recorded turtles “as disappearing beyond the 51st,
at the south end of Lake Winnipeg. There the Emys geographica of Le Seur

. occurs.” Seton (1918) says that “probably this refers to . . . Chrysemys
marginata belli” (now C. picta belli). This latter observation appears to be
correct, as to the writer’s knowledge only two turtles occur in Manitoba: the
Western Painted Turtle Chrysemys picta bellii Gray and the Snapping Turtle
Chelydra serpentina serpentina Linnaeus. ‘The assumption is further strength-
ened by the fact that Richardson also mentions another turtle “with a flexible
neck” which he thought was probably the Snapping Turtle.

Since this first record the known range of the turtle in Manitoba has been
mentioned in three separate articles. In 1918 Seton recorded it from the Red
River near Winnipeg, and from Carberry, Boissevain, Riding Mountain, and
Austin. Criddle (1919), in a short note, recorded it from Rice Lake near
Onah; and Logier and Toner (1955) brought together the above records and
added one new one, the Bloodvein River region of Lake- Winnipeg.

During some preliminary studies of this turtle the writer became impressed
by the fact that so little was known of its range. Consequently, prominent
naturalists throughout Manitoba were consulted and a compilation of the
records provided by them, in addition to the writer’s own records, was begun.
The following list and map (Figure 1) should serve to greatly enlarge our
knowledge of the turtle’s distribution in Manitoba.

The records listed below are new to the literature and unless marked other-
wise are the result of personal communication; the abbreviations for museum
specimens are: NMC—National Museum of Canada, and MNHM—Manitoba
Natural History Museum.

NEW MANITOBA RECORDS FOR THE PAINTED TURTLE

Rep River System. Lockport (J. J. Keleher), Rat River (G. W. Malaher),
Red River (G. W. Malaher), Sandilands (NMC 1847), Seine River (G. W.
Malaher), and Winnipeg (R. Sutton).

ASSINIBOINE RIVER SystEM. Assiniboine River (J. Serafin and W. J.
Goodey through G. W. Malaher), Assiniboine River south of Portage la
Prairie (S. M. Boyachek), Birtle (R.D. Bird), Brandon (NMC 50), Douglas
Lakes (S. Criddle, R. D. Bird), Jackfish Lake—an oxbow of the Assiniboine
River twenty miles south of Melbourne Junction (R. Allen), Minnedosa River
_ near junction with Assiniboine River (C. D. Bird), road between Onanole and
south gate of Riding Mountain National Park (MNHM), Ormond Creek near
Winnipeg (R. Sutton), St. Lazare (R. D. Bird), slough six miles north of Mel-
bourne (R. Allen), Virden (Mrs. D. B. Sparling), Virden near Assiniboine
River (Mrs. D. B. Sparling).

1958 Birp: WESTERN PAINTED [TURTLE 29

Souris River SysteM. Antler Creek (J. Serafin through G. W. Malaher,
R. Sutton), Antler Creek at junction with Souris River (C. Tillenius), Graham
Creek (J. V. Parker), Jackson Creek (J. V. Parker), highway south of Melita
(J. V. Parker), North Antler Creek (J. V. Parker), Pipestone Creek (J. Serafin
through G. W. Malaher), Souris River (H. Guttman, J. Serafin, and W. J.
Goodey through G. W. Malaher, R. Sutton), Souris River near junction with
Assiniboine (J. B. Wallis), Souris River south of Nesbit (C. D. Bird), South
Antler Creek (J. V. Parker), Treesbank (NMC 961), lakes throughout Turtle
Mountain (M. S. Colquhoun).

PEMBINA River SysteM. Near Morden (Mrs. D. B. Sparling), Pembina
River (R. Sutton).

OlIYVLNO
Es Ao ee

3
A/ a a,
] ca 4 ~O Oe &
0 yy Sj
eres } HOO Ons a
= c
g LY @: \) O ial
} ep) o
S a OF |Z S
© wee) w = a
Ae ae : SR es
v= z eo = rar
qZz rs (o)
a | ar se
S tL s &
RED RN® | ao
[——) os
OD gs
S
eZ : :
< ie} 3S
Oo ae
op
Se ae
z
“a = = SS
s
55
£9
a 2
a Sue
we B
[a4
Oo 5 ae — 5
E -4 2)
aax > c=
ew ze z () 3
On SuCHy aes le eX ‘b 2
Ww Zz z
“eg ie >o @ io)
= > Ou ay
Bee we lee 2
(e)
Z2- 2, .
oc ) Cd O egies me
Ouse ane O Xe, | 2
G) CD OANG: eI
w _
em

NVMAHOLVASVS

30 Tue CANADIAN FieLtp-NaATURALIST Molar

BROKENHEAD River SysteM. Brokenhead River (C. Tillenius), near
Richer (A. McLeod).

WInnipkG River System. Barren Lake (G. W. Malaher), Betula Lake
(H. D. Whellams, J. C. Ritchie, C. D. Bird), Big Whiteshell Lake (C. Tillenius),
Brereton Lake (A. H. Shortt, C. Tillenius, H. D. Whellams), Cabin Lake
(G. W. Malaher, C. D. Bird), Caddy Lake (H. D. Whellams), Camp Lake
(H. D. Whellams), Falcon Lake (G. W. Malaher, H. D. Whellams), George
Lake (H. D. Whellams, R. Sutton), Green Lake (R. Sutton), High Lake
(H. D. Whellams, E. Fisher through R. Sutton, NMC 2145), Jessica Lake
(A. H. Shortt, H. D. Whellams, C. Tillenius, C. D. Bird), Lac Du Bonnet
(H. D. Whellams), Lyons Lake (H. D. Whellams), Oiseau River (H. D.
Whellams), Pointe Du Bois (Mrs. C. Whitmore through R. Sutton), Red Rock
Lake (A. H. Shortt, C. Tillenitus, H. D. Whellams, C. D. Bird), Rennie River
(C. Tillenius), Rice Lake (H. D. Whellams), near Silver Falls (R. Sutton),
Star Lake (G. W. Malaher, G. Butler), War Eagle Lake (H. D. Whellams),
West Hawk Lake (G. W. Malaher, H. D. Whellams), White Lake (A. H.
Shortt, H. D. Whellams, D. Reimer, C. D. Bird), Whitemouth Lake (H. D.
Whellams), Whitemouth River (G. W. Malaher, C. Tillenius, H. D. Whellams),.
Whiteshell River (C. Tillenius, H. D. Whellams), Whiteshell River near Lone
Island Lake (R. Sutton), Williams Lake (R. Sutton), Winnipeg River (H. D.
Whellams).

In commenting on the turtle’s range in Manitoba Seton (1918) said that
“Gt is of general distribution in the southwest quarter of Manitoba, but is
unknown at Shoal Lake or anywhere on the east side of Lake Winnipeg.”
From the writer’s studies it has become apparent that the turtle occurs in
greatest abundance in the southeast corner of Manitoba and in lesser numbers
to the west.

In the eastern part of the province lakes and streams are very numerous
and most of them connect with the Winnipeg River system. Turtles have
been found to be generally abundant throughout this area.

The range in the central and western part of the province is restricted to
the Red River and its tributaries, the Rat, the Seine, the Assiniboine, the Souris,
the Minnedosa, and the Qu’Appelle rivers. The species may also be frequently
found in sloughs and lakes at the headwaters of these water bodies.

Within the above areas the Western Painted Turtle is most commonly
met with in backwaters, sloughs, quiet streams, and sheltered bays where the
water is shallow, the bottom is soft, and there is abundant aquatic vegetation.
Deep, cold lakes and rapidly moving streams appear to be generally avoided.

The early (1851) report of Richardson that turtles seem to disappear
beyond the 51st parallel is corroborated by the above records. The reason for
this restriction in range is believed to be due to the requirement of long heat
for the hatching of the eggs. Eggs are generally laid in the latter part of June
and according to Breckenridge (1944) may have an incubation period of from
92 to 140 days. In fall the turtles burrow into the soft muddy bottoms of the
lakes and streams which they inhabit and they are thus able to survive extreme

1958 Biro: WEsTERN PAINTED TURTLE 31

degrees of cold that prevail above ground. Their eggs, however, are laid in
comparatively shallow, covered, holes on dry land and hence any eggs which
had not received enough warmth to hatch during the summer and early fall
would be frozen during the winter. In more southerly areas these eggs stand
a chance of overwintering (see Hartweg, 1944 and 1946; Carr, 1952; Carl, 1944,
Cahn, 1938; and Thacker, 1924) but in the northerly areas they are prevented
from doing so by the longer exposure to cold and because of the greater
minimum temperatures.

Acknowledgments are extended to all the above-mentioned people who
helped in the compilation of the new records. In addition I would like to
‘thank Sherman Bleakney of the National Museum of Canada and Richard
Sutton of the Manitoba Natural History Museum for furnishing records of
this species of turtle from their respective Museums.

REFERENCES

Breckenrince, W. J. 1944. Reptiles and 1946. Confirmation of over-

amphibians of Minnesota. Univ. Minn.
Press.

Cann, A. R. 1938. The turtles of Illinois.
Illinois biol. Monogr. 16:1-218.

Cari, CLirForD. 1944. The reptiles of British
Columbia. Handb. B.C. prov. Mus. 3:
5-60.

Carr, ArcHIE. 1952. Handbook of turtles.
The turtles of the United States, Canada,
and Baja California. Ithaca, Comstock.

‘CripoLeE, Norman. 1919. Additional notes
on Manitoba turtles, snakes and _ batra-
chians. Ottawa Nat. 32:135.

Hartwec, Norman. 1944. Spring emer-
gence of painted turtle hatchlings. Copeia
1944:20-22.

wintering in painted turtle hatchlings.
Copeia 1946:255.

Locier, E. B. S., and G. C. Toner. 1955.
Check-list of the amphibians and reptiles
of Canada and Alaska. Contr. R. Ont.
Mus. Zool. Palaeont. No. 41.

RicHaRDSON, Sir JoHN. 1851. Arctic search-
ing expedition. London, Longman. v.1.
SETON, Ernest T. 1918. A list of the tur-

tles, snakes and batrachians of Manitoba.
Ottawa Nat. 32:79-83.

TuHacker, IT. L. 1924. Notes on Bell’s
painted turtles (Chrysemys marginata
bellii) in British Columbia. Can. Field

Nat. 38:164-167.

Received for publication 16 November 1956

EXPLANATORY NOTE

The information at the bottom of the front cover, known as a bibliographi-
cal strip, is presented in this concise form to facilitate the arrangement of
periodicals and the compilation of citations. Its use brings the CANADIAN
FIELD-NATURALIST into complete conformity with the recommendations
on the layout of periodicals of the International Organization for Standardiza-
tion (ISO). Canada is a signatory to these recommendations.

32 Tue CANADIAN FieLD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

CHRISTMAS BIRD CENSUS — 1957
Edited by W. Earl Godfrey

St. John’s, Nfld. (City of St. John’s and check points at nearby Torbay and Cape
Spear) .—Dec. 26, 1957; 8.30 a.m. to 3.30 p.m.; temp. 18° to 32°; wind NW. Total party hours,
22 (16 on foot, 6 by car); total party miles, 92 (14 on foot, 78 by car).

Common Loon, 1; Oldsquaw, 2; Common Eider, 30; Glaucous Gull, 3; Iceland
Gull, 33; Great Black-backed Gull, 50; Herring Gull, 688; Dovekie, 22; Black
Guillemot, 9; Rock Dove, 285; Mourning Dove, 5; Boreal Owl, 1; Belted Kingfisher, 1,
Yellow-shafted Flicker, 3, Common Raven, 6, Common Crow, 42; Black-capped
Chickadee, 18; Boreal Chickadee, 6; Am. Robin, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 10;
Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 1,670; Myrtle Warbler, 1, House Sparrow, 586, Purple
Finch, 22; Pine Grosbeak, 3; Common Redpoll, 188; Red Crossbill, 7; Fox Sparrow,
1. Total 29 species; 3,685 individuals.

Stuart Peters, Florence Peters, Jack Saunders, Joyce Saunders, Harold Horwood, Charles Richardson,

Leslie M. Tuck, (compiler), Wayne L. Tuck, Mrs. A. G. Gosling, Tom Bergerud, Wyona Bergerud.

Cole Harbour-Chezzetcook, N.S. (74-mile radius centered on Mineville; Eastern Shore
Highway and surrounding area between Dartmouth and Porters Lake, Cole Harbour,
Lawrencetown, Wedge Island, Seaforth and Chezzetcook).—Dec. 22, 1957; 7.45 a.m. to 4.45
p-m.; early fog then 9/10 cloud; temp. 45° to 50°; wind NNW, 0 to 25 m.p.h.; ground wet,
free of snow, all water open, heavy swell at sea. Fourteen observers in 6 parties. Total party
hours, 47 (28 on foot, 19 by car); total party miles, 149 (35 on foot, 114 by car).

Common Loon, 3; Red-necked Grebe, 2; Horned Grebe, 28; Great Cormorant, 2;
Great Blue Heron, 1; Canada Goose, 430; Black Duck, 420; Pintail, 3; Common
Goldeneye, 30; Bufflehead, 21; Oldsquaw, 31; Common Eider, 5, White-winged
Scoter, 4; Surf Scoter, 11, Common Scoter, 11; Common Merganser, 3; Red-breasted
Merganser, 53; Hawk (Buteo), 1; Ruffed Grouse, 2; Gray Partridge, 7; Common
Snipe, 1; Purple Sandpiper, 26; Sanderling, 20, Great Black-backed Gull, 115, Herring
Gull, 805, Ring-billed Gull, 7; Black-headed Gull, 14, Common Murre, 1, Thick-
billed Murre, 1; Dovekie, 8; Black Guillemot, 1; Rock Dove, 15; Mourning Dove, 1;
Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 4; Black-backed Three-toed Wood-
pecker, 1; Horned Lark, 5; Gray Jay, 17; Blue Jay, 42; Common Raven, 23; Common
Crow, 150; Black-capped Chickadee, 125; Boreal Chickadee, 19; White-breasted
Nuthatch, 4; Brown Creeper, 2; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 43, Starling, 665; Palm
Warbler, 3; House Sparrow, 510; Brown-headed Cowbird, 350; Evening Grosbeak, 1,
Common Redpoll, 54; Pine Siskin, 23, Am. Goldfinch, 145; White-winged Crossbill,
17; Savannah Sparrow, 20; Slate-colored Junco, 255, Tree Sparrow, 21, White-
throated Sparrow, 9; Swamp Sparrow, 5; Song Sparrow, 34; Lapland Longspur, 2;
Snow Bunting, 4. Total, 63 species, about 4,698 individuals. (Seen in area Dec. 29,
Virginia Rail (immature), 1; Northern Shrike, 1; Meadowlark, 1).

C. R. K. Allen, John Comer, Miss Ethel Crathorne, Fred Dobson, Mrs. Phyllis Dobson, J. K. S.

Kirkaldy, I. A. Macpherson, L. B. Macpherson (compiler), J. A. McCarter, Willett J. Mills,

H. P. Moffatt, T. F. T. Morland, J. C. Morrow and Mrs. Franklyn White (Nova Scotia Bird Society).

Halifax, N.S. (74-mile radius centered just north of Henry Lake on Old Sambro Road.
Includes City, Harbour, Northwest Arm and roads to Herring Cove, Sambro, Prospect Bay
and Timberlea).—Dec. 26, 1957; 7.45 a.m. to 5.00 p.m.; mostly cloudy; temp. 24° to 33°;
wind SE, 5 to 25 m.p.h.; ground bare and frozen, thin ice on some ponds and inlets, heavy
swell at sea. Twenty observers, 10 in 6 parties, 10 at 9 feeding stations. Total party hours, 38
plus feeder-watching time (19 on foot, 17 by car, 2 by boat); total party miles, 101 (20 on
foot, 76 by car, 5 by boat.

Common Loon, 6; Red-necked Grebe, 6; Horned Grebe, 6; Cormorant (probably
Great), 35; Common Goldeneye, 5; Oldsquaw, 9; White-winged Scoter, 9; Common
Scoter, 10; Red-breasted Merganser, 3; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1; Rough-legged
Hawk, 1; Purple Sandpiper, 1; Glaucous Gull, 1; Iceland Gull, 3, Great Black-backed
Gull, 580; Herring Gull, 5,700; Ring-billed Gull, 7; Black-headed Gull, 8, Thick-billed
Murre, 1; Dovekie, 6; Rock Dove, 500; Hairy Woodpecker, 6, Downy Woodpecker,

1958 CuristMAS Birp Census—1957 33

5; Horned Lark, 15; Gray Jay, 13; Blue Jay, 28, Common Raven, 14; Common
Crow, 134; Black-capped Chickadee, 98; Boreal Chickadee, 15; White-breasted
Nuthatch, 6; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Brown Creeper, 1; Am. Robin, 8; Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 17; Northern Shrike, 2; Starling, 5,100; Palm Warbler, 1; Yellow-
breasted Chat, 1; House Sparrow, 1,200; Brown-headed Cowbird, 3; Evening
Grosbeak, 31; Purple Finch, 2; Pine Grosbeak, 10; Common Redpoll, 60; Pine
Siskin, 17; Am. Goldfinch, 76; White-winged Crossbill, 10; Savannah Sparrow, 6;
Slate-colored Junco, 110; Tree Sparrow, 7, Song Sparrow, 11. Total, 52 species;
about a 907 individuals.

C. K. Allen, Mrs. G. P. Backman, Mrs. E. A. Bell, Jorn Comer, A. he M. and Mrs. Curry, Fred
Dobvon Mrs. John Doull, Miss Alice Falkenham, Mrs. H. G. Grant, S. A. Grimm, J. K. S. Kirkaldy,
I. A. laepRersors L. B. Macpherson (compiler), J. A. McCarter, Willett J. Mills, H. P. Moffatt,
T. F. T. Morland, Mrs. C. L. Torey and Mrs. V. NE Wynne (Nova Scotia Bird Society).

West Middle Sable, N.S. (From Matthews Lake and Hemeon Head to 1 mi. N of
Sable River and from Sable River to East Sable River and Johnson Pond. Mixed woods,
ocean shore, sand beach, sheltered brackish water and scattered rural community) .—Dec. 24,
1957; 7.20 a.m. to 5 p.m.; mostly sunny, clouds 15-75%; temp. 40° to 50°; wind SW to W,
5-20 m.p.h.; no frost, ice or snow. Four observers in 4 parties (2 stationary). Total party
hours, 153 (82 on foot, 3 by car, 4 by bicycle); total party miles, 49 (14 on foot, 20 by car,
15 by bicycle).

Common Loon, 1; Horned Grebe, 2; Great Cormorant, 54; Canada Goose, 652;
Black Duck, 173; Greater Scaup, 25; Common Goldeneye, 2; Bufflehead, 15;
Oldsquaw, 1; Common Eider, 3; Common Scoter, 40; Ruffed Grouse, 3; Great Black-
backed Gull, 61; Herring Gull, 1,010; Dovekie, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy
Woodpecker, 1; Horned Lark, 1; Gray Jay, 6; Blue Jay, 4; Common Raven, 3;
Common Crow, 81; Black-capped Chickadee, 7; Boreal Chickadee, 3; Am. Robin, 1;
Starling, 14, House Sparrow, 1; Am. Goldfinch, 9; Slate-colored Junco, 34; Tree
Sparrow, 8; White-throated Sparrow, 2; Song Sparrow, 3; Lapland Longspur, 1
Total, 33 species; 2,224 individuals. (Also seen in area in count period: Mallard,
Goshawk, Great Biomed Owl, White-breasted Nuthatch, Brown Pneaslhver.
Balgenore Oriole, Chipping Sparrow, Swamp Sparrow).

Harrison F. Lewis (compiler), Laura N. Lewis, Mrs. Cecil Thompson, Harold F. Tufts.

Wolfville, N.S. (Within a radius of approximately ten miles of Acadia University,
west to Kentville; south to Black River; east to Avonport; and north to Pereau).—Dec. 26,
1957; partly clear, partly overcast, temp. 20° at start, 34° later, ground bare; ponds mostly
open; visibility excellent; light southwest wind. 11 observers in five parties (two at bird
tables). Total party hours, 19; total party miles, 190 (174 by car, 16 on foot).

Canada Goose, 110; Black Duck, 210; Common Goldeneye, 17; Goshawk, 1;
Redtailed Hawk, 5; Rough-legged Hawk, 1; Pigeon Hawk, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 1;
Bald Eagle, 13 (8 ad. and 7 im.); Ruffed Grouse, 3; Ring-necked Pheasant, 8 (3 males,
5 females); Common Snipe, 1; Great Black-backed Gull, 200; Herring Gull, 524;
Rock Dove, 21; Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Horned Lark, 7;
Blue Jay, 59; Common Raven, 118, Common Crow, 620; Black-capped Chickadee, 33;
Boreal Chickadee, 9; White-breasted Nuthatch, 3; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 1; Brown
Creeper, 1; Robin, 42; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 13; Starling, 1,203; House Sparrow,
490, Redwinged Blackbird, 1, Evening Grosbeak, 15; Purple Finch, 6; Pine Grosbeak,
1, Common Redpoll, 23; American Goldfinch, 5; White-winged Crossbill, 6;
Savannah Sparrow, 10; Slate-colored Junco, 200; Tree Sparrow, 5; White-throated
Sparrow, 1; Song Sparrow, 7. Total, 42 species; 3,999 individuals.

Joan Bromley, J. S. Erskine, Rachel Erskine, Mary Forbes, Rupert Haley, Ralph Mosher, Eric Mullen,

Peter Smith, Christopher Thurrott, Virginia Thurrott, R. W. Tufts (compiler).

Port Elgin, N.B. (Baie Verte, Port Elgin, Hardy, Woodside, Shemogue; all within
74-mi. radius of school at Woodside; open fields and apple orchards bordering highway
30%, salt-water marshes 30%, beach at Baie Verte 30%, coniferous forest 10%).—Dec. 28,
1957; 8.30 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; overcast, light snow and drizzle in a.m.; temp. 33° to 35°; wind
NW, 5-15 m.p.h.; ground unfrozen, covered with one inch of wet snow; all fresh-water
areas open. Four observers in two parties. Total party hours, 28 (14 on foot, 14 by car),
total party miles, 85 (20 on foot, 65 by car).

34 Tue CANADIAN Fie_p-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Common Goldeneye, 32; Red-breasted Merganser, 1, Ring-necked Pheasant, 1;
Herring Gull, 28; Blue Jay, 26; Common Raven, 2; Common Crow, 11; Black-capped
Chickadee, 6; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 302 (200 est., 102); House Sparrow, 140
(130 est., 10); Common Redpoll, 4; Savannah Sparrow, 1, Tree Sparrow, 5; Snow
Bunting, 100 (90 est., 10). “Total, 15 species; about 660 individuals.

Don McPhail, Ed Lowe, Albert Flemming, C. O. Bartlett (compiler).

Riverview Heights, N.B. (Streets and roads in Riverview. Woods surrounding River-
view. 1 mile west on Highway 29 to bridge crossing Petitcodiac River. 5 miles east on
Highway 29 and 3 miles south on Turtle Creek Road on which periodical checks of the
surrounding woods were made) .—Dec. 29, 1957; 11.15 a.m. to 2.45 p.m.; temp. 38° to 28°; wind
SE, 8 m.p.h.; mild, ground muddy, a few patches of light snow, overcast. 4 observers in
1 party. Total party hours, 7 hr. 45 min. (45 minutes on foot, 7 hr. by car); total party
miles, 9 (1 on foot, 8 by car).

Black Duck, 119; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Ring-necked Pheasant, 2; Great Black-backed
Gull, 61; Herring Gull, 285; Downy Woodpecker, 1, Gray Jay, 4; Blue Jay, 8;
Common Crow, 2 and 3; Mockingbird, 1; Starling, 35 and 30; House Sparrow, 5 and
35; Common Grackle, 1; Pine Grosbeak, 1; Common Redpoll, 12; Tree Sparrow, 2;

Chipping Sparrow, 1. Total, 17 species, 604 individuals.
Roger MacGregor (compiler), Harry MacGregor, Mrs. Harry MacGregor, Scott MacGregor.

Saint John, N.B. (74-mile radius including Saint John, Lancaster, Rothesay and lower
Saint John and Kennebecasis river valleys. Part covered 20% sea coast, 70% city and
residential and 10% coniferous and mixed woods. Ground bare) .—Dec. 30, 1957; 7.30 a.m. to
5.00 p.m.; temp. 30° to 40°; wind NW, 10-12 m.p.h. 8 observers in 6 parties. Total party
hours, 25 (17 on foot, 8 by car); total party miles, 65 (21 on foot, 44 by car).

Common Loon, 1; Horned Grebe, 2; Black Duck, 16; Common Goldeneye, 35;
Goshawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 4; Glaucous Gull, 2; Iceland Gull, 3; Great Black-backed
Gull, 1950+; Herring Gull, 9661+; Rock Dove, 103+; Hairy Woodpecker, 3, Downy
Woodpecker, 8; Blue Jay, 5; Common Raven, 21; Common Crow, 217; Black-capped
Chickadee, 59; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 3; Brown Creeper, 1; Am. Robin, 2; Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 3, Starling, 425+; Nashville Warbler, 1, House Sparrow, 395+,
_ Evening Grosbeak, 2; Pine Grosbeak, 13, Common Redpoll, 20; Pine Siskin, 2; Slate-
colored Junco, 35; Tree Sparrow, 31, White-throated Sparrow, 1. ‘Total, 33 species;
about 13,051 individuals. (Seen in area during Christmas season: 1 Catbird, 1 Myrtle
Warbler and numerous Gray Jays. Nashville Warbler has been coming to a feeding

station at Renforth since mid-November).
David Christie, Mrs. C. S. Christie, Miss Jane Hazen, Donald MacDougall, Stuart MacFarlane,
Mrs. Ashley J. Smith, W. Austin Squires (compiler), Murray Watters.

Grand’Mere, Que. (All birds observed at feeding stations in wooded area on outskirts
of town. Country rolling and covered with young hardwood stand).—Dec. 26, 1957; 8 a.m.
to 5 p.m. One observer.

Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 3; Black-capped Chickadee, 10;
White-breasted Nuthatch, 3; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Song Sparrow, 1. ‘Total,
6 species; 16 individuals. (Seen in area during count period: Pine Grosbeak, House

Sparrow, Starling, Crow, Pileated Woodpecker).
R. E. Kirkpatrick.

Hudson Heights, Que. (Como to Hudson Heights, 7 to 8 miles, S.W. side Lake of
Two Mountains and inland 2 to 5 miles; 5% residential; 3594 woodland; 60% fields and
farmland; water frozen. Includes feeding stations of Whitlock Sanctuary).—Dec. 28, 1957;
8 a.m. to 4 p.m.; partly cloudy, temp. 20° to 25°; wind E 10 m.p.h.; no snow on ground;
streams and Lake of Iwo Mountains mostly frozen. 15 observers in 7 parties. Total party
hours, 373 (26 on foot, 4 by car, 73 by feeders) ; total party miles, 90 (42 on foot, 48 by car).

Rough-legged Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 5; Pileated Woodpecker, 3, Hairy
Woodpecker, 18; Downy Woodpecker, 28; Black-backed Three-toed Woodpecker,
1; Blue Jay, 41, Common Crow, 1; Black-capped Chickadee, 207; White-breasted
Nuthatch, 35; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 4; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 11; Starling, 21,
House Sparrow, 111; Redwinged Blackbird, 1; Common Grackle, 1; Evening Gros-
beak, 221, Purple Finch, 20; Pine Grosbeak, 30; Common Redpoll, 199; Am. Gold-
finch, 4; Slate-colored Junco, 8; Tree Sparrow, 37. ‘Total, 23 species; 1008 individuals.

1958 CHRISTMAS Birp Census—1957 35

(Seen in area in count period: Herring Gull, Sparrow Hawk, Horned Owl, Brown

Creeper).

Mr. and Mrs. A. I. Bryan, Misses A. and M. Clarke, R. Cundill, R. Farren, Mr. and Mrs. G. A. Golden

(compiler), A. Kelly, Mr. and Mrs. R. Lepingwell, Mrs. D. Macaulay, D. Macaulay, Jr., H. Marpole,

Mrs. R. Wright.

Lennoxville, Que. (Open fields and hedgerows along two miles of Magog River and
101 miles of roads close to mixed second-growth woods; 4 m. woods from mature hemlock
to scrub, totaling 1 sq. m.; 3 sq. m. of Lake Massawippi, 11 feeding stations in Lennoxville
and N. Hatley; all within a circle with critical 15 m. diameter extending from Magog power
dam to just beyond Lennoxville).—Dec. 28, 1957; 7.45 a.m. to 3.45 p.m.; (7 observers only
for full day); cloudy; temp. 30° to 16°; wind nil 8 a.m. to 5; 3 m.p.h. at 4 p.m., av. 3.9
m.p.h.; ground with 1 inch or more of snow where protected, mostly bare, Lake Magog
frozen (no timing of these obs.). 20 observers in 3 to 5 parties plus 11 stationary observers
at feeders (maximum numbers used). Total party hours, 22 (16 on foot, 6 by car); total
party miles, 119 (18 on foot, 101 by car).

Black Duck, 2; Common Goldeneye, 100+; Goldeneye (sp.) 50+; Common Mer-
ganser, 104+; Ruffed Grouse, 6, Herring Gull, 11; Pileated Woodpecker, 1, Hairy
Woodpecker, 12; Downy Woodpecker, 7; Blue Jay, 37; Black-capped Chickadee, 83;
White-breasted Nuthatch, 13; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 58; House Sparrow,
104; Redwinged Blackbird, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 22; Pine Grosbeak, 8, Tree Sparrow,
12. (Seen in area Dec. 24: 5 Barron’s Goldeneyes;, Dec. 29: 7 Barron’s Goldeneyes).
Total, 18 plus species; 632 plus individuals.

A. P. Campbell, C. Coleman, H. Doheny, J. E. Freeman, Mrs. J. E. Freeman, R. Hart, K. R. Lane,

A. N. Langford (compiler), Miss E. LeBaron, F. G. LeBaron, Miss J. LeBaron, G. H. Moffat,

Mrs. F. Molnar, D. C. Patriquin, B. W. Patton, D. Pollock, Mrs. G. P. St. Pierre, P. St. Pierre,

W. Sarrasin, R. Shannon, plus 11 part-time observers at feeders.

Montreal, Que. (Mount Royal, Lasalle, Thorn Hill, Strathmore, Cartierville, Laval
des Rapides, Ahuntsic, St. Helen’s Island, Nun’s Island, Goat Island, Heron Island, south
shore St. Lawrence River from Mercier Bridge to Jacques Cartier Bridge, and north shore
from Dorval to Verdun).—Dec. 21, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4.10 p.m., cloudy and squally, temp.
46° to 38°; wind SW, 15-25 m.p.h.; no snow and all fresh water unfrozen. 22 observers in
9 parties. Total party hours, 58 (38 on foot, 18 by car, 2 by boat); total party miles, 122
(38 on foot, 78 by car, 7 by boat).

Double-crested Cormorant, 1; Mallard, 25; Black Duck, 732; Pintail, 48; Am.
Widgeon, 33; Greater Scaup, 6; Common Goldeneye, 466, Common Merganser, 66,
Rough-legged Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Ring-necked Pheasant, 12; Glaucous Gull,
12; Iceland Gull, 7; Great Black-backed Gull, 23; Herring Gull, 617; Ring-billed Gull,
85; Screech Owl, 1; Yellow-shafted Flicker, 4; Pileated Woodpecker, 1, Hairy Wood-
pecker, 7, Downy Woodpecker, 6; Common Crow, 4; Black-capped Chickadee, 112,
White-breasted Nuthatch, 7; Brown Creeper, 19, Am. Robin, 1; Starling, 254, House
Sparrow, 230; Pine Grosbeak, 1; Common Redpoll, 59; Am. Goldfinch, 6. Total,

31 species; 2,848 individuals.

Dr. W. F. Black, Mrs. H. E. Chalk, J. D. Delafield, Delisle Garneau, Dr. L. Grahame, E. Hawkins,

Miss G. Hibbard, Dr. A. Hickey, J. Howes, A. W. B. Kelly, A. R. Lepingwell, J. K. Lowther,

Mrs. J. K. Lowther, I. A. McLaren (compiler), Miss K. Milroy, Hon. Justice G. H. Montgomery,

John Montgomery, J. A. Rolland, D. Ryan, Dr. D. E. Sergeant, Dr. J. Summerby, Miss Joan Thorton

(Prov. Quebec Soc. for the Protection of Birds).

Quebec, Que. (Ste. Foy to Quebec bridge, Quebec seaport to Island of Orleans bridge,
Plains of Abraham, Charlesbourg, Orsainville and Quebec Zoological Garden, town suburbs
14%; fields 25%; coniferous forests 12%; deciduous woods 5%; mixed woodlands
29%; shores 15% ).—Dec. 26, 1957; 7.00 a.m. to 4.10 p.m.; overcast, heavy snow p.m. followed
by rain, temp. 28° to 35°; wind NE, 3-8 m.p.h.;, 3-12 inches of snow on ground; streams open
and very few icefields on St. Lawrence River. 25 observers in 6 parties. Total party hours,
33 (30 on foot, 3 by car); total party miles, 73 (37 on foot, 36 by car).

Common Goldeneye, 4, Common Merganser, 6; Ruffed Grouse, 9; Iceland Gull,
2; Great Black-backed Gull, 2; Herring Gull, 32; Ring-billed Gull, 1; Great Horned
Owl, 1; Barred Owl, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 8; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Blue Jay, 16;
Common Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee, 61, White-breasted Nuthatch, 3; Red-
breasted Nuthatch, 1; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 200; House Sparrow, 945; Red-
winged Blackbird, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 13; Pine Grosbeak, 16, Common Redpoll, 6;

36 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Song Sparrow, 1. Total, 24 species, 1,334 individuals. (Seen in area: Dec. 31, 1
Gray Jay).

Benoit ee Georgette Beaupré, Denis Bouchard, Guy Boucher, Pierrette Bouffard, Jacques Cayouette,
Raymond Cayouette (compiler), Claude Dumais, Rolland Dumais, André F ortin, Marie-Claude
Guimont, Francois Hamel, Jean Huot, Ronald Lepage, Louis Lemieux, Louis-A. Lord, Héléne
Marceau, Gaston Moisan, Mathilde Morency, Michel Poulin, André Robert, Jean-Marc Robert,
Frangois Soucy, René St-Laurent, Henri Talbot (Club des Ornithologues, Quebec).

Bancroft, Ont. (Town of Bancroft, South on Highway 28 to Paudash Lake, Deciduous
woods 30%; spruce bogs 30%; town 20%; pasture 20%).—Dec. 24, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4.15
p-m.; temp. 30° to 25°; wind SW, gusts to 40 m.p.h.; dull and stormy in a.m., clearing
p-m.; very mild, snow all melted, lakes open. 1 observer. Total party hours, 8; (5 on foot,
3 by car); total party miles, 73 (5 on foot, 68 by car).

Ruffed Grouse, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 8; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Blue Jay, 3
Common Raven, 1; Black-capped Chickadee, 32; White-breasted Nuthatch, 3, Red-
breasted Nuthatch, 6, Brown Creeper, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 8; Starling, 22;
House Sparrow, 75; Common Redpoll, 30. Total, 13 species; 188 individuals. (Robin

seen at feeding station on Dec. 16 and 17).
Earl Stark (Toronto Ornith. Club).

Barrie, Ont. (Dec. 28, 1957; temp. 40°; wind light E veering to W; no snow, Kempen-
feldt Bay open, Little Lake frozen. 20 observers in $ cars. Total party hours, 30; total party
miles, 226 (103 on foot, 215% by car).

Red-necked Grebe, 2; Horned Grebe, 1; Pied-billed Grebe, 3; Common Golden-
eye, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 5; Ring-necked Pheasant, 1; Herring Gull,
35; Ring-billed Gull, 12; Great Horned Owl, 1; Pileated Woodpecker, 7; Hairy
Woodpecker, 7; Downy Woodpecker, 15; Blue Jay, 36, Common Crow, 4; Black-
capped Chickadee, 157; White-breasted Nuthatch, 12; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 1;
Brown Creeper, 2; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 1; Northern Shrike, 6, Starling, 259;
English Sparrow, 160; Cardinal, 3; Evening Grosbeak, 37; Pine Grosbeak, 72; Redpoll,
207; Am. Goldfinch, 1, Slate-colored Junco, 12; Tree Sparrow, 5. ‘Totals, 30 species;
1,066 individuals.

Miss A. M. Hughes (Secretary, Brereton Field Naturalists’ Club).

Bobcaygeon, Burnt River, Fenelon Falls and Sturgeon Lake, Ont. (Open farmland
57%; woods, chiefly coniferous 31%; open water 2%, village 10%) .—Dec. 22, 1957; 7.05 a.m.
to 4.10 p.m.; chiefly cloudy a.m., clear late p.m.; temp. 37° to 41°; wind NW in a.m.; light
(ground bare). 2 observers in 1 party. Total party hours, 9 (23 on foot, 63 by car); total
party miles, 74 (8 on foot, 66 by car).

Common Goldeneye, 1; Red-tailed Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 8; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 7; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Blue Jay, 2; Black-capped
Chickadee. 45; White-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Evening Grape ile @onmen Redpoll,

47; Tree Sparrow, 6. Total, 12 species; about 123 individuals.
David Calvert, E. W. Calvert (compiler).

Brockville, Ont. (That area enclosed by 72-mile radius circle centered on post office,
Brockville. 20% of area is open water; 50% open farmland; 20% deciduous woodland,
7% coniferous woodland; 1394 marsh; 13% urban).—Dec. 29, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; temp.
30° to 38°; wind SW, 10 to 25 m.p.h. 21 observers in 9 parties. Total party hours, 69 (42 on
foot, 27 by car); total party miles, 384 (58 on foot, 326 by car).

- Common Loon, 2; Greater Scaup, 35; Common Goldeneye, 206, Common Mer-
ganser, 30; Goshawk, 1; Rough-legged Hawk, 2; Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse,
24; Gray Partridge, 5; Iceland Gull, 3; Great Black-backed Gull, 9; Herring Gull,
132; Ring-billed Gull, 46, Great Horned Owl, 1; Pileated Woodpecker, 3, Hairy
Woodpecker, 10; Downy Woodpecker, 6; Blue Jay, 65; Common Crow, 1; Black-
capped Chickadee, 137; White-breasted Nuthatch, 24; Brown Creeper, 4, Eastern
Bluebird, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 8; Northern Shrike, 2; Starling, 526, House
Sparrow, 705; Eastern Meadowlark, 1; Redwinged Blackbird, 1; Brown-headed Cow-
bird, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 71; Pine Grosbeak, 17, Common Redpoll, 486, Am. Gold-
finch, 58, Tree Sparrow, 10; Song Sparrow, 1. ‘Total, 36 species; 2,609 individuals.
(Seen in the area during the count period but not during the count itself were: Black
Duck, Canvasback, Bald Eagle, Black-backed Three-toed Woodpecker, Myrtle
Warbler, Snow Bunting. The Eastern Bluebird has been in the area where counted

1958 Gani Birp Census—1957 37

since the beginning of December. Three Iceland Gulls were noted for a period of
about twenty minutes by a competent observer. They were in company with both
Herring Gulls and Great Black-backed Gull).

J. Bayly (compiler), A. Bell, K. Buell, J. Cartwright, I. Clark, M. Edwards, Miss M. Hewitt, D. Hurrie,

Mrs. I. Jarvie, M. Jarvie, Miss E. Johnston, Mrs. H. Johnson, W. Lamb, H. Lapp, Miss N. Mansfield,

W. Miller, R. Morrow, Mrs. H. Quilliam, G. Stirrett, A. Strong, Miss D. Webb.

Carleton Place, Ont. (A circle 73-mile radius centered on bridge over Mississippi
River at Carleton Place).—Dec. 28, 1957; 9 am. to 3 p.m.; temp. 28° to 35°; wind E, 12
m.p-h.; ground was bare and frozen in morning, thawed in p.m. 36 observers in 14 parties.
Total party hours, 171; total party miles, 294 (37 on foot, 257 by car).

Common Goldeneye, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 18; Ring-necked Pheasant, 1; Rock Dove,
139; Snowy Owl, 1; Pileated Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 10; Downy Wood-
pecker, 1; Blue Jay, 62; Common Crow, 3; Black-capped Chickadee, 93; White-
breasted Nuthatch, 9; Brown Creeper, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 3, Northern
Shrike, 4; Starling, 77; House Sparrow, 210; Evening Grosbeak, 62; Purple Finch, 6,
Pine Grosbeak, 28; Common Redpoll, 349; Am. Goldfinch, 51, Tree Sparrow, 4.
Total, 23 species; 1,136 individuals.

Rowley Frith, Alan G. Bland, A. E. Bourguignon, C. E. R. Thompson, Cyril Inderwick, F. R.

Robertson, E. H. Ritchie, Dr. D. B. O. Saville, Dr. and Mrs. M. V. N. Murthy, John Bird, H. M. Brown,

M. D. Spencer, Misses Charlotte E. Dill and Sheila M. Clark, Mr. and Mrs. Tim Burnett, Mr. and

Mrs. Robert Lighthart, Mr. and Mrs. G. S. Davies, Miss Dianne Burnett, Susan Hawkins, Jane Oliver-

Bellases, Joanne Hall, Mr. and Mrs. G. E. Findlay, Mr. and Mrs. W. F. Findlay, Mr. and Mrs.

W. R. Findlay, David G. Findlay, Timothy Findlay, Peter Findlay, Dan. Findlay, Kate Findlay,

Jean Findlay, D. H. and D. D. Findlay (compiler).

Collingwood, Ont. (50% shoreline and open water, 25% deciduous woodland, 25% open
country, fields).—Dec. 26, 1957; 9 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; temp. 30° to 35°; wind W, 10-15 m.p.h.
14 observers in 3 parties. Total party hours 7; total party miles, 109 (4 on foot, 105 by car).

Red-necked Grebe, 1; Horned Grebe, 4; Black Duck, 3; Common Goldeneye, 81;
Bufflehead, 6, Oldsquaw, 4; Common Merganser, 18; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Glaucous
Gull, 2; Herring Gull, 775+; Ring-billed Gull, 10; Mourning Dove, 1, Snowy Owl, 1;
Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 4; Blue Jay, 4; Black-capped Chickadee,
58; White-breasted Nuthatch, 4; Whistling Swan, 1; Brown Creeper, 1; Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 14; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 134; House Sparrow, 500+; Car-
dinal, 2; Common Redpoll, 33; Tree Sparrow, 16, Snow Bunting, 65. Total, 28
species; 1,747 individuals. (Whistling Swan, uncommon winter observation. Seen
in the area during Christmas week: Meadow Lark, Bronzed Grackle, Evening Gros-

beaks, Pine Grosbeaks.
A. J. Mitchener (compiler), Dr. K. Edwards, L. A. Holbrooke, G. Wamsley, L. and E. Wambold,

J. Walker, J. Kirby, A. C. Cutten, A. Elliott, R. Kirby, J. Baird, N. Chessel, J. Hewson.

Guelph, Ont. (74-mile radius centering on St. George’s Square in downtown Guelph;
includes City of Guelph and 15-mile stretch of Speed River, occurrence of cover types not
yet worked out; area not thoroughly covered).—Dec. 29, 1957; 8.20 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.;
mostly cloudy with occasional clear intervals late morning and afternoon; temp. 24° to 30°;
wind SW to NW, 15-25 m.p.h.; 9 observers in 3 parties plus 2 observers at 2 feeding stations.
Total party hours, 9 (6 on foot, 3 by car); total party miles, 47 (40 on foot, 7 by car).

Ruffed Grouse, 3; Glaucous Gull, 3; Herring Gull, 210; Ring-billed Gull, 18;
Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 3; Common Crow, 1; Black-capped
Chickadee, 35; White-breasted Nuthatch, 5; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 75; House
Sparrow, 68 (55-13); Cardinal, 1; Pine Grosbeak, 4; Am. Goldfinch, 9; Slate-colored
Junco, 1; Tree Sparrow, 6. ‘Total, 17 species; 445 individuals. (Seen in area during
count period: Great Blue Heron, Mallard, Black Duck, Am. Widgeon, Common
Merganser, Sparrow Hawk, Great Horned Owl, Belted Kingfisher, Pileated Wood-
pecker, Blue Jay, Pine Siskin, White-winged Crossbill).

Mr. and Mrs. Carman Burton, Mr. and Mrs. Ralph Comfort, Alex Cringan, Antoon de Vos, Jacob

Kalff, Grant Love, Stuart MacKay, Robert Mason, William Steele.

Hamilton, Ont. (73-mile radius centering on York and Dundurn streets, and including
Hamilton, Burlington, Lake Medad, Dundas, Greensville, Ancaster, Mineral Springs, South-
cote, Hannon and Stoney Creek).—Dec. 29, 1957; 7 a.m. to 10.30 p.m.; overcast; temp. 26°
to 36°; wind SW, 10-17 m.p.h.; ground bare; Dundas Marsh and Hamilton Harbour open.
67 observers in 29 parties. Total party hours, 196 (187 on foot, 9 by car); total party miles,
388 (240 on foot, 148 by car).

38 THe CANADIAN FieLtp-NaATURALIST Vol. 72

Red-necked Grebe, 1; Horned Grebe, 5; Great Blue Heron, 3; Mallard, 187;
Black Duck, 197; Am. Widgeon, 2; Redhead, 3; Canvasback, 12; Greater Scaup, 161,
Lesser Scaup, 1; Common Goldeneye, 179; Bufflehead, 21; Oldsquaw, 491; White-
winged Scoter, 3; Ruddy Duck, 1; Hooded Merganser, 1, Common Merganser, 2000;
Red-breasted Merganser, 74; Red-tailed Hawk, 38; Red-shouldered Hawk, 1, Rough-
legged Hawk, 9; Marsh Hawk, 2; Sparrow Hawk, 27; Ruffed Grouse, 9, Ring-necked
Pheasant, 54; Gray Partridge, 4; Killdeer, 5; Glaucous Gull, 3, Iceland Gull (Kum-
lien’s), 1; Great Black-backed Gull, 82; Herring Gull, 2,500; Ring-billed Gull, 65;
Mourning Dove, 3; Screech Owl, 4; Great Horned Owl, 11; Long-eared Owl, 30,
Saw-whet Owl, 1; Belted Kingfisher, 10; Yellow-shafted Flicker, 2; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 3; Red-headed Woodpecker, 3, Hairy Woodpecker, 80, Downy Woodpecker,
130; Blue Jay, 167; Common Crow, 542; Black-capped Chickadee, 622, White-breasted
Nuthatch, 122; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 15; Brown Creeper, 31, Carolina Wren, 1,
Am. Robin, 2; Catbird, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 46; Cedar Waxwing, 12; North-
ern Shrike, 7; Starling, 7500; Myrtle Warbler, 1, House Sparrow, 1550; Common
Grackle, 6; Cardinal, 156; Evening Grosbeak, 2; Purple Finch, 34; Pine Grosbeak, 17;
Hoary Redpoll, 1; Common Redpoll, 137; Pine Siskin, 130, Am. Goldfinch, 160,
Slate-colored Junco, 287; Tree Sparrow, 400; Chipping Sparrow, 1, Field Sparrow, 3,
White-throated Sparrow, 1; Swamp Sparrow, 14; Snow Bunting, 3. Total, 75 species;
about 18,452 individuals. (Seen in area in count period: Goshawk, Pigeon Hawk,
Winter Wren, Mockingbird, Eastern Meadowlark, Red Crossbill, White-winged

Crossbill, Rufous-sided Towhee, Oregon Junco).

Stuart Alexander, Mr. and Mrs. Frank Bell, Miss Barbara Blackmore, Mr. and Mrs. R. D. F. Boume,

Miss Stella Brown, James Burns, Donald Campbell, William I. Campbell, Kenneth J. Cox, John

Cumming, Robert Curry, Edward Dinniwell, James A. N. Dowall, Vincent Duff, Ian Halladay,

Peter Hamel, Fred Helleiner, John Hencher, Robert Henry, George Holland, Mr. and Mrs. William

Holley, Roger Jackson, John Kennett, Miss Margaret Lamb, Woodburn Lambe, Mrs. John Lamoureux,

Thomson Lawrie, Miss Suzanne Lawrie, Miss A. E. LeWarne, Mr. and Mrs. Robert H. Lloyd,

Dr. R. G. C. MacLaren, Harold MacPherson, Mr. and Mrs. George McBride, C. Douglas McCallum,

Dr. and Mrs. George O. McMillan, John B. Miles, Dr. and Mrs. John Miller, James Morrow,

Mrs. Carl M. Morden, Dugald Moule, John A. Moule, Mr. and Mrs. Albert B. Nind, George W. North

(compiler), Mrs. George W. North, John Olmsted, David K. Powell, Robert K. Sargeant, Mr. and Mrs.

Frank Schneider, William Shaw, Miss Eunice Smillie, Robert Stamp, Miss Laura Stewart, Danny

Strickland, Miss Ann Watson, Miss Jane Watson, Miss Mabel Watson, J. Harvey Williams, Robert

Zavitz (Hamilton Nature Club).

Huntsville, Ont. (Dec. 28, 1957, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.; temp. 28° to 24°; no measurable wind,
light snowfall until early afternoon, then clearing; lakes and rivers mostly open, following
two weeks of mild weather; 3-4 inches old snow in bush, 2 inches new snow. 31 observers
in 12 parties. Total party hours, 30 (20 on foot, 10 by car); total party miles, 126 (24 on
foot, 102 by car).

Ruffed Grouse, 4; Herring Gull, 23; Hairy Woodpecker, 32; Downy Wood-
pecker, 24; Gray Jay, 9; Blue Jay, 22; Common Raven, 12; Blackcapped Chickadee,
153, White-breasted Nuthatch, 36; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 19; Brown Creeper, 2;
Golden-crowned Kinglet, 2; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 88; House Sparrow, 169,
Common Grackle, 1; Cardinal, 2; Evening Grosbeak, 61; Pine Grosbeak, 12; Common
Redpoll, 60; White-winged Crossbill, 9; Snow Bunting, 210. Total, 22 species; 951
individuals.

Mrs. Edgar Brook, Mr. and Mrs. A. C. Conway, Paul Conway, Douglas Conway, Beverley Conway,

Patricia Conway, Mrs. E. Farnsworth, Dorothy Fletcher, Vernon Graham, Mrs. J. Heron, Mrs. Gordon

Hill, Gerry Jenkins, James Kay, Mr. and Mrs. Gerald Keetch, Mrs. Langridge, Aubrey May, Nancy May,

Ken Perrin, Mrs. H. L. Reazin, Mr. and Mrs. E. G. R. Rogers, Dr. and Mrs. Ross Rogers, Susan Rogers,

Frank Rogers, Russell J. Rutter (compiler), Mr. and Mrs. W. Waters, Mrs. George Wilson

(Huntsville Nature Club).

Kingston, Ont. (73-mile radius centering on Garden Island, including Cataraqui River
and Creek, Lake Ontario, St. Lawrence River, Wolfe and adjacent islands). —Dec. 21, 1957;
7 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; rain in morning; temp. 40° to 45°; wind SW, 15-40 m.p.h.; low areas
flooded after heavy rain; all bodies of water open; no snow or cold spells recently. 18
observers in 8 parties. Total party hours, 63 (33 on foot, 30 by car); total party miles, 364
(44 on foot, 320 by car).

Common Loon, 2; Horned Grebe, 26; Mallard, 22; Black Duck, 159; Green-
winged Teal, 1; Am. Widgeon, 2; Ring-necked Duck, 1; Canvasback, 283, Greater
Scaup, 1862; Common Goldeneye, 863; Bufflehead, 22; Common Merganser, 399;
Rough-legged Hawk, 8; Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 6, Gray Partridge, 15,

ae

1958 CuristMas Birp Census—1957 39

Glaucous Gull, 21; Iceland Gull, 3; Great Black-backed Gull, 64; Herring Gull, 498;
Ring-billed Gull, 148, Bonaparte’s Gull, 4, Great Horned Owl, 2; Snowy Owl, 2;
Belted Kingfisher, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 8, Downy Woodpecker, 10; Blue Jay, 61;
Common Crow, 104; Black-capped Chickadee, 171, White-breasted Nuthatch, 28;
Brown Creeper, 3; Winter Wren, 1; Carolina Wren, 1, Am. Robin, 2; Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 1; Northern Shrike, 5; Starling, 1493, House Sparrow, 356; Eastern
Meadowlark, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 14, Common Redpoll, 56; Am. Goldfinch, 2;
Slate-colored Junco, 2; Tree Sparrow, 77; Field Sparrow, 3; Song Sparrow, 5; Lap-

land Longspur, 100. “Total, 48 species, about 6,920 individuals.

Jim Bayly, Art Bell, John Cartwright (compiler), Dr. Ken Edwards, Mary Edwards, Dr. Martin
Edwards, Art Hyde, Walter Lamb, Lou Lowther, Mary L’Estrange, Mrs. Shirley Peruniak, Mrs. Helen
Quilliam, Dr. and Mrs. George M. Stirrett, Alden Strong, Al Warren, Deirdre Webb, Nora Mansfield.

Kirkland, Lake, Ont. (73-mile radius centering on a point on No. 112 highway one
mile north of Dane; forested 65%; fields 20%; town 5%; slimes 5%; marsh 5%).—Dec. 22,
1957; 5.30 a.m. to 6 p.m.; overcast, temp. 24° to 32°, wind SW, 15 m.p.h.; 4 in. snow in open,
6 in. in bush; lakes frozen, streams mostly open. 16 observers in 8 parties. Total party hours,
25 (184 on foot, 63 by car); total party miles, 138 (27 on foot, 111 by car).

Ruffed Grouse, 5; Great Horned Owl, 3; Hairy Woodpecker, 11; Gray Jay, 17;
Blue Jay, 10; Common Raven, 7; Black-capped Chickadee, 98, Boreal Chickadee, 11;
Red-breasted Nuthatch, 4; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 8; Evening Grosbeak, 2;
Pine Grosbeak, 15; Common Redpoll, 4; White-throated Sparrow, 1; Snow Bunting,

12. ‘Total, 16 species; 209 individuals.

Mrs. K. Bennett, F. M. Helleiner, J. H. Hodgins, M. Johnson, Ralph Karlson, Ruth Karlson, R. J.
McClanoghan (compiler), P. W. Richter, I. Robertson, Mrs. W. S. Savage, Mr. and Mrs. J. G.
Stephenson, Miss A. L. Stewart, Mrs. George Timmins, George Timmins Jr., Mrs. R. Walker, F.
Washington (Kirkland Lake Nature Club).

Kitchener, Ont. (73-mile radius centering on extreme SW boundary of Kitchener;
cattail marsh 2%; open land 23%; deciduous woods 25%; suburbs 2%; open water 2%;
coniferous woods 257%; swamp 21%).—Dec. 22, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; overcast to sunny;
temp. 31° to 45°; wind SW to WNW,, 15 to 10 m.p.h.; no snowfall; ground bare, all water
open. 29 observers in 6 parties. Total party hours, 423 (38 on foot, 42 by car); total party
miles, 163 (39 on foot, 124 by car).

' Great Blue Heron, 1; Black Duck, 12; Common Goldeneye, 32; Common Mer-
ganser, 9; Goshawk, 1; Red-tailed Hawk, 11, Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 7;
Ring-necked Pheasant, 7; Herring Gull, 95; Ring-billed Gull, 3; Rock Dove, 58;
Screech Owl, 1; Great Horned Owl, 2; Long-eared Owl, 8; Belted Kingfisher, 4;
Pileated Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 9; Downy Woodpecker, 40; Blue Jay,
15; Common Crow, 3; Black-capped Chickadee, 192; White-breasted Nuthatch, 31;
Red-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Brown Creeper, 15; Winter Wren, 1; Am. Robin, 1;
Golden-crowned Kinglet, 62; Northern Shrike, 7; Starling, 81; House Sparrow, 294;
Cardinal, 35; Evening Grosbeak, 32; Pine Grosbeak, 6, Common Redpoll, 75; Pine
Siskin, 2, Am. Goldfinch, 136, Slate-colored Junco, 49; Tree Sparrow, 36; Song

Sparrow, 2. Total, 40 species; 1,380 individuals.

Willard H. Schaefer, F. W. R. Dickson, Eric M. Carter, Morley Preston, Robert Pickering, R. C.
Hilborn (leaders); Ross Campbell, Dorothy Campbell, Craig Campbell (compiler), Margaret Lemon,
Norman Shantz, Horace Dahmer, Earlmont Poth, R. E. Scheffel, James Carter, John Bindernagel,
Stephen Underhill, Joyce Preston, James Detweiler, Robert Wilkins, Allan Heslop, Douglas Ainsworth,
Dr. J. B. Sanders, Elizabeth Hagey, Harold Ellenton, Linda Preston, Amo Schatt, Ralph Hendry,
Mrs. Ralph Hendry.

London, Ont. (London to Delaware, Fanshaw Lake, Byron bog, Trott’s swamp, all
around University and north of London. River and gullies 50%; farmland 20%; roadsides
15%; mixed woodlots 5%; swamp 10%).——Dec. 28, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; river and
ponds open; temp. 33° to 37°; wind S by SW, 12-14 m.p.h.; wet snow at 7.30 turning to rain,
ending by 8 o’clock, remainder of day overcast, ground bare. 34 observers in 14 parties.
Total party hours, 120 (113 on foot, 17 by car); total party miles, 190 (79 on foot, 111 by car).

Pied-billed Grebe, 1; Great Blue Heron, 2; Mallard, 51; Black Duck, 534; Lesser
Scaup, 1, Common Goldeneye, 65, Common Merganser, 85; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1;
Cooper’s Hawk, 1,; Red-tailed Hawk, 41; Rough-legged Hawk, 1; Bald Eagle, 1;
Marsh Hawk, 1, Sparrow Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Bobwhite, 20; Ring-necked
Pheasant, 11; Herring Gull, 287; Ring-billed Gull, 2; Mourning Dove, 6; Screech Owl,
1; Great Horned Owl, 3; Long-eared Owl, 2; Short-eared Owl, 12; Belted Kingfisher,

40 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

8; Red-bellied Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 47; Downy Woodpecker, 90;
Blue Jay, 81; Common Crow, 11; Black-capped Chickadee, 244, White-breasted Nut-
hatch, 51; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 25; Brown Creeper, 14, Winter Wren, 9; Carolina
Wren, 1; Am. Robin, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 48; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 1;
Northern Shrike, 4, Starling, 357; House Sparrow, 1773; Eastern Meadowlark, 1,
Cardinal, 201; Evening Grosbeak, 10; Purple Finch, 16; Common Redpoll, 36; Pine
Siskin, 1; Am. Goldfinch, 139; Slate-colored Junco, 108; Tree Sparrow, 129; Field
Sparrow, 3; Swamp Sparrow, 1; Song Sparrow, 7; Snow Bunting, 1. Total, 55 species;
4,552 individuals.

James Leach (compiler), J. C. Laughton, D. W. Sutton, Mr. and Mrs. Wm. Gisling, Lynn Ball,

Alan Westbrook, Peter Middleton, Glenn Pincombe, Eli Davis, Mr. and Mrs. Harold Leach, Mrs.

Spruce, Mrs. G. Cummings, Mr. and Mrs. W. Day. Dr. and Mrs. C. Cline, Walter Parsons, Paul

Mackenzie, Charles, Ted and Wm. Maddeford, D. Carr, Dr. Hobbs, Brandon, Hobbs, Carolyn Hobbs,

Dr. G. Aitken, H. Nugent, H. Keast, V. Franks, G. Muller, Laura Sweeten, Mr. and Mrs. J. C. Higgins.

Melbourne, Ont. (A fifteen-mile circle centered one mile north of West Lorne. Parts
of the Townships of Aldbourough, Dunwich, Ekfrid and Mosa are included).—Dec. 26,
1957; 6.30 a.m. to 5.30 p.m.; temp. 34° to 28°; wind SW, 10 to 25 m.p.h.; no snow on ground,
all water open; complete overcast in morning, broken overcast in afternoon. 11 observers
in 3 parties. Total party hours, 28 (14 on foot, 14 by car); total party miles, 166 (20 on foot,
146 by car).

Common Goldeneye, 333; Red-breasted Merganser, 2; Cooper’s Hawk, 1, Red-
tailed Hawk, 26, Red-shouldered Hawk, 1; Rough-legged Hawk, 18, Marsh Hawk, 32;
Sparrow Hawk, 5; Ruffed Grouse, 4; Bobwhite, 32; Ring-necked Pheasant, 6, Herring
Gull, 143; Ring-billed Gull, 36; Bonaparte’s Gull, 1, Rock Dove, 39; Mourning Dove,
55; Screech Owl, 2; Great Horned Owl, 2; Short-eared Owl, 21; Belted Kingfisher, 2;
Pileated Woodpecker, 2; Red-bellied Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 13,
Downy Woodpecker, 33; Horned Lark, 33, Blue Jay, 7, Common Crow, 2; Black-
capped Chickadee, 108; White-breasted Nuthatch, 12; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 7;
Brown Creeper, 14; Am. Robin, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 9; Northern Shrike, 2;
Starling, 174; House Sparrow, 376; Eastern Meadowlark, 12; Redwinged Blackbird, 1;
Brown-headed Cowbird, 3; Cardinal, 105; Am. Goldfinch, 3; Slate-colored Junco, 56;
Tree Sparrow, 168; Song Sparrow, 6. ‘Total, 44 species, 1,910 individuals. (Seen
during count period: Yellow-shafted Flicker, Mockingbird, Evening Grosbeak).

Edwin Graff, Florence Graff, Robert Hopper, Donald Johnson, James Lemon, Tom Lemon, V. E. Lemon,
Dougald Murray (compiler), David Robinson, James Shostock, Robert Shostock.

North Bay, Ont. (Township of West Ferris, North Himsworth to Wasi Falls, North
Bay and Widdifield Twp. Mixed second-growth bushland 45%; mainly jackpine 30%;
burnt-over bush 10%; settlements 1094; rivers, marshes 5%).—Dec. 28, 1957; 7.30 a.m. to
5 p.m.; mainly clear, sunny; temp. 20° to 19°; wind NW, N, SW, E, 14-9 m.p.h.; ground
covered with about one inch of fresh snow; lakes frozen but rivers and creeks mainly open.
5 observers in 1 party. Total party hours, 883 (6 hr.40m. on foot, lhr.50m. by car); total party
miles, 68 (9 on foot, 59 by car).

Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 1; Blue Jay, 3; Black-capped
Chickadee, 19. ‘Total, 4 species; 25 individuals. All birds, with the exception of
11 Chickadees, were seen at compiler’s feeding station. (Other species seen between
Dec. 21 and Jan. 1: Ruffed Grouse, Herring Gull, Pileated Woodpecker, Gray Jay,

Evening Grosbeak, Pine Grosbeak, Starling, White-breasted Nuthatch).

T. C. Cusson, Lucille Cusson, Helen Willoughby, Edith Munns, Hazel Petty (compiler) (Nipissing

Field Naturalists ).

Ottawa, Ont. (74-mile radius from Parliament Hill; town and suburb, fields, deciduous
woods, coniferous scrub, river banks).—Dec. 22, 1957; 7.30 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; temp. 33° to
41°; wind W to SE, 4 to 12 m.p.h.; partly cloudy in a.n., clear in p.m.; no snow; lakes and
ponds frozen, but rivers mainly open. 37 observers in 13 parties. Total party hours, 86;
total party miles 413 (79 on foot, 334 by car).

Canada Goose, 4; Black Duck, 40; Common Goldeneye, 71; Hooded Merganser,
1, Common Merganser, 50; Sparrow Hawk, 3; Ruffed Grouse, 7; Ring-necked
Pheasant, 11, Gray Partridge, 36; Iceland Gull, 1; Great Black-backed Gull, 1; Herring
Gull, 185; Ring-billed Gull, 1; Rock Dove, 482; Mourning Dove, 3; Great Horned
Owl, 2; Short-eared Owl, 1; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 8; Downy

1958 CuristTMAs Birp Census—1957 41

Woodpecker, 18; Gray Jay, 1; Blue Jay, 50; Common Crow, 32; Black-capped Chick-
adee, 215; White-breasted Nuthatch, 42; Brown Creeper, 7, Am. Robin, 1; Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 5; Northern Shrike, 8; Starling, 997; House Sparrow, 1095, Evening
Grosbeak, 64; Pine Grosbeak, 49; Hoary Redpoll, 6, Common Redpoll, 948, Am.
Goldfinch, 22; White-winged Crossbill, 1, Tree Sparrow, 4, White-throated Sparrow,

1; Snow Bunting, 137. Total, 40 species; 4,611 individuals.

A. W. F. Banfield, Miss A. Banning, Mr. and Mrs. D. R. Beckett, Mr. and Mrs. J. Bird, A. E.

Bourguignon, K. W. Bowles, H. M. Brown, Miss S. M. Clark, D. D. Findlay, Mr. and Mrs. D. K.

Findlay, Dr. and Mrs. C. Frankton, Mr. and Mrs. R. E. Frith, H. C. Gibbs, W. E. Godfrey, Miss V.

Humphreys, H. Lloyd, Mr. and Mrs. H. Marshall, E. H. McEwen, E. Mills, F. Munro, E. H. Ritchie,

Dr. (compiler) and Mrs. D. B. O. Savile, Mr. and Mrs. P. Scott, Dr. and Mrs. D. A. Smith, P. Smith,

W. J. Smith, M. D. Spencer, L. Stevenson.

Peterborough, Ont. (Approx. 18-mile radius of Peterborough; open farmland 45%,
marsh 15%; Water 5%; coniferous woods 5%; deciduous woods 5% mixed woods 25%) .—
Dec. 28, 1957; 8.15 a.m. to 5 p.m.; temp. 36° to 39°; wind SW, 5-10 m.p.h.; visibility good to
fair, ground frozen; no snow; river open. 23 observers in 7 parties. Total party hours, 56,
total party miles, 356 (22 on foot, 334 by car).

Pied-billed Grebe, 1; Great Blue Heron, 1; Mallard, 2; Common Goldeneye, 1;
Common Merganser, 6; Goshawk, 1, Sparrow Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 8, Ring-
necked Pheasant, 3; Herring Gull, 15; Rock Dove, 176; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Pileated
Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 8; Downy Woodpecker, 16; Blue Jay, 38;
Common Crow, 1; Black-capped Chickadee, 285, White-breasted Nuthatch, 28;
Brown Creeper, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 14; Northern Shrike, 4, Starling, 457,
House Sparrow, 462; Cardinal, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 140; Purple Finch, 1; Pine Gros-
beak, 24, Common Redpoll, 920; Pine Siskin, 6, Am. Goldfinch, 96, Tree Sparrow, 61;
Snow Bunting, 1. Total, 33 species, 2,783 individuals.

D. Sadler, S. Bond, K. W. Strasser, T. Smith, P. McGillen, Mr. and Mrs. G. Green, M. V. Powell,

J. H. Johnson, W. J. Smith, R. Chandler, Mr. and Mrs. V. Chandler, K. Baker, P. Bristow, Audrey

Wilson, E. McDonald, Lola Leach, A. Bunker, Miss Bunker, M. Pomeroy, F. R. Pammett and

J. L. McKeever (compilers ).

Pickering, Ont. (From West City limits of Oshawa to Newcastle on Lake Ontario
forming a radius of 20 miles from the center of Oshawa to Lake Skugog, east to Pontypool) —
Dec. 22, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4 p.m.; temp 32° to 40°; wind S, 5 m.p.h. 16 observers in 5 parties.
Total party hours, 92; total party miles, 174 (47 on foot, 127 by car).

Great Blue Heron, 2; Am. Bittern, 1; Black Duck, 90; Common Goldeneye, 58,
-Oldsquaw, 308; Common Merganser, 13; Red-breasted Merganser, 2; Marsh Hawk, 1;
Peregrine Falcon, 1; Pigeon Hawk, 1, Sparrow Hawk, 6; Ruffed Grouse, 13; Ring-
necked Pheasant, 13; Great Black-backed Gull, 16; Herring Gull, 394; Ring-billed
Gull, 30; Rock Dove, 218; Mourning Dove, 24; Long-eared Owl, 1; Short-eared Owl,
1; Saw-whet Owl, 1; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 17, Downy Wood-
pecker, 12; Black-backed Three-toed Woodpecker, 4; Horned Lark, 1; Blue Jay, 25;
Common Crow, 40; Black-capped Chickadee, 490, White-breasted Nuthatch, 15,
Red-breasted Nuthatch, 1; Brown Creeper, 1, Winter Wren, 1; Carolina Wren, 1;
Golden-crowned Kinglet, 41; Northern Shrike, 4; Starling, 165; House Sparrow, 352;
Cardinal, 15; Evening Grosbeak, 24; Purple Finch, 13; Pine Grosbeak, 12; Common
Redpoll, 42; Pine Siskin, 2; Am. Goldfinch, 150; Slate-colored Junco, 20; Tree
Sparrow, 87; Swamp Sparrow, 2; Song Sparrow, 10; Snow Bunting, 2. Total, 50
species; 2,731 individuals.

Alf. Bunker (compiler), Charles Christy, Forrest Dilling, Roy Flemming, W. Fisher, Jake Laird,

Brian Nauss, Bill Neal, Glen Owen, Jim Richards, Mrs. Ara Sands, George Scott, Brian Seton,

John Theberge, Ted and Ron Tozer.

Pickering Township, Ont. (15 acres of mixed woodland; white cedar 20%; hemlock
20%; poplar, birch, ironwood, maple 45%; uncultivated fields 15%, three miles of country
roads, fields 50%; mixed woodland 50%; including 3 feeding stations).—Dec. 28, 1957;
7.30 a.m. to 5.05 p.m.; overcast (briefly partly cloudy); temp. 32° to 35°; wind, variable
becoming W, 15 m.p.h.; ground clear, creek running almost full, ponds with some “window-
pane” ice; ground frozen at dawn becoming muddy. 2 observers in 1 party. Total party hours,
9% (44 on foot, 1 by car); total party miles, 7 (4 on foot, 3 by car).

Herring Gull, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 1, Downy Woodpecker, 6; Blue Jay, 3;
Black-capped Chickadee, 26, White-breasted Nuthatch, 5; Brown Creeper, 2; Am.

42 Tue CANADIAN FiIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Robin, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 3; House Sparrow, 37; Am. Goldfinch, 100;
‘ Slate-colored Junco, 8; Oregon Junco, 1, Tree Sparrow, 12. Total, 14 species; 213
individuals.

Doris Huestis Speirs (compiler), John Murray Speirs.

Port Arthur and Fort William, Ont. (Silver Harbour south along Highway 17 to
Fort William, and to Chippewa Park, west to Murillo, north to Kivikoski, south to Port
Arthur. Mixed woodlands and settled areas).—Dec. 28, 1957; 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.; cloudy dull,
temp. 16° to -5°; wind NW, 10 to 24 m.p.h.; 6 inches snow; a few open areas near shore
in Lake Superior, all other waters frozen. 19 observers in 12 parties; Total party hours, 38
(13 on foot, 25 by car); total party miles, 314 (15 on foot, 299 by car). ;

Common Goldeneye, 170; Gray Partridge, 3, Herring Gull, 140; Rock Dove, 487;
Snowy Owl, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 7, Downy Woodpecker, 9; Gray Jay, 8; Blue
Jay, 24; Common Raven, 137; Common Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee, 59; Boreal
Chickadee, 3; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 298; House Sparrow, 2168, Evening
Grosbeak, 21; Pine Grosbeak, 48; Common Redpoll, 248. Total, 19 species; 3,835
individuals. (Goshawk, Rough-legged Hawk, Sharp-tailed Grouse, Pine Siskin,
seen during count period).

Dr. and Mrs. A. E. Allin, R. D. Brougham, Rev. W. Cook, Keith Denis (compiler), R. Denis,

C. E. Garton, Mrs. A. F. Hanton, Mrs. W. P. Hogarth, D. Hurd, Mrs. M. Knowles, I. Robb, R. Robb,
S. Robb, W. Robinson, C. Rydholm, Mrs. C. Saucier, Miss M. Smith, J. Thompson.

Richmond Hill, Ont. (Woods, fields, some marsh. Limit of 15 miles in any direction
from Richmond Hill. Woods, riverbeds, small lake areas, fields and roadsides).—Dec. 26,
1957; 8.30 a.m. to 4 p.m.; temp. 35° to 40°; wind, very little. 14 observers in 4 parties. Total
party hours, 98; total party miles, 154 (23 on foot, 131 by car).

Rough-legged Hawk, 1, Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ring-necked Pheasant, 4; Herring
Gull, 8; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 15; Downy Woodpecker, 15,
Blue Jay, 31; Common Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee, 169; White-breasted Nut-
hatch, 26; Brown Creeper, 5; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 33; Northern Shrike, 2,
Starling, 25; Myrtle Warbler, 1; Cardinal, 20, Evening Grosbeak, 9; Pine Grosbeak,
15; Am. Goldfinch, 202; Slate-colored Junco, 12; Tree Sparrow, 18, Song Sparrow, 1.

Total, 23 species; 676 individuals.

Mr. and Mrs. T. Boardman, Mr. and Mrs. P. Addison, Mr. R. Stanfield, Mr. J. W. Large, Mr. O.
Devitt, Dr. and Mrs. E. Meade, William Addison, P. Addison, Lyn Jackman, David Gibson,
David Tinker, Dr. Lillian C. Langstaff (compiler) (Richmond Hill Naturalists).

Rutherglen, Ont. (From township of Bonfield, villages of Bonfield, Rutherglen, areas
around rivers Mattawa, Amable du Fond, Ottawa to town of Mattawa; open farmland 10%;
mixed second growth forest 50%; bogs 5%; lakes, rivers 20%; settlements 15°4).—Dec. 31,
1957; 7.30 a.m. to 3.30 p.m.; blue sky to snowing; temp. 19° to 24°; wind W veering E to S,
2 to 10 m.p.h.; ground covered by 1 inch of snow; ice on the lakes not carrying, all water
with a current open. 1 observer. Total party hours, 8 (6 on foot, 2 by car); total party
miles, 43 (4 on foot, 39 by car).

Common Goldeneye, 3; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 17; Downy
Woodpecker, 6; Gray Jay, 8; Blue Jay, 6, Common Raven, 1; Black-capped Chick-
adee, 40; White-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 3; Brown Creeper, 2;
Starling, 3; Pine Grosbeak, 7; Snow Bunting, 28. Total, 14 species; approximately
132 individuals.

Louise de Kiriline Lawrence.

Toronto, Ont. (Many established routes, north to Pottageville, west to Clarkson and
east to Whitby) —Dec. 22, 1957; 7.45 a.m. to 5 p.m.; temp. mean 39°; sunny, ground all bare,
creeks open, no sign of ice or snow anywhere. 114 observers in 28 parties. Total party hours,
177 hr. 40 min.; (average per party,,6 hr., 32 min.).

Red-necked Grebe, 1; Great Blue Heron, 2; Mallard, 815; Black Duck, 855;
Pintail, 1; Green-winged Teal, 2; Blue-winged Teal, 1; Am. Widgeon, 2; Redhead, 1,
Canvasback, 2; Greater Scaup, 1335; Lesser Scaup, 3; Common Goldeneye, 443,
Bufflehead, 142; Oldsquaw, 3670; White-winged Scoter, 9; Hooded Merganser, 1;
Common Merganser, 57; Red-breasted Merganser, 3; Goshawk, 1; Sharp-shinned
Hawk, 1; Cooper’s Hawk, 4; Red-tailed Hawk, 29; Rough-legged Hawk, 7, Marsh
Hawk, 2; Sparrow Hawk, 47; Ruffed Grouse, 4; Ring-necked Pheasant, 192; Am.
Coot, 1; Glaucous Gull, 4; Great Black-backed Gull, 36; Herring Gull, 2,676; Ring-

1958 CuriIstTMAS Birp Census—1957 43

billed Gull, 625; Mourning Dove, 12; Great Horned Owl, 8; Snowy Owl, 4; Hawk
Owl, 1; Long-eared Owl, 8; Saw-whet Owl, 2; Belted Kingfisher, 2; Yellow-
shafted Flicker, 2; Pileated Woodpecker, 6, Hairy Woodpecker, 99, Downy
Woodpecker, 179; Horned Lark, 1; Blue Jay, 177; Common Crow, 22; Black-capped
Chickadee, 838; White-breasted Nuthatch, 168; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 17; Brown
Creeper, 38; Winter Wren, 1; Carolina Wren, 4; Am. Robin, 3; Golden-crowned
Kinglet, 79; Cedar Waxwing, 6, Northern Shrike, 17; Starling, 1736, House Sparrow,
1872; Eastern Meadowlark, 4; Redwinged Blackbird, 5; Rusty Blackbird, 1, Common
Grackle, 1; Cardinal, 103; Evening Grosbeak, 14, Purple Finch, 8, Pine Grosbeak, 57,
Common Redpoll, 102; Pine Siskin, 2; Am. Goldfinch, 403; Red Crossbill, 1, White-
winged Crossbill, 3; Rufous-sided Towhee, 2, Slate-colored Junco, 307; Oregon Junco,
1; Tree Sparrow, 404; White-throated Sparrow, 5; Song Sparrow, 48. Total, 78

species; 17,747 individuals.
W. Addison, J. Baillie (compiler), H. Barnett, G. M. Bartmen, G. Bennett, O. Bennett, F. Bodsworth,
M. Boggs, O. D. Boggs, O. D. Boggs, jr., Ralph Brown, Robert Brown, Ruth Brown, A. Bunker,
. Burton, L. Butcher, V. Carter, C. H. D. Clarke, D. Clarke, L. Clarke, S. Clarke, F. Crawford,
Dales, C. Davies, I. Davies, A. Dawe, O. E. Devitt, F. H. Emery, G. Fairfield, J. Fairfield,
. B. Falls, T. Farley, L. Farr, W. Farr, L. Galbraith, B. Geale, D. Geale, J. Geale, C. Goodwin,
. Gunn, J. Gunn, W. W. H. Gunn, H. Halliday, M. Halliday, R. Hansell, P. Harrington, P. Higgins,
. Higgins, J. Hogg, D. Hughes, J. Humphreys, C. Ireson, L. Jackman, R. James, R. Knights,
Lambert, H. Lawrence, B. LeVay, F. LeVay, J. LeVay, N. LeVay, H. Lumsden, J. Lunn,
Mackintosh, R. Maclelland, William Martin, A. Mason, J. Mayall, K. Mayall, I. Metcalfe,
Myland, D. O’Brien, G. Page, R. Pannell, J. Parker, D. Perks, J. Purkis, A. Reid, H. Richards,
. Ripley, M. Ripley, R. Ritchie, J. Satterly, R. M. Saunders, D. Scovell, J. Sherrin, T. M. Shortt,
Simmons, S. Skolnick, F. Smith, J. Smith, W. W. Smith, H. Southam, D. H. Speirs. E. Stark,
. Stewart, D. Sumner, L. Szijj, E. H. Taylor, R. Taylor, R. Trowern, N. Verbeek, E. Waltho,
Warwick, E. Wasserfall, W. Wasserfall, E. Welch, E. West, J. D. West, M. West, B.
Westcott, W. Williams, Roy Wilson, J. Woods (members and friends of the Brodie Club).

Salam)

mZbsono<

Westport, Ont. (73-mile radius centering on village municipal office, farmland 15%,
lakes 20%; marshes 5%; deciduous woodland 40%; red cedar groves 2%; mixed woodland
18%).—Dec. 28, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4 p.m.; cloudy, clear 10 a.m.; temp. 30° to 35°; wind E, 10
to 15 m.p.h.; ground bare, first freeze-up Nov. 26, all lakes again open Dec. 25. 12 observers
in 5 parties. Total party hours, 38 (173 on foot, 203 by car); total party miles, 257 (29 on
foot, 228 by car).

Common Loon, 2; Black Duck, 6; Common Goldeneye, 76; Common Merganser,
438; Cooper’s Hawk, 1; Rough-legged Hawk, 1, Bald Eagle, 3; Peregrine Falcon, 1,
Ruffed Grouse, 13; Herring Gull, 61; Ring-billed Gull, 81, Pileated Woodpecker, 2;
Hairy Woodpecker, 10; Downy Woodpecker, 4; Blue Jay, 41; Black-capped Chick-
adee, 193; White-breasted Nuthatch, 14; Brown Creeper, 1; Golden-crowned King-
let, 1, Northern Shrike, 5; Starling, 20; House Sparrow, 123, Pine Grosbeak, 9;
Common Redpoll, 423; Pine Siskin, 11, Am. Goldfinch, 4; Tree Sparrow, 3. Total,
27 species, 1.547 individuals.

J. C. Bayly, A. Bell, D. Crawford, R. Dudley, I. Jarvie, M. Jarvie, J. MacIntyre, N. Mansfield,

W. Miller, G. M. Stirrett, A. M. Strong (compiler), D. Webb.

Carlton, Sask. (74-mile radius centering 23 miles west and 23 miles south of Carlton,
deciduous woods 20%; open farmland 80%).—Dec. 29, 1957; 7.30 a.m. to 3 p.m.; mostly
overcast; temp. —34° to —25°; wind E and NE, 15 m.p.h.; 6 inches snow on ground.
6 observers in 2 parties. Total party hours, 143 (12 on foot, 13 by car); total party miles, 69
(2 on foot, 67 by car).

Pigeon Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 5; Sharp-tailed Grouse, 18, Gray Partridge, 16,
Snowy Owl, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Gray Jay, 1; Black-billed Magpie, 19; Black-
capped Chickadee, 10; Starling, 5; House Sparrow, 168, Evening Grosbeak, 22; Pine
Grosbeak, 19; Common Redpoll, 151; Snow Bunting, 251. Total, 15 species, 688
individuals.

Margaret Belcher (Regina Natural History Society), Dr. R. M. Bremner, Jonathan Gerrard, J. Frank

Roy (Saskatoon Natural History Society), Dr. and Mrs. Stuart Houston (compilers) (Yorkton

Natural History Society).

Saskatoon, Sask. (A circle 15 miles in diameter, centered 2 miles south of Saskatoon,
including the city, the wooded banks of the Saskatchewan River, 3 golf courses, the Forestry
farm and surrounding fields and pastures) .—Dec. 26, 1957; 8 a.m. to 4 p.m.; temp. 16° to 34°;
wind NE, 20 to 35 m.p.h.; partially cloudy; light snow cover averaging 2 inches deep.
22 observers in 5 parties. Total party hours, 284 (12 on foot, 163 by car); total party miles,
155 (22 on foot, 133 by car).

44 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 72

Mallard, 10; Sharp-tailed Grouse, 35; Ring-necked Pheasant, 4; Gray Partridge,
23; Great Horned Owl, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 5; Downy Woodpecker, 1; Black-
billed Magpie, 107; Black-capped Chickadee, 29; Bohemian Waxwing, 1550, House
Sparrow, 1206, Evening Grosbeak, 24; Pine Grosbeak, 58; Common Redpoll, 1260;

Snow Bunting, 348. Total, 15 species; 4,662 individuals.

J. S. MacLennan, Ted Wedge, T. Wedge, W. Wedge, Lindylou Wedge, R. Pravda, A. Grady,

R. Gerrity, G. Gerrity, D. Morris, B. Mills, J. F. Roy (compiler), Dr. R. M. Bremner, Muriel Bremner,

M. Bremner, R. Folker, B. Gollop, J. Shadick, J. Hogg, Grace Hogg, J. Mackenzie, P. Cordrey

(members of Saskatoon Nat. Hist. Society).

Yorkton, Sask. (73-mile radius centering on Yorkton; farmland, 207% wooded). Dec.
26, 1957; 8 a.m. to 5.30 p.m.; overcast; temp. 19° to 23°; wind SE, 30 m.p.h.; 6 inches snow
on ground. 17 observers in 6 parties. Total party hours, 28 (83 on foot, 193 by car); total
party miles, 1223 (122 on foot, 110 by car).

Ruffed Grouse, 1; Sharp-tailed Grouse, 18; Gray Partridge, 36, Great Horned
Owl, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Blue Jay, 2; Black-billed Magpie, 28, Black-capped
Chickadee, 9; Bohemian Waxwing, 41; Starling, 4, House Sparrow, 219; Pine Gros-
beak, 25; Hoary Redpoll, 2; Common Redpoll, 231; Snow Bunting, 274. ‘Total, 15
species; 894 individuals. Snowy Owl, Dec. 29; Hairy Woodpecker, Dec. 24.

Brother Eugene, Brother Joseph, Henry Chilman, Jr., Tom Cursons, Archie Fraser, Art Gellert, Billy

Horseman, Dr. and Mrs. Stuart Houston (compilers), Ronald McDonald, Preston McDonald, Bob

Pearce, Wayne Pearce, Elwood Sharpe, Cliff Shaw, Jeff Smith, Donald Swaby (Yorkton Natural

History Society).

Calgary, Alta. (73-mile radius centering on Centre Street Bridge and Bow River,
including Inglewood Sanctuary, Bowness Park, Glenmore Reservoir, sections banks Bow
and Elbow River, Roxborough and Rideau city parks).—Dec. 22, 1957; 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.;
mostly sunny, temp. 1° to 38°; wind SSW, 18 m.p.h.; ground bare and frozen; prairie
sloughs, Glenmore Reservoir frozen; ponds in Inglewood ice free; Bow and Elbow Rivers
open. 8 observers in 4 parties. Total party hours, 24 (12 on foot, 12 by car); total party
miles, 188 (11 on foot, 177 by car).

Mallard, 2,203; Green-winged Teal, 1; Redhead, 1; Canvasback, 1; Common
Goldeneye, 128; Barrow’s Goldeneye, 1, Common Merganser, 8; Goshawk, 1; Prairie
Falcon, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 2; Ring-necked Pheasant, 11; Gray Partridge, 20; Killdeer,
1; Snowy Owl, 9; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Black-billed Magpie, 92; Black-capped Chick-
adee, 21; Brown Creeper, 1; Bohemian Waxwing, 13; Starling, 1; House Sparrow, 274,
Pine Grosbeak, 6, Common Redpoll, 37. Total, 23 species; 2,835 individuals. (Seen
in count period: Mountain Chickadee, Boreal Chickadee, Red-breasted Nuthatch,
Golden-crowned Kinglet, Northern Shrike).

C. J. Barnhardt, E. D. Beacham (compiler), J. Beacham, E. Cheney, J. Clarke, M. J. Cope,

W. E. MacKay, N. Winnick (Calgary Bird Club).

Edmonton, Alta. (73-mile radius from airport; town and suburbs, farmland, mixed
woods, river banks).—Dec. 29, 1957; 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.; clear; temp. —2° to —4°; wind SSE,
5 m.p.h.; one-half inch fresh snow. 26 observers in 10 parties. Total party hours, 342 (263
on foot, 8 by car); total party miles, 120 (20 on foot, 100 by car).

Mallard, 63, Pintail, 2, Common Goldeneye, 9; Common Merganser, 1; Rough-
legged Hawk, 1, Pigeon Hawk, 1, Ruffed Grouse, 3; Sharp-tailed Grouse, 2; Ring-
necked Pheasant, 42; Gray Partridge, 26; Rock Dove, 48; Snowy Owl, 1; Boreal
Owl, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 6, Downy Woodpecker, 6, Blue Jay, 16; Black-billed
Magpie, 148, Black-capped Chickadee, 129; Boreal Chickadee, 4; Brown Creeper, 1,
Bohemian Waxwing, 628; Starling, 6, House Sparrow, 332; Pine Grosbeak, 56;

Common Redpoll, 60. Total, 25 species; 1,592 individuals.

A. Allan, K. Ball (compiler), A. Blades, E. Blades, H. Campbell, S$. Campbell, M. Forge, C. Hampson,

M. Hampson, H. Habgood, J. Hawkins, R. Heath, O. Hohn, E. Jones, N. Krevosheia, R. Lister, °

I. MacDonald, S. MacDonald, H. MacGregor, J. McIntyre, A. McPhalen, D. Milner, H. Pegg,

P. Thompson, R. Turner, J. Williams.

Comox, B.C. (Courtenay, from upper river bridge along river bank to head of Comox
Bay, side trips between Courtenay and Comox, taking in Park, much of farmed area around
Comox Village to Village dump).—Dec. 29, 1957; 8 a.m. to 3.30 p.m.; temp. 34° to 42°;
wind calm. Observers in 2 and 3 parties. Total party hours, approx 17 m.; car only from
different points; total party miles, approx. 12.

Common Loon, 7; Red-throated Loon, 3; Red-necked Grebe, 3; Horned Grebe,

4, Western Grebe, 3; Double-crested Cormorant, 1; Pelagic Cormorant, 1; Cormorant

1958 CuristMas Birp Census—1957 45

(sp. ?), 12; Great Blue Heron, 7; Mallard, est. 150+; Pintail, 1, Green-winged Teal,
27; Am. Widgeon, 250+; Greater Scaup, 200+; Common Goldeneye, 160; Bufflehead,
30; Oldsquaw, 2; White-winged Scoter, 450+; Surf Scoter, 1200+; Common Scoter,
9; Hooded Merganser, 1; Common Merganser, 4, Red-breasted Merganser, 2; Duck
(sp.?) 3000; Red-tailed Hawk, 2; Bald Eagle, 3; Ruffed Grouse, 2; Ring-necked
Pheasant, 30; Am. Coot, 75; Killdeer, 12; Black Turnstone, 80; Glaucous-winged Gull,
300; Herring Gull, 7; Mew Gull, 36; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Red-shafted Flicker, 15,
Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 5; Steller’s Jay,
15; Common Raven, 9; Common Crow, 1, Northwestern Crow, 130; Chestnut-backed
Chickadee, 81; Winter Wren, 20; Bewick’s Wren, 11; Am. Robin, 28; Varied Thrush,
2; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 31; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 2; Northern Shrike, 4,
Starling, 25; MacGillivray’s Warbler, 1, House Sparrow, 20; Brewer’s Blackbird, 400;
Purple Finch, 10; House Finch, 3; Pine Siskin, 165; Finch (sp.?), 15; Rufous-sided
Towhee, 30; Oregon Junco, 200; Fox Sparrow, 7; Song Sparrow, 52. Total, 60:
species; 7,360+ individuals. (Seen in area during count period: Barrow’s Goldeneye,
Peregrine Falcon, Common Snipe, Dunlin, Snowy Owl, and Golden-crowned
Sparrow).

D. Guthrie, J. and H. Haines, J. A. B. Paul, Theed Pearse (compiler).

Crescent Beach, B.C. (Coast and bush between Crescent Beach, Ocean Park and
White Rock; Nicomekl River at Elgin; fields and roads between Port Kells and Trans
Canada Highway).—Dec. 30, 1957; 7.45 a.m. to 3.30 p.m.; temp. 30° to 38°; wind NE, 10
m.p-h.; mostly overcast with fitful sunshine, visibility fair. 8 observers in + parties. Total
party hours, 13 (123 on foot, 2 by car); total party miles, 30 (20 on foot and bicycle, 10
by car).

Common Loon, 18; Red-necked Grebe, 3; Horned Grebe, 17; Eared Grebe, 2;
Western Grebe, 12; Cormorant, (sp.) 2; Great Blue Heron, 10; Brant, 18; Mallard, 3,
Pintail, 3; Greater Scaup, 39; Common Goldeneye, 9; Bufflehead, 28; Oldsquaw, 19;
White-winged Scoter, 250+; Surf Scoter, 125+; Common Scoter, 6, Ruddy Duck, 6;
Red-breasted Merganser, 17; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1; Marsh Hawk, 1; Sparrow
Hawk, 1; Am. Coot, 5; Killdeer, 11; Dunlin, 150; Glaucous-winged Gull, 230; Herring
Gull, 100; Mew Gull, 3; Belted Kingfisher, 1, Red-shafted Flicker, 5; Pileated Wood-
pecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Steller’s Jay, 2; Northwestern Crow, 67; Black-
capped Chickadee, 43; Winter Wren, 2; Bewick’s Wren, 1; Varied Thrush, 3, Golden-
crowned Kinglet, 7; House Sparrow, 24; Brewer’s Blackbird, 65, Purple Finch, 54;
Pine Siskin, 175; Rufous-sided Towhee, 18; Oregon Junco, 80; White-crowned
Sparrow, 7; Fox Sparrow, 1; Song Sparrow, 54. ‘Total, 48 species, 1,745+ individuals.
Raft of several thousand ducks out on Boundary Bay mostly mallard and pintail.
(Dec. 28, 5 Black Turnstone seen at Crescent Beach; Dec. 31, Ruffed Grouse seen at

Ocean Park).
H. N. Clarke, Rev. M. W. Holdom (compiler), Miss Elsie Osgood, Sister Theodora, Mrs. Kathleen

Munro, Tom Stevens, (Sir) John Simeon (Bt.), Richard Simeon, E. E. Woodford.

Penticton, B.C. (Route followed lower half mile of Trout Creek and adjacent beaches
on Okanagan Lake, thence south along west side of Okanagan Lake to Penticton and along
south shore to east side of lake; route then followed highway to Vassaux Lake via Kaleden
and old road overlooking Skaha Lake).—Dec. 28, 1957; 9.30 a.m. to 3.30 p.m.; temp. 35° to
45°; cloudy, sunny periods in a.m.; no snow; no ice on lakes. 2 observers together. Total
party miles, 34 (3 on foot, 31 by car); total party hours, 43 (23 on foot, 2 by car).

Horned Grebe, 2; Canada Goose, 60+; Mallard, 10; Redhead, 5; Canvasback, 6;
Bufflehead, 13, Hooded Merganser, 1; California Quail, 10; Am. Coot, 900+; Herring
Gull, 2; Red-shafted Flicker, 6, Lewis Woodpecker, 1, Downy Woodpecker, 1,
Black-billed Magpie, 3; Black-capped Chickadee, 6, Golden-crowned Kinglet, 2;
Northern Shrike, 1; English Sparrow, 25; Oregon Junco, 16, Song Sparrow, 3. Total,
20 species; 1,073 individuals.

S. R. Cannings, R. A. Cannings.

Vancouver, B.C. (73-mile radius centering on Broadway West and Granville Street,
including the City of Vancouver, North Vancouver, parts of the Municipalities of Burnaby,
West Vancouver and Richmond, part of Burrard Inlet and North Arm of the Fraser

46 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 72

River) Salt water 30%; shores 3%; marsh 3%; open fields 10%; built up areas 40%; city parks
7%; coniferous forests 7%).—Dec. 26, 1957; 7.45 a.m. to 5 p.m., temp. 42° to 47°; wind W 15

decreasing to 2 m.p.h.; sunny a.m.; light clouds forming late p.m. 37 observers in 13 parties.

Total party hours, 923 (673 on foot, 25 by car); total party miles, 872 (432 on foot, 44 by car).

Common Loon, 14; Arctic Loon, 55; Red-throated Loon, 16; Red-necked Grebe,

24; Horned Grebe, 179; Eared Grebe, 27; Western Grebe, 491; Pied-billed Grebe, 2;

Double-breasted Cormorant, 70; Pelagic Cormorant, 62; Great Blue Heron, 39;

Canada Goose, 31; Mallard, 706; Shoveler, 15; Pintail, 238; Green-winged Teal, 7;

Am. Widgeon, 270; Wood Duck, 14; Canvasback, 4, Greater Scaup, 2,942+; Lesser

Scaup, 5; Common Goldeneye, 271; Barrow’s Goldeneye, 637; Buflehead, 178; Old-

squaw, 16; Harlequin Duck, 13; White-winged Scoter, 295; Surf Scoter, 1,196,

Common Scoter, 188; Ruddy Duck, 42; Hooded Merganser, 19, Common Merganser,

5; Red-breasted Merganser; 390; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 5, Cooper’s Hawk, 2; Red-

tailed Hawk, 6; Bald Eagle, 7, Marsh Hawk, 10; Peregrine Falcon, 3; Sparrow Hawk,

3; Ring-necked Pheasant, 64; Am. Coot, 391; Killdeer, 191, Common Snipe, 17; Black

Turnstone, 131; Dunlin, 1,931+; Sanderling, 397, Glaucous-winged Gull, 15,231+,

Herring Gull, 370; Mew Gull, 5,380+; Bonaparte’s Gull, 380; Common Murre, 47,

Pigeon Guillemot, 36; Marbled Murrelet, 91; Ancient Murrelet, 2; Short-eared Owl,

- 13; Belted Kingfisher, 17; Red-shafted Flicker, 291; Pileated Woodpecker, 3, Yellow-
bellied Sapsucker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 2, Downy Woodpecker, 7, Steller’s Jay,

41, Common Raven, 7; Northwestern Crow, 480; Black-capped Chickadee, 391,
Chestnut-backed Chickadee, 211; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 18; Brown Creeper, 12;

Winter Wren, 31; Bewick’s Wren, 17; Long-billed Marsh Wren, 3, Am. Robin,
3,911+; Varied Thrush, 231; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 247; Ruby-crowned Kinglet,

193; Bohemian Waxwing, 42; Cedar Waxwing, 648, Northern Shrike, 12; Starling,

14,653+; Crested Mynah, 71; House Sparrow, 580; Western Meadowlark, 49, Red-

winged Blackbird, 161; Brewer’s Blackbird, 1,120; Orange-crowned Warbler, 2,

Evening Grosbeak, 411, Purple Finch, 632; House Finch, 296; Common Redpoll, 5;
Pine Siskin, 1,122+; Rufous-sided Towhee, 71; Slate-colored Junco, 14; Oregon Junco,
683, White-crowned Sparrow, 154; Golden-crowned Sparrow, 87; Fox Sparrow, 14;

Lincoln’s Sparrow, 2; Song Sparrow, 492. ‘otal, 99 species, 60,605+ individuals.

R. Drent, A. J. Erskine, F. J. Sandford, A. Muir, Violet Mackay, J. Ross Mackay, G. McKay, W. L.
Merilees, Bill Merilees, S. F. Bradley, Dorothy Bradley, Evelyn Wright, C. Wright, Col. Wm. Bird,
Gwen Wright, Rosamond Ross, R. Webber, H. Mulder, J. G. Sarles, E. Moodie, Sheila Buchanan,
Verna Newson, Hilda Hesse, W. H. Hesse, L. N. Precious, Margaret Mcfeat, Heather Leveson-Gower,
Inga Perkin, G. S. Stevens, Mrs. G. S. Stevens, Janis Stevens, Foote Waugh, Mary Alice Foote Waugh,
Noela Waugh, J. Bain, Mrs. J. Bain, Wm. M. Hughes (compiler).

Vernon, B.C. (North to Buckerfield’s Ranch; west to Okanagan Landing; south to
Rattlesnake Point (Kalamalka Lake); east to Coldstream Ranch).—Dec. 22, 1957; 8.30 a.m.
to 3.30 p.m.; temp. 28° to 38°; wind S, 5 to 15 m.p.h.; Okanagan and Kalamalka Lakes clear
of ice; Swan Lake mostly frozen over; one inch of snow. 20 observers in 4 parties. Total
party hours, 25, total party miles, 120 (25 on foot, 95 by car).

Common Loon, 2; Red-necked Grebe, 1; Horned Grebe, 2; Great Blue Heron, 8:
Mallard 116, Green-winged Teal, 2; Am. Widgeon, 97; Shoveler, 6, Redhead, 35;
Ring-necked Duck, 14; Lesser Scaup, 39; Common Goldeneye, 3; Barrow’s Golden-
eye, 4; Goldeneye sp., 8 (females or immature); Bufflehead, 8, Hooded Merganser, 3;
Common Merganser, 9; Goshawk, 1; Cooper’s Hawk, 1; Golden Eagle, 4; Ring-necked
Pheasant, 180, Gray Partridge, 31; California Quail, 15; Am. Coot, 87; Killdeer, 8;
Common Snipe, 9; Herring Gull, 2; Rock Dove, 40+; Mourning Dove, 2; Short-eared
Owl, 3; Belted Kingfisher, 2; Red-shafted Flicker, 27; Pileated Woodpecker, 2:
Hairy Woodpecker, 3; Downy Woodpecker, 6, Horned Lark, 11; Steller’s Jay, 5,
Black-billed Magpie, 109; Common Raven, 7; Clark’s Nutcracker, 2; Black-capped
Chickadee, 63; Mountain Chickadee, 11; Chestnut-backed Chickadee, 1; White-
breasted Nuthatch, 3; Pygmy Nuthatch, 20; Brown Creeper, 1; Am. Dipper, 2;
Winter Wren, 1; Am. Robin, 3; Townsend’s Solitaire, 2; Golden-crowned Kinglet,
11; Bohemian Waxwing, 307; Cedar Waxwing, 15; Northern Shrike, 12; Starling, 72;
House Sparrow, 450; Western Meadowlark, 103; Brewer’s Blackbird, 20; Evening
Grosbeak, 145, Cassin’s Finch, 15; Pine Grosbeak, 9; Hoary Redpoll, 10; Common

1958 Curistmas Birp Census—1957 47

Redpoll, 965; Pine Siskin, 84; Am. Goldfinch, 222; Slate-colored Junco, 2+; Oregon
Junco, 464; Tree Sparrow, 5; White-crowned Sparrow, 11, Song Sparrow, 47; Snow
Bunting, 1. Total, 70 species, 3,991 individuals. (Seen during period: Whistling
Swan, 2; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1; Gyrfalcon, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 2; Hawk Owl, 1;

Common Crow, 120; Redwinged Blackbird, 2; Rufous-sided Towhee, 2).

J. Arrand, Miss K. Bartholomew, J. B. Beddome, Mrs. K. Dobson, J. T. Fowle, J. Grant (compiler),
J. V. Holms, A. N. Humphreys, Rey. A. C. Mackie, J. Y. Obana, Mrs. T. Pickering, D. Quirk,

_ J. R. Quirk, D. A. Ross, I. Ross, Miss S. Ross, D. H. Ruppel, B. A. Sugden, E. Van Blaricom,
E. P. Venables.

Victoria, B.C. (Sea front, woods, bush land, cultivated fields, flooded fields and small
Jakes; Victoria and Saanich peninsula within 20-mile radius of center of town).—Dec. 28,
1957; 8.30 a.m. to 4.30 p.m., temp. 43°; wind SW, 20-50 m.p.h.; heavy squalls, rain and hail,
partly fine. 16 observers in 8 parties. Total party hours, 48 (38 on foot, 10 by car); total
party miles, 45 (15 on foot, 30 by car).

Common Loon, 23; Arctic Loon, 6; Red-throated Loon, 2; Red-necked Grebe, 20;
Horned Grebe, 184; Eared Grebe, 62; Western Grebe, 98; Pied-billed Grebe, 4;
Double-crested Cormorant, 5; Pelagic Cormorant, 173; Great Blue Heron, 9; Canada
Goose, 62; Mallard, 1,415; Pintail, 1,088, Green-winged Teal, 384; Am. Widgeon,
4,368; Shoveler, 1,680; Wood Duck, 3; Ring-necked Duck, 1; Canvasback, 73; Greater
Scaup, 676; Common Goldeneye, 88; Bufflehead, 600; Oldsquaw, 66; Harlequin Duck,
75, White-winged Scoter, 105; Surf Scoter, 86, Common Scoter, 8; Ruddy Duck, 210;
Hooded Merganser, 18; Common Merganser, 6, Red-breasted Merganser, 55; Sharp-
shinned Hawk, 2; Cooper’s Hawk, 2; Red-tailed Hawk, 3; Bald Eagle, 1; Sparrow
Hawk, 1; California Quail, 83; Ring-necked Pheasant, 39; Am. Coot, 342; Black
Oystercatcher, 37; Killdeer, 83; Black Turnstone, 135; Common Snipe, 6; Dunlin, 61;
Glaucous-winged Gull, 2,755; Herring Gull, 56, Mew Gull, 778; Pigeon Guillemot,
7; Marbled Murrelet, 10; Ancient Murrelet, 1, Rock Dove, 15; Belted Kingfisher, 4;
Red-shafted Flicker, 49; Pileated Woodpecker, 3; Lewis’s Woodpecker, 2; Hairy
Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Skylark, 116; Steller’s Jay, 37; Common
‘Raven, 4; Northwestern Crow, 824; Chestnut-backed Chickadee, 148; Common
Bushtit, 24; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 4; Brown Creeper, 14; Winter Wren, 7; Bewick’s
Wren, 14; Am. Robin, 1,119; Varied Thrush, 90; Hermit Thrush, 2; Golden-crowned
Kinglet, 80; Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 4; Water Pipit, 87; Cedar Waxwing, 47;
Northern Shrike, 1; House Sparrow, 137; Western Meadowlark, 51; Redwinged
Blackbird, 465, Brewer’s Blackbird, 566; Purple Finch, 61; House Finch, 61; Pine
Siskin, 223; Rufous-sided Towhee, 71; Oregon Junco, 447; White-crowned Sparrow,
6; Golden-crowned Sparrow, 82; Fox Sparrow, 19; Song Sparrow, 67. Total, 88
species; 21,010 individuals. (Seen within 24 hours of census date: Black-bellied
Plover, 25; Bonaparte’s Gull, 5; Rock Sandpiper, 12; Surfbird, 2; Lesser Yellowlegs,
1; Am. Goldfinch, 2). a

Mrs. H. W. S. Soulsby, Mrs. H. M. S. Bell, Miss E. K. Lemon, Mrs. G. J. Jackson, Mrs. Eleanore

McGavin, Miss M. C. Melbum, Miss Leila Roberts, Mrs. W. L. Taylor, Mrs. J. A. Sherman, Ray Beckett,
J. O. Clay (compiler), P. Symons, Ralph Fryer, A. R. Davidson, A. Poynter, H. Wotton.

CORRECTION TO 1956 CENSUS

In the report for Comox, B.C. (Can. Field Nat. 71:26. 1957) Eared Grebe should
tead Horned Grebe.

48 THe CanapiANn FieLtp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

FINANCIAL STATEMENT OF
THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, DEC. 2, 1957

CURRENT ACCOUNT

ASSETS LIABILITIES
Balance in Bank, Dec. 2/57...... $1,649.13 Audubon Screen Tours, guarantee. $ 750.00
Billswecetvablews sna ey ee 236.94 Cheques outstanding............ 79.70
Lodge, estimated value.......... 120200) 2 Balances (2 nv ee ee 1,176.37
$2,006.07 $2 , 006.07
RECEIPTS EXPENDITURES
Balance in Bank, Nov. 29/56.... $3,043.87 Can. Field Nat. (8 numbers)..... $4,038.45
Fees: DUS trations ee eee 709.45
Currentee hy eee $1,577.74 Separatesn che h nus 0. hey sree eee 444 .84
Advance........... 214.79 Editors’ honoraria.............. 300.00
IATREATS Hes eee 952.49 Business Manager’s honorarium. . 15.00
INSSOCIAter eee. 32.00 Postage and Stationery.......... 410.99
2,777.02 Extra cost Wilson Geology...... 1,087.20
Separates and illustrations....... 508.39 Excursions and Lectures Comm... 100.00
Single and Back Numbers....... 788.13 Newsletter (3 numbers)......... 97.62
Sale Wilson Geology............ i AZ0F30 = Bank discounters eee 36.19
Sale Macoun Biography......... 11.15 Foreign exchange............... 55.85
Donations ee eae ais ane le 25.00 Mliscellaneous.................. 84.32
From Publication Fund......... 300.00 Balance in Bank,
Niiscellaneousne ese ee 4.50 Deer 2 Silence ee $1, 649.13
Audubon Tours (net)............ 370.98 less o/s cheques...... 79.70
—_—— 1,569.43
$8,949.34 $8 949. 34
RESERVE FUND
ASSETS LIABILITIES
$3,000 Ontario Hydro 3% bonds,
Market value................ $2,605.00
13 shares Bell Telephone stock,
Miarketayaluice a iss osc 520.00 NIL
Balance in Bank, Dec. 2/57...... 175.33
$3, 300. 33
RECEIERS jaa EXPENDITURES
Balance in Bank, Nov. 29/56.... $ 134.75 Rent safety deposit box......... $ 5.00
Bankanterests)65 a ae eae 3.46 Purchase 2 shares Bell Telephone. 68.00
Bondhiniterestan yee wy ts de 90.00 Purchase 3 Rights Bell Telephone. 2.88
Dividend Bell Telephone........ 23.00 Balance in Bank, Dec. 2/57...... 175.33
$ 251.21 $ 251.21
PUBLICATIONS FUND
ASSETS LIABILITIES
$1,500 Ontario Hydro 3% bonds,
Marketcvalues S284... 05.2. $1,297.50
Balance in Bank, Dec. 2/57...... 152.41 NIL
$1,449.91
RECEIPTS EXPENDITURES
Balance in Bank, Nov. 29/56.... $ 398.75 To Current Account............ $ 300.0C
Bankointerests yy is ee 8.66
Bond interest os) 4y kee hee 45.00 Balance in Bank, Dec. 2/57...... 152.41
$ 452.41 $ 452.41
Audited and found correct.
Dec. 2, 1957. (Signed ) Ei FRANKTON (Signed) R. J. MOORE
. L. CONNERS Treasurer.

Sane

1958 Report oF Council, 1957 49

REPORT OF COUNCIL AT THE SEVENTY-NINTH
ANNUAL MEETING OF THE
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB,
DECEMBER 6, 1957

Since the last Annual Meeting there were four meetings of Council: December

13, 1956, at St. Patrick’s College, with 16 members present; February 7, 1957,

at the National Museum of Canada, with 16 members present; September 30,

1957, at the National Museum of Canada, with 16 members present, November

12, 1957, at the National Museum of Canada, with 17 members present.
Appointments were made for 1957 as follows:

Editor of the Canadian Field-Naturalist—Mr. R. A. Hamilton

Business Manager of the Canadian Field-Naturalist—Mr. W. J. Cody

Chairman of the Publications Committee—Dr. J. W. Groves

Chairman of the Excursions and Lectures Committee—Dr. Winston Sinclair

Chairman of the Reserve Fund Committee—Mr. Hoyes Lloyd

Chairman of the Special Lectures Committee—Dr. E. L. Bousfield

Chairman of the Membership Committee—Mr. W. J. Cody

Chairman of the Bird Census Committee—Dr. D. B. O. Savile

Chairman of the Macoun Field Club Committee—Dr. J. S. Bleakney

Chairman of the F.O.N. Affairs Committee—Mr. Rowley Frith

Representatives, Canadian Section, International Committee for Bird Preserva-

tion—Mr. W. E. Godfrey, Dr. D. A. Munro

REPORT OF THE PUBLICATIONS COMMITTEE
Since December 1, 1956, the following numbers of the Canadian Field-
Naturalist have been published: Vol. 69, No. 4; Vol. 70, Nos. 1-4; Vol. 71, Nos.
1-3. Vol. 71, No. 4 is expected to appear about the middle of December.
Papers, notes and reviews were distributed as follows:

Papers Notes Reviews

PNET OD OLOGY pete sMaesee Benen ee 2

| BOKER es A ec a a ee 6 1 3
SHON Sa ie i Nae ee 1 1
PACK CLO Oy Momminr tin Ae tase Sra lS 1 3 3
Nesta inv 00) iy pss ale SoS ase a NS NA 1 1 1
limrertebrate ZOolo pia wes = ay 3 5 3
INET geo 5 78 peste AAI daa ORR ee 6 6 4
Gob icraehnol pyre se ails ee pel es Nes VE A ba 1 35 13
Miscellaneous eon. oe er element e 5 2 11

This comprises a total of 453 pages exclusive of the index of Vol. 71, with
67 maps and illustrations. The account of the geology of the Ottawa District
was published as Vol. 70, No. 1. Large prepublication orders were received
from Carleton College and the Geological Survey. The cost of publication of
the 4000 copies printed has been covered by sales to date. It is planned to
canvass business firms to obtain advertising for aid in publication costs. Sales
of back numbers totaled $555.39, exclusive of sales of Vol. 70, No. 1.

REPORT OF THE EXCURSIONS AND LECTURES COMMITTEE
Business dealt with by the committee during the year included arrangement
of a program of outings, production of the Newsletter, the management of the

50 Tue CaNnaDIAN Fie_p-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Study Groups, arrangement of the Annual Dinner, and finances of the
committee.

Three excursions were held in May to the Lodge, Rockland, and Pakenham.
One trip was held in the fall, to the Lake Fortune Parkway. Four early morning
bird walks were conducted by the Bird Group in May.

The Annual Dinner at the Central Experimental Farm in April attracted a
large group of members and their friends. “The display there of the work of
the Macoun Field Club drew many favorable comments.

The Newsletter, edited by Mr. and Mrs. Kenneth Bowles, continues to
serve local members, with informal notes on natural history and news of Club
activities.

REPORT OF THE RESERVE FUND COMMITTEE
The only change reported for the year was the purchase of two additional
shares of Bell Telephone stock by the Treasurer upon authorization of the
Committee.

REPORT OF THE SPECIAL LECTURES COMMITTEE
Three Audubon Screen Tours completed the 1956-57 series:
January 26—Alberta, by Dick Bird.
February 23—Rocky Mountain Rambles, by Emerson Scott.
April 4—Kangaroo Continent, by Alfred M. Bailey.
The following lectures of the tenth season complete the program for 1957:
October 15—A Touch of the Tropics, by William H. Wagoner.
November 28—Ranch of the Purple Flowers, by Robert C. Hermes.

REPORT OF THE MEMBERSHIP COMMITTEE
The responsibility of this Committee is to seek new members and subscribers
to the Canadian Field-Naturalist from outside the Ottawa District. With
publication of the Naturalist now up to date, steps have been taken to build up a
file of names of naturalists to whom membership information might be sent for
use of the 1958 Committee. In October letters were sent to the Manitoba
Natural History Society, Saskatchewan Natural History Society and the
Federation of Ontario Naturalists asking for lists of members. A favorable
reply has already been received from Saskatchewan, and the F.O.N. has offered
to enclose an O.F.-N.C. brochure with their bulletin. “Three thousand of the
newly printed brochures have been sent to the F.O.N. headquarters, and two
thousand to other institutions.

REPORT OF THE BIRD CENSUS COMMITTEE
A very successful 1956 Christmas Bird Census was reported, 6879 individual
birds being counted, representing 33 species. The Christmas Bird Census for
all of Canada was published in Vol. 71, No. 1, of the Canadian Field-Naturalist.

REPORT OF THE MACOUN FIELD CLUB COMMITTEE

The Macoun Field Club is now in its ninth year, with sixty active members
distributed almost equally among the Junior, Intermediate and Senior Groups.
Weekly meetings were held at the National Museum on Tuesdays for the Seniors
and on Saturdays for the Juniors and Intermediates. As in previous years,
Saturday morning field hikes were held in the winter, spring and fall, and the
club members greatly appreciated the transportation and supervision provided
by O.F.-N.C. members and the National Museum.

In 1957, there were eighteen indoor meetings and seven hikes. On April
25 the children set up a display at the annual banquet of the O.F.-N.C. The

1958 Report oF Councit, 1957 51
annual Macoun Field Club birthday party was held on April 27. Badges were
presented to new members on this occasion and prizes awarded to the Junior
and Intermediate winners of the attendance and merit game. Parents and
other guests then viewed displays and enjoyed the birthday cake provided by
the girls in the Senior group. The club room has been renovated and the
library augmented by the purchase of new charts, books and leaflets. | Other
club activities included publication of two issues of the Little Bear, edited by
Mr. Herbert Groh, ushering by the Seniors at the Audubon Screen Tours, and
the election of new officers in October. The new presidents in the groups
are Hugh Scoggan for Juniors, John Scoggan for Intermediates, and Pierre
Taschereau for the Seniors.

The members are looking forward to a new series of interesting talks and
demonstrations and, in company with the Committee, wish to thank in particular
Mr. Herbert Groh, Mr. D. C. Maddox and Mr. High Thompson for invaluable

assistance at meetings and in other ways.

NOTICE OF MOTION
Notice of Motion having been given at the Council Meeting of September

30, it was moved and carried on division at the Council Meeting of November
12 that the active membership and subscription fees of the Ottawa Field-
Naturalists’ Club be increased from $3.00 to $4.00 per annum, effective in 1959,
and that the associate membership fee be increased from $1.00 to $2.00, effective
in 1959.
L. S. Russell, President

H. J. Scoggan, Secretary

A Flora of the Marshes of California

By Herpert L. Mason. Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1957. 878 p., illus.
$10.00.

Keeping abreast of the demands of ap-
plied biology for technical publications
in the cognate fields is a real challenge to
the pure scientist. As one of the world’s
foremost taxonomists, Professor Mason,
seeing the need for a precise work on
the botany of aquatic plants, has now pro-
vided a most complete and competent
guide for the particular use of experts in
wildlife management and conservation.

His book describes nearly a thousand
different species of marsh plants which,
for the purpose, are defined as all plants
growing in wet soil or in water. Species
of this ecological group are representa-
tive of almost all plant families, horse-
tails, cattails, pondweeds, arrowheads,
sedges, grasses, rushes, duckweeds, iris,
willows, polygonums, goosefoots, water-
lilies, buttercups and so on through the
System to the composites, beggar-ticks
and cockleburs. The main portion of the

REVIEWS

text is therefore taken up with the de-
tailed description of these selected repre-
sentatives of the great plant assemblages,
with keys for their identification, habitat
notes and pertinent citations. A short
introductory chapter and an illustrated
glossary complete the text.

Well over one third of the species are
illustrated in the 358 full-page drawings
which, one will quickly recognize, have
unusual botanical as well as artistic merit.
They are all line drawings, finely exe-
cuted and superbly reproduced, and show
a habit sketch of the whole plant with
enlarged detail of the critical parts of
leaves, flowers or fruits. The parts are
often repeated to show the degree of
variability found in nature. Seeds are
always shown because these are especially
important in the wild food aspects of
game management.

As might be expected in the prepara-
tion of a work of such magnitude, the
author has had the assistance of his
various students and associates at the
University of California in the construc-

52 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

tion of the drawings, in the preliminary
field work, and likely in assembling parts
of the text. The author has paid particu-
lar attention to nomenclature and matters
of classification. In doing so he has fol-
lowed a rather conservative line, pre-
ferring to side-step taxonomic issues,
pointing out rather the difficulties or dis-
crepancies in current concept or observa-
tion and referring the problems for fur-
ther study, a realistic attitude which
reflects systematic discretion and con-
sideration of his readers.

The terminology in descriptions and
keys is as simplified as it can be and still
is sufficiently precise to suit the require-
ments of the intended users. The draw-
ings, made for living material, reveal some
things not usually known to herbarium
workers, and depict the plants as the
field worker will encounter them. The
manual will have wide application far be-
yond the limits of California, and wildlife
biologists, botanists and serious natura-
lists everywhere will require it for ready
and frequent reference.

W. G. Dore

The Distribution of Minnesota Minnows
and Darters in Relation to Pleistocene
Glaciation

By James C. Unpernity. Minneapolis,

Museum of Natural History, University of

Minnesota, 1957. 45 p. (Occasional Papers,

No. 7).

Distribution of fish is not the result of
chance. The occurrence or absence of a
given species in a given drainage area
may be associated with many complex
and interrelated factors such as tolerance
of individuals of a species to the physico-
chemical characteristics of the environ-
ment, suitability of habitat for all phases
of fish life history and adaptability of
individuals to environment.

James C. Underhill discusses the dis-
tribution of two families of small fishes
in Minnesota waters. The occurrence of
forty-one species of minnows and fifteen
species of darters collected in Minnesota
has been plotted on maps and the distri-
bution discussed.

The author relates the distribution of
these fishes to Pleistocene glaciation as it
affected the three basins in Minnesota:
the Mississippi and Red rivers and Lake

Vol. 72

Superior drainage. Species are grouped
according to their time of arrival into the
three basins as dispersal routes opened to
fish and as suitable conditions were met
throughout the ages. Eighteen species of
minnows and darters are grouped to-
gether as early arrivals because they are
common to all basins. Most of these
species have a wide distribution range
north in Canadian waters. Underhill dis-
agrees with Isobel Radforth in explaining
the distribution of fish on the basis of
isotherms. Too little is known of the life
histories and specific requirements of fish
to enable an adequate discussion of eco-
logical factors as they may limit the dis-
tribution of fish. More basic research is
required on species of minnows and
darters, for example, in order to provide
a solution to such fundamental problems.
The author would have helped the
reader who might not be very familiar
with local geological events if he had in-
cluded maps of the areas of Minnesota
covered by the Mankato ice and Lake
Grantsburg, and by showing, for ex-
ampie, connections between rivers and
basins during late and postglacial times.
The thesis is well documented with a
list of more than seventy references. The
reading of this publication, free of typo-
graphical errors, is most interesting.
J. P. Currrier

The Warblers of North America
By Luptow Griscom, ALEXANDER SPRUNT,

Jr., and others. Il. by John Henry Dick.

New York, Devin-Adair Co., 1957. 356 p.

$15.00.

“This book undoubtedly fills a need in
the literature of ornithology, chiefly be-
cause the large Family of the American
Wood Warblers (Parulidae) still remains
a vast field for diligent and painstaking
research. To encourage such research a
practical way is, of course, to produce a
compilation, such as this one, of hitherto
known data, set forth with professional
as well as popular appeal and indicating
at the same time to the enterprising stu-
dent the yet undiscovered premises. To
this effect a number of our best known
ornithologists co-operated under the
editorship of Ludlow Griscom and
Alexander Sprunt, Jr., bringing about
this, on the whole, successful effort.

1958

The handsomely turned out volume
begins with a publisher’s preface which
explains, among other things, the dis-
crepancy that cannot escape notice be-
tween the title of the book and the one
on the jacket. Tribute is duly paid to all
the contributors, including those whose
names for unexplained reasons are
omitted from the list on the jacket.

Probably not without intention Alex-
ander F. Skutch’s fine article on the
Warbler Family in general introduces the
discussions. Here the accumulated know-
ledge of our perhaps most outstanding
and skillful observer of birds’ behavior
and breeding rhythms, provides us with
a resumé of the life history data of the
Wood Warblers. Later, when the reader
discovers the lack of these significant
facts, this chapter proves of much value
as one to which he can return for the
information he finds missing in so many
of the descriptions of the species.

Griscom’s discussions on the classifica-
tion of warblers and the techniques of
warbler study are highly informative and
delivered in a clear and readable style.
The amateur and the beginner students,
especially, benefit thereby since the
author, with his inimitable zest, wit, and
erudition, succeeds in gripping the reader
with these subjects, that can appear very
dry and remote, so that he vividly realizes
their importance and purposes. None
better than Mr. Griscom, who is rightly
considered America’s top field orni-
thologist, can propound the essentials of
good field work, although his techniques
for the most part limit themselves to the
matters of identification and the inter-
pretation of occurrence data. Character-
istic is his emphasis on bird counts,
precise daily and seasonal counts of
individuals carefully recorded, as the only
sure and revealing basis for research on
migration routes and distribution.

Two chapters are devoted to the songs
of the warblers. One of these, and I
think the most significant, is based on
W. W. H. Gunn’s and Donald J. Borror’s
remarkable work with tape recordings.
The songs of 39 species are here analyzed,
their duration given, and their notes
aptly rendered in phonetics.

An unusual and helpful chapter is on

REVIEWS 53

the foraging ranges. It gives a compara-
tive table of the species and their pre-
ferences for low, medium, and high levels
of the forest growth.

General notes, an explanation of the
Latin names, which is interesting to
many, field characters, short nesting data,
voice, food habits, and distribution, com-
pose the descriptions of each species. The
paucity of good life history data is, with
few exceptions, striking. Among the ex-
ceptions are all Walkinshaw’s contribu-
tions, especially that on the Prothono-
tary (Prontonotaria citrea) which should
have been the model of all the others,
those of Skutch, which with his fine
literary style and substance are hard to
match, Gunn’s on the Tennessee (V ermi-
vora peregrina), Griscom’s on the Ceru-
lean (Dendroica cerulea), Oberholser’s
on the Bay-breasted (Dendroica cas-
tanea), and Weston’s on the Pine
Warbler (Dendroica pinus). The assign-
ment of so many ‘northern’ warblers to
an author whose experience lies almost
entirely with the southern species is un-
fortunate. From this circumstance suffer
especially the Northern Waterthrush
(Seturus noveboracensis), the Black-
burnian (Dendroica fusca), and the
Magnolia (Dendroica magnolia) Warb-
lers. Most of what has been written on
many of these species is ignored. In
several cases, with the warblers nesting
in the author’s garden, one wonders why
not a single original item is produced on
the behavior and rhythms of these birds.
The use of range maps, adopted recently
by many works of this kind, is of value,
but those here reproduced would have
gained on the printing having been finer
and more precise. A few inaccuracies, as
noted, in the description of the ranges
and distribution are perhaps unavoidable.

Eleven chapters deal with the occur-
rence, migration, and the differences in
behavior of resident and migratory
warblers, in the regions north and south
of the United States. Despite a certain
amount of repetitiousness, these discus-
sions afford many pages of valuable and
interesting information. Such are the
sections on the influence of the evolution
of the land and its topography in relation
to the movements and distribution of the

54 THe CaANnapDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

birds, especially noteworthy in the ac-
counts about Panama and British Colum-
bia, and on the timing of the resident
tropical warblers’ breeding season which
is dependent upon the departure north-
wards of the migrants and the release of
larger food supplies caused by their
exodus, to mention but two examples. In
Clement’s and Gunn’s excellent conclud-
ing article on the warblers in Eastern
Canada we gain insight into the ecological
relationships between the warblers and
their plant world, their niche require-
ments, and how these affect their distri-
bution, a fascinating and all-important
aspect in the study of the birds. We are
told that on the estimated basis of each
acre being occupied by one pair of
warblers, representing the apparent den-
sity of their populations, the vast forested
land from the Manitoba border eastwards
harbor during the summer something like
350 million pairs.

AP

Vol. 72

Biographical notes on the contributors,
three appendices, and an index to the
warblers, conclude the volume. The lack
of a complete list of references is doubt-
less an editorial error and a rather sur-
prising omission in view of the book’s
pretention to being an authority. In some
places direct quotations are not even so
marked.

Lastly a word on the illustrations which
are generously scattered throughout the
volume. In his 45 pen drawings and 35
colored plates the young American
artist, John Henry Dick, shows fine
artistic sense and delicacy. Increased ex-
perience will enable him to infuse his
lovely birds with more life and move-

ment, an animation that would have en-

livened many of those exquisite scenes
against which he chose to create them.

LouIsE DE, KirtLinE LAWRENCE

XY

Important to Every Field Naturalist

New Books or New Editions

A GENERAL TEXTBOOK OF ENTOMOLOGY

By A. D. Imms.
account of entomology available.
incorporate advances of recent years.

The 9th edition, revised and reset, of the most useful general
Much of it has been entirely rewritten so as to
With over 600 illustrations.

$15.00

ADAPTIVE COLORATION IN ANIMALS

By Hugh B. Cott.

“Perhaps the most satisfactory book yet written on adaptation

. .in many respects the last word on the subject.”—Dr. Julian S. Huxley, in the

Introduction.

Illustrated with remarkable photographs.

$15.00

SWIFTS IN A TOWER

By David Lack. Describes the activities of a colony of swifts in an Oxford tower.
Glass-backed nesting boxes were substituted for the ventilators in which they were

nesting. They could be watched from only a few inches.

book. $4.25

A truly remarkable

THE RYERSON PRESS

299 QUEEN STREET WEST, TORONTO 2B, ONTARIO, CANADA

eee

$ 1 Columbia Bird and Mammal
>. Soeiety —

mt, M. D. F. Upvarpy; Seeeing: M.
‘Myres, Dept. of Zoology, University of
olumbia, Vancouver 8, B.C.-

Edmonton Bird Club

aL; Audubon Representative, R. Heatu;
ae ae) ne G. Batt.

St, ee Ont.; Mieration ‘Secretary,

wt “Nova Scotia Bird Society |
dent, GR. KK: ALLEN;
RISON F. Lewis; Secretary-Treasurer, Carr,

eee paper measuring 8% by 11 inches.
All text matter, including quotations, foot-
notes, tables, literature references, and legends for
figures should be double-spaced. Only those words
m ant to appear in italics should be underlined.

ivery | sheet of the manuscript should be numbered.

a

ce matter, er Pa fellow the rules in
TTatee _ International Code for the eer of

SA eel Z85-1943 Abbreviations for
Sciemific and Engineering Terms or the ernie

ae in adie numerals. Tables and legends for
Cea should be

_ AFFILIATED

628 Fraser St.,

de nt, A. ALLAN; Vice-President, W.R. Sart; —
-Treasurer, W. Gok: ayiceu: Field Secre- is

Leacu, 376 Platts Lane, SD) 35 Bondar Ont. o"

Vice-President, Dr.

ts Mostann, c/o Nova Scotia Museum oh

is are requested to use at least one given

Websters New International eee is the

placed after the list of ©

SOCIETIES

‘Provancher Society of Natural History
of Canada
"President, J. Kennepy Hux; First Vice-President,
FRANCOIS Hamer: Second Vice-President, Ronarp
E. Bran; Secretary -Treasurer, Gzorces A. LECLERC,
Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Goniety for the
Protection of Birds
President, J. L. Van Camp; Vice-Presidents,
iL: DELAFIELD, Miss R. B. BLaNcHAaRp; Treasurer,
Miss G. E. Hrsparp; Secretary, Miss Ruts S.
Axssott, Senneville, R.R. 1, Ste. Anne de Bellevue,
Que.; Librarian, Mrs. P. H. pu Boutay.

_ Toronto F ield Naturalists’ Club
President, Dr. Water Towet.; Vice-President,
Frep BopswortH;, Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. J. B.

Stewart, 21 Millwood Road, Toronto 7, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society
Honorary President, N. .A. M. MacKenzir; Past
President, A. R. Wootton; President, J. J. Prom-
MER; Vice-President, FRank Sanrorp; Honorary
Secretary, J. Y. Nemp; Recording Secretary, Miss

_ Erner Fuerer; Program Secretary, Joun GarvNER;

Honorary Treasurer, FRANK SANFORD; Librarian,
Mrs. S. F. Brapiey; Editor of Bulletin, C.. B. W.
Rocers.

“ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

Illustrations —

All figures, fartediae each figure of the tee
should be numbered consecutively in arabic
numerals. The author’s name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower
left corner of the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated

_ in the figure.

Line drawings should be ee with India ink

on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or

blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines

' that are to appear in the reproduction should be
_ ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be

lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (4 13/16 by 7 3/4 inches)
but the height should be adjusted to allow for the
legend.

Reprints
Reprints, with or without covers, may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form which

__ is attached to the galley proofs.

Volume
Volume
- Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
~ Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume
Volume

Volume

21
22
23
24:
25
26

(1889)
(1890)
(1891)
(1892)

(1893)

(1894)
(1895)
(1896)
(1897)
(1898)
(1899)

2 (1900)

(1908)

(1909)

(1910)

Numbers
Numbers
Numbers
Numbers

Numbers

- Numbers

Numbers

Numbers

Numbers

Numbers

Numbers

Numbers

Number

Numbers

Number

The Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club has for sale... .

THE CANADIAN ENTOMOLOGIST

1-12
1-2, 4-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12

Ll

1-12.

Weld
1-2, 4, 6-12
11

7-8
le

Issues are unbound and in fair condition...

Address enquiries to...

W. J. Cody, Business Manager

The Canadian Field-Naturalist

Science Service Building, Ottawa, Ontario

2 E. L. BOUSFIELD | a5)

55-118 a Ottawa, April-June 1958

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

Founpep IN 1879

The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of nature.
_ encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observation
all branches of natural history. The patron is His Excellency, the Right Honorable V
cent Massey, C.H., Governor General of Canada. The club is a corporate member
the Federation of Ontario Naturalists. | Beat ie

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

ete S. Russeti, President, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario
Epwarp L, BousFrexp, First Vice-President

J. SHERMAN BrLEAKNEY, Second Vice-President y !
Raymonp J. Moore, Treasurer, Science Service Building, Ottawa, Oneines

A. W. F. BaNrieLp, Secretary, National Museum . Canada, Ottawa, Ontario
I. L. Conners, C. FRANKTON, Auditors

Mrs. Joon W. Arnotp, Miss ANNE BANNING, Mass Anna Brown, Miss Cuartortml
Ditt, Mrs. Joun HAawkesprince, Miss VIoLtEt Humenriss, Miss Pautine SNURE, Miss
Mary Sruart, THE REVEREND F. E. Banim, Messrs. R. M, ANDERSON, J. W. Arno i
W. K. W. Batpwin, D. R. Beckett, B. Borvin, A. E. Boureuienon, K. Bows, ke
Cameron, W. J. Copy, Teds: Conners, Woe Dorg, C. FRANKTON, R. Frirn, J.
Gittetr, W. E. Goprrry, H. Grou, J. W. Groves, R. A. Hamirron, W. I. rtm
W. H. Lanceney, H. Lion, W. W. Mar, H. Mansuart, D. A. Munro, A. E. Pors
P. A. Ruppext, D. B. O. Savite i Bf SCbGGAN, G. W. SINCLAIR, V. E. ES Beas

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST |

Science Service Building, Ottawa, Ontario
Rosert A. Hamiton, Editor W. J. Copy, Business Mana,
Associate Editors: F. J. Aucock (Geology), Joun W. Arnotp (Entomology), W. A. B
(Paleontology), J. SHERMAN Bieakney (Herpetology), Austin W. CAMERON (Mam
malogy), Wittiam G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymonp Re ee W. Eart Goprre’
(Onmnology). A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), A. LaRocque (Conchology).
The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Naturali
Club with the assistance of affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manuscri
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the m
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertisin
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTION:
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879, 1886, and the OTTA
NATURALIST, 1886-1919, are obtainable from the business manager.

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION |

The annual membership fee of $3.00 covers subscription to the journal. Institutio
however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current numb
of regular issues are ninety cents. Money orders should be made payable to the Otta
Field-Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of change of address sho
also be sent to the treasurer. 3

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario

The Canadian Field-Naturalis

VoLuME 72 APRIL-JUNE 1958 Numper 2

“~ FRESH-WATER AMPHIPOD CRUSTACEANS OF
GLACIATED NORTH AMERICA

EE. L. BousFieELp
National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

THE present account treats systematically 30 species and subspecies of amphipo-
dous crustaceans from epigean fresh waters of Canada and contiguous areas of
the United States that have been exposed to Pleistocene glaciation*. “Twenty-
two of these are herewith recorded from Canada of which eleven (Pontoporeia
affinis Lindstr., Gammarus fasciatus Say, G. duebeni Lillj., G. lacustris Sars,
G. |. limnaeus Smith, Crangonyx gracilis Smith, Anisogammarus ramellus
(Weckel), A. confervicolus (Stimpson), A. locustoides (Brandt), Hyalella
azteca (Sauss.) and Corophium spinicorne (Stimpson) ) were previously known,
three (Gammarus tigrinus Sexton, Crangonyx richmondensis Ellis and C. r.
occidentalis H. & H.) are new to the region, and eight (Paramoera columbiana,
P. carlottensis, Gammarus pseudolimnaeus, Crangonyx rivularis, C. setodactylus,
C. minor, C. pseudogracilis, and C. richmondensis laurentianus) are new to
science. The genus Paramoera and family Pontogeniidae are new to the fresh
waters of North America.

The pertinent literature dates from 1818 when Thomas Say described
Gammarus fasciatus, G. minus, and “Ampithoe dentata” from fresh waters of
eastern United States. Further serious work was not attempted until Smith
(1871 and following) described Gammarus limnaeus, Crangonyx gracilis, and
Hyalella dentata from the Great Lakes and Rocky Mountain regions. Weckel’s
comprehensive treatment of North American species (1907) included redescrip-
tions of poorly known species and the addition of Anisogammarus ramellus to
the epigean or surface-water forms. The records of Huntsman (1915) and
Johansen (1920 and following) extended considerably the ranges of amphipods
in fresh waters of Canada. Major contributions were made by Hubricht and
Mackin (1940) with the description of Gammarus troglophilus, G. acheron-
dytes, Crangonyx forbesi, C. obliquus, and C. shoemakeri; by Hubricht (1943)
with the addition of Crangonyx anomalus and a number of new subterranean
species; and by Shoemaker (1942) with keys to the families, subfamilies, genera,
and subgeneric groups, and detailed descriptions of new and _ little-known
subterranean forms. hese and a number of lesser publications have contri-
buted much to our knowledge of the taxonomy, general biology, and economic
importance of the North American species, all of which have been summarized
most usefully in Pennak (1953).

*Exclusive of obligate-subterranean forms which, almost without exception, occur south of the
study region.

Mailing date of this number: 30 May 1958
55
CORRECTION

The illustration on page 101 goes with the legend on page 104. The illustration on page 104
should appear on page 101.

56 Tue CAnaDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Despite these notable contributions, knowledge of the group is far from
complete. The present investigation was necessitated primarily by the accumu-
lation of large collections of unstudied material and the new records, new forms,
and range extensions contained therein. Furthermore, recent advances in
amphipod systematics emphasizing the diagnostic importance of spines and
setae (namely, the European group of Bazikalova, 1945; Segerstrale, 1947;
Gurjanova, 1951; Kinne, 1954; Carausu, 1943; and others) have made necessary
the re-examination and redescription of type and topotype material of earlier
species, and a re-appraisal of the North American literature. The animals are
generally regarded as taxonomically difficult; the genitalia are not of systematic
significance, or if so, not readily utilized, and reliance must be placed on
somewhat obscure and more variable characters. The high degree of
variability between individuals and between successive instars, the pronounced
sexual dimorphism, and the overlapping of ranges, both ecologically and
geographically, tend to mask the certain separation of closely related species.
The writer has presently endeavored to provide bases for the recognition of
genetically distinct populations in the group. Further taxonomical refinements
comparable to those presently accepted in decapod crustaceology and orni-
thology should provide a still more realistic approach to this end.

With respect to probable origin, the North American fresh-water amphipod
fauna may be classified in two main groups: (1) those of ancient fresh-water
lineage, having no morphologically close marine relatives, and (2) those of
relatively recent marine origin. The first (and largest) group contains the
Crangonyx section of Gammaridae, represented in epigean waters by the
primarily American-endemic genus Crangonyx and the essentially Palaearctic
genus Synurella, and in subterranean waters by an even larger number of
American-endemic genera and species. ‘This group occurs mainly in the east-
central United States. Parts of this region have evidently not been glaciated
nor inundated by the sea since the Palaeozoic era and are today characterized by
well-developed underground drainage systems. During the Mesozoic and most
of the Cenozoic, many of the Crangonyx group were probably distributed
throughout the region that is now Canada, at least in its southern portions.
However, they would have been obliterated or forced southwards by the
destruction of surface and subsurface drainage systems during Pleistocene
glaciation (see Hitchcock, 1949). In recent times, several of the hardier
surface-water forms have followed the retreating glacier northwards, some
apparently to the limit of hard-water drainage basins, high water tables, and/or

rolonged winter freezing, but a few have invaded the soft-water Precambrian
Shield and boreal forest regions. A small number of the Crangonyx group
have been isolated from the main group on the Pacific slope by the locally
glaciated and ecologically unsuitable watersheds of the Rocky Mountains, and
by the arid-climate and seasonal extremes of temperature of the midwestern
plains. The Eurasian counterpart of Crangonyx would appear to be the large
Palaearctic genus Niphargus (for distribution maps, etc., see Carausu, 1943).

The marine-derived group is further separable into species which are able
to tolerate salt and brackish water and are closely related to modern marine

1958 BousFiELD: FResH-WatTeR AMPHIPODS 57

species, and those which are typically unable to tolerate salt water but have
close affinities with littoral marine forms at the generic and subgeneric level.
The first group is represented on the Pacific coast by species of Anisogammarus
(Eogammarus), Paramoera, and Corophium spinicorne; in the subarctic-boreal
region by Pontoporeia affinis,; and on the Atlantic coast by the Gammarus
tigrinus — G. fasciatus complex. The second subgroup includes the Holarctic
Rivulogammarus complex (of which only G. duebeni is euryhaline) and the
neotropical genus Hyalella which may have become ecologically separated from
its marine-littoral relatives (Hyale, Allorchestes) as early as the Mesozoic.

The relationship between body form and function in fresh-water amphipods
would provide an interesting field of investigation and a possible guide to
evolutionary relationships. For instance, the presence of sternal gills, the
lengthening of peraeopod 4, and partial reduction of the pleopods in Crangony«x
are to be expected in animals that have long frequented oxygen-deficient
subterranean waters, that crawl about upright on or in the substratum, and are
feeble swimmers. The pleopods, uropods, and telson of Gammarus are best
developed in the lotic-water species, which are the more active swimmers,
whereas the lentic-water forms, ‘sidling’ about on the substratum, have more
pronounced dorsal abdominal spine groups and generally richer armature of
the peraeopods. Hyalella swims rapidly with its powerfully developed
pleopods; yet its peculiar mouthparts, brood plates, uropods, and telson, and
ability to walk upright in air indicate a semiterrestrial ancestry.

North American fresh-water amphipods are essentially cold-stenothermal,
both vegetatively and reproductively. The Crangonyx group, Rivulogam-
marus, Anisogammarus, Paramoera and Pontoporeia, live mainly in springs,
streams, cave streams, lakes, and ponds that are cool to cold in summer, that
breed in the winter and spring when water temperatures are low (5-15°C),
and that normally produce only one brood per year. On the other hand, the
American-Atlantic Gammarus tigrinus and G. fasciatus, the neotropical
Hyalella, a very few of Crangonyx, and Corophium spinicorne breed in the late
spring and summer, typically produce several broods per year, and. are
apparently limited northward by low summer water temperatures.

The preparation of this report has required the help of many scientific
institutions and interested persons. For supplying material used in this study
the writer is particularly grateful to officers of the Conservation Branch of the
Ontario Department of Planning and Development, and the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology and Palaeontology, Toronto, Ontario, and the Pacific
Biological Station, Nanaimo, B.C. Valuable material and ecological informa-
tion have been provided by Dr. D. S. Rawson and Mr. M. Atton, University
of Saskatchewan; Dr. and Mrs. G. Clifford Carl, Victoria, B.C.; Dr. F. P. Ide,
and Mr. J. B. Sprague, University of Toronto; Mr. Leslie Hubricht, Louisville,
Ky.; Miss Catherine Boll, University of Missouri, Dr. J. S. Bleakney and Mr.
W. Earl Godfrey, National Museum of Canada, Mr. H. Schultz, Canadian
Wildlife Service, and Mr. Eric L. Mills, Ottawa; Mr. Pierre Brunel, Grande
Riviere, Que.; Mr. H. J. Squires, St. John’s, Nfld., and many others whose
contributions appear in the station lists of material. Finally, the writer wishes
to acknowledge the generous assistance with critical material and sources of

58

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

information provided by Mr. C. R. Shoemaker, United States National Museum,
Washington, D.C.

KEY TO SPECIES (partly after Shoemaker, 1942)

Body dorso-ventrally ee coxal plates 1-4 very shallow, 4th not emarginate
behind; gnathopod 2 simple; animal domicolous —_________ COROPHIIDAE
Segments of urosome separate; antenna 2, segment 4 alike in male and female
A i A I cd co Aa ae Ne OA OBR Corophium spinicorne Stimpson (p. 111)
Body laterally compressed; coxal plates deeper than wide, 4th excavate behind;
guathopod 2 subchelate; nondomicolousS 2 —————————EE—EEEE 2

. Antenna 1, accessory flagellum lacking, mandible without palp; maxilla 1, palp

vestigial, minutely two-jointed, uropod 3 uniramous or minutely biramous

i Seeds a eee Nc oI ORAS UN ea a i ie oe TALITRIDAE
Telson entire; antenna 1 longer than peduncle oF antenna 2; pleon segments 1 & 2

dorsally carinate; basos of peraeopod 5 serrate posteriorly, that of 3 & 4

STU Gls sent eR eS tet ee se re AE NE Hyalella azteca (Saussure) (p. 109)
Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum (may be very minute or scalelike),; mandible

with palp; maxilla 1 with normal two-jointed palp; uropod 3 typically biramous,

telsonpvariously..cleft: or entire = 5080 2 ie Ne a 3

. Interantennal lobe of head acutely produced anteriorly; peraeopods 3-5 unlike in

size and structure, 4th longest, basal joint of 5th greatly expanded; gnathopods
unlike esmallss typically: subchelatesasaee eae HAUSTORIIDAE
Antenna 1 not geniculate; uropod 3, outer ramus one-segmented; gnathopod 2
weakly subchelate; abdomen finely hirsute, not dorsally carinate
DEE Ae Raa GENES CeaaheY ae aeneu nutage sia eve) a souran we ieg sre Pontoporeia affinis Lind. (p. 61)
Interantennal lobe broad, anterior margin perpendicular or slightly oblique,
peraeopods 3-5 alike in structure but differing in length, gnathopods alike,
subchelate; second pair/usually larger eee 4

Accessory flagellum more or less well-developed, at least two-jointed, inferior
antennal sinus (when present) broadly incised; uropod 3, rami usually not lance-
olate, inner ramus shorter; telson variously cleft or entire _.GAMMARIDAE 6

Accessory flagellum one-jointed, scalelike, or lacking; inferior antennal sinus sharply
incised; uropod 3, rami lanceolate, subequal; telson partly cleft == ____

DIE ASD ANS) Se ib bee dA VS ae AUN NV ce PONTOGENIIDAE
Gnathopods subchelate, segments 5 & 6 not markedly elongate or linear, accessory
flagellum) one-jomted,) blunt-conica SEE Paramoera Miers 5
Gnathopods powerful and similar in both sexes; uropod 3 without lateral plumose
SOC ee eae cA ot BA Fea A GO ASIN Des COM DE AL ALOR P. carlottensis n. sp. (p. 64)
Gnathopods moderate, unlike in male and female; uropod 3, rami with lateral
joliumonOS NemaVe, (ojos (Orel Miouaveve Sone oo P. columbiana n. sp. (p. 62)

Antenna 1, accessory flagellum of 2-7 distinct segments; head with distinct inferior
antennal sinus; lower lip deep, inner lobes weak or lacking; maxilla 1, outer plate
normally with 11 apical pectinate spine teeth, peraeopods 4 & 5 subequal,
urosome segments dorsally spinose; without sternal gills, male typically larger
tchariherivalleys WC i eG) Ne MO ey IA asi Ss ali aoc hs Naren as ee Gammarus section 7

Antenna 1, accessory flagellum of one distinct segment and one or more minute
terminal joints, head without inferior antennal sinus; lower lip broad, inner lobes
usually distinct; maxilla 1, outer plate typically with 7 apical pectinate spine
teeth, peraeopod 4 longer than 5; urosome segments dorsally smooth or nearly so;
sternal gills present; female typically the larger .__ Crangonyx section 18

. Gnathopod 1 larger than gnathopod 2 in male; palm slightly oblique and armed

throughout with numerous blunt peglike teeth; coxal gills with cylindrical
appendages (accessory gills); uropod 3, inner ramus very small; urosome seg-
MENte | MOL carinate me OLsalllly sane Mayenne Anisogammarus (Eogammarus) 8

1958 BousFieLp: FReEsH-W ATER AMPHIPODS 59

10.

11.

12"

13.

14.

15.

Gnathopod 1 smaller than gnathopod 2, palm usually very oblique, with one or two
spine teeth at most; coxal gills without cylindrical appendages; uropod 3, inner
ramus typically more than half the length of the outer__Gamzmarus (sens. lat.) 10

. Antenna 1, peduncular segment 1 with 4-6 ventral (posterior) groups of setae;

median dorsal abdominal spines short, 4 groups on abd. segment 5; uropod 3,
terminal segment of outer ramus minute —-___ A. locustoides (Brandt) (p. 86)
Antenna 1, peduncular segment 1 with 1-2 ventral groups of setae; median dorsal
abdominal spines moderately long, 2 groups on abd. segment 5; uropod 3,
FeEMnalesesinent of Outer ramus CONnspicuONs= = se 9
Median dorsal abdominal spines in groups of 3-4, dorsal posterior margin of
abdominal segment 3 without setae or spines; male with calceoli_________
a NOME EE Seles EN (PSSA Sa ae A. confervicolus (Stimps) (p. 86)
Median dorsal abdominal spines singly inserted or paired; dorsal posterior margin of
abdominal segment 3 with longish setae (occasionally also paired spines); male

without calceoli on antenna 2 —. A. ramellus (Weckel) (p. 84)
Interantennal lobe of head with sharply defined upper angle and rounded, oblique
anterior margin forming a shallow lateral sinus. ___. Gammarus (Gammarus)

Coxal plate 1 with 3-6 long antero-ventral setae; peraeopods 4 & 5, hind lobe of basos
small or lacking, when present armed with stout spines and setae, antenna 2
generally setose, flagellum without calceoli in the male 11

Interantennal lobe of head, anterior margin nearly perpendicular, upper and lower
margins well defined, anterior angles usually rounded, lateral sinus deep; hind
lobe of peraeopods 4 & 5 free, without strong spines, male typically with calceoli
COMM ATL CT TN Alp 2s NSS eI Gammarus (Rivulogammarus) 12

Antenna 1, ventral margin of peduncular segment 2 with one prominent group of
setae and one or two small accessory setae; antennae 2 and peraeopods in male
without fine curled setae; urosome segments somewhat dorsally ‘humped,’
SIE OLOUPS) PLOMIME Mite we ee Sa ea ee G. fasciatus Say (p. 69)

Antenna 1, peduncular segment 2 with 2-4 equally strong median ventral groups of
setae; antenna 2 and peraeopods in male with numerous fine curled setae, uro-
some segments not ‘humped’, spines relatively small G. tigrinus Sexton (p. 66)

Peduncular segment 2 of antenna 1, ventral margin with 2-5 distinct groups of setae
(in addition to terminal group); coxal plates 1 & 2, antero-ventral margins with

DEA eeS OTL se bale remanent Dt Pe UO aerate ees dC ee 13
Peduncular segment 2, ventral margin with 1 (rarely 2) distinct groups of setae; coxal
plates 1 & 2, antero-ventral margins with 1-2 short setae...» 15

Antenna 2, flagellum without calceoli in male, ultimate segment of peduncle much
longer than penultimate; uropod 3, inner ramus more than three-fourths the
outer; eyes small, weakly pigmented G. acherondytes H. & M. (p. 73)

Antenna 2, flagellum normally with calceoli in the male; ultimate and penultimate
segments of peduncle subequal; uropod 3, inner ramus less than three-fourths
Enevotiter:seyes large. neniformydeeplys pigmented m5 y= es eas Se 14

Peduncular segment 1 of antenna 1, ventral margin armed distally with 2-3 groups
of setae, peracopod 4 & 5, segments 4 & 5 with groups of numerous long simple
setae among spine clusters, anteriorly and posteriorly G. duebeni Lill}. (p. 72)

Peduncular segment 1, ventral margin distally with one group of setae; peraeopods
4 & 5, segments 4 & 5 with few simple setae among spine clusters, anteriorly
Ors ye acre RRA oe Ui Soh ose Hew aN oye ee ee G. minus Say (p. 72)

Peraeopod 5, basos narrow, posterior margin nearly straight, lined with a few short
setae, uropod 3, outer ramus long and slender, tapering throughout, terminal
segment with plumose setae on lateral margins; urosome segment 3 typically
with one or both median dorsal spines lacking (replaced by fine setae)...
Berle eae nah ens AEs TYP ase labo eb EEN Mahal NOD don dA A G. lacustris Sars 16

Peraeopod 5, basos expanded, posterior margin convex proximally, lined with
numerous longish setae; uropod 3, outer ramus relatively broad, tapering near
apex, terminal segment short, without lateral setae; median dorsal spines on
jWWAOOSNOCE GY AUS MI AS SEES OS LS 2 OE fol Re Oe ag WR Oey Aes SAY | Ue lk URC en Ua ON 17

60

16.

Wie

18.

19.

20.

21:

22.

23.

24.

25.

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Lateral corners of abdominal side plates 2 & 3 acute, produced posteriorly, lower
margin armed with groups of longish setae, eyes subreniform, deeper than
broad; dorsal abdominal spines totaling 14-24 —_____ G. 1. limnaeus Smith (p. 81)

Lateral corners of abdominal side plates 2 & 3 weakly acute, not produced posteriorly,
lower margin with singly inserted setae and a few short spines; eyes subrotund,
separated from anterior margin of head by nearly their width, dorsal abdominal
Spines:totalime: 1 O514 aiccus 2s ee pet a ee G. 1. lacustris Sars (p. 80)

Eye small to median, subovate;, antennae long and slender, rather setose, peraeopods
4 & 5, inner face of basos with a few setae, segments 4-6 with numerous long
Nene cinons Sole Clee a ee G. troglophilus H. & M. (p. 78)

Eyes medium large, reniform; antennae normal in length and setation; peraeopods
4 & 5, inner face of basos with many setae singly or in groups; segments 4-6
with: only a few short setae’ among spine (clusters. a HE
ROE Eat Sane aM elon ci AUP as SE (oe Cuan) cate Upe EUW MEU, G. pseudolimnaeus n. sp. (p. 74)

Eyes normally present and pigmented; if absent or unpigmented, uropod 3 biramous
and telson cleft (both sexes); antenna 2 armed with calceoli in male. 19

Eyes absent; antenna 2 in male without calceoli; other characters not combined
Sang prepa ADA, RI SeGT ES ete) Se ea eae 2 obligate-subterrancansgenenas

Uropod 3 uniramous, ramus not longer than peduncle; urosome coalesced__Synurellat
Uropod 3 unequally biramous, outer ramus longer than peduncle, urosome segments

HE Tee sss A MN AU eee ge et PN a Rl eI Crangonyx (sens. lat.) 20
Eyes normally developed, darkly pigmented... epigean species 21
Eyes reduced to a few pigmented facets or absent_.____ subterranean species?

Propodus of gnathopod 2, palmar margin very oblique, posterior margin less than

half the anterior margin; outer margin of dactyl with three or more sensory setae 22
Propodus of gnathopod 2, palmar margin not unusually oblique, posterior margin half

or more than half the length of the anterior margin; outer margin of dactyl

armed with one, sometimes two median sensory setae. 23
Propodus of gnathopod 2, superior lateral setae singly inserted, basal segments of

peraeopods 3-5 deeply serrated posteriorly, telson much longer than broad,

ee ply Ale tn ae aE sci Sateen Le ees eee an C. serratus (Embody) (p. 90)
Superior lateral setae inserted in groups of two or more; basal segments of peraeopods

3-5 not deeply serrated; telson short, shallowly cleft...C. obliquus (H. & M. (p. 89)
Propodus of gnathopod 2, superior lateral setae in transverse groups of three or more 24
Superior lateral setae singly or occasionally doubly inserted = __ Bates a 6)
Uropod 3, outer ramus slender, length about four times the width; abd. side plate 2,

lateral corner strongly produced posteriorly, maxilla 2, facial row of setae of

imulem, PlatewneatlyaOWSOlete: sass seamen wee es C. richmondensis Ellis
(C. r. richmondensis Ellis—p. 90) (C. r. laurentianus n. subsp.—p. 94;

C. r. occidentalis H. & H.—p. 91).
Uropod 3, outer ramus stout, length less than three times the width, abd. side plate

2, lateral corner acute but not strongly produced; maxilla 2, facial row of setae

of inner plate well developed: =. fees iain 25
Telson cleft about half way to base, each lobe with 5-6 apical spines; basos of

peraeopods 3-5 considerably expanded, posterior border with numerous minute

serrations; males larger than females i C. anomalus Hubricht (p. 87)
Telson shallowly cleft, each lobe with 3-4 apical spines; basos of peraeopods 3-5

not unusually expanded, serrations normal; males smaller —
BSL EST oI 0) TING RES SA eet AE Ea) C. forbesi (H. & M.) (p. 87)

*®About 25 known continental N. American species, in six somewhat overlapping genera, including

Allocrangonyx Schellenberg, Apocrangonyx Stebbing, Bactrurus W. P. Hay, Stygobromus Cope, Stygonectes
W. P. Hay, and Synpleonia Creaser. (Keys and descriptions in Shoemaker, 1942, and Hubricht, 1948).

+Essentially Eurasian (see Carausu, et al., 1955) but represented in N. America by S. johanseni Shoe-

maker 1920 (Alaska); S. bifurca (O. P. Hay) 1882 (Tenn., Ala., Miss., La., Ark., Mo.); S. chamberlaini
(Ellis) 1940 (S. C.); and S. dentata Hubricht 1943 (Ky.).

tInclude C. antennatus Packard 1881 (Tenn.); C. packardi Smith 1888 (Ind., Ky., Kan., Ark.);

C. dearolfi Shoemaker 1942 (Pa.); and C. hobbsi Shoemaker 1941 (Fla.).

ree

1958 BousFiELD: FresH- WATER AMPHIPODS 61

26. Palmar margin of propod (seg. 6) of gnathopods, in female, straight or concave and
armed throughout with heavy notched spine teeth; inner margin of correspond-
ing dactyl armed with several teeth; uropod 3 short, outer ramus 1-13 times the
peduncle; length 7-18 mam 27
Palmar margin of propod convex and armed with weak, minutely notched spine
teeth, heavier at posterior angle; inner margin of dactyl armed with a few setae
but no teeth; uropod 3, outer ramus usually more than 13 times the peduncle,

Tempeh 3.5-10 mm 29
27. Uropod 2 in the male, outer ramus with comb spines C. shoemakeri (H. & M.) (p. 95)
Uropod 2 in the male, outer ramus Without comb, spines oe 28

28. Abdominal side plates 1 & 3 nearly quadrate, lateral corners acute, some or all

AUR a ae LO a C. setodactylus n. sp. (p. 96)

C. minor n. sp. (p. 98)

posterior margin of propodus of gnathopod 1 singly rbakyereacXe Mal eu eeR Re ah eee cry 30

30. Antenna 2, posterior margin of peduncular segment 4 armed with 3-4 groups of

Family HAUSTORIIDAE

Pontoporeia affinis Lindstrom

Pontoporeia affinis Lindstrom 1855, p. 63; S. I. Smith 1871, p. 452; Shoemaker 1920, p. 10H;
Segerstrale, 1937; Shoemaker 1942, p. 3; Larkin 1948, p. 5.

Pontoporeia hoyi Smith 1874, p. 647, pl. II, fig. 5.

Pontoporeia filicornis Smith 1874, p. 649; Adamstone 1928, p. 366; Sheffer and Robinson 1939, p. 120.

Pontoporeia kendalli Norton 1909, p. 247, fig. 1.

Pontoporeia affinis var. brevicornis Segerstrale 1950, p. 13, fig. 9; Henson, 1954.

Distribution and Ecology: Large deep lakes and rivers of Canada and the
United States, from the shores of the Arctic Ocean south to the limits of
Pleistocene glaciation, from Labrador and central Maine on the east to Lake
Washington on the west. In summer it occurs even in the shallows of northern
lakes but only in deep cold parts of southern lakes where temperatures do not
exceed 14.5°C. Pelagic males in October; ovigerous females from November to
April; life span of slightly more than two years.

Material Examined: ALBERTA: Waterton L., sev. specimens. SASK.: D. S.
Rawson collections, 1943-1956 — Reindeer L., L. La Ronge, Wollaston L., L. Atha-
baska. ONTARIO: L. Erie, 2 miles off Pottahawk Pt., 30-40 ft, E.L.B., Aug. 29,
1956, 24 subadult spec., NMC No. 2115; L. Nipigon, Orient and McIntyre Bays, F. B.
Adamstone, summer, 1921, 1923, several hundred specimens.

Remarks: On the basis of morphological and ecological similarities the
writer would concur with Segerstrale and others that North American material

62 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

is not specifically distinct from the European Pontoporeia affinis Lindstrom.
Minor but apparently consistent morphological differences between representa-
tive fresh-water material of the two continents have been noted by Smith,
Segerstrale, and others, to which the specific or varietal names hoy1, kendalli,
filicornis, brevicornis, and typica have been variously applied. Evidence to
date could be interpreted to provide grounds for subspecific recognition of all
North American material (as p. a. hoyi Smith) and that within this complex are
one or more varieties of relatively recent evolution. ‘The rather large, morpho-
logically and ecologically distinct form recorded under the name Pontoporeia
affinis from littoral salt waters of Ungava Bay (Dunbar, 1954) and the St.
Lawrence estuary (Bousfield, 1955a) may prove specifically separable from
Lindstrom’s form. However, until more extensive information on the
taxonomy, distributional ecology, and physiology of the entire North American
and European species complex becomes available it seems advisable to refer all
North American fresh-water material simply to Pontoporeia affinis Lindstrom.

Family PONTOGENIIDAE

Paramoera columbiana n. sp.
Paramoera mohri, Bousfield (1958), p. 110, 112.

Distribution and Ecology: Spray pools, and tidal portions of coastal fresh-
water streams of British Columbia; from Prince Rupert and the Queen
Charlotte Islands south to Vancouver and Nanaimo. Breeds in late winter and
spring; life cycle probably of one year only.

Material Examined: QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS: author coll., 1957:
Spray pools at north end of Gray Bay, Moresby I., E.L.B., July 12, 1957—Female, type;
male, allotype; 19 males and 4 females (ovig.), paratypes. NMC Nos. 2276 &
2277. Stream mouths near Skidegate Mission, W. of Queen Charlotte City,
Graham I.; N. Side of Copper Bay; and E. of Cape Fanny, Moresby I.; W. coast
Graham I. at Mountain Creek, Shield’s Bay; S. of Stiu Pt.; N. side Gudal Bay; and
S. side Gudal Bay. PRINCE RUPERT: mouth of Hay’s Creek, E. L. B., July 3,
1957 —1 male, 1 female, (ovig.) 39 mm. SOUTHERN B.C.; author coll., 1955:
mouth of Berkeley stream, Departure Bay; Emmond’s Beach, N. of Powell River:
and Deep Cove, Indian Arm, near Vancouver.

Diagnosis (Figures 1, 2): Female (7.5 mm) —Interantennal lobe rather large, smoothly
rounded; inferior antennal sinus sharply incised. Eyes large, black, subquadrate, nearly
meeting middorsally. Antenna 1 a little longer than antenna 2; peduncular segments 1,
2, & 3 with 3, 2, and 1 groups of ventral setae respectively; flagellum of 20-25 segments,
alternate segments with clavate sense organs posteriorly. Accessory flagellum conical, about
1/3 the first flagellar segment. Antenna 2, peduncular segment 5 not longer than 4, armed
posteriorly with 2-3 groups of long setae; flagellum 12-17 segmented, without clavate sense
organs.

ABBREVIATIONS FOR FIGURES

Ant | Antenna Head region b Palp
Brpl Brood-plate Left Pleopod 1

Brp] set. Brood-plate setae Pore. Lower Lip Right
Coxal plate Mandible Telson
Calceolus ¢ rf M Maxilla Uropod
Epimeral plate(s) Maxilliped C Upper Lip
Gnathopod P Peraeopod Urosome

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-WatTER AMPHIPODS 63

; , B.C. 1. Female, 7.5 mm (TYPE).
2. Male, 8.0 (ALLOTYPE). 3. Imm. Female, 7.0 mm (PARATYPE).

Figure 1. Paramoera columbiana n. sp. Gray Bay, Moresby I.

64 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Mandibular palp, segment 2 slightly broadened medially, subequal segment 3, most of
inner margin lined with stout setae. Lower lip, inner lobes vestigial. Maxilla 1, inner plate
with 6 marginal plumose setae; outer plate with 11 conspicuously pectinate spine teeth; right
palp with 6-8 apical spine teeth and a few setae, left palp with 5-6 spines and 3-4 setae.
Maxilla 2, inner plate with row of 5 large plumose setae diverging distally from inner
margin. Maxilliped, inner plate with 3 apical spine teeth and 7-8 marginal plumose setae.

Gnathopod 1, segment 6 (propod) subrectangular, longer than segment 5, with 6-7
groups of superior-lateral, 4-5 of inferior-lateral, and 3-4 of posterior setae; palmar margin
convex, oblique, posterior angle defined by 3 prominent spines and 2 groups of spines on
inner face. Dactyl close fitting, weakly toothed along inner margin. Gnathopod 2 similar
but longer; segment 6 shorter than segment 5, with 3-4 groups of superior-lateral, and
inferior lateral setae, and 5 groups along posterior margin.

Peraeopod 2 shorter than 1, coxal plate shallow-excavate behind. Peraeopods 3-5
increasing successively in length; segment 2 (basos) in all moderately expanded, posterior
margin evenly convex, serrulate. Coxal gills on peraeon segments 2-7, posterior smallest.
Brood lamellae on peraeon segments 2-5, hindmost smallest.

Pleopods powerful, 3rd shortest, rami subequal, about 16-segmented (basally fused),
peduncle with 2 coupling spines. Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, posterior margin serrulate,
that of 3 convex. Uropod 1, subequal rami about 2/3 the peduncle. Uropod 2, outer
ramus shorter than inner, both shorter than peduncle. Uropod 3, rami subequal, lanceolate,
13 times the peduncle, inner margins lined with singly inserted plumose setae. Telson cleft
two-thirds to the base, each lobe with apical spine and seta, and several fine setae dorsally
along outer margin.

In the immature male and female, the eyes are broad reniform in shape and smaller in
size. The ventral peduncular setae of the antennae are longer and better developed.
Male (8 mm): Eyes very large and subquadrate. Antenna 1 with platelike calceoli on
peduncular segment 3 and proximal 6-8 antennal segments; accessory flagellum nearly 2/3
the first antennal segment. Antenna 2 with calceoli on proximal 7 flagellar segments.
Peduncular segments stouter than in female; ventral marginal setae short.

Gnathopods stouter, more powerfully subchelate. Gnathopod 1, segment 6 subovate,
palmar margin very oblique; tip of dactyl closing between two rows of conical spines at the
posterior angle. Gnathopod 2 similar, but segment 6 shorter than 5, and its long axis
dorsally reflected. Peraeopods 3-5 proportionately a little longer than in the female.

Remarks: Paramoera columbiana belongs in the group of P. mohri Barnard
(1952), P. Roreana Stephensen (1944) and P. fasciculata (Thomson) lacking _
sternal gills and having gnathopods weakly subchelate and sublinear (in female),
inner margin of dactyl inconspicuously dentate. Habitat characteristically
marine intertidal. The species differs from koreana in having coxal gills on
peraeopod 7, and from P. mohri (its closest relative) in the larger eye, more
numerous palmar spines on segment 6 of the gnathopods, the minutely serrulate
posterior borders of Ep 2 & 3, the richer dorsal armature of the telson, and its
occurrence in fresh water.

Paramoera carlottensis n. Sp.

Distribution and Ecology: Recorded from fresh-water spray pools on the
west coast of the Queen Charlotte Islands, B.C., in company with P. columbiana,
Anisogammarus confervicolus, mayfly nymphs, and tadpoles of Bufo boreus.
Breeding season probably in winter and early spring.

Material Examined: Rocky shore south of Stiu Pt., Cartwright Sd., west coast
of Graham I., B.C.; fresh-water pools above normal high water level, E. L. B., July
26, 1957—Female, type; male, allotype; 7 males, 5 females, paratypes. NMC.
Nos. 2278, 2279. Spray pools at stream mouth, S. side Gudal Bay, Graham I., July
27, 1957 — 1 male.

1958

BousFieLp: FresH-WatEeR AMPHIPODS

65

Figure 2.

Paramoera carlottensis n. sp. Stiu Pt., West coast Graham re BC.
(TYPE). 2. Male, 7.0 mm (ALLOTYPE).
Paramoera columbiana n. sp. 3. Female, 7.5 mm (TYPE).

1. Female, 8.0 mm

66 Tn CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Diagnosis (Figure 2): Female, subadult (8.0 mm) — Interantennal lobe broadly rounded,
inferior antennal sinus sharply incised. Eyes medium-small, broad-reniform, black. Antenna
1, peduncular segments 1-3 successively shorter, with 2, 2, and 1 groups of setae respectively;
flagellum of 24-28 segments, alternately bearing long-clavate sense organs, accessory
flagellum conical, about 4 the first flagellar segment. Antenna 2 much shorter, peduncular
segment 5 shorter than 4, ventral setae short and sparse; flagellum of about 12 segments,
without clavate sense organs.

Mandibular palp, segment 2 broadened medially. Lower lip without inner lobes.
Maxilla 1, inner plate with 5 plumose setae; outer plate with 11 strongly pectinate spine
teeth; left palp with 5 apical spines and a few setae. Maxilla 2, inner plate with 3-4 long
plumose setae diverging distally from inner margin. Maxilliped, inner lobe with 3 apical
spine teeth and 6-7 marginal plumose setae; outer plate broad.

Gnathopods powerfully subchelate. Gnathopod 1, segment 6 longer than broad, with
about 4 groups each of superior-lateral and inferior-lateral setae; palmar margin convex,
oblique, lined with 4 or 5 stout spines and numerous stiff setae; dactyl toothed along inner
margin, closely fitting palm, tip closing among group of spines at posterior angle.
Gnathopod 2 similar; segment 6 relatively longer than broad, almost devoid of lateral setae.

Peraeopod 2 shorter than 1, coxal plate broader than deep, shallowly excavate behind.
Peraeopods 3-5 successively longer; basos moderately expanded, posterior margin serrulate.
Coxal gills on segments 2-7, decreasing in size posteriorly. Brood lamellae large on segments
2-4, very small on 5 (marginal setae not developed in material examined).

Pleopods strongly natatory; rami subequal, longer than peduncle, 10-12 segmented,
peduncle with 2 coupling spines distally on inner margin. Abdominal side plates 2 & 3,
hind margins convex, serrulate. Uropod 1, subequal rami about half the peduncle. Uropod
2 shorter than peduncle of uroned 1, outer ramus about three-fourths the inner. Uropod
3 equal 1 in length to uropod 2; rami lanceolate, subequal, margins lined with groups of short
spines and distally a few setae, none plumose. ‘Telsen cleft two-thirds to the base, lobes
with longish apical setae and fine dorsolateral setae.

Male, subadult (7.0 mm): Antenna 1 with piatelike calceoli or proximal 5-6 flagellar
segments. Antenna 2 with calceoli on proximal 7-8 flagellar segments. Gnathopods similar
to those of female but relatively stouter and more powerful.

Remarks: Paramoera carlottensis is closest to the group of P. japonica
Tattersall (1922), P. yezoensis Ueno (1933), and P. hayamaensis Stephensen
(1944) typically with sternal gills and having gnathopods powerfully subchelate,
similar, and alike in both sexes, dactyls conspicuously dentate on inner margin,
habitat i in fresh-water streams (of Japan). ‘The present species differs from all
three, however, in lacking sternal gills except for a median sternal process in
peraeon segment 2; also, the gnathopods are more powerful, the accessory
flagellum larger, and rami of uropod 3 have fewer lateral setae.

Family GAMMARIDAE
Gammarus Section

Gamarus (Gammarus) tigrinus Sexton

? Gammarus fasciatus Say, 1818, p. 3875 (salt-water form); Smith, 1874, p. 654 (Eastport, Me.);
Hubricht, 1948, p. 6 (partim).

Gammarus fasciatus Johansen, 1922, p. 180 (Charlottetown, P.E.I.); Hynes, 1954 b, 1955; Bousfield.
1955a, b, 1956a, b.

Gammarus tigrinus Sexton, 1939, p. 543, figs. 1-27.

Distribution and Ecology: Low brackish and tidal fresh waters of estuaries
and river mouths of the American Atlantic coast from the St. Lawrence estuary
(Baie Comeau) south to Florida (excl. Newfoundland); probably recently

introduced in the British Isles. Inhabits shores and shallows of turbid tidal

1958 BousFIELD: FrEsH-WaATER AMPHIPODS | 67

fresh waters that are relatively warm in summer. Ovigerous females from May
to September; life cycle of 8 months to one year.

Material Examined: Author collections 1950-1956 from: Que.: St. Lawrence
estuary — Montmagny, Richer R. mouth, St. Tite des Caps, Grand Etang, Gaspe.
N.B.: mouth of Caraquet R., tidal f. water of the Miramichi estuary. P.E.I.: West
Souris, Long Pond (nr. Grand Tracadie). N.S.: Pugwash R. mouth; South Sonora,
mouth of St. Mary’s R.; mouth of stream, Hampton, Annapolis Co.; East R. mouth,
Lunenburg Co.; mouth of Ohio R., Shag Harbour, Shelburne Co.; Pig Yoke R. mouth,
E. Pubnico, Yarmouth Co.; also collections of Atlantic Biol. Sta., from the Shubena-
cadie estuary. MAINE: Sheepscot R. mouth, Lincoln Co., A. P. Stickney, June 13,
1956, one male. MD.: Head of Chesapeake Bay (many localities), collections of the
U.S. National Museum. N.C.: N. River Road, ditch; Cape Fear R., 12 miles above
sea; Newport R., above narrows. S.C.: Edisto R., Willtown Bluff (several lots).
GEORGIA: Ogeechee R., King’s Ferry. FLORIDA: St. John’s R., Welaka.

Diagnosis (Figure 3): Very similar to Gammarus fasciatus in coloration and body
structure; distinguished chiefly by characters given in the key to species (p. 59) and by the
less acutely produced lateral corners of the abdominal side plates, and the slightly larger
size at maturity. The species has been carefully described and figured by Sexton (1939),
except for the mouthparts and a few other points of comparison which are herewith noted:

Male (11-14.5 mm): Interantennal lobe rather acutely angled above, rounded below.
Antenna 1 shorter than antenna 2; peduncular segments 1, 2, and 3 with 1-2, 2-4, and 1-2
median ventral groups of setae respectively. Antenna 2, peduncular segment 5 a little longer
than 4, both clothed anteriorly and laterally with numerous groups of setae, and posteriorly
with clusters of long setae, many of which are curled at the tips; flagellum heavily setose.

Mouthparts much as in G. fasciatus. Lower lip, inner lobes obsolete. Mandibular palp
with up to 10 long setae distally on inner margin of segment 2. Maxilla 1, inner plate with
about 12 marginal plumose setae; outer plate relatively short and broad, palp of right side
broad, with 3-4 stout conical spine teeth and a few setae at the apex; that of left side with
about 10 stiff setae, no setae on outer margin. Maxilla 2, inner face of inner plate with 8-9
long setae in a row diverging distally from inner margin. Maxilliped, inner plate with about
six short plumose setae on inner margin.

Remarks: The writer has compared material from Frodsham, England, and
Loch Neagh, Ireland, (kindly supplied by Dr. H. B. N. Hynes) with that from
American Atlantic localities (above) and was unable to find consistent dif-
ferences between them. The plumosity of the long setae on the margins of
segment 2 of gnathopods and peraeopods 1 & 2 is extremely fine, visible only
at high magnifications. Peraeopods 4 & 5 are almost exactly equal in length in
both sexes. The lateral corners of abdominal side plates 2 & 3 are nearly
quadrate, less pronounced posteriorly than in Sexton’s figured specimen, and
much less so than in G. fasciatus. Uropod 3, rami proportionately a little
longer and more slender than in G. fasciatus, inner ramus nearly equal to the
basal segment of the outer (Sexton’s type, in this respect, is atypical of the
species), terminal segment of outer ramus relatively short, not bearing plumose
lateral setae in the type and only very exceptionally in material examined.

G. tigrinus was for more than a century unrecognized as a distinct species
on the American Atlantic coast (to which it is native) because of its close
morphological similarity and high degree of ecological and geographical overlap
with Gammarus fasciatus. In the British Isles the brackish water tigrinus is
conspicuously unlike all other native species and thus soon attracted the atten-
tion of Dr. Sexton to whom we owe its specific recognition. The subsequent
confusion of the two species by Hynes (1954 and following) and the writer

Figure 3. Gammarus minus Say Monterey, Virginia. 1. Male, 8.5 mm.
Gammarus tigrinus Sexton St. Majorique, Gaspe Bay, Que. 2. Male, 12.5 mm.
Gammarus duebeni Lillj. Western Head, Queens Co., N.S. 3. Male, 17 mm.

1958 BousFiELD: FresH-WaAtTER AMPHIPODS 69

(1955, 1956) was based on comparison of material from the British Isles with
that from estuaries on the Canadian Atlantic coast (head of Gaspe Bay and
Hampton, N.S.) which had previously been identified by Dr. Shoemaker and
Dr. Segerstrale as G. fasciatus but which in fact was the brackish-water G.
tigrinus. Recently Dr. Henry O. Werntz, Woods Hole Oceanographic Insti-
tution, has been chiefly responsible for defining the distinctive morphological
characters of the two species and working out their different physiological and
ecological tolerances.

Gammarus (Gammarus) fasciatus Say

Gammarus fasciatus Say, 1818, p. 374 (partim); S. I. Smith, 1874, p. 653 (partim); Weckel, 1907,
(partim); p. 48, non fig.; Huntsman, 1915, p. 151, fig. 4b. Pentland, 1930 (partim); Hubricht and
Mackin, 1940, (partim) p. 198, fig. 3; Hubricht, 1943 (partim), p. 6; Clemens, 1950.

Gammarus sp., Nicholson, 1872, p. 500.

Distribution and Ecology: Lakes and large rivers that are slow-flowing,
relatively turbid, and warm in summer, from the shoreline to about 40 feet in
depth; authentically known from the Chesapeake, Delaware, Hudson, and St.
Lawrence drainage systems including the Great Lakes; probably also in the
Mississippi system. Ovigerous females from May to September, two genera-
tions per year; life cycle of less than one year’s duration.

Material Examined: Author collections from: ONTARIO: L. Huron, near
mouth of Thessalon R.; L. Erie, off Pottahawk Pt.; Long Pt., Head of Rondeau Bay,
J. R. Dymond, June 13, 1941; L. Ontario: Toronto Islands; Miner Bay; Moore Park,
A. G. Huntsman, April, 1913; St. Lawrence R., Sheek I., Long Sault Rapids, J. S.
Bleakney, April, 1957; Ont. Dept. Planning and Development collections (1946-1955)
in the lower regions of the following rivers: South Nation, Napanee, Don, Grand,
Lynn, Big and Otter. QUEBEC: St. Lawrence R., Montreal to the head of salt
water at Neuville, Bordeau, Richelieu, Montmorency, St. Eustache, Roxboro, Plage
St. Michel, St. Vallier, Montmagny, Richer R., Orleans I. VERMONT: L. Cham-
plain, Burlington. NEW YORK: Niagara R., above falls; Cayuga L., Seneca Falls;
Hudson R., opposite Germantown; N. of Saugerties Light, Hallenbeck Creek.
PENNSYLVANIA: Susquehanna R., at Paquea. NEW JERSEY: North of
Riverton, Delaware R., Creskill. MARYLAND: Potomac R., near Georgetown;
Port Tobacco, Charles Co. DELAWARE: Delaware City. WISCONSIN: mouth
of Fish Creek slough, L. Superior, Ashland.

Diagnosis (Figure 4): A strikingly banded, setiferous species having antenna 1 shorter
than antenna 2, eyes large and reniform and dorsal abdominal spines in prominent groups.

Male (13 mm): Interantennal lobe of head with oblique anterior margin, upper angle
sharp, lower rounded, lateral sinus moderate. Eye large, black, broad-reniform. Antenna
1 typically shorter than antenna 2, peduncle much shorter than flagellum; segment 2 of
peduncle with 1-3 median ventral groups of setae, the middle group the most prominent
and present even in females and immatures, segment 3 very short, with one median ventral
group of setae; flagellum 25-30 segmented, with minute paddleshaped sensory organs borne
antero-distally on each segment, much as in G. tigrinus (Sexton, 1939, fig. 2), accessory
flagellum 5-6 jointed. Antenna 2, peduncle much longer than the 13-segmented flagellum,
peduncular segment 4 longer than 5, margins with numerous groups of setae, none of which
have curled tips. Upper lip distally rounded, minutely setose. Lower lip, inner lobes not
distinctly marked off. Mandibular palp rather long and slender; segment 2 distally with
6-7 longish setae; inner margin of termal segment distally convex. Maxilla 1, inner lobe
(not shown in Figure 2) small, with 12-14 marginal setae; right palp with 5-6 short apical
spine teeth and left palp with several stout setae distally and one seta on outer margin.
Maxilla 2, inner plate with facial row of 10 setae. Maxilliped, inner plate about twice as

70 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

wide as long, median distal angle sharp, apex wth 3 spine teeth, inner margin with about
7 plumose setae, outer plate, outer margin with numerous short curved spines; segment 2
of palp much the longest; segment 3 with three groups of setae on outer margin.

Coxal plates 1 & 2 with about 5 rather long setae at antero-ventral angle and about 3
shorter postero-ventral setae. Gnathopod 1, segment 2 stout, segment 5, posterior margin
with 4 groups of setae, some being pectinate; segment 6 (propodus) large, subovate, palmar
margin slightly concave, very oblique, with stout median spine and cluster of long setae;
posterior angle with several stout spines against which closes the tip of the strongly curved
dactyl; posterior margin gently convex, bearing 4-5 groups of setae; inner face of propodus
with 1-3 superior lateral and 4-5 inferior lateral groups of setae. Gnathopod 2 somewhat
similar but larger; segment 2 with longer and more extensive marginal setae; segment 5
with 6-7 posterior groups of setae; propodus subrectangular, palmar margin slightly concave,
oblique, bearing two stout spines, 3 small groups of superior lateral and 4-6 groups of
inferior lateral setae. Peraeopod 1 a little longer than 2, posterior margins of segments
4-6 (in both) armed with five or more clusters of very long simple setae. Peraeopods 3-5
relatively short and stout, segments 4-6 with groups of spines and clusters of long setae (none
with curled tips); segments 5 & 6 subequal, dactyls rather short and strongly curved,
peraeopod 3, posterior margin of basos concave, lined with short setae, hind lobe free,
rounded; peraeopods 4 & 5, basos longer but narrowing distally to sharply angled corner
bearing a few spines and long setae; posterior margin with numerous rather long setae,
slightly concave distally; inner face with numerous setae. Coxal gills on segments 2-7,
smallest posteriorly.

Pleopods 1 & 2 subequal, 3rd shortest; plumose rami subequal, nearly twice the peduncle,
about 20-segmented (basally fused); three or four basal setae of inner ramus are stout,
cleft distally, tips barbed or weakly pectinate. Coupling spines 3-4, of which 2 are hooked.
Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, ventral margins with numerous long setae; posterior margins
slightly oblique, bearing a few short setae, lateral corners acutely produced.

Uropod 1, rami subequal, about two-thirds the peduncle. Uropod 2, outer ramus
shorter than inner. Uropod 3, rami long, slightly curved and sharply tapering distally,
inner ramus a little shorter than basal segment of outer ramus; in mature specimens one or
two setae are singly inserted on lateral margins of the well-developed terminal segment of
the outer ramus. Urosome segments moderately ‘humped’ middorsally as in certain marine
species (G. oceanicus, etc.); median and lateral spines strong, 2-3 per group. Telson cleft
to base, each lobe with one dorso-lateral and two or three terminal spines.

Female (8-12 mm): Compared to the male, antenna | is relatively longer and A2 much
less hairy. Gnathopods 1 & 2 similar, but much smaller and weaker; palmar margin of
propod less oblique, without stout median spines. Peraeopods shorter and less setose,
Uropod 3, rami shorter and broader, margins less setose. Brood plates on segments 2-5,
the last quite small.

Remarks: Say’s original description and notes on the ecology and
behaviour of this species are remarkably detailed, particularly concerning the
banded coloration of the body segments and appendages in life. He noted,
but did not consider specifically distinct, a closely similar “inhabitant of the salt
water” which may have been what is now known as G. tigrinus Sexton.
However, Say’s description leaves no doubt that the name fasciatus must be
applied to the fresh-water animal, if only because it is mentioned first in the
description. Unfortunately, Say did not describe many of the presently
accepted diagnostic characters of the appendages, a circumstance which may
have contributed to the confusion of this species with the superficially similar
G. pseudolimnaeus (Weckel, 1907; Huntsman, 1915; Pentland, 1930) and
G. tigrinus (Hubricht & Mackin, 1940; Hubricht, 1943). Clemens (1950, p. 5)
has summarized distributional records referred by 14 previous authors to the
name “Gammarus fasciatus,’ records which actually comprise at least three

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-WaTER AMPHIPODS 71

Figure 4. Gammarus fasciatus Say South Nation R., Ontario. 1. Male, 13.5 mm. 2. Female, 12.0 mm.

Wee THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

(probably four or more) fully distinct species. Such a complex would help
account for the contradictory reports on the ecology, physiology, and
behavior of the “species” reviewed by Clemens (p. 36).

Gammarus (Rivulogammarus) duebeni Lilljeborg

Gammarus duebenii Lilljeborg, 1851, p. 22.

Gammarus duebeni G. O. Sars, 1895, p. 205, pl. 177, fig. 1; Shoemaker, 1930, p. 114; Blake, 1933;
Hynes, 1954a, 1955; Bousfield, 1955, 1956a, b.

Distribution and Ecology: ‘Yide pools at and above MHW level and tidal
fresh waters of stream mouths and short estuaries that are cool in summer,
typically along rocky coasts; northern Europe, Iceland, southern Labrador,
and Gulf of St. Lawrence south to Massachusetts, tolerates a wide range of
salinities (1-85%.) but completes its life cycle in fresh water only in parts of
Ireland and the west coast of Great Britain. Ovigerous females from January
to July; life cycle of about 18 months.

Material Examined: QUEBEC: Port Alfred, Saguenay R., shore stream mouth,
V. D. Vladykov, Sept. 4, 1942; Mouth of Natashquan R., E. Corbeil, June 16, 1954;
Riviere St. Paul, near Blanc Sablon. NOVA SCOTIA: E.L.B., July, 1957: Cape
Fourchu, Yarmouth Co.; Shag Harbour, Shelburne Co.; Western Head, Queens Co.;
Peggy’s Cove, Halifax Co.; Bear Cove, Halifax Co. NEW BRUNSWICK:
Reversing Falls, Saint John, H. M. Rogers, Sept. 1, 1935. MASSACHUSETTS:
Gloucester and E. Gloucester, high-water rock pools, U. S. N. Mus. collections,
June-July, 1929.

Diagnosis (Figure 3, p. 68): G. duebeni is distinguished by its relatively large size (to 20
mm) and stout appendages, and by the numerous clusters of long simple setae on antenna 2,
segments 4-6 of the peraeopods, and dorsum of the urosome, particularly in the male. Further
diagnostic characters are as follows (see also Figure 3): Eye large, reniform. Antenna 1,
peduncular segment 1 with 2-3 groups of setae distally on ventral margin; segment 2 with 2-4
and segment 3 with 1-2 median ventral groups of setae respectively. Antenna 2, peduncular
segments 4 & 5 subequal, liberally armed with groups of long setae set fanwise on margins.

Lower lip, inner lobe obsolete. Mandibular palp, segment 2 longest, inner margin of
segment 3 distally concave, bearing about 30 comb setae, outer face with 2 groups of 4-5
setae. Maxilla 1, inner plate with 20 marginal plumose setae. Maxilla 2, inner plate with
facial row of 18-20 plumose setae, terminal setae slightly offset. Maxilliped, inner plate with
4 terminal and 1 subterminal conical spine teeth and 12 plumose setae on the inner margin;
~ segment 2 of palp nearly as wide as long.

Posterior margin of basal segment of peraeopod 5 gently convex, lined proximally with
10-14 short setae, distally nearly bare; hind lobe obtuse, not rounded, unarmed. Posterior
margins of abdominal side plates 2 & 3 with 5-6 short setae distally, lateral corners sub-
quadrate, not acutely produced.

Gammarus (Rivulogammarus) minus Say

Gammarus minus Say, 1818, p. 376; Shoemaker, 1940, p. 390, figs. 1, 2; Hubricht, 1943, p. 685
(partim); Cole, 1957, p. 86, fig. 2b, c.

Gammarus propinquus Hay, 1902a, p. 224; Weckel, 1907, p. 52, fig. 12.

Gammarus purpurascens Hay, 1902b, p. 488, fig. 7; Weckel, 1907, p. 50, fig. 11.

Distribution and Ecology: Known authentically from springs, streams,
and cave streams of southern Pennsylvania, south to Georgia and west to
Indiana; ovigerous females throughout the year; life cycle probably of about
one year, adults maturing at various sizes from 8.5 to 16 mm.

Material Examined: PENNSYLVANIA: Spring at Gables Woods, Lancaster,
J. W. Price, Mar. 6, 1936 — 6 spec. (Neocotypes) ident. by C. R. Shoemaker. NMC.
No. 2274. VIRGINIA: spring one mile north of Monterey, Route 220, Highland

1958 BousFiELD: FrEsH- WATER AMPHIPODS 73

Co.; spring near Black Pond, Fairfax Co. W. VIRGINIA: spring near Renick,
Greenbrier Co. D.C.: outlet of spring, west of Georgetown.

Diagnosis (Figure 3, p. 68): As redescribed by Shoemaker (1940); a small to medium-
sized species having short (3-4 segmented) accessory flagellum, weakly armed peraeopods and
uropods 1 & 2, and inner ramus of uropod 3 about two-thirds the outer ramus. The
following distinctive characters have also been noted: antenna 1, peduncular segments 1,
2, & 3, with 1, 3-5, and 1 ventral groups of setae respectively. Peraeopods 3 & 4, basos with
distinct free hind lobe, segments 4-6 nearly devoid of setae among spine clusters, peraeopod
5, posterior margin of basos convex proximally, nearly straight distally, lined throughout
wth 10-15 short setae, hind lobe free but small, segments 4-6 with a few longish setae among
spine clusters, especially anteriorly.

Remarks: Although Gammarus minus has not been recorded authentically
from the study region, the proximity of the type and neotype localities to its
southern border justifies the inclusion of Say’s species in this report. Shoe-
maker (1940) was unaware that Say’s original type material (though dry-
mounted and fragmentary) was available in the collection of the Academy of
Natural Sciences, Philadelphia (Cat. No. 2743). On probability he referred
propinquus-type amphipods to the name Gammarus minus Say, and selected
neotypes from a spring stream near Lancaster, Pa., some 60 miles to the west
of Philadelphia.*

In collections of the National Museum of Canada (No. 2120) are
seven subadult specimens of Gammarus taken by the writer in a small trout
stream, temp. 57.5°C., just west of Tracadie, N.B., Aug. 4, 1950, that agree well
with Say’s meagre description of G. minus, even to the presence of 12 segments
in the flagellum of antenna 1 of a 4.5-mm immature male. However, these
differ noticeably from immature specimens of the propinquus type. Among
other distinctive characters, they possess long, split-tipped setae on the antennae
and gnathopods, 3-4 long antero-ventral setae on coxal plates 1 & 2; obsolete
hind lobes on the bases of peraeopods 4 & 5; and generally more closely resemble
immature specimens of G. fasciatus. The specific determination of this New
Brunswick form must wait until descriptively adequate material has been
collected.

In the writer’s opinion, Shoemaker’s notes on the taxonomy and ecology
of Gammarus minus var. tenuipes from cave streams in W. Virginia are strongly
indicative of a distinct obligate-subterranean species.

Gammarus (Rivulogammarus) acherondytes H. & M. 1940
Gammarus acherondytes Hubricht & Mackin, 1940, p. 192, fig. 2.

Distribution and Ecology: Known only from two cave streams in the
southern part of the state of Illinois, in company with Gammarus troglophilus.
Because of its subterranean habitat this species is not properly included in the
scope of this paper. However, for purposes of comparison with other well-
known and closely related species, G. acherondytes is herewith redescribed
from cotype material (Morrison’s Cave, Ill.) kindly loaned by the Royal Ontario
Museum of Zoology and Palaeontology.

*Say’s type material, consisting of two fragmentary headless specimens, has recently been examined
by the writer. The gnathopods, peraeopods, pleopods, telson, abdominal side plates, and dorsal armature
of the urosome were found to compare closely with those of similar-sized specimens of G. propinquus, thus
confirming Shoemaker’s synonomy.

74 THe CANADIAN FieLp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Diagnosis (Figure 5): Combines characters of mouthparts, gnathopods, and peraeopods
that are basically of the Rivulogammarus type, with noncalceolous, setose, second antennae,
rich setation of coxal plates, and partial dorsal ‘humping’ of the urosome typical of the
Gammarus fasciatus complex; distinguished by its small, weakly pigmented eyes; slender,
elongate antennae; numerous groups of setae midventrally on ant. peduncular segments 2 & 3;
the short uropod 1; and long dorsal spines on the urosome.

Male (17 mm): Interantennal lobe of head rather sharply angled above and below;
lateral sinus moderate. Eye small, subreniform, weakly pigmented. Antennae long, slender
and moderately setose. Antenna 1, ventral margin of peduncular segment 1 distally armed
with short setae; peduncular segments 2 & 3 with 4-5 and 2-3 ventral groups of setae
respectively. Antenna 2, peduncle longer than setose flagellum, ultimate segment longer
than penultimate, margins of both with 4-5 groups of longish simple setae.

Lower lip, outer lobes laterally produced; inner lobes vestigial. Mandibular palp,
terminal segment distally straight, inner margin and inner face armed with about three
groups of setae. Maxilla 1, margin of inner plate with about 19 plumose setae; outer plate
much larger, apex broadly rounded; palp of right side distally broadest, apex with 6 conical
spine teeth and a stout seta; that of left side slender, with several stout apical setae. Maxilla
2, inner plate with facial row of 15-17 setae. Maxilliped, inner plate with 3 conical spine
teeth at rounded apex; inner margin with about 10 plumose setae, outer plate broad, palp,
margin of segment 2 with 2 groups of setae; segment 3 with 3 groups of setae on outer face
near outer margin, and a row of pectinate setae at base of dactyl.

Coxal plate 1 with 3-4 short antero-ventral setae. Gnathopod 1, carpus, propod, and
dactyl as described in the type, except palmar margin of propod bears stout median spines.
Gnathopod 2, segment 2 with groups of long setae along posterior magin, proximally on
anterior margin, propod long and narrow, palmar margin with median spine.

Peraeopods 1 & 2, posterior margins of segments 4-6 with 6-9 clusters of rather long
setae; dactyls short, nails curved. Peraeopods 3-5 slender, segments 4-6, margins with
groups of long stout spines and clusters of long setae; peraeopod 3, posterior margin of
segment 2 evenly convex, hind lobe smoothly rounded; segment 6 longer than 5.
Peraeopods 4 & 5 similar in shape, segment 5 longer than 6; posterior margin of segment 2
unevenly convex, lined with about 16 short setae, hind lobe free but more sharply angled,
without spines.

Subequal rami of pleopods less than twice the peduncle, about 25-segmented; basal
setae of inner ramus cleft apically, paired tips unequal in length, not barbed or conspicuously
pectinate; inner margin of peduncles with three coupling spines, two being hooked.
Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, posterior margins with a few setae distally, lateral corners acute,
not produced. Uropod 1 reaching only to tips of uropod 2, rami subequal, posterior
marginal spines rather large. Uropod 3 as in the type; inner ramus about four-fifths the
outer, terminal segment small, without lateral setae. Telson cleft to base, dorso-lateral
and terminal spines long. Female: Smaller, less attenuated, and less hairy than male.
Gnathopods as in the figured allotype except that palmar margin of propodus in each has a
stout spine near distal angle. Uropod 3, rami relatively short and broad; length of outer
ramus about twice the peduncle.

Gammarus (Rivulogammarus) pseudolimnaeus n. sp.
Gammarus fasciatus Forbes, 1876, p. 6; Weckel, 1907, p. 41 (partim), fig. 8 (partim); Huntsman,
1915 (partim).
Gammarus limnaeus Pentland, 1930 (partim); Hubricht & Mackin, 1940, p. 191 (partim); Hubricht,
1943, p. 684.

Distribution and Ecology: Widely distributed in the Mississippi drainage
basin of east central United States, and the southwestern St. Lawrence system,
from Texas and Arkansas north to Wisconsin, Ontario, and western Quebec.
A species of larger rivers and lakes that breeds in tributary streams and springs
that are cool in summer. Ovigerous females mainly from April to July; life
span of approximately 16 months. Frequently associated with G. fasciatus and

—eEEe————EE—————EESSS

seroma

Figure 5. Gammarus acherondytes H. & M. Burksville, Illinois. 1. Male, 19 mm (COTYPE).
2. Female, 17 mm (COTYPE).

76 THe CaNnaDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Crangonyx pseudogracilis in rivers and lakes and with Hyalella azteca, and

Crangonyx spp. in streams. Probably seasonally migratory.

Material Examined: ONTARIO: Rideau R., below Hog’s Back, Ottawa, E.L.B.,
May 7, 1955. Male, type; female, allotype, female, paratype. NMC No. 2110;
April 30, 1955 —1 male, topotype. NMC No. 2111. Toronto: Creek out Spadina
Road; small stream, Moore Park; stream, High Park; Ashbridge’s Bay, A.G.H.,
Dec. 5, 1912; ravine creek, N. Toronto, E.B.S. Logier, May 7, 1916. L. Ontario,
dredged off Whitby; L. Huron, streams on Manitoulin I., Black Ash Creek,
and Underwood Creek, near Collingwood; Ont. Dept. Planning & Development
Surveys, 1946-1956: Highland Creek, Duffin Creek, Rouge R., Big Creek, Otter
Creek, Little Otter Creek. NEW YORK: Hemlock Brook, Locke; Spring Creek,
Caledonia (as G. minus, Shoem. det.); Owasco L., (as G. minus, Shoem. det.).
WISCONSIN: Hilgen spring, 1 mile E. of Cedarsburg, Ozaukee C., July 7, 1938
(as G. limnaeus, L. Hubricht det.); Ashland, mouth of Fish Creek, author coll., 1957.
MICHIGAN: Hog Creek, N. of Quincy, Branch Co., Aug. 1, 1938 (as G. limnaeus,
Hubricht det.); L. Superior, Munising Wharf, auth. coll., 1957. ILLINOIS: Creek
near Waukegan (as G. fasciatus, Weckel det.). TENNESSEE: Creek near Redfoot
L., Obion Co. MISSOURI: Twelvemile Creek, St. Louis Co. (as G. limnaeus,
Hubricht det.); spring 7 miles S. Frederickton, Madison Co. (as G. limnaeus, Hubricht
det.); Hunter’s Creek Cave, Boone Co., C. Boll, Oct., 1956, 3 — 152 meters from Cave
mouth. TEXAS: Texas coast, USNM No. 155/931 (no other data).

Diagnosis (Figure 6): Closely allied to Gammarus troglophilus H. & M. but distin-
guished by the large reniform eye, the lack of calceoli on antenna 2 in the female, the
concave palmar margin of gnathopod 2 in the male, the broad outer lobe of the maxilliped,
the form and armature of the peraeopods, the unequal rami of the pleopods, and the smaller
size at maturity.

Male (14-17 mm): Interantennal lobe broad, corners rounded above and below, lateral
sinus deep. Antenna 1 distinctly longer than antenna 2, relatively bare of setae; flagellum
of 30 segments, peduncular segment 2 with two groups of short setae on ventral margin,
accessory flagellum 5-6 segmented. Antenna 2, peduncular segments 4 & 5 subequal, armed
with groups of small setae. Flagellum 10-13 segmented.

Lower lip, outer lobes somewhat asymmetrical; inner lobes weakly defined. Man-
dibular palp, outer face of segment 3 with three groups of longish setae; inner margin
of segment 2 with distal row of about 10 long setae and proximal group of 4-5 short setae.
Maxilla 1, inner plate with about 19 marginal setae. Maxilla 2, inner plate with oblique
facial row of about 15 long setae. Maxilliped, inner plate with about 10 marginal plumose
setae and 3 terminal spine teeth; palp large, 3rd joint, width half its length.

Coxal plate 1 widened distally, 1-2 short setae at anterior and posterior corners.
Gnathopod 1, segment 5 subtriangular, convex posterior margin with 6-7 groups of setae,
segment 6, palmar margin irregularly concave, very oblique, virtually continuous with
posterior margin, with heavy median spine-tooth, and several small spines at posterior angle;
inner face with 2-3 groups of superior lateral and 4-5 groups of inferior lateral setae; dactyl
strongly curved, closing at tip. Gmnathopod 2, coxal plate deeper than wide, parallel-sided;
segment 5 with 7-8 posterior groups of setae and distal row of nonplumose setae; propodus
large, subrectangular, several blunt spines at posterior angle; inner face with 3 groups of
superior lateral and 6-8 groups of inferior lateral setae.

Peraeopods 1 & 2, posterior setation rather sparse in both. Peraeopods 3-5, segments 4-6
normally spinose but without corresponding clusters of long and prominent setae; peraeopod
5, posterior margin of segment 2 shallow-concave distally, numerous longish setae lining
it throughout and grouped proximally on inner face.

Pleopods natatory, 3rd the shortest; outer ramus (in all) about 10% longer than inner
ramus, about 1.7 times the corresponding peduncle; peduncle 1 narrowest, 3 broadest,
margins of each with a few groups of long setae and 3-4 coupling spines of which only 2
are hooked. Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, posterior margins lined with a few short setae,
lateral corners acute but little produced posteriorly.

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-WaAtTER AMPHIPODS 77

Figure 6. Gammarus pseudolimnaeus n. sp. Rideau R., Ottawa, Ontario. 1. Male, 17 mm (TYPE).
2. Female, 13.5 mm (ALLOTYPE).

78 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Violee72

Uropod 1 exceeding uropod 2, peduncle half again as long as subequal rami; uropod 3,
rami long, broadly tapering, outer ramus about 20% longer than inner and 3 times the
peduncle, natatory setae relatively short and sparse, terminal segment short, lateral margins
rarely with setae. Urosome segments not noticeably ‘humped’ middorsally, with normal
quota of median and lateral groups of spines and fine setae, 2-4 spines per cluster. Telson
_ about as long as wide, cleft very nearly to base, groups of spines and fine setae dorso-laterally
and terminally on each lobe.

Female (10-14 mm): Gnathopods generally similar but proportionately much smaller
and weaker, gnathopod 1, propod without single large spine on palmar margin and only
one group of spines on posterior margin. Brood lamellae on segments 2-5, largest on 3,
smallest on 5, margins expanded anteriorly, lined with numerous long setae. Uropod 3
proportionately smaller than in male; outer ramus tapering distally, 40% longer than inner
ramus and about twice the peduncle. In immatures of both sexes the inner ramus is propor-
tionately much shorter than the outer.

Remarks: his species has previously been confused with Gammarus
lacustris, G. limnaeus, G. minus, and G. fasciatus. Both Forbes (1876) and
Weckel (1907) described and figured this species under the name G. fasciatus
which it superficially resembles in antennal accessory flagellum, eye shape, form
of peraeopods, dorsal abdominal armature, and third uropods, and with which
it overlaps ecologically and geographically. However, the two species are
distinct on characters of the head, mouthparts, and general armature of the
appendages. Hubricht and Mackin (1940, p. 191) noted differences between
specimens from Rocky Mountain lakes (G. lacustris) and those from streams in
east-central U.S.A., samples of which have been found by the writer to be
G. pseudolimnaeus, however, the specific value of these differences was not
recognized at that time. The species is readily separable from G. minus
(propinquus) by the first and third uropods, accessory flagellum, basal segments
of peraeopods 3-5, and size at maturity.

Gammarus (Rivulogammarus) troglophilus H. & M.
Gammarus troglophilus Hubricht & Mackin, 1940, p. 189, fig. 1; Hubricht, 1948, p. 684; Weise,
1958; 1957, p. 198.

Distribution and Ecology: Known from some 30 cave streams, springs, and
spring streams of Missouri and Illinois. Although barely reaching the southern
limit of Pleistocene glaciation and unknown from Canada, the species is here-
with more fully described, for comparative purposes, from cotype specimens
(Morrison’s Cave, Ill.) kindly loaned by the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology

and Palaeontology.

Diagnosis (Figure 7): Conforming to the original description of Hubricht and Mackin,
with the following additions:

Male (20 mm): Interantennal lobe of head relatively narrow, anterior angles rounded,
lateral sinus large. Eyes reduced, subovate, black. Antenna 1, peduncular segments each
with a single median ventral group of setae. Antenna 2, peduncular segments 4 & 5 sub-
equal, bearing prominent groups of longish setae (also on flagellum).

Lower lip, inner lobes weak. Mandibular palp, inner margin of segment 2 with 6-7
setae distally and proximally; inner margin of segment 3 distally concave. Maxilla 1, inner
plate with about 16 marginal setae, palp of right side broadening distally to 6 or 7 short
spine teeth; left palp bearing several short stiff setae on bluntly rounded apex. Maxilla 2,
inner plate with facial row of about 10 setae. Maxilliped, inner plate with 3 conical spine
teeth (innermost longest) and small subterminal spine, and about 8 marginal plumose setae;
outer plate long, narrow, inner distal corner not rounded; palp, 3rd and 4th segments
combined are longer than 2nd.

Gnathopods essentially as described, except that the slightly concave palmar margin

1958 BousFIELD: FresH- WATER AMPHIPODS 79

Figure 7. Gammarus troglophilus H. & M. Burksville, Illinois. 1. Male, 20 mm (COTYPE)
2. Female, 15 mm (COTYPE).

80 Tue CaNnabDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

of the first gnathopod bears two stout widely separated spines, and the shallowly convex
palmar margin of gnathopod 2 bears one strong spine near posterior angle.

Peraeopods 1 & 2 rather slender, posterior margins of segments 4-6 in each armed with
several groups of long setae. Peraeopods 3-5 long and fairly robust, segments 4-6 armed
anteriorly and posteriorly with several clusters of spines and numerous long setae; peraeopod
5, convex posterior margin of basos (segment 2) with about 16 longish setae and a few
scattered setae on its inner face. Coxal gills on segments 2-7, not decreasing markedly in
size posteriorly.

Rami of pleopods almost exactly equal, length about 1.7 times the peduncle, 3-4 coupling
spines on inner margin of peduncle, of which only 2 are hooked. Abdominal side plates
2 & 3, posterior margins with a few setae, lateral corners scarcely produced posteriorly.

Urosome segments dorsally armed with median and lateral groups of stout spines and
numerous long setae. Uropod 3, rami long and tapering, inner about five-sixths the outer
which is three times the peduncle. Telson cleft to base.

Female (15 mm): Flagellum of antenna 2 with small calceoli on proximal segments.
Gnathopod 1, palmar margin of propodus with 2-3 stout spines, that of gnathopod 2 smooth.
Brood plates on segments 2-5 inclusive, immature in specimen examined. Uropod 3, outer
ramus twice the length of the peduncle.

Remarks: For details of the life history and ecology of this remarkable
amphipod the reader is referred to two recent papers by Weise (1953, 1957).
Hubricht & Mackin (1940) noted the occurrence of G. troglophilus in springs
with G. limnaeus (probably G. pseudolimnaeus) and had no difficulty in

separating the two forms.

Gammarus lacustris lacustris G. O. Sars

Gammarus lacustris G. O. Sars, 1864, Shoemaker, 1955, p. 47.

Gammarus limnaeus S. I. Smith, 1874, p. 608, pl. II, figs. 5, 6 (partim); Weckel, 1907, p. 42
(partim); Shoemaker, 1920, p. 16E; Johansen, 1920, p. 129 (partim); Saunders, 1933, p. 247, fig. 2c;
Hubricht and Mackin, 1940, p. 191 (partim); Hubricht and Harrison, 1941, p. 330.

? Gammarus robustus S. I. Smith, 1874, p. 610, pl. 2, figs. 7-12.

Gammarus pulex G. O. Sars, 1895, p. 503, pl. 177.

Distribution and Ecology: Cold lakes, tundra ponds, sloughs, and their
outflows; from Baffin Island and the Hudson Bay drainage basin west to the
Yukon and Alaska, south through the Midwest and the Rocky Mountains to
New Mexico and California; northwestern Europe. Ovigerous females in late
spring and early summer; life cycle of about 15 months.

Material Examined: NORTHWEST TERRITORIES: C. A. E. material from
Dolphin and Union Straits, 1915-16 (as G. limnaeus, Shoemaker, 1920); L. Nettilling
and L. Pagutaktu, D. R. Oliver, 1954-1955, Charlton I., James Bay, F. Johansen.
BRITISH COLUMBIA: Collections of Pacific Biological Station (material of
Saunders, 1933) from Vancouver I., incl. Malahat L., Pin L., Tower L., and Garibaldi
L., and the mainland incl. Paul L., Six Mile L., and Cottonwood L. (near Nelson),
and Brent’s L. (near Summerland); L. Audy (Rocky Mountain Park); lake outflow
near Cranbrooke; N. Fork Moose R. (as G. fasciatus, Weckel det.); small lake at
4000 ft, UBC Botanic Reserve; also from Sink L., near Stephen, J. B. Tyrrell, 1883.
ALBERTA: Red Deer and Battle R. District; Third Vermilion L. SASKAT-
CHEWAN: Several Lakes, D. S. Rawson and survey parties, 1948-56: Kostuchenko,
Pike, Matador, Katepwa, Last Mountain, Murray, Waterhen, Sturgeon, Wakaw,
L. la Ronge, Athabaska, and Reindeer; also Reed L., auth. coll., 1957. MANITOBA:
Fort Churchill, F. P. Ide., 1954; Winnipeg Beach, L. Winnipeg, auth. coll., 1955.
ONTARIO: Fort Severn, Patricia District, W. B. Scott, 1940; Mattagami R., near
Smoky Falls. QUEBEC: L. Aigneau, southwest of Ungava Bay, D. R. O., 1954;
Port Burwell, J. S. Bleakney, 1952; Cape Hope’s Advance, Hudson Strait. IDAHO:
Lake 1 mile north of Franklin. WYOMING: Yellowstone L., Yellowstone National

1958 BousFIELD: FRESH-WATER AMPHIPODS 81

Park. CALIFORNIA: Lakes of Owens R. drainage basin (Mildred L., etc.), Bishop,
N. Reimers coll., 1954. NEW MEXICO: Headwaters of Zuni R., McKinley Co.,
(as G. limnaeus, Hubricht det.).

Diagnosis (Figure 8): North American material is similar to that of northwestern
Europe in the small, subrotund eyes, short accessory flagellum (2-4 segments), subquadrate
(or acute but unproduced) lateral corners of the abdominal side plates, the singly spaced
dorso-lateral abdominal spines (not in groups of 2-4 as in Jimnaeus) and the relatively short,
sparsely setose, terminal segment of the outer ramus of uropod 3. However, the ventral
margins of the abdominal side plates tend to be more setose and the lateral corners some-
what more acute, and the eye is not as close to the anterior margin of the head.

Remarks: Smith’s material of G. limnaeus from Colorado is very probably
G. I. lacustris. The identity of his G. robustus from the same region cannot be
ascertained without examination of the original material. The writer has seen
no material comparing in shape and armature of the propods of the gnathopods

with Smith’s corresponding figures of robustus.
P § lg

Gammarus lacustris limnaeus S. 1. Smith

Gammarus lacustris S. I. Smith, 1871, p. 453; Bousfield, 1956, p. 140.

Gammarus limnaeus S. 1. Smith, 1874, p. 651, pl. 2, figs. 6, 7; Weckel, 1907, p. 42, fig. 9 (partim);
Huntsman, 1915, p. 151, fig. 4a; Johansen, 1920, p. 129 (partim); Pentland, 1930 (partim); Hubricht &
Mackin, 1940, p. 191 (partim); Hubricht, 1943, p. 684 (partim)?

Distribution and Ecology: Known authentically only from the St.
Lawrence drainage basin, from western Ontario to eastern Quebec and
Newfoundland. Occurs in large lakes (Superior, Huron, Michigan), and
smaller lakes (Nipigon, Nipissing, Simcoe) and their outflows, and in marshes,
Swamps, swamp streams and springs that are cool to cold in summer, from the
shore line to more than 60 ft in depth, under stones, among algae, bottom
detritus and weeds. Ovigerous females from April to August; life history of

about 15 months.

Material Examined: ONTARIO: author collections from small lake near
Macdiarmid, Nipigon Provincial Park, and Thessalon beach, L. Huron; L. Nipigon,
dredged, F. B. Adamstone, 1921; L. Superior, Ste. Ignace I., 8-13 fath., S. I. Smith,
summer, 1871 (topotypes); also lotic water collections of Ont. Dept. Planning
and Development, and author from: small tributary of Little Otter Creek, 1 mile
north of Staffordville, Elgin Co.; Rocky Saugeen R., 7 miles east of Flesherton,
Grey Co.; Credit R., 4 miles west of Alton, Peel Co.; Moira R. tributary, 63 miles
west of Foxboro, Hastings Co. MINNESOTA: L. Bemidji, Beltrami Co., author
coll., 1957. QUEBEC: author collections, 1953, from small lake 4 miles west of Cap
Chat, and Grand Etang, Gaspe region; lake at Port Menier, Anticosti I. NEW-
FOUNDLAND: Small lake at Cook’s Harbour, Belle Isle Strait, E. Palmen, 1949.

Diagnosis (Figures 8, 9): As described by Smith and Weckel, with the following
additions: Male (14-18 mm): Interantennal lobe of head fairly broad, anterior corners
rounded, lateral sinus deep. Eyes somewhat variable but usually subreniform, deeper than
wide, black. Antenna 1, accessory flagellum with 3-4 segments, the last very small,
peduncular segment 2 with 1-2 groups of short setae on ventral margin.

Upper lip rounded below and finely setose. Lower lip, inner lobes weak. Mandibular
palp, segment 2, inner margin lined with 10-12 setae, longest distally; segment 3 somewhat
shorter, tapering distally, inner margin distally concave, inner face with two groups of 2-3
setae. Maxilla 1, inner plate with up to 24 marginal setae; palp of right side with 5-7 apical
spine teeth and a few setae, that of left side with several stiff apical setae. Maxilla 2, inner
plate with facial row of 20 long setae subparallel to inner margin. Maxilliped, inner plate
with 3 terminal spine teeth and 8-10 marginal plumose setae; outer plate distally rounded,
palp relatively short, segment 3 shorter than 2.

Figure 8.

Gammarus lacustris limnaeus Smith 1. Lake near Macdiarmid, Nipigon Provincial Park, Ont.
Male, 17 mm. 1A. Female, 14 mm. 2. Seven, Islands Lake, Gaspe, Que. Male, 16 mm. 3.
Female, 14 mm. 4. Port Menier Lake, Anticosti I., Que. Male, 19 mm.

Gammarus lacustris lacustris G. O. Sars 5. Port Burwell, Quebec. Male, 15 mm. 6. Angle-
sey, Wales. Male, 13.5 mm. 7. Female 13.5 mm.

1958 BousFIELD: FRESH-WaATER AMPHIPODS 83

Md
Mapa

Figure 9. Gammarus lacustris limnaeus Smith Little Otter Creek, Elgin Co., Ontario. 1. Male, 15 mm.
2. Female, 13 mm.

84 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 72

Coxal plates 1 & 2 each with 1-2 antero-ventral and 1 postero-ventral setae. Gnathopods
as in the type; propodus of gnathopod 2 in the male with 3 groups of superior-lateral and
5-6 groups of inferior-lateral setae. Peraeopod 1 somewhat longer and heavier than 2,
posterior margins of segments 4-6 lined with four or more clusters of long setae, some longer
than segment 6. Peraeopods 3-5 rather slender, 4th very slightly longer than 5; segments
4-6 lacking long setae; segment 2 (basos) widest proximally, hind margin of peraeopod
3 & 4 slightly concave, that of 5 nearly straight, lined with about 10-12 short setae and a few
setae on inner face of basos,; segment 6 about three-fourths segment 5.

Pleopods 1 & 2 subequal, 3rd shortest, rami subequal, about 20-segmented, nearly twice
the length of respective peduncles; basal setae of inner ramus stout, distally forked, one tip
simple, the other pectinate, peduncles with 3-5 coupling spines of which two are hooked.
Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, posterior margins oblique, lateral corners acutely produced,
ventral margins gently convex, lined with 4-6 longish setae, some in groups. Dorsal median
and lateral spines on urosome segments 1-3 total 14-17 (up to 24 in lotic water specimens),
typically 2 spines per group, one or both median spines on urosome 3 lacking. Uropod 3,
rami long, slender, inner ramus about four-fifths the outer which is three times the peduncle,
terminal segment of outer ramus, lateral margins with plumose setae singly inserted or in
groups with simple setae. Telson cleft to base, lobes with a few lateral setae and apical
spines.

Femal (14 mm): Generally shorter-limbed than male. Abdominal side plates, lateral
corners a little less strongly produced. Uropod 3, inner ramus nearly equal to basal segment
of outer ramus.

Remarks: ‘The present material of G. 1. limnaeus is remarkably similar to
material of G. /. lacustris from the British Isles (Anglesey), kindly supplied by
Dr. H. B. N. Hynes. The writer has concluded, however, that differences in
eye shape, antennal setation, shape and armature of abdominal side plates, and
dorsal abdominal spination are regionally consistent and deserving of subspecific
recognition. Lotic-water specimens show a tendency to more acutely pro-
duced abdominal side plates, more numerous dorsal abdominal spines, shorter
pleopods, and, in uropod 3, to more unequal rami and a more setose terminal

segment of the outer ramus.

Anisogammarus (Eogammarus) ramellus (Weckel)
Gammarus ramellus Weckel, 1907, p. 38, fig. 7.
Gammarus confervicolus Saunders, 1938, p. 248, fig. 2e.
Anisogammarus ramellus Shoemaker, 1942, p. 4; Carl et al., 1952; 1956, p. 6.
Anisogammarus (Eogammarus) ramellus Barnard, 1954, p. 16, pl. 15.

Distribution and Ecology: Mainly in small coastal streams and lakes with
direct access to the sea but above HW level; occasionally also in tidal fresh and
oligohaline-brackish waters; American-Pacific coast from California to British
Columbia. Ovigerous females from March to August; life cycle probably of

one year.

Manel Examined: QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS, author coll., 1957:
small steep streams near Skidegate Mission and at Queen Charlotte City, Graham I.,
and Alliford Bay, Moresby I VANCOUVER I.: author coll., 1955, from small
stream at Wreck Bay (Ucluelet); east side of Kennedy L.; and Keighley’s stream,
Departure Bay. Collections of Pacific Biological Station (Saunders, 1933) from
Butchart’s Gardens, Victoria; Keighley’s well; and Anderson L. CALIFORNIA:
Stream mouth at Biological Station, Mendocino, author coll., 1955.

Diagnosis (Figure 10): Male (12 mm): Interantennal lobe truncate, corners rounded.
Eye rather small, broad-reniform, black. Antenna 1, peduncular segments 1-3 with 2, 2, and
1 ventral groups of short setae respectively; flagellum of 22-25 segments; accessory flagellum
of 5-6 segments. Antenna 2, peduncular segments 4 & 5 slender, setose, subequal; flagellum
of 12-14 segments, without calceoli.

3 Hd

S=SER.

Figure 10. i locustoides (Brandt) Queen Charlotte City, Graham I., B.C. 1. Male,
mm.
Ce Oa confervicolus (Stimpson) Skidegate Mission, Graham I., B.C. 2. Male,
mm.
Anisogammarus ramellus (Weckel) Skidegate Mission, B.C. 38. Male, 12 mm.

86 Tue CanaDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vole

Lower margin of coxal plates 1 & 2 lined with numerous setae. Posterior margins of
abdominal side plates 2 & 3 with several longish setae.

Material from British Columbia, particularly at the mouths of streams, differs from that
of Mendocino in the shorter ventral peduncular setae of antenna 1, the more convex outline
and longer setae of the posterior margin of the basos of peraeopods 3-5, and the presence
(in some males) of short paired spines among the dorsal setae of pleon segments 2 & 3.

Remarks: ‘The species is closely related to Anisogammarus oregonensis
Shoemaker (1944) recorded from seaside creeks and lakes in southern Oregon

but not yet in Canada.

Anisogammarus (Eogammarus) confervicolus (Stimpson)

Gammarus confervicolus Stimpson, 1856; Holmes, 1908, vol. 10, p. 239.

Melita confervicola Stebbing, 1906,, p. 428.

Anisogammarus confervicolus Saunders, 1938, p. 248 (partim); Carl, 1937.

Anisogammarus (Eogammarus) confervicolus Barnard 1954, p. 9, pls. 9-10.

Distribution and Ecology: Brackish bays and estuaries from ‘Alaa: to
California; frequently in spray pools fresh to the taste and above normal HW,
and mouths of f.w. streams, in company with A. locustoides, Corophium
spinicorne and Paramoeraspp. Previously recorded in Canada fam Vancouver
I., and Lost Lagoon, Vancouver, B.C. Ovigerous females from May to August.

Material Examined: QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS, author coll., 1957:
spray pools and mouths of streams on W. coast Graham I. at Mountain Creek,
Shields Bay; S. of Stiu Pt., Cartwright Sound; N. side Gudal Bay; Gudal Creek;
S. side Gudal Bay; also mouth of small stream E. of Cape Fanny, Moresby I.; stream
mouth near Skidegate Mission and at Queen Charlotte City, Graham I., and 'N. side
of Copper Bay, Moresby I. PRINCE RUPERT, author coll., 1957: stream mouth in
Hay’s Inlet. VANCOUVER I., author coll., 1955: spray pools at N.W. end Long
Beach and Webb’s Pt.; mouth of Goldstream, head of Finlayson Arm; stream mouths
at heads of Comox Harbour, Nanoose Bay, and Ladysmith Harbour; Berkeley Stream,
Departure Bay. B.C. MAINLAND, author coll., 1955: mouth of stream, Kelly Bay;
stream mouth at Sechelt.

Diagnosis (Figure 10): Male (11 mm): Close to A. ramellus but distinguished by
several characters of the head region. Interantennal lobe oblique, upper angle sharp,
minutely notched, lower rounded. Eye moderately large, broad-reniform, black, anterior.
Antenna 1 a little longer than antenna 2; peduncular segments 1-3 successively smaller,
typically with 3, 2, & 1 ventral groups of short setae respectively: flagellum of 20-22 seg-
ments; accessory flagellum with 3-4 segments. Antenna 2, peduncle stouter but less setose
than in A. ramellus, flagellum of 11 segments, proximally with calceoli.

Coxal plates with fewer marginal setae and pleon segments 1-3 without dorsal groups
of setae (or spines). Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, posterior margins with one or two setae.

Anisogammarus (Eogammarus) locustoides (Brandt)

Gammarus locustoides Brandt, 1851.

Gammarus (Marinogammarus) locustoides Gurjanova, 1951, p. 771, fig. 537.
Anisogammarus (Eogammarus) locustoides Barnard, 1954, p. 12, pl. 11.
Anisogammarus locustoides Carl et al., 1956, p. 6.

Distribution and Ecology: Mouths of fresh-water streams exposed to lotic
fresh waters at low tide; Kamchatka, Alaska, and British Columbia; previously
recorded in Canada from a fresh-water stream, East Bunsby Islands, west coast
Vancouver Island. Ovigerous females March to June; life cycle of about
15 months.

Material Examined: QUEEN CHARLOTTE ISLANDS, author coll., 1957:
stream mouths on W. coast Graham I. at Mountain Creek, Shield’s Bay, and S. of

ee es

1958 BousFIELD: FREsH-WaATER AMPHIPODS 87

Stiu Pt., Cartwright Sound; stream mouths on E. coast Graham I., W. of Skidegate
Mission and W. of Queen Charlotte City; also N. side of Copper Bay, Moresby I.
B.C. MAINLAND: Collections of Pacific Biological Station, “Work Canal” (near
Prince Rupert), July 21, 1906—1 male specimen.

Diagnosis (Figure 10): Male (14 mm): Interantennal lobe, anterior margin concave,
upper corner sharp, lower rounded. Eye large, reniform, black. Antenna 1, peduncular
segments 1-3 stout, with 6, 6, and 2 ventral groups of longish setae respectively; flagellum
of 25-30 segments; accessory flagellum with 5-6 segments. Antenna 2, peduncular segments
4 & 5 strong, subequal, each with 4-5 ventral groups of long setae; flagellum of 15 segments,
without calceoli.

Coxal plates 1 & 2 without conspicuous marginal setae. Pleon segments 1-3 dorsally
smooth; posterior margins of side plates 2 & 3 convex, lined with short setae.

Crangonyx Section

Crangonyx anomalus Hubricht
Crangonyx anomalus Hubricht, 1943, p. 687, pl. I.

Distribution and Ecology: Known only from limestone springs of
southern Ohio and Kentucky.

Remarks: Recorded localities are at the southern limit of Pleistocene
glaciation in Ohio but south of the St. Lawrence drainage basin. The writer
has seen no material of this species. Hubricht’s figures for the gnathopods and
uropods indicate a close relationship with C. forbesi (H. & M.), also a stream-
dwelling species but of more southerly distribution. The broadly expanded
basal segments of peraeopods 3-5, the spinose telson, the strongly curved outer
ramus of uropod 2 in the male, and the fact that males are larger than females,
are specifically distinctive.

Crangonyx forbesi (Hubricht & Mackin)

? Crangonyx gracilis Forbes, 1876, p. 6 (partim).
Eucrangonyx forbesi Hubricht & Mackin, 1940, p. 196. fig. 5.
Crangonyx forbesi Hubricht, 19438, p. 689.

Distribution and Ecology: Widely distributed in springs and cave streams
of the Mississippi drainage basin, from Arkansas north to Illinois. Ovigerous
females March to May; seasonally migratory.

Diagnosis (Figure 11): As several characters of major taxonomic value were omitted
in the original description, the species is herewith redescribed and refigured in order to
facilitate comparison with several new forms recorded in this study. Through the kindness
of the Royal Ontario Museum of Zoology and Palaeontology, cotype material (Kirkwood,
Missouri) has been made available for this purpose.

Female (17 mm): Interantennal lobe of head very broad, corners broadly rounded.
Eyes small, black, irregularly subrotund. Antennae armed with numerous groups of short
setae, particularly on peduncular segments. Antenna 1, peduncular segments 1 & 2 subequal,
3rd not more than half the 2nd, all relatively broad and heavy. Antenna 2, peduncular
segment 4 longer than 5.

Lower lip, outer lobes considerably produced and narrowing laterally almost to a point.
Mandibular palp, outer margin of segment 3 with 3 groups of short setae. Maxilla 1, inner
plate with 9 marginal plumose setae. Maxilla 2, inner plate with facial row of about 10
stout setae diverging obliquely from inner margin. Maxilliped, inner plate bearing 6-7
short apical spine teeth and about 6 marginal plumose setae; palp relatively short, segment 2
nearly as wide as long.

Coxal plate 1 somewhat broadened distally, corners rounded, ventral margin lined with
20-25 short setae. Segment 3 & 4 of gnathopod 1, posterior margins lacking fine pectination

88 THE CaANnapDIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

(pe poe

i —

Figure 11. Crangonyx forbesi (H. & M.) Kirkwood, Missouri. 1. Female, 17 mm (COTYPE).
2. Male, 11.0 mm (COTYPE).

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-WaterR AMPHIPODS 89

(in either sex). Gnathopod 2, coxal plate somewhat narrowing distally, ventral margin
setose; inner margin of dactyl without minute setae. Peraeopod 1 not longer than peraeopod
2; segments 4-6 posteriorly lined with numerous short spines. Peraeopods 3-5 relatively
stout and heavy; bases of each bordered posteriorly with 20-30 fine serrations. Coxal gills on
segments 2-7 inclusive; paired sternal gills on 6, two pairs on segment 7. Median sternal
process on segments 2 & 3. Brood plates not developed in specimens examined.

Pleopods natatory though somewhat reduced; 1 & 2 subequal, 3rd shortest, inner ramus
of all pleopods slightly longer than outer, about 12 times the peduncle, 10-20 segmented
(basally fused), peduncle with 6-7 coupling spines. Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, lateral
corners minutely mucronate, not produced posteriorly. Uropods 1 & 2 relatively short and
heavy, posterior margins lined with numerous spines.

Remarks: ‘The relatively short, stout, heavily setose and spinose antennae,
peraeopods, and uropods, and the reduced pleopods are characteristic of lotic-
water forms such as C. forbesi. The unusual female specimens of “Crangonyx
gracilis” described by Forbes (1876) from southern Illinois may have been this
Species.

Crangonyx obliquus (Hubricht & Mackin)
Eucrangonyx obliquus Hubricht & Mackin, 1940, p. 195, fig. 4 (female only).
Crangonyx obliquus Hubricht, 1948, p. 689 (partim); Cole, 1957, p. 36, fig. 2E (partim).
Distribution and Ecology: ‘The type female was taken from a creek near
Clarksville, Johnson Co., Arkansas, and the species was subsequently recorded
by Hubricht (1943) from Michigan and Indiana south to Louisiana and Georgia
and from Kentucky by Cole (1957).

Remarks: WHubricht (1943), apparently without critical comparison of
type material, has synonymized Crangonyx richmondensis Ellis with C. obliquus
(H. & M.). The writer has not seen the type material of either species. ‘As
originally figured, however, the gnathopods of each are quite unlike and are
strongly suggestive of two fully distinct species. The two species are readily
separable on characters given in the key. In C. obliquus the propodus of
egnathopod 1 is subovate, the palmar margin very oblique and strongly convex,
the posterior margin armed with one group of setae and very short, much less
than half the length of the anterior margin. The posterior border of the carpus
is also very short, armed with only two groups of setae. The propodus of the
second gnathopod is relatively longer, posterior margin not quite half the
length of the anterior margin. Dactyls of both gnathopods are very long,
strongly curved, and armed on the outer margin with three widely spaced
sensory setae. The male has not been described.

Specimens labeled “C. obliquus” from a pond near Ann Arbor, Washtenaw
Co., Michigan, kindly supplied by Mr. Hubricht, were found to be a new
northern race of C. richmondensis (see p. 94). C. obliquus was described from
a stream; C. richmondensis is essentially a species of ponds, sloughs, and their
outflows. On these considerations the lotic-water records of Hubricht (1943)
and Cole (1957) from Illinois, Ohio, Kentucky, Tennessee, Arkansas, and
Missouri are more likely to be the true C. obliquus (H. & M.), whereas those
from sloughs and ponds in S. Carolina, Georgia, Alabama, Mississippi, and
Louisiana are probably C. richmondensis Ellis.

90 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST ~ Vol. 72

Crangonyx serratus (Embody)

? Ampithoe dentata Say, 1818, p. 383.

Eucrangonyx serratus Embody, 1910, p. 299, fig. 1.

Crangonyx serratus Hubricht, 1948, p. 689.

Distribution and Ecology: Known only from sloughs, ponds, and ditches
of Virginia, S. Carolina, and northern Florida; probably occurring as far north
as Pennsylvania in Atlantic coastal drainage systems.

Material Examined: Roadside ditch near Bower’s Hill, Norfolk Co., Virginia, L.
Hubricht coll., Feb. 25, 1945 —5 males (10-11 mm), 4 ovig. females (14-16 mm).

Diagnosis (Figure 20, p. 110): A moderately large, lentic-water species, distinguished
by the deeply serrated posterior margins of the basal segments of peraeopods 3-5. The -
gnathopods in both sexes are also diagnostic; palmar margins long, strongly convex, very
oblique, and heavily spinose; dactyls armed on the outer margin with 6-8 well-spaced sensory
setae. Lateral corners of abdominal side plates, particularly 2, strongly produced posteriorly.
Telson much longer than wide, cleft more than half way to the base, and bearing spines
dorsally as well as terminally on each lobe.

The mouthparts are also distinctive but show interesting similarities to those of the
subterranean C. dearolfi Shoemaker (1942). Lower lip, inner lobes relatively well demar-
cated; outer lobes relatively deep. Mandibular palp, terminal segment distally narrowing,
outer margin lined with 5-6 longish setae. Maxilla 1, inner plate with 5-6 marginal setae,
outer plate short, truncated apex bearing 7 slender and weakly pectinate spine teeth.
Maxilla 2, plates short; inner plate broad, with facial row of 4-5 plumose setae set obliquely
to inner margin. Maxilliped, inner plate short, with 3 tall apical spine teeth, and 2-3 short
plumose marginal setae; palp strong, dactyl slender.

Remarks: Say’s “Ampithoe dentata” from fresh-water marshes of South
Carolina is probably referable to immature stages of Crangonyx serratus or
similar species. Mr. C. R. Shoemaker has recently pointed out (personal com-
munication) that Say’s statement (1818, p. 383) “posterior edge of dilated
thighs conspicuously serrated with from eight to twelve teeth” pertains to this
species and not to Hyalella azteca Saussure (to which Stebbing, 1906, tentatively
assigned Say’s species). In H. azteca only the last pair of thighs (basos of
peraepod 5) are serrated, and these not prominently so (Figure 20 (1)).
Although Say defined the genus “Azmpithoe” as lacking an accessory flagellum
in the first antenna (with which Hyalella agrees), it is more than likely that his
material actually did have an obscure, minutely 2-jointed, accessory flagellum,
a character easily overlooked.

Crangonyx richmondensis richmondensis Ellis

Crangonyx richmondensis Ellis, 1940, p. 3, figs. 1, 2.

Crangonyx obliquus Hubricht, 1948, p. 689 (partim).

Crangonyx occidentalis Bousfield, 1956a, p. 141; 1956b, p. 31.

Distribution and Ecology: Shallow margins of sloughs, ponds, bog ponds,
and their outflows; eastern slopes of the Appalachians, Georgia north to Nova
Scotia and Newfoundland, probably also Alabama to Arkansas. Ovigerous
females from December (in the south) to June (in the north); life cycle of
one year, only the immatures found during summer and fall.

Material Examined: NEWFOUNDLAND: Power’s Pond, St. Philip’s, H. J.
Squires, July 4, 1954—5 adult females. NMC. No. 2128; July 18, 1955 — male and
female, plesiotypes. NMC. No. 2126; 11 additional males, 11 females. NMC.
No. 2127; Bog Pond, 3 miles N. of St. Shott’s, Avalon Peninsula. NOVA SCOTIA:
Halifax water supply pond, 3 miles W. of Halifax on Hwy. No. 3; Black R., Kings
Co., stomach of trout.

1958 BousFieELD: FresH-WaTER AMPHIPODS 91

Diagnosis (Figure 12, p. 92; Figure 20, p. 110): As described and figured by Ellis (1940)
with the following characterization: Female (12-14 mm): Mouthparts larger and setation
more strongly developed than in male. Lower lip, outer lobes produced laterally, tips
rounded; inner lobes fairly broad. Gnathopods, setae of ventral margins of coxal plates
short. Peraeopods 3 & 5 subequal, 4th longest; basal segments expanded posteriorly, width
(in peraeopod 5) more than two-thirds its length, posterior margin convex, with 14-18 fine
serrations; segment 5 slightly longer than segment 6; dactyls relatively short, about 30%
of the length of the respective propods. Coxal gills on segments 2-7; paired sternal gills
on segment 6, two pairs on segment 7. Median sternal process on segments 2 & 3. Brood
plates on segments 2-5, smallest on 5.

Pleopods natatory, subequal, 2nd slightly the longest, 3rd shortest; inner ramus about
10% longer than outer, a little more than twice the peduncle; peduncle with 4-5 coupling
spines. Abdominal side plates 2 & 3, lateral corners produced acutely.

Remarks: C. richmondensis is distinguished from C. forbesi by the more
slender and less setose antennae, peraeopods, and uropods; by the more reduced
mouthparts; and by the more prominent lateral corners of abdominal side plates
2 & 3. For reasons previously outlined (p. 89), the writer considers Hubricht’s
synonymy of this species and C. obliquus to be invalid, and regards richmon-
densis as the nominate race of what may prove to be the most widely distributed

species of the genus in N. America.

Crangonyx richmondensis occidentalis Hubricht & Harrison

Eucrangonyx gracilis Saunders, 1938, p. 246, fig. 2a, b; ? Carl, 1953.

Crangonyx occidentalis Hubricht & Harrison, 1941, p. 381, fig. 1.

Distribution and Ecology: Recorded from bog ponds, small lakes, and
their outflows on the Pacific coast of Canada and the United States, from
Washington State, the Fraser valley, and Vancouver Island in the south to
Prince Rupert and the Queen Charlotte Islands in the north. Ovigerous females
from December to July; immatures only during late summer and fall.

Material Examined: BRITISH COLUMBIA: Vancouver I., author coll.,
1955: First Nanaimo L.; Berkeley Stream, Departure Bay, Lost Lake (near P.B.S.),
N.E. end of Clayoquot I. Collections of the Pacific Biological Station (as E. gracilis,
Saunders det.) from: Berkeley stream; Millstream, Nanaimo; Rock City Pond; shallow
roadside pool, 8 miles S. of Nanaimo; Tower L.; Spider L.; Whiteaker’s L., Malahat,
Shawnigan L.; Kennedy L.; near Tofino. Prince Rupert: Moose Creek. Queen
Charlotte Islands, author coll., 1957: Lower Gudal Lake, and lake above Stiu Pt.,
W. Coast Graham I.; stream 4 m. N. Port Clements, Carex marsh at Yakan Pt., and
stream near Lawn Pt., N. & E. coasts of Graham I.; Bog pond at Cape Chroustacheft
and Mosquito Lake, E. side Moresby I. WASHINGTON: Echo L., near Everett
(type locality). Plantation Pond, King Co., C. H. Harrison, May 13, 1939 — 20
adult speciments. NMC. No. 2129.

Diagnosis (Figure 12): Essentially as described by MHubricht and Harrison but
differing from the nominate form of C. richmondensis in the narrower and less serrated
basal segment of peraeopod 5, the shorter third uropods, and by the more deeply cleft and
less spinose lobes of the telson; and from the eastern race Jawrentianus by the more sharply
produced lateral angles of abdominal side plates 2 & 3, the more acutely pointed outer plate
of the maxilliped, and the slightly smaller size at maturity.

Female (13 mm): Lower lip broad, outer lobes apically rounded. Mandibular palp,
segment 2 with about 14 stout setae in two rows on inner margin, segment 3, inner face
with longish setae in small groups near outer margin. Maxilla 1, inner plate small, rounded,
with four marginal plumose setae. Maxilla 2, inner plate short and broad, one or two short
plumose setae on inner face near’ apex. Maxilliped, inner plate very short, obliquely
truncated, with 5 short apical spine teeth and several stiff setae, and 3-4 short plumose

Figure 12. Crangonyx richmondensis occidentalis H. & H. Plantation Pond, King Co., Wash. 1. Female,
13.5 mm. 2. Male, 10.0 mm.
CAabeCnue richmondensis richmondensis Ellis Power’s Pond, St. Phillip’s, Nfld. 3. Female,
.) mm.

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-Water AMPHIPODS 93

Figure 13, Crangonyx richmondensis laurentianus n. subsp. Black L., Gatineau Park, Que. 1. Female
17 mm (TYPE). 2. Male, 11.5 mm (ALLOTYPE). Washtenaw Co., Mich. 8. Female,
16mm. 4. Male, 11 mm.

94 — Tue CanapiANn FieLtp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 72

marginal setae; outer plate short, narrow, somewhat distally tapering and apically rounded,
segment 3 of palp nearly as broad as long.

Propodus of gnathopod 2 tends to be a little broader with fewer posterior and superior
lateral setae than in richmondensis. In Q.C.1. material, superior lateral setae tend to be
irregularly spaced, usually in groups of 2-3, some even single. Brood plates on segments -
2-5, anterior three large, margins with long simple setae, hindmost plate small. Peraeopod
5, width of basal segment less than two-thirds its length (in both sexes), posterior margin
gently convex, with 10-14 fine serrations. Pleopods normal. Abdominal side plates 2 & 3,
lateral corners produced posteriorly as in richmondensis. Telson with broad, shallow,
apical notch, lobes each with 2 (less often 3) apical spines.

Remarks: The writer has noted the close similarity between topotype
material of C. occidentalis, kindly supplied by Leslie Hubricht, mature speci-
mens from Newfoundland, and the figures for C. richmondensis from S.
Carolina given by Ellis (1940). All occur along the shallow margins of small
lakes, particularly in somewhat acid waters. However, minor but consistent
points of difference were noted which, coupled with their nonoverlapping
geographical distributions, provide presently acceptable grounds for subspecific
separation of the two populations.

Crangonyx richmondensis laurentianus n. subsp.

Eucrangonyx gracilis Weckel, 1907, p. 32, fig. 3 (large form).
Crangonyx obliquus Hubricht, 1943, p. 689 (partim).
Crangonyx occidentalis Bousfield, 1956, p. 141 (partim).

Distribution and Ecology: Shallow margins of bog ponds and small,
typically acidic lakes and their outflows; from Michigan and south central
Ontario to western Quebec. Ovigerous females and mature males from April
to June, dying soon after release of young from brood plates.

Material Examined: ONTARIO: Pt. aux Pins, near Sault Ste. Marie, bog pond,
C. S. Holling, May 30, 1950 — 8 males, NMC. No. 2201; Black L., Hwy No. 7, just W.
of Sharbot L., Frontenac Co., author coll. Ont. Dept. Planning & Development
Stream Surveys, 1948, 1950: Moira R. — several stations in the northern (Precambrian
Shield) part of the watershed; Napanee R., 2 miles W. of Varty L., and 5 miles
E. of Moscow. QUEBEC: author collections from: Black L., Gatineau Pk., near
Kingsmere, April 27, 1955 — male, type; female, allotype; 17 adult paratypes. NMC.
Nos. 2102, 2103; and Mud Lake, Gatineau Pk., Fortune L., Gatineau Pk., E. L.
Mills, June 5, 1957. L. a ’?Ours, Mont Tremblant Park, A. Robert, May 24, 1953 —
2 females. NMC. No. 2204. MICHIGAN: Pond on Platt Rd., 0.5 miles N. of
Bemis Rd., Washtenaw Co., L. Hubricht, Apr. 30, 1941 (as C. obliquus) — 46 adult
specimens. NMC. No. 2203.

Diagnosis (Figure 13): Closely similar to the nominate subspecies but typically with
only two apical spines on each lobe of the telson (mature animals of both sexes); abdominal
side plates 2 & 3, lateral corners moderately produced; body and appendages relatively
heavy; size larger at maturity.

Female (14-18 mm): Interantennal lobe of head relatively narrow, corners rounded.
Eye small, black, irregularly elliptical. Antenna 1, peduncular segment 2 longest, 3rd
shortest; flagellum of 25-35 segments; accessory flagellum minutely 2-segmented, as long
as first flagellar segment. Antenna 2, flagellum of 8-10 segments.

Mouthparts tending to reduction of plates and setae. Lower lip, outer lobes bluntly
rounded. Mandibular palp, terminal segment about half as broad as long, outer marginal
setae staggered, not in groups. Maxilla 1, inner plate with 4 marginal plumose setae.
Maxilla 2, plates short and broad, facial row of setae on inner plate virtually obsolete.
Maxilliped, inner plate short and broad, armature as in occidentalis, outer plate small,
bluntly rounded; palp relatively large, segment 2 half again as long as wide, dactyl narrow
throughout.

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-Water AMPHIPODS 95

Antero-ventral and postero-ventral corners of coxal plate 1 each with 5-6 short setae.
Gnathopod 1, posterior margins of segments 3 & 4 with minute scalelike pectinations;
posterior margin of segment 5 with 5-6 clusters of setae; segment 6 (propodus) widest
distally, palmar margin gently convex, slightly oblique, armed with numerous cleft spines,
posterior angle sharp, defined by several closely crowded spines, posterior margin with
about 5 groups of setae; dactyl heavy, inner margin lined with minute setae, closely fitting
palm. Gnathopod 2 larger and more powerful; segment 5 with 7-8 posterior groups of
setae; segment 6 ovate, palm convex, oblique, multispinose, posterior angle with two stout
spines, the larger twice the smaller, tip of dactyl closing between spines at palmar angle;
inner face of propodus with about 6-8 irregular groups of superior lateral setae.

Peraeopods 3-5 long and slender, 4th longest, 3rd and 5th subequal; basos of P 5, width
about three-fourths its length, convex posterior margin with 15-20 conspicuous serrations;
dactyl about one-quarter the length of the propodus. (In brood pouch embryos, peraeopods
4 & 5 are subequal, both larger than peraeopod 3). Brood plates, coxal gills and sternal
gills as in richmondensis.

Inner ramus of pleopods markedly longer than outer, about 23 times the peduncle; outer
margin of peduncle lined with longish setae (most numerous in pleopod 1), inner margin
distally with 3-4 coupling spines. Abdominal side plates, posterior margin shallowly incised
distally; lateral corners, moderately produced on 2, weakly acute on 1 & 3. Uropod 3 short,
outer ramus about twice the peduncle, lateral margins each with 5-6 groups of spines;
inner ramus bearing 2-3 spines on inner distal border. Telson short, cleft nearly one-third
to the base, each lobe terminated by 2 spines (3 in immatures and occasionally in adults),
laterally with minute paired plumose setae.

Male (9-11 mm): Smaller and more slender than female. Antenna 1, flagellum of about
25 segments. Antenna 2 peduncular segments 4 & 5 and the first five segments of the
flagellum with calceoli. Gnathopod 1 much as in female but smaller and less setose. In
gnathopod 2, propodus more slender and palm slightly more oblique, dactyl long and thin.
Peraeopods 3-5, segments 4-7 relatively longer and more slender. Uropod 2, outer ramus
short, curved outwards, a few spines terminally and on lateral margins; no comb spines
present. Uropod 3, inner ramus with only one lateral spine.

Remarks: ‘The present race of richmondensis has been recorded to date
only from the St. Lawrence drainage basin, particularly from small lakes of the
Laurentian Shield, hence the specific name. ‘The present description applies
Closely to the “large form” of Eucrangonyx gracilis (Ann Arbor, Michigan)
described and figured by Weckel (1907) and correctly stated by Hubricht and
Mackin (1940) not to be the true E. gracilis Smith. This large Ontario form
was first specifically recognized (by the writer, 1956) under the name
C. occidentalis H. & H., but from which it is now considered subspecifically
distinct. The listed material from Washtenaw Co., Mich., identified by
Hubricht (1943) as Crangonyx obliquus (H. & H.), is very like Weckel’s Ann
Arbor specimens in the shape and armature of segments 5-7 of gnathopods
1 & 2, and in the telson, but quite unlike the corresponding figures of Hubricht

and Mackin for C. obliquus.
Crangonyx shoemakeri (Hubricht & Mackin)

Eucrangonyx shoemakeri Hubricht & Makin, 1940, p. 198, fig. 6 (partim).

Crangonyx shoemakeri Hubricht, 1943, p. 690 (partim?); Cole, 1957, p. 36, fig. 2F (?).

Distribution and Ecology: Known authentically only from temporary
pools, ponds, and springs near Georgetown, D.C. (type locality); probably in
similar habitats of American Atlantic coastal drainage basins.

Remarks: Hubricht and Mackin (1940, p. 198) note that the row of comb
spines on the outer ramus of the second uropods is present in males from the
District of Columbia but not from Illinois or Oklahoma. In the writer’s

96 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

experience with the genus Crangonyx, the armature of the second uropods in
the male was found to be specifically diagnostic, accordingly the material from
Illinois and Oklahoma represents a species distinct from C. shoemakeri, the
identity of which awaits more complete description of both it and the type of
C. shoemakeri. WHubricht (1943) gives numerous locality records for “C.
shoemakeri” from Michigan, Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Kentucky, and Missouri,
but none from the Atlantic coastal plain, nor does he indicate which of his
material bears comb spines and which does not. Specimens from a spring
stream in Kentucky provided for this study by Leslie Hubricht do not have
the comb spines and, as elsewhere noted (p. 61), are closely similar to Ontario
specimens of C. setodactylus. The probability is great, therefore, that many
of Hubricht’s records, particularly from permanent bodies of water, are not
referable to C. shoemakeri (H. & M.).

Crangonyx setodactylus n. sp.

Eucrangonyx shoemakeri Hubricht & Makin, 1940, p. 198 (partim), non fig. 6g.
Crangonyx shoemakeri Hubricht, 1943, p. 690, (partim); Cole, 1957, p. 36, (partim?).

Distribution and Ecology: Recorded only from three streams in south-
western Ontario and a spring stream in Fayette Co., Kentucky; probably
widely occurring in streams, drains, and ditches of the southern part of the St.
Lawrence and northern regions of the Mississippi and Ohio drainage systems.
Ovigerous females April to June; adults die soon after release of young from

brood pouch.

Material Examined: ONTARIO: Spitler Creek (P. & D. Sta. Y2b4), 4 miles
west of Norwich, Oxford Co., E.L.B., May 29, 1957— Male, type; female, allo-
type; 3 ovig. female paratypes. NMC. Nos. 2104, 2105; Stony Creek (P. & D.
Sta. Y3tl), 4 miles W. of Tillsonburg, Oxford Co., E.L.B., May 29, 1957—2 males,
14 females, NMC. No. 2197; Same station, P. & D. stream survey, June, 1955 —1
female (17 mm). NMC. No. 2196; Nith R., tributary near Amulree, 10 miles N.E.
Stratford, Perth Co., E.L.B., May 29, 1957—2 ovig. females, NMC. No. 2198.
KENTUCKY: Spring near Bryan Sta., 0.3 miles E. of Eastern Road, N.E. of Lexing-
ton, Fayette Co., L. Hubricht, April 25, 1941 — 24 males, 28 ovig. females. NMC.
No. 2199. :

Diagnosis (Figure 14): A rather large species of the shoemakeri group having strongly
toothed palmar and dactylar margins in the gnathopods in the female but distinguished
by characters given in the key (p. 6).

Female (10.5-17 mm): Eyes rather small, subrotund, black. Antenna 1, flagellum of
22-28 segments; accessory flagellum shorter than Ist flagellar segment. Antenna 2, combined
lengths of subequal peduncular segments 4 & 5 less than peduncle of antenna 1, flagellum of
10-11 segments.

Lower lip, inner lobes weak. Mandibular palp, outer margin of segment 3 with 2
proximal and 1 distal groups of setae. Maxilla 1, inner plate with about 8 marginal setae.
Maxilla 2, inner plate with oblique facial row of 8-9 setae; outer plate rather narrow.
Maxilliped, inner plate with 3-4 terminal spine teeth and 4-5 inner marginal plumose setae;
outer plate blunt-rounded, lateral margins parallel; palp rather slender.

Coxal plate 1, lower margin with about 12 short setae. Gnathopod 1, segment 5 with
small free posterior margin bearing 2 groups of long setae; segment 6 (propodus) subquadrate,
palmar margin slightly concave, bearing 12-15 cleft spines on each side and about 6 groups
of long setae on posterior margin; posterior angle with one large and two small spines on
outer side, 5 small spines on inner; dactyl stout, moderately curved. Gnathopod 2 similar
but larger, segment 6 subrectangular, palmar margin more oblique, straight or very slightly
convex, posterior angle with 2 small spines behind large spine on outer side, and 3 corres-

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-WaterR AMPHIPODS 97

Figure 14, Crangonyx setodactylus n. sp. Spitler Creek, Oxford Co., Ontario. 1. Female, 13.5 mm
(TYPE). 2. Male, 8.5 mm (ALLOTYPE).

98 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

ponding small spines on inner side; superior lateral setae singly or doubly inserted. Brood
plate large, oval, equal in length to gnathopod 2.

Peraeopod 2, coxal plate about as wide as deep, postero-ventral margin setose.
Peraeopod 3, brood plate very short and broad. Peraeopod 5, basal segment half again as
long as broad, posterior margin with about 10 weak serrations. Dactyls of all peraeopods
usually with 2-3 short bristles on inner margin. Coxal gills of moderate size. Paired
sternal gills on segment 6, two pairs on 7.

Pleopods, inner ramus distinctly longer than outer, about 3 times the peduncle.
Abdominal side plates 1-3, lateral corners minutely acute and not prominently produced,
lower margins of 2 & 3 with a few spines. Uropod 2 short and stout, outer ramus a little
shorter than inner; uropod 3, outer ramus barely longer than peduncle, inner ramus with 1-2
spines distally. Telson broader than long, shallowly cleft; lobes each with 3 terminal spines.

Male (8.5 mm): Smaller and more slender than female. Antenna 1, flagellum of 24
segments. Antenna 2, flagellum of 9 segments; anterior margins of peduncular segments
4 & 5 each with 5 calceoli. Gnathopod 1, palmar margin of propodus convex, oblique,
posterior angle with 4 spines on outer and inner margins, tip of slender dactyl reaching
almost to most posterior spines of palmar margin. Gnathopod 2, propodus more elongate,
inner face with about 5 singly or doubly inserted superior lateral setae. Uropod 2, inner
margin of outer ramus with 1 and outer margin with 4 short spines. Uropod 3, outer ramus
slender, longer than peduncle; inner ramus unarmed.

Remarks: The presence of 2-3 small stiff setae on the inner margin of the
dactyls of the peraeopods is a prominent diagnostic character, hence the specific

name setodactylus.

Crangonyx minor n. sp.

Eucrangonyx gracilis Hubricht & Mackin, 1940, p. 199 (partim).
? Crangonyx gracilis gracilis Hubricht, 1943, p. 691 (partim).

Distribution and Ecology: Recorded from hard-water streams, ditches,
drains, and sloughs of southwestern Ontario and Missouri, but probably widely
occurring in the east-central United States. Ovigerous females April to June.

Material Examined: ONTARIO: Stony Creek, 4 miles W. of Tillsonburg,
Oxford Co., (P. & D. Sta. Y3t1), E.L.B., May 29, 1957— Male, type; female, allo-
type; 5 male and 14 ovig. female paratypes. NMC. Nos. 2101, 2133, same station
P. & D. stream survey, summer, 1955 — 1 ovig. female; also E.L.B., Aug. 30, 1956 —
several immatures; Spitler Creek (P. & D. Sta. Y2b4), 3 miles N.W. of Springford,
Oxford Co.; Horner Creek (P. & D. Sta. S1b2), 4 miles E. of Shakespeare, Oxford
Co.; Nith River (P. & D. Sta. L1m1), Perth Co. MISSOURI: Slough near Missis-
sippi R., 1 mile from Grimsby, St. Louis Co., L. Hubricht, April 25, 1938 — 3 males,
1 ovig. female. NMC. No. 2136.

Diagnosis (Figure 15): A small species of the shoemakeri group, distinguished by the
blunt, recessed lateral corners of the abdominal side plates, the slender, finely setose terminal
segment of the mandibular palp, and the heavily spinose anterior margin of the basal segment
of peraeopod 5 in the female.

Female (6.5-9.0 mm): Eyes moderate, deeper than wide, black, close to anterior margin
of head. Antenna 1, peduncular segments successively decreasing in size distally; flagellum
of 19-20 segments. Antenna 2, peduncular segments 4 & 5 slender, subequal; flagellum of
8-9 segments.

Lower lip rather deep, outer lobes distally acute, inner lobes weak. Mandibular palp,
terminal segment minutely setose distally, outer margin with 2 longish setae proximally.
Maxilla 1, inner plate with 6-7 marginal plumose setae. Maxilla 2, inner plate with oblique
facial row of 6 plumose setae. Maxilliped inner plate wth 4-5 apical spine teeth and 3-4
plumose marginal setae; outer plate blunt-rounded; palp slender, nail of dactyl long.

Gnathopod 1, coxal plate lined below with 14-15 setae; propodus subquadrate, palmar
margin distinctly concave, slightly oblique, armed with 16-20 spines on each side, posterior
angle with 4 short spines on outer margin and 6 on inner; posterior margin with about 3

99

BousFieLp: FresH-WaATER AMPHIPODS

1958

1. Female, 8.5 mm (TYPE).

Stony Creek, Oxford Co., Ontario.

2. Male, 5.0 mm (ALLOTYPE).

Crangoynx minor n. sp.

Figure 15.

100 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Wolken

groups of setae; dactyl strongly toothed on inner margin, tip reaching posterior angle.
Gnathopod 2 generally similar but stronger, propodus subrectangular, palmar margin slightly
concave, more oblique; posterior angle with 1 long and 2 short spines on outer side and 6
short spines on inner side; superior lateral setae singly inserted. Brood plate expanded
anteriorly, about as long as gnathopod 2.

Peraeopod 2 slender, postero-ventral margin of coxal plate lined with about 20 setae,
brood plate broad distally, narrowing proximally. Peraeopod 3, brood plate about twice
as long as wide. Peraeopod 5, basal segment relatively narrow, anterior margin with about
15 short spines, posterior margin with 10-13 minute serrations. Dactyls of peraeopods less
than one-third the length of the propods, inner margins with only one small seta at base of
nail. Coxal gills rather large and long. Paired sternal gills on segment 6, two pairs on 7,
the last rather long and lanceolate. Sternal process prominent on segment 2.

Inner ramus of pleopods longer than outer and barely more than twice the peduncle.
Abdominal side plates posteriorly recurved or truncate, not acutely produced; lower margins
with a few spines. Uropod 3, outer ramus short and broad at base, barely exceeding
peduncle in length, inner ramus small, one spine apically. Telson broader than long,
shallowly cleft; lobes each with 3 apical spines.

Male (5.0 mm): Antenna 1, flagellum with 16-17 segments. Antenna 2, flagellum of
6-7 segments. Gnathopod 1 relatively more powerful than in female; propodus distally
broadest, palmar margin more oblique and nearly straight; nail of dactyl short, not reaching
posterior angle. Gnathopod 2 broadening distally, palmar margin oblique, convex, superior
lateral setae (3 only) single inserted. Peraeopods more slender and dactyls relatively longer
than in female. Uropod 2, outer ramus with 3 spines along outer margin, inner margin
unarmed, apex with a group of short spines. Uropod 3, outer ramus more slender and half
again as long as peduncle. Telson cleft half way to base.

Remarks: The species is closely related to C. shoemakeri and C. seto-

dactylus but is much smaller, hence the specific name munor.

Crangonyx rivularis n. sp.

Eucrangonyx gracilis Hubricht & Makin, 1940, p. 199 (partim).

Crangonyx gracilis gracilis Hubricht, 1948, p. 691 (partim).

Distribution and Ecology: Recorded from streams, drains, ditches, and
small ponds in limestone regions of southern and eastern Ontario, probably
throughout the southern part of the St. Lawrence and Ohio river systems. Fre-
quently in small headwater streams and springs that are cool to cold in summer.
Ovigerous females from April to June, dying shortly after release of young.

Material Examined: ONTARIO: Rocky Saugeen R. (P. & D. Sta. 2cl’), small
tributary 4 miles N. of Durham, Grey Co., E.L.B., May 30, 1957— Male, type;
female, allotype; 7 male, 18 ovig. female paratypes. NMC. Nos. 2108, 2169. Also
from the following watersheds (Ont. Dept. Planning & Development & author
collections): Saugeen; Thames; Horner; Little Otter; Stony; Spitler; Venison (Big
trib.); Credit (Orangeville); Drilled well, 85 ft., McCarthy Rd., Uplands (south of
Ottawa), E.L.B., Feb. 13, 1957 —2 immature males, 3 immature females.

Diagnosis (Figure 16): A small species of the gracilis group having weakly spinous
palmar margins of the propods of the gnathopods in the female but distinguished by the
nearly truncate, weakly acuminate lateral corners of the abdominal side plates, the weakly
serrated posterior margin of the basos of peraeopods 3-5, the presence of grouped (rather
than singly inserted) setae on the posterior margin of the propodus of gnathopod 1 in both
sexes, the relatively numerous small cleft spines at the posterior angles of the propods of the
gnathopods, and the numerous short, stout, widely spaced spines on the outer ramus of
uropod 2 in the male.

Female (5.5-7.0 mm): Eyes oblong, black, anterior. Antenna 1, flagellum of 19-20
segments; accessory flagellum longer than first joint of primary flagellum. Antenna 2,
peduncular segment 4 slightly longer than 5; flagellum of 8-9 segments.

1958 BousFIELD: FRESH-W ATER AMPHIPODS 101

—S
ae

ZB

oS

Figure 16. Crangonyx rivularis n. sp. Rocky Saugeen R., Station 2cl’, Grey Co., Ontario. 1. Female,
6.0 mm (TYPE). 2. Male, 4.5 mm (ALLOTYPE).
Rocky Saugeen Station 3G2e, northwest of Durham, Ontario, 3. Female, 6.5 mm.

102 Tue CaANnapDiIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Lower lip, outer lobes rather deep; inner lobes weak. Mandibular palp relatively
short, 3rd joint finely setose distally, outer margin proximally with one long seta. Maxilla 1,
inner plate with four marginal plumose setae; palp short. Maxilla 2, inner plate with oblique
facial row of 5 plumose setae. Maxilliped, inner plate with 3 apical spine teeth and 3-4
plumose marginal setae; outer plate short, blunt.

Coxal plate 1, lower margin with about 8 setae. Gnathopod 1, segment 6 subquadrate,
palmar margin slightly convex, nearly perpendicular, bearing a few weak spines on each side,
posterior angle with large spine and 2-3 smaller spines on outer side, 4-5 small inner spines;
dactyl, inner margin with several setae, nail long. Gnathopod 2 similar but longer, propodus
subrectangular, palmar margin more oblique, posterior angle with one large and 2-3 small
spines on outer side, one large and 3-4 small spines on inner side; superior lateral setae
singly inserted.

Peraeopod 2, coxal plate with about 16 marginal setae. Peraeopod 3, brood plate short,
broad. Peraeopod 5, basos half again as long as broad, anterior margin with about 8 spines,
posterior margin with 10 weak serrations; dactyls of peraeopods 3-5 about 35-40% as long
as respective segment 6. Paired sternal gills on segment 6, two pairs on 7. Sternal process
on thoracic segment 2.

Inner ramus of pleopods the longer, about twice the peduncle. Abdominal side plates,
lateral corners quadrate or recurved, weakly acuminate, not produced posteriorly, a few
short spines along lower margins. Uropod 3, outer ramus broadly tapering, nearly twice the
peduncle; inner ramus small, one marginal spine. Telson as broad as long, shallowly cleft,
lobes each with 2-3 long apical spines.

Male (3.5-4.5 mm): Very small and slender. Antenna 1, flagellum of 15-16 segments.
Antenna 2, flagellum of 6 segments. Gnathopod 1 relatively larger and more powerful;
palmar margin of propodus more oblique, armed throughout with strong spines; setae of
posterior margin inserted singly or in groups; dactyl without setae along inner margin
except at base of nail, tip barely reaching spine group at posterior angle. Gnathopod 2,
propodus distally widening, palmar margin oblique, convex, lined throughout with strong
spine teeth. Uropod 2, outer ramus nearly straight, apex and distal margins lined with well-
spaced short spines. Telson cleft one-fourth to the base.

Remarks: This species appears to be the dominant form of small streams
and springs in hard-water regions, hence the specific name rivilaris. In slightly
larger females from P. & D. station 3g2e, Rocky Saugeen R., the small spines
at the posterior angles of the propods of the gnathopods are more numerous,
and the setae on the posterior margins are usually in groups of 3-4. Lobes of

telson each frequently with only 2 apical spines.

Crangonyx pseudogracilis n. sp.

? Crangonyx gracilis Forbes, 1876, p. 6 (partim), Hynes, 1955.

? Melita parvimana Holmes, 1904, p. 506, fig.

Eucrangonyx gracilis Kunkel, 1918, p. 94, fig. 20 (partim); Johansen, 1920, p. 128 (partim);
Hubricht & Mackin, 1940, p. 199, fig. 7 (partim).

Crangonyx gracilis gracilis Hubricht, 1943, p. 691 (partim).

Distribution and Ecology: Recorded from rivers, river mouths, lakes,
sloughs, quarry ponds, dams, and other larger fresh waters that tend to be
somewhat turbid and warm in summer; from southern Ontario, southwestern
Quebec, and Vermont to Missouri; probably throughout the Mississippi drainage
basin, lower part of the St. Lawrence system, and American Atlantic water-
sheds. ‘The writer has seen no material from springs, spring streams, or waters
that are typically cold and clear in summer. Adults breed in spring and
throughout the summer. Frequently taken in company with Gammarus
fasciatus and Hyalella azteca, though less often with C. gracilis and G. pseudo-
limmaeus (in northern areas); also taken with C. minor and an undescribed
species in Missouri. Introduced in the British Isles.

1958 BousFiELD: FresH-WaAtTER AMPHIPODS 103

Material Examined: ONTARIO: Napanee R., at Napanee (P. & D. sta. P1a20),
Lennox & Addington Co., June 9, 1950— Male, type; female, allotype,; 3 ovig.
female paratypes. NMC. Nos. 2107, South Nation R., at Hwy. 17, Prescott Co.,
E. Mills, June 9, 1957—1 male. NMC. No. 2190; also author collections from
Champlain Bridge, Ottawa R.; Rideau R., below Hog’s Back, Ottawa; and L. Huron,
mouth of Thessalon R. Additional specimens, Ont. Dept. Planning & Development,
at: Nith R:, at New Dundee, Waterloo Co.; Humber R. near Toronto; South Nation
R., Prescott Co. QUEBEC: Fairy L., near Hull, author coll.; [le Perrot, quarry
pond, J. S. Bleakney, May 28, 1955 —2 males, 2 ovig. females. NMC. No. 2194,
same locality, C. Durden, April 21, 1957—3 males. NMC. No. 2195; Ruisseau, Ile
Bizzard Co., P. Brunel, coll. VERMONT: L. Champlain, Burlington Whf., author
coll. MISSOURI: Slough near Mississippi R., 1 mile S. of Grimsby, St. Louis Co.,
L. Hubricht, April 25, 1938 — 15 males, 14 ovig. females. NMC. No. 2128. WIS-
CONSIN: Ashland, mouth of Fish Creek, auth. coll. 1957.

Diagnosis (Figure 17): Superficially much like C. gracilis Smith in type of gnathopods,
peraeopods, and abdominal side plates, but distinguished by the larger eyes, more setose
peduncle of antenna 2, shorter peraeopod dactyls, presence of comb spines on the outer
ramus of uropod in the male, and presence of two small accessory spines in the outer row
at posterior angle of propodus of gnathopod 2 in the female.

Female (7.5-10.5 mm): Eyes relatively large, oblong, black, anterior. Antenna 1,
peduncular segments 1 & 2 subequal, 3rd much shorter, flagellum of 21-23 segments,
accessory flagellum longer than Ist flagellar segment. Antenna 2, peduncular segments
4 & 5 subequal, slender, setose; posterior margin of 4 with 2-3 groups and of 5 with 4-5
groups of long setae; flagellum of 8 segments.

Mandibular palp slender, outer margin of terminal segment proximally with 2 long
setae. Maxilla 1, inner plate with 5 marginal plumose setae; palp long. Maxilla 2, inner
plate short, broadest in middle, oblique facial row of 7 plumose setae. Maxilliped, inner
plate short, 4 spine teeth on rounded apex, inner margin with 3-4 plumose setae; palp strong,
segment 2 broad.

Coxal plate 1, lower margin with about 8 setae. Gnathopod 1; propodus subquadrate,
palmar margin convex, oblique, lined with weak spines, posterior angle with one large and
two small spines on outer side and five small spines on inner side, posterior margin with
about 6 singly (occasionally doubly) inserted setae; dactyl strong, inner margin with a few
weak setae, nail long, tip closing almost on most posterior spines of palmar margin.
Gnathopod 2 larger; propodus subrectangular, palmar margin convex, oblique, lined on
either side with weak spines, posterior angle with one large and two small spines on outer
side, and one large and three (or four) small spines on inner side, posterior margin with
groups of long setae, 7-8 superior lateral setae singly or occasionally doubly inserted.

Peraeopod 2, coxal plate about as wide as deep, postero-ventral margin with about 13
short setae; segment 2 extending beyond ventral margin of coxal plate by nearly one-fourth
its length. Peraeopod 3, basal segment with 11 weak posterior serrations; brood plate short,
broad. Peraeopod 5, basos with about 16 irregularly spaced, distally pronounced, serrations.
Dactyls of peraeopods 3-5 about one-third the length of corresponding propods. Coxal
and sternal gills not unusual in size or shape.

Inner ramus of pleopods 25% longer than outer and about twice the peduncle.
Abdominal side plates, lateral corners acute, that of 2 strongly produced posteriorly, lower
margin long, armed with a few short spines. Uropod 3, outer ramus half again as long as
peduncle, regularly tapering; inner ramus with one or two marginal spines. Telson longer
than wide, cleft one-third to the base.

Male (4.5-5.5 mm): Eyes large, irregularly oblong, black. Antenna 1, flagellum of
19-20 segments. Antenna 2, flagellum of 6 segments. Gnathopod 1 relatively more
powerful, palmar margin of propodus longer and more oblique than in female, lined on both
sides with strong spines; dactyl short, nail very short, tip barely closing on spines at posterior
angle. Gnathopod 2, propodus distally widest, palmar margin oblique, convex, spines
numerous and strong; dactyl and nail short. Peraeopods 3-5 more slender, and posterior

104 Tue CanabIiAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Ep ,_3

Figure 17. Crangonyx pseudogracilis n. sp. Napanee R., Napanee, Ontario. 1. Female, 8.0 mm
(TYPE). 2. Male, 5.0 mm (ALLOTYPE).

1958 BousFieLp: FresH-Water AMPHIPODS 105

margin of basal segment of 5 with fewer serrations than in female, dactyls about two-fifths
the length of respective propods. Uropod 2, outer ramus curved slightly outwards, inner
margin lined distally with about 10 closely set comb spines. Uropod 3, inner ramus without
marginal spines. Telson cleft nearly half way to base, lobes each with 3 apical spines.

Remarks: This species has been previously confused with the superficially
similar C. gracilis Smith, hence the specific name. Holme’s “Melita parvimana”
(1904) is unquestionably a Crangonyx and very probably pseudogracilis. ‘The
ecological notes and localities of Forbes (1876), Kunkel (1918), and Johansen
(1920) suggest that some of their material was also referable to this species. A
lot of 50 specimens from Grimsby, Missouri, from which the figures of
“Eucrangonyx gracilis” Hubricht & Mackin (1940) were prepared, was found
to contain three species, none referable to Smith’s species. One of the three
species (having comb spines on uropod 2 in the male) the writer is unable to
distinguish from Ontario specimens of C. pseudogracilis and is listed above.
Specimens from the Severn Thames canal, Gloucestershire, England, kindly
supplied by Dr. C. Edwards, have comb spines on uropod 2 in the male and
appear to be C. pseudogracilis.

Crangonyx gracilis Smith

Crangonyx gracilis S. I. Smith, 1871, p. 453; 1874, p. 654 (partim); S. A. Forbes, 1876, p. 6
(partim); ? Cole 1957, p. 36.

Eucrangonyx gracilis Weckel, 1907, p. 32, fig. 3 (small form); Huntsman, 1915, p. 152 (partim),
non fig. 4c; Johansen, 1920, p. 128 (partim); Hubricht & Makin, 1940, p. 199 (partim) non fig. 7.

? Crangonyx gracilis gracilis Hubricht, 1943, p. 691 (partim).

Distribution and Ecology: Recorded authentically from L. Superior, L.
Huron, L. Michigan, L. Ontario, and the Muskoka Lakes; from permanent
ponds, pools, streams and swamps that are cool to cold in summer, in Ontario
and the Great Lakes drainage basin.

Material Examined: ONTARIO: L. Superior, St. Ignace I., S. I. Smith, summer,
1871. 1 male, I ovig. female topotypes; author coll. from L. Huron, mouth of
Thessalon R.; Beattie Pt., Carleton Co., swamp pool and temporary stream; Quarry
pond, Carlingwood Heights, Ottawa; Moira R., small bay 4 miles W. of Kaladar
beside Hwy. No. 7; Small pond W. of Metcalfe, Russell Co., W. Sinclair, May,
1957 — several males and numerous ovigerous females. Additional material from the
following watersheds (P. & D. collections): Big Creek; Little Otter Creek; Spitler
Creek; Stony Creek; Moira. QUEBEC: author coll. from: Black L., Pinks L.,
Gatineau Park, above Hull; Ile Perrot, quarry pond, J. S. Bleakney, May 28, 1955 —
1 male, 2 ovig. females; same locality, spring stream, C. Durden, April 21, 1957 —
8 males.

Diagnosis (Figures 18, 19): ‘The original description of Smith (1871, 1874) is detailed
but not altogether accurate and lacks figures, thus contributing in some measure to
subsequent confusion between this and similarly sized species from elsewhere on the
N. Amercian continent. Through the kindness of C. R. Shoemaker, topotype male and
ovigerous female specimens, collected by Smith in L. Superior, have been made available to
the writer and are herewith redescribed. The figure of the male second uropod (Figure
19) was drawn by Mr. Shoemaker from another topotype specimen.

Female (6.0-10.5 mm): Eyes irregularly subovate, black, close to anterior margin of
head. Antenna 1, peduncular segments 1 & 2 subequal, 3rd much shorter; flagellum of 22-23
segments; accessory flagellum with relatively prominent second joint, about equal to first
segment of primary flagellum. Antenna 2, peduncular segments 4 & 5 subequal, posterior
margin of 4 with only 1 distal group of long setae and 1 or 2 groups of short setae proximally.

Lower lip rather broad and shallow. Mandibular palp short, segment 2 broad; segment

106

Figure 18.

Tue CaNnabiAN FreLp-NaTURALIST Vol. 72

Crangonyx gracilis Smith L. Superior, off St. Ignace I. 1. Female, 6.0 mm (TOPOTYPE).

Pond at Beattie Point, west of Ottawa, Ontario.

2. Female, 10.5 mm.

1958 BousFIELD: FresH-WatTerR AMPHIPODS 107

ZU,

Figure 19. Crangonyx gracilis Smith L. Superior, off St. Ignace I. 1. Female, 6.0 mm (TOPOTYPE).
2. Male, 4.0 mm (TOPOTYPE). Pond at Beattie Point, west of Ottawa, Ontario. 3. Female,
10.5 mm. 4. Male, 6.5 mm.

108 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

3 with one long seta proximally on inner margin. Maxilla 1, inner plate with 4 plumose
setae; palp rather long. Maxilla 2, inner plate with oblique facial row of 5 plumose setae.
Maxilliped, inner plate long, with 4-5 apical spine teeth and 3-4 marginal plumose setae;
palp rather stout, 2nd and 3rd segments subequal.

Gnathopod 1, lower margin of coxal plate with 6-7 longish setae, propodus subquadrate,
palmar margin convex, nearly perpendicular, lined on both sides with weak spines, posterior
angle with one large and two small spines on outer side, and five small spines on inner side,
posterior margin with 6-8 singly (occasionally doubly) inserted setae, dactyl strong, a few
weak setae on inner margin, nail long, tip closing on posterior angle. Gnathopod 2 some-
what larger and more powerful; propod somewhat wider distally, palmar margins more
oblique, convex, posterior angle with one long and one short spine on outer side, and one
long and 2-3 (occasionally 4) short spines on inner side; superior lateral setae singly inserted.

Peraeopod 2, segment 2 not much exceeding lower margin of coxal plate. Peraeopod 3,
basal segment with 6-7 prominent spines on anterior margin and 10-12 weak serrations on
gently convex posterior margin; brood plate relatively long and narrow, with few marginal
setae. Peraeopod 5, basos half again as long as wide, posterior margin convex, with 10 or
more serrations that are not as deep as the contained setae. Dactyls of peraeopods 3-5
about one-third the respective propods. Sternal gill on abdominal segment 1 smallest,
drop-shaped.

Inner ramus of pleopods a little longer than the outer, less than twice the peduncle.
Abdominal side plates, lateral corners acute, that of 2 rather strongly produced; lower margin
rather short, with a few spines. Uropod 2, inner ramus equal to peduncle. Uropod 3,
outer ramus about twice the peduncle, 2-3 groups of spines on lateral margins; inner ramus
bare. Telson about as wide as long, cleft one-third to base, lobes each with 3 long apical
spines.

Male (4.5 mm): Antenna 1, flagellum of 18 segments. Antenna 2, flagellum of 5-6
segments. Gnathopod 1, propodus more powerful, palmar margin more oblique than in
female, lined on both sides with strong spines, dactyl without setae on inner margin except
at base of nail, tip of which attains the posterior angle. Gnathopod 2, propodus widening
distally, palmar margin more oblique, with strong spines. Peraeopods 3-5 slender, dactyls
very long, nearly equal to half the length of the respective propods. Uropod 2, outer ramus
directed laterally, inner margin with one, and outer margin with three, short spines, but
no comb spines. Uropod 3, outer ramus slender, about twice the peduncle. Telson slightly
longer than wide.

Note: Most of the material examined is larger than the topotype specimens and those
from ponds and quarries in the Ottawa region have the telson more deeply cleft (Figure 19)
among other differences.

Remarks: Many published references to the name “Crangonyx gracilis”
lack specifically detailed information on the material; consequently, their precise
determination is not possible. The description and figure of Weckel’s “small
form” from L. Michigan were probably based on the true C. gracilis, whereas her
“large form” and that of Smith (1874, p. 565) from L. Huron were more likely
C. r. laurentianus (p. 94). The locality records of Huntsman (1915) are within
the expected range, but his Fig. 4c showing lateral spines on the telson and a
small terminal joint on the outer ramus of uropod 3 is not referable to Smith’s
gracilis. Vhe records of Johansen (1920) probably all apply to the true C.
gracilis, except possibly those from the Ottawa R., and Fairy L., Hull Park,
and Montreal West, Que., which may have been C. pseudogracilis. Hubricht’s
“subspecies” C. g. gracilis (1943) is based on material from 16 states in eastern
U.S.A., that includes at least three and possibly five or more fully distinct species.
The cave stream form C. g. packardi Smith is, in the writer’s opinion, a valid
full species.

1958 BousrieLp: FresH-WaterR AMPHIPODS 109

Family TALITRIDAE*

Hyalella azteca (Saussure)

Amphithoe aztecus Saussure, 1858, p. 474.

Allorchestes knickerbockeri Bate, 1862, p. 250.

Hyalella dentata Smith, 1874, p. 609, fig. 1.

Lockingtonia fluvialis Harford, 1877, p. 54.

Hyalella knickerbockeri Weckel, 1907, p. 54, fig. 15.

Hyalella azteca Stebbing, 1906, p. 575; Saunders, 1933, p. 245, fig. 1; Shoemaker, 1942b, p. 80, 82;
Bulycheva, 1957, p. 181, figs. 66a, 66b.

Distribution and Ecology: Continental N. America, Mexico north to the
tree lime in Canada and Alaska, Atlantic to Pacific, including coastal islands; in
all permanent fresh water that reaches a monthly mean summer temperature of
more than 10°C. Ovigerous females in spring and throughout the summer.

Material Examined: More than 300 lots of specimens from nearly every province
and state in the study region including the Queen Charlotte and Vancouver Islands
on the west, and Newfoundland, Anticosti, and Prince Edward Island on the east;
from lakes, ponds, sloughs, marshes, estuaries, rivers, streams, ditches, and spring
streams; the most common and most widely distributed North American fresh-water
amphipod crustacean.

Diagnosis (Figure 20): As described by Smith, Weckel, and others. The species
appears to be somewhat variable morphologically.

The typical dorsal abdominal carination in both sexes consists of a small middorsal
posterior projection of abdominal segments 1 & 2, occasionally (as in material from Prince
Edward Island) on abdominal segment 3, and very occasionally also on thoracic segment 7
(Grand Etang, Que.). Two-, three-, and four-spined individuals have been noted in the
same lot from the same body of water (Grand Etang), whereas others (Queen Charlotte
Islands) approach the edentate condition in H. imermis Smith (1875) from Colorado. The
serration of the posterior border of segment 2 of the peraeopods is also variable; mature
males from a lake near Macdiarmid, Ontario, have about 12 such notches in peraeopod 5, 8
or 9 of which might be called conspicuous, although in other localities the serrations may
be stronger and more numerous. In general, material from northern localities has relatively
large eyes and, in the male, the propod of gnathopod 2 is very broad and palmar margin is
almost smoothly convex.

Mouthparts much as in H. curvispina (Shoemaker, 1942b); maxilla 1, inner plate rela-
tively short and broad, bearing 2 plumose setae at the very apex; palp of outer plate very
small and finely setose, elongate and minutely 2-jointed in the right maxilla, short-rounded
and 1-jointed in the left. In the female, gnathopod 2 (described by Bate, 1862, as gnathopod
1), segment 2 slender, shallowly sigmoid in outline, anterior margin not expanded; segment
4 produced a little posteriorly, lobe armed with several spines and rows of small pectinate
scales, segment 5, posterior distal lobe armed with a comblike row of about 15-20 short
spines; segment 6 long and slender, produced postero-distally beyond base of short, curved
dactyl which closes in semichelate fashion against the oblique palm and approaches the
weakly chelate or ‘mittenlike’ condition seen in the land-dwelling Talitridae (Orchestia,
etc.). Coxal gills on segments 2-7, double on 2-6. Brood plates large, triangular; margins
armed with numerous hooked bristles that interlock with those of neighboring plates.

Remarks; Yor reasons previously stated (p. 90), “Ampithoe dentata” Say
1818 is more properly placed in the synonomy of Crangonyx serratus (Embody),
rather than in Hyalella azteca as first suggested by Stebbing (1906).

*Bulycheva (1957) has promoted the Talitridae to superfamily rank (Talitroidea) containing three
families (Hyalidae, Talitridae, Hyalellidae), the last of which Hyalella azteca is the type.

Figure 20.

Hyalella azteca (Saussure)
7.0 mm.

Lake near Macdiarmid, Nipigon Prov. Pk., Ontario.
Crangonyx serratus (Embody) Bower's Hill, Norfolk Co., Virginia.
Crangonyx richmondensis richmondensis Ellis

10 mm. 4. Female, 13.5 mm.

1. Female,

2. Male, 12 mm.

Power’s Pond, St. Phillip’s, Nfld. 8. Male,

1958 BousFIELD: FresH-WatTER AMPHIPODS 111

Family COROPHITIDAE

Corophium spinicorne Stimpson

Corophium spinicorne Stimpson, 1857, p. 514; Shoemaker, 1949, p. 74, fig. 6 (and synonomies );
Barnard, 1954, p. 36; Carl, 1987, p. 450.

Distribution and Ecology: \Low-brackish and tidal fresh water of bays and
estuaries of the American Pacific coast, from southern California to Alaska;
frequently encountered at the mouths of small fresh-water brooks in company
with Anisogammarus spp. and Paramoera columbiana, above the reach of all but
the very highest tides. Ovigerous females, March to August; life span probably
of one year.

Material Examined: BRITISH COLUMBIA: Queen Charlotte Islands, author
coll., 1957: W. coast Graham I., stream mouth near Stiu Pt., N. side Gudal Bay, and
S. side Gudal Bay, Cartwright Sound; also stream W. of Queen Charlotte City,
Graham I., and N. side Copper Bay, Moresby I. Vancouver I., author coll., 1955:
Quisitis Pt. (Ucluelet); Long Beach, N.W. end Wickaninnish Bay, above HW
pools, Goldstream R., head of Finlayson Arm; stream mouths at Comox Bay, Nanoose
Bay, Departure Bay, and Ladysmith Harbour. B.C. Mainland, author coll., 1955;
Emmond’s Beach and Kelly Bay, near Powell River.

REFERENCES

ApamsTong, F. B. 1928. Relict amphipods
of the genus Pontoporeia. Trans. Amer.
micr. Soc. 47:336-368.

Barnarp, J.L. 1952. Some amphipods from
Central California. Wasmann J. Sci. 10:
9-36.

1954. Marine Amphipoda of Ore-
gon. Ore. St. Monog. Zool. No. 8.

Bate, C. S. 1862. Catalogue of the speci-
mens of amphipodous Crustacea in the
collections of the British Museum. Lon-
don, Taylor and Francis.

Bazixatova, A. R. 1945. Les amphipodes
du Baikal (in Russian. French summary).
Trav. Sta. limnol. Lak Bajkal. No. 11.

Buaxe, C. H. 1933. Crustacea. Biological
survey of the Mount Desert region, Part
5. Philadelphia, Wistar Institute of Ana-
tomy and Biology.

BousFietp, E. L. 1955a. Studies on the
shore fauna of the St. Lawrence estuary
and Gaspe coast. Bull. nat. Mus. Canada.
136:95-101.

1955b. Ecological control of the
occurrence of barnacles in the Miramichi
estuary. Bull. nat. Mus. Canada. No. 137.

1956a. Studies on the shore Crus-
tacea collected in eastern Nova Scotia and
Newfoundland, 1954. Bull. nat. Mus.
Canada. 142:127-152.

1956b. Malacostracan crustaceans
from the shores of western Nova Scotia.
Proc. N. S. Inst. Sci. 24:25-38.

1958. Ecological investigations on
shore invertebrates of the Pacific coast of

Canada. Bull. nat. Mus. Canada. 147:
104-115.
Burycueva, A. 1957. The sea fleas of the

USSR and adjoining waters (in Russian).
Keys to the Fauna of the USSR. Zool.
Inst. Acad. Sci. USSR. No. 65.

Carausu, Serciu. 1943. Amphipodes de
Roumanie I. Gammarides de type Cas-
pian. Monographia Institutul de Cercetari
Piscicole al Romaniei. No 1. Bucharest.

, E. Dospreanu, and C. MANOoLACHE.
1955. Amphipoda. Forme salmastre si de

apa dulce. Fauna Republicii Populare
Romine. Crustacea. IV (4).

Cart, G. C. 1937. Flora and fauna of
brackish water. Ecology 18:446-453.
1953. Limnobiology of Co-
wichan Lake, British Columbia. J. Fish.
Res. Bd Canada. 9:417-449.

—————, and C. J. Guicer. 1951. Notes on
the flora and fauna of Triangle Island,
B.C. Rep. prov. Mus. nat. Hist. Anthrop.
1950.

, and . 1956. Notes on the
flora and fauna of Bunsby Islands, B.C.
Rep. prov. Mus. nat. Hist. Anthrop. 1956.

Cremens, H. P. 1950. Life cycle and
ecology of Gammarus fasciatus Say. Ohio
State Univ. Abstr. Doct. Diss. 61:89-96.

112

Corr, G. A. 1957. Some epigean isopods
and amphipods from Kentucky. Trans.
Ky Acad. Sci. 18 (2-3) :29-39.

Dunpar, M. J. 1954. The amphipod Crus-
tacea of Ungava Bay, Canadian eastern
Arctic. J. Fish. Res. Bd Canada. 11:700-798.

Eris, T. K. 1940. A new amphipod of the
genus Crangonyx from South Carolina.
Charleston Mus. Leafl. 13 (3) :3-8.

Empopy, G. C. 1910. A new fresh-water
amphipod from Virginia with some notes
on its biology. Proc. U.S. nat. Mus.
38:299-305.

Forses, S. A. 1876. List of Illinois Crus-
tacea. Bull. Ill. Lab. nat. Hist. 1:6.

Guryanova, E. F. 1951. Amphipoda-Gam-
maridea of the seas of the USSR and ad-
joining waters (in Russian). Keys to the
Fauna of the USSR. Zool. Inst. Acad.
Sci. USSR. No. 41.

Harrorp, W. G. W. 1877. Description of
a new genus and three new species of
sessile-eyed Crustacea. Proc. Calif. Acad.
Sci. 7:53-55. :

Hay, W. P. 1902a. Observations on the
crustacean fauna of the region about Mam-
moth Cave, Kentucky. Proc. U.S. nat.
Mus. 25:225-236.

1902b. Observations on the crus-
tacean fauna of Nickajack Cave, Tennessee,
and vicinity. Proc. U.S. nat. Mus. 25:417-
439.

Henson, EF. B. 1954. Pontoporeia affinis var.
brevicornis in Cayuga Lake, N.Y. Ecology
35:579.

Hircucock, H. B. 1949. Caves in Eastern
Canada. Bull. nat. Speleol. Soc. 11:60-63.
Hormes, S. J. 1904a. Amphipoda of
southern New England. Bull. U.S. Bur.

Fish. 24:457-529.

1904b. Amphipod crustaceans of
the expedition. Harriman Alaska Ser.
10:233-246.

Husricut, L. 1943. Studies on the Ne-
arctic fresh-water Amphipoda III. Notes
on the fresh-water Amphipoda of eastern
United States, with descriptions of ten new
species. Amer. Midl. Nat. 29:683-712.

———, and J. G. Mackin. 1940. Descrip-
tions of nine new species of fresh-water
amphipod crustaceans and new localities
for other species. Amer. Midl. Nat.
23:187-218.

——,, and C. H. Harrison. 1941. The
fresh-water Amphipoda of Island County,
Washington. Amer. Midl. Nat. 25:330-
333.

Tue CANADIAN FIeLp-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

Huntsman, A. G. 1915. The fresh-water
Malacostraca of Ontario. Contr. Can.
Biol. Il. Fresh-water fish and lake bi-
ology. Sess. Pap. 396. Suppl. 145-163.

Hynes, H. B. N. 1954a. The ecology of
Gammarus duebeni Lilljeborg and its oc-
currence in fresh water in western Britain.
J. Anim. Ecol. 23:38-84.

1954b. On the identity of Gam-
marus tigrinius Sexton 1938. Nature, Lond.
174:563.

1955. The reproductive cycle of
some British fresh-water Gammaridae.
J. Anim. Ecol. 24:352-387.

JouANsEN, F. 1920. The larger fresh-water
Crustacea of Canada. Can. Field - Nat.
34:132.

1922a. Fresh-water Amphipoda
from Canada and Newfoundland. Can.
Field Nat. 36:177-182.

1922b. The crustacean life of
some arctic lagoons, lakes, and ponds.
Rep. Can. arct. Exped. VII. Crustacea.
Pr. N.

Kinng, O. 1954. Die Gammarus-Arten der
Kieler Bucht. Zool. Jb., Syst. 82:405-424.

Kunxet, B. W. 1918. The Arthrostraca of
Connecticut. Bull. Conn. geol. nat. Hist.
Surv. 26: 1-261.

Larkin, P. A. 1948. Pontoporeia and Mysis
in Athabaska, Great Bear, and Great Slave
lakes. Bull. Fish. Res. Bd Canada. 78:1-33.

NicHotson, H. A. 1873. Contributions to
a fauna Canadensis, etc. Can. J., n.s. 8:490.

Norton, A. H. 1909. Some aquatic and
terrestrial crustaceans of the State of
Maine. Proc. Portland Soc. nat. Hist.
2:247.

PENNAK, R. W. 1953. Fresh-water inver-
tebrates of the United States. Amphipoda.
p. 435-446. New York, Ronald Press.

PenTLAND, E. S. 1930. Controlling factors
in the distribution of Gamzmarus. Trans.
Amer. Fish. Soc. 60:1-6.

Sars, G. O. 1895. Crustacea of Norway.
Vol. 1. Amphipoda. Christiana and
Copenhagen, Cammermeyers.

Saunpers, L. G. 1933. Fresh-water amphi-
pods of Vancouver Island. Contr. Can.
Biol. 8:243-249.

Say, Tuomas. 1818. An account of the
Crustacea of the United States. J. Acad.
nat. Sci. Philad. 1:37-401.

SEGERSTRALE, S. G. 1937. Studien tiber die
Bodentierwelt in Sudfinnlandischer Kisten
gewassern. III. Zur Morphologie und
Biologie des Amphipoden Pontoporeia

1958

affinis nebst einer Revision der Pontoporeia
Systematik. ArsVuosik Soc. Sci. fenn.
Commentat. Biol. 7 (1) :5-183.

1947. New observations on the
distribution and morphology of the am-
phipod Gammarus zaddachi Sexton with
notes on related species. J. Mar. biol. Ass.
U. K. 27:219-244.

1950. The amphipods on the
coasts of Finland—some facts and pro-
blems. ArsVuosik. ‘Soc. Sci. fenn. Com-
mentat. Biol. 10(14) :1-28.

1954. The fresh-water amphi-
pods Gammarus pulex (L.) and Gammarus
lacustris Sars in Denmark and Fennos-
candia—A contribution to late and post-
glacial immigration history of the aquatic
fauna of N. Europe. ArsVuosik. Soc. Sci.
fenn. Commentat. Biol. 15 (1) :1-91.

Sexton, E. W. 1939. On a new species of
Gammarus (tigrinus) from Droitwich
district. J. Mar. biol. Ass. U. K. 23:543-

551.

SHEFFER, L., and W. G. Rosrinson. 1939.
A limnological study of Lake Washington.
Ecol. Mon. 9:95-143.

SHOEMAKER, C. R. 1920. Amphipods. Rep.
Can. arct. Exped. Vol. 7, Crustacea. Part
E.

1930. The Amphipoda of the
Cheticamp expedition of 1917. Contr.
Can. Biol., n.s. 5:221-359.

1940. Notes on the amphipod
Gammarus minus Say and description of
a new variety, Gammarus minus var.
tenuipes. J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 30:388-394.

1942a. Notes on some American
fresh-water amphipod crustaceans with
descriptions of a new genus and two new
species. Smithson. misc. Coll. 101(9).

1942b. A new species of Amphi-
poda from Uruguay and Brazil. J. Wash.
Acad. Sci. 32:80-82.

BousFieLp: FresH-WaAtTER AMPHIPODS 113

. 1944. Description of a new
species of Amphipoda of the genus Aniso-
gammarus from Oregon. J. Wash. Acad.
Sci. 34:89-93.

1949. The amphipod genus Coro-
phium on the west coast of America. J.
Wash. Acad. Sci. 39:67-82.

. 1955. Amphipoda collected in
the Arctic Laboratory, Office of Naval
Research, Point Barrow, Alaska, by G. E.
MacGinitie. Smithson. misc. Coll. 128(1).

SmitH, S. I. 1871. Preliminary report on
dredgings in Lake Superior. Amer. J.
Sci., 3d Ser. I1:453.

1874. The Crustacea of the fresh
waters of the United States. A symposium
of higher fresh-water Crustacea of North
United States. Rep. U.S. Fish. Comm.
(1872-3) 2: 651.

1875. Report on the amphipod
crustaceans of Colorado. Ann. Rep. U'S.
geol. Surv. Territories for 1873 (1875):
608-611.

STEPHENSEN, K. 1944. Some Japanese am-
phipods. Vidensk. Medd. dansk naturh.
Foren. Kbh. 108:25-88.

Tartersatt, W.M. 1922. Amphipoda with
notes on additional species of Isopoda.
Zoological results of a tour in the Far
Fast. Mem. Asiat. Soc. Beng. 6:435-459.

Ueno, M. 1933. Three noticeable fresh-
water Crustacea of Hokkaido. Annot.
zool. Jap. 14-15:115-122.

WeckeEL, Apa. 1907. The fresh-water Am-
phipoda of North America. Proc. U.S.
nat. Mus. 32:25-58.

Waise, Jo G7 1953. esbhemlite cycle and
ecology of Gammarus troglophilus Hu-
bricht and Mackin. Master’s Thesis, Sth.
Ill. Univ. Libr., Carbondale, Il.

1957. The spring cave-fish
Chologaster papilliferus in Illinois. Ecol-
ogy 38:195-204, |

Received for publication 29 July 1957

114

THe CanabiANn FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

REVIEWS

Fifty Trees of Canada

By J. L. Van Camp. Second ed. Agincourt,
Ontario, The Book Society of Canada,
1956. 64 p. 50 cents.

This booklet will continue to serve its
purpose well in helping the novice to
know the trees. For each species an out-
line drawing and brief statement of
characteristics of the leaf, twig and fruit
are given. All the common trees native in
the area east of the Rockies, the pines,
spruces, elms, oaks, maples, cherries,
basswood, ironwood, tuliptree, etc., are
treated along with two alien species,
Norway spruce and Scotch pine. The
booklet, a primer to the more exhaustive
study of Canadian trees, is designed for
the use of nature groups, boy scouts and
school children in the field.

This second edition is essentially a
reprinting of the first. No changes in the
text have been made and some minor
inconsistencies in detail and typography
have been carried over. A brightly
colored spray of foliage, an artistic repre-
sentation of the national emblem, has
been added to dress up the cover.

W. G. Dore

Insect Life in the Tropics

By T. W. Kirkpatrick. London, New York,
Toronto, Longmans, Green & Co., 1957.
146 fig., 311 p. $6.30.

This book, as stated on the jacket, is
an introduction to the natural history of
tropical insects. Although the author in-
dicates that it is addressed primarily to
interested laymen it will probably appeal
more to advanced amateur or beginning
professional entomologists.

One might expect that a book with
such an intriguing title would be un-
usually colorful, at least in its illustra-
tions. In this case the title hides an intro-
ductory textbook of entomology in
which tropical insect species have been
selected to illustrate the discussions. Fol-
lowing an introductory chapter in which
he defines the tropical environment, the
author touches briefly on the general
structure of insects, classification, de-

velopment, and reproduction. Subsequent
chapters are concerned with locomotion,
food and feeding habits, defence and pro-
tection, insect architecture, and insect
communities. This is a lot to cover in
three hundred pages, and some of the
sections are very skimpy. Most of the
species are common in Africa and in
Trinidad where the author apparently
has had considerable experience. How-
ever, much of the information presented
is obtainable in general entomology text-
books. The writing style is somewhat too
‘textbookish’ for enjoyable reading, but
it is lightened considerably by the per-
sonal nature of the observations and by
the frequent use of appropriate quota-
tions that range from the Biblical to
Ogden Nash.

Unfortunately the author has at-
tempted to steer a middle-of-the-road
path between the popular or semipopular
approach that stimulates the amateur and
the studious writing that informs the
trained worker. The resultant text is not
particularly satisfying from either aspect,
but is slanted toward the professional
category. In some areas, particularly in
the chapter on the general structure of
insects, the subjects are simplified to the
point of error. A number of statements
might be cited in this regard: “This skin,
or cuticle, is composed of chitin”; “The
wings are formed of two layers of thin
membrane strengthened by a framework
of tabular veins”; “Many insects have no
auditory organs and are deaf.” In other
ways the discussions, such as of the dis-
tinctions between parasites and parasi-
toids, the theory of insect mimicry, or
Uvarov’s phase theory of locust migra-
tion, would scarcely be appreciated by the
amateur and might be criticized by the
professional. There is no list of references.
The descriptive classification of insects 1s
inadequate for identification, particularly
by amateurs, and the illustrations, com-
prising black-and-white photographs and
line drawings, are little help in this re-
gard. They serve mainly to illustrate

1958

morphological features.

The preparation of an introductory
guide to tropical insects is a formidable
task and the author, obviously a keen
observer of insect ways, should be com-
mended for attempting it. Certainly such
a guide, more reasonably restricted to the
common species of a definite tropical
region, would be a welcome addition to
the literature. The present volume, it
seems, fills the need in only a small way.

Joun W. ArNnoLp

Flora of the British Isles—IIlustrations,

Part 1

By Sys J. Rores. A companion volume to
the text by A. R. Clapham, T. G. Tutin
and E. F. Warburg. Cambridge, Univer-
sity Press, 1957. 144p. $4.25.

This first instalment of the illustrations
for the new Flora of the British Isles has
been eagerly awaited by the users of
that excellent manual. It contains the
illustrations, in the same sequence as the
text, of all the ferns, the conifers, and the
dicotyledons up to the end of Legumi-
nosae, here called Papilionaceae. The por-
tion of the dicotyledons includes such
important families as Ranunculaceae,
Cruciferae, Violaceae, Caryophyllaceae,
Chenopodiaceae, Geraniaceae and Legu-
minosae but others which North Ameri-
can botanists might expect to find, such
as Salicaceae, Polygonaceae, Saxifra-
faceae and Rosaceae, are not included.

There are 552 illustrations. They are
all line drawings, of rather good quality
and, apart from the character imparted to
them by the artist, are much like those
in earlier British manuals such as the
Handbook of the British Flora by
Bentham and Hooker. The figures are
now reproduced four to a page but per-
haps it is the intention of the publishers
to reprint them when all are completed in
a volume with format comparable to the
text.

The legends consist only of the botani-
cal name, common name, and color of
the flower. As a supplement to the text,
the picture will find much use, but used
separately as a field guide they will be
of little help since descriptive material

REVIEWS 115

indicating the finer diagnostic features is
in many instances necessary.

The Flora is by no means out of place
in the Canadian botanist’s library. Prac-
tically all of our adventive plants, the
weeds of fields and waysides, many
garden plants, and practically all the
constituents of our meadows, lawns and
pastures are included. Indeed, one might
well refer here to see if we do not have
some species at our very doorsteps which
are not properly recognized in current
North American manuals. There are also
included some native North American
plants which have established themselves
in the British flora. W. @ Doss

Using Wayside Plants
By Netson Coon. 2d rev. ed., 1958. Pub-
lished by the author, Box 287, Watertown

72, Massachusetts. 254 p. $3.00.

Man’s long association with plants can
easily be overlooked, especially by city
dwellers. In an age of canned foods and
packaged breakfast cereals, plastics and
decorative mobiles, pills and synthetic
dyes, we are apt to be unaware of the
enduring part that plants can and do play
in our lives. Limiting himself to a
hundred plants Nelson Coon tells us how
they may provide us with profitable use
and fascinating pastime.

Using Wayside Plants is not written
for the acquisitive or the profit-loving
or the queer. Its author is not a faddist.
He gives us rather, from his long and
intimate association with plants, a fresh
look at things that grow and he tells of
ways that our enjoyment of them may
be increased. In addition to accounts of
many common plants that may be used
for food and medicinal purposes the
writer tells of others that are useful for
dyeing, for children’s playthings or for
household crafts. His keen observation
for beauty in wild plants finds decorative
use even in the skunk cabbage. The
author also provides a list of several
shrubs that are worth planting around
the home.

It is doubtful if many readers will want
to spend the time or use the amount of

116 Tue CanapiANn FIeLp-NaATURALIST

gas or electricity needed to make many
of the preparations, but the directions
still provide engrossing reading. One who
is just beginning to learn about plants
will find absorbing interest in every page
and one who is not a novice will find a
nostalgic charm in the book.

Rosert A. HamiLton

The Fishes of Ohio
By Mitton B. TrauTMAN. Illus. keys. Colum-
bus, Ohio U. Press, 1957. 683 p. $6.50.

Many publications have appeared deal-
ing with the fishes of individual states but
this is one of the most ambitious of them
all. It not only describes 160 species but
deals with conditions affecting their
occurrence and distribution and with
ecological changes that have affected
their distribution and abundance.

For each species there is the following
information: (1) a black and white de-
tailed original drawing to scale accom-
panied in many cases by drawings of the
young where they differ in pattern of
markings or in other characters from the
adult, and of diagnostic features useful in
identification, (2) large maps of Ohio
indicating past and present distribution
in the state, (3) smaller maps showing
total North American distribution, (4)
description including characters distin-
guishing the species from others with
which it may be confused, (5) coloration,
(6) usual size and record of weight for
Ohio, (7) hybridization where it occurs,
(8) under Ohio distribution some ac-
count of present and past abundance,
(9) habitat.

Besides more than 800 black-and-white
illustrations, there are seven full-page
color plates showing 21 species.

Keys for identification include an
abundance of detail that should make
them much more useful than most keys,
not only for the nonscientist, but also for
the ichthyologist. The amount of detail
is indicated by the fact that the key to
the species and subspecies covers 40
pages. The key to families is illustrated
with outline drawings.

The thoroughness of treatment is in-

Vol. 72

dicated by the fact that in presenting the
keys not only is there a glossary of tech-
nical terms and directions for the use of
keys but also careful directions for
methods of counting and measuring and
accounts of equipment and materials
necessary for identification and of varia-
tions within species. Features which
often puzzle the nonscientific reader,
such as differences in common names and
changes in scientific names, are discussed.

The accounts of conditions affecting
past and present distribution include an
account of the glacial and early post-
glacial history of Ohio and changes due
to settlement and industry. A useful
feature of these presentations are brief
summaries of the salient features of
changes in geological and historical times.

As a source book of information on the
characters and occurrences of the fishes
dealt with this book is invaluable to
ichthyologists, students, commercial
fishermen, sportsmen and field natura-
lists, not only in Ohio but in many sur-
rounding states and neighboring parts of
Canada. Of the 160 species included more
than one hundred occur in Ontario.
There are, however, in Ontario at least
25 species not found in Ohio, and the dis-
parity between the fish fauna of Ohio
and that of provinces east and west of
Ontario increases with distance.

However, this is not only a work of
reference, it contains a wealth of in-
formation for anyone interested in ani-
mal life. We read for instance that “the
Muskellunge was one of the first species
to become commercially important. Un-
til 1850, the bulk of the commercial catch
was taken by spearing the fishes as they
passed beneath holes in the ice or swam
over riffles and by hauling seines in the
marshes, streams and shallow bays, either
beneath the ice or after it had disap-
peared... . After 1855 fyke, pound and
trap nets, set in the bays and open lake
became increasingly important.”

This is the rich harvest of thirty years
of assiduous and devoted work in pursuit
of knowledge about fishes especially in
Ohio. J. R. Dymonp

1958

The Edge of April, a Biography of
John Burroughs
By Hupecarv Hoyt Swirt. Ill. by Lynd

Ward. New York, William Morrow and

Company, 1957. 316 p. $4.75.

The author of this book has chosen a
very appropriate title. John Burroughs
was born at “the edge of April” and it is
the time of year he most loved.

This is a junior book for age 14 and
up. In it, the author has attempted to
create a living picture of John Burroughs
by writing about selected events in his
life and welding them into a progressive
narrative. It is written in a very easy,
readable style and although the naturalist
is described in the third person, the
reader feels he is reliving Burroughs’ life
and seeing through his eyes the plants,
animals, and people that surrounded him.

The first of the three main parts covers
the period of Burroughs’ life from his
birth on April 3, 1837, to seventeen years
when he broke away from his family to
teach school. It is the best written of the
three and portrays the child, with his
perception and awareness of things
around him, in an acutely vivid manner.
For the reader who has explored a marsh
and found his first spring peeper, chapter
two will hold special enchantment as he
relives this discovery with John Bur-
roughs, age five. The use of the colloquial
expressions and manner of speech used in
the area around the Burroughs’ farm in
the Catskill Mountains of New York in
the 1840’s adds realism to the scenes.

In the second section Burroughs is
seen as a young man. A large part of this
period of his life was spent in Washing-
ton and it was during his stay there that
he met Walt Whitman, who became one
of his closest friends, shared Burroughs’
love of natural history and encouraged
him to write about it. Although this was
an important formative period in Bur-
roughs’ life, the author dwells perhaps
too long on Burroughs’ marital difficulties

REVIEWS 117

and on the events of the war between the
states rather than stressing his love of
natural history which remained his
primary interest throughout this period
and set the future course of his life.

Part three deals with Burroughs’ life
as an established and famous naturalist
and writer. During this period he moved
from Washington to a fruit farm on the
Hudson River where he supervised and
helped to build his own home, Riverby.
This section, which includes excerpts
from some of the naturalist’s writings and
descriptions of his trips in the vicinity of
Riverby, helps recapture the joy of
tramping the country and seeing nature
through the eyes of Burroughs but it
lacks the verve and excitement of dis-
covery described so vividly in the first
section, even though Burroughs ap-
parently retained this capacity to the
time of his death in 1921.

Although the author has admittedly
chosen incidents from the life of John
Burroughs which she thought best illus-
trated the personality of the man, she
has blended them into a life story that
moves along smoothly without obvious
interruption in the first part of the book.
However, in the last section, large gaps
occur as the author tries to cover a lon
and important period of Burroughs’ life
in a short space. Consequently, some of
the continuity is lost and the reader’s
interest may lag periodically. As com-
pensation for the large gaps in this sec-
tion, a bibliography and a list of books
published by Burroughs between the
years 1867 and 1922 are included.

The beautiful illustrations by Lynd
Ward depict scenes, birds, and animals
observed and described by Burroughs.
In some of the scenes, Burroughs him-
self is shown in childhood, youth, young
manhood, and in his later years when he
was familiar to so many readers and
lovers of natural history.

Rutu Horner ARNOLD

118

Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

Letters to the Editor

Request for Information on Monotone
of Chickadee

In the course of a visit to Martha’s Vine-
yard, Massachusetts, during April 12 to 19,
1957, I became impressed by the fact that, in
the vast majority of cases, both notes of the
“fee-bee” call of the Black-capped Chickadee
Parus atricapillus were on the same pitch.
Since the main purpose of my visit to this
island was to search for premature or extra-
limital straggler birds, I made no intensive
study of the chickadees’ “song.” However,
I did determine that the normal version of
the “fee-bee” call, in which the first note is
higher than the second, was distinctly the
exception rather than the rule on Martha’s
Vineyard at the time of my visit.

The purpose of this note is to ask if any
readers of the Canadian Field-Naturalist
have observed Black-capped Chickadees
making a regular practice of uttering their
“fee-bee” call in such manner that both notes
are on the same pitch. I would be particu-
larly interested in learning whether the
species is known to do so in the Maritime
Provinces.

Aaron M. Bace
Dover, Massachusetts

SPECIALIZED

LIGHTWEIGHT
CAMPING AND
MOUNTAINEERING
EQUIPMENT |
ee - =

° SEND FOR OUR NEW :
FREE CATALOGUE .
_ (1958 EDITION) i
over 70 illustrated pages; = |
many in full colour. —

tHomas BLACK anp sons
CANADA e LIMITED
222 STRATHCONA AVE. © OTTAWA e¢ CANADA

Request for Information on Purple
Martin Abandoning Loft

In April 1957 my Purple Martin loft,
situated in the village of Manotick, Ontario,
was duly occupied by the usual complement
of 12 couples in 16 apartments. This par-
ticular loft had been in use for the last 12
years. The first year I was lucky to have
two couples take possession of the loft and
the number has since increased until the full
complement was established.

This year in the middle of July when the
fledglings were fairly well feathered the
parents suddenly deserted the loft and con-
sequently left the young to starve. I took
down the loft in September and found 20
young birds dead. Taking no chances I have
erected a new loft ready for next spring.

One theory advanced is that trees may have
grown sufficiently near the loft to hamper
the flight in taking off and landing. This can-
not be the cause of the desertion as the
fledglings were more than half grown. Be-
sides, there are two good channels leading
to the river, their favorite feeding grounds.

I should like to know of any other lofts
having been so abandoned.

Ottawa, Ontario Bertram A. FAUVEL

A CHECKEISH OF

THE BIRDS
of the

HAMILTON, ONTARIO
REGION

35 for $1.00 10 cents each

Available from:

The Secretary, Hamilten Nature
Club
Box 384, Main Post Office

Hamilton, Ontario

ioe Brits Columbia Bird and Mammal
_ Soeiety

a ty ab British: Columbia, Vancouver 8, B.C.

hi W Bdaianton Bird Club
P; esident, A. Attan; Vice-President, W.R. Sat;

ie _Melilwraith Oraithalogiesl Club,
London, Ont.

st es F. Howarp Keast; President
7. Joop; Vice-President, F.S. Coox, Recording

Nova Scotia Bird Society |

ident, C. R. K. Auten; Vice-President, Dr.
ISON oe ‘Lewis; Secretary-Treasurer, Capt.
a Mortanp, c/o Nova Scotia Museum of
Spring Garden Road, Halifax, N.S.;
oe De. Lroyp B. _MacrHerson.

anuscripts dud be typewritten on one side
ontrarsparent paper measuring 83 by 11 inches.
lors are requested to use at least one given
e. All text matter, including quotations, foot-
, tables, literature references, and legends for
res should be double-spaced. Only those words

nt to appear in italics should be underlined.
very sheet of the manuscript should be numbered.

Ww bster’s New International Dictionary is the
ority for spelling.

y should be listed alphabetically and typed
end of the main body of text. For titles in
mce matter, abbreviations follow the rules in
International Code for the Abbreviation of
Jes of Periodicals and the World List of
_ Scientific Periodicals.

Other abbreviations should be used sparingly.
e better-known terms of measurement follow
‘A Specification Z85-1943 Abbreviations for
cientific and Engineering Terms or the equivalent
f the American Standards Association (Z10.1-

wf ables should be titled and numbered consecu-

ively in arabic numerals. Tables and legends for
ie figures should be placed after the list of
prencss: Each table and all the legends should

) dani: M. D. F. Upvarpy, Dept. of Zoology,

eferences are made by the author-date system.

AFF ILIATED SOCIETIES

‘Provancher Society of Natural History
of Canada
President, J. Kennevy Hux; First Vice-President,
Francois Hamer; Second Vice-President, Ronarp
E. Brats; Secretary-T reasurer, Grorces A. LECLERC,
628 Fraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds
President, J. L. Van Camp; VigesPresiions
J. DELAFIELD, Miss R. B. BLANCHARD; Treasurer,
Miss G. E. Hrsparp; Secretary, Miss Ruty S.
Assott, Senneville, R.R. 1, Ste. Anne de Bellevue,
Que.; Librarian, Mrs. P. H. pu Boutay. :

Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club
President, Dr. WaLteR ToweELL; Vice-President,
Frep BopswortH; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. J. B.

Stewart, 21 Millwood Road, Toronto 7, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society
Honorary President, N. A. M. MacKenzir; Past

President, A. R. Woorron; President, J. J. Ptom-

MER; Vice-President, FRANK SanForp; Honorary
Secretary, J. Y. Neitp; Recording Secretary, Miss
Eruet Fucrer; Program Secretary, JoHN GARDNER;

lah ee Treasurer, FRANK SANFORD; Librarian,

Mrs. S. F
RocErs.

. BRADLEY; Bap of Bulletin, CBW

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

and references in notes should be incorporated

directly in the text.

Illustrations

All figures, including each Fonte of the plates,
should be numbered consecutively in arabic
numerals. The author’s name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower

-left corner of the sheet on which the illustration

appears. ape legend should not be incorporated
in the fi

Line qenee should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines
that are to appear in the reproduction should be
tuled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (4% by 74 inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints

Reprints, with or without covers, may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form which
is attached to the galley proofs.

ee ee : | ge COMP.
| LIBRARY

The CANADIAN cE

‘RAVENS!

~ eaten ee

£ the Byron Bog in Southwestern Ontario, II Wham W. Jupp 119

ns on the Lesser Snow Goose eure Grounds, Egg
, Banks Island Uae Fors H. McEwen 122

wa, Ontario SHERMAN BLEAKNEY 128

nm ae from Northerh Canada, Ill
‘ J. Watton Groves, Sueia C. Tomson, and Maria Pantipou§ 133

Psebarion: and Population of the Starling in
p Nev foundland Salta Lesuiz M. Tuck 139

ti n of a Short-tailed Weasel Capturing a Chipmunk Row .ey Frira 144
ti ms of the Mocking-bird in Eastern Ontario Row tey Frira 145
| axwings at Churchill, Manitoba Eva Beckett 145

. of the Harvest Mouse in British Columbia James A. Munro 146

pa es ee ee } BR Sieman 147

147

a a HC aiobe == The Mew Way of the Wilderness — The Snakes of
n Oh The BBC Naturalist

1 Nat. | Vol. 72 | No. 3 | p. 119-150 | Ottawa, July-September 1958

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

FouNDED IN 1879

The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of nature, 1
encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observations |
all branches of natural history. The patron is His Excellency, the Right Honorable Vin-
cent Massey, C.H., Governor General of Canada. The club is a corporate member of
the Federation of iene Naturalists. <

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

Loris S, RussELL, President, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario
Epwarp L. Bousriexp, First Vice-President

J. SHERMAN BLEAKNEY, Second Vice-President

Raymonp J. Moore, Treasurer, Science Service Building, Ottawa, Ontario.

A. W. F. Banrierp, Secretary, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Oe
I. L. Conners, C. F RANKTON, Auditors

Mrs. Joun W. Arnotp, Miss ANNE Bannine, Miss Anna Brown, Miss CuaR101
Ditt, Mrs. Joun Hawxespripce, Miss VIoLET Humeuriss, Miss Paving SnuRE, M1
Mary STuaRT, [THE REVEREND F. E. Banim, Messrs. R. M. ANDERSON, J. W. Arno
W. K. W. BALpwin, D. R. Beckett, B. Bown, A. E. Bourcuienon, K. Bowzes, A. W,
Cameron, W. J. Copy, Ted Conners, W. G. Dore, C. Frankton, R. Frits, J. A
Gittetr, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, l. W. Groves, R. A. Hamutton, W. I. Intima
W. #H. LANCELEY, H. Lrovp, W. W. Mair, H. Mansuatt, D. A. Munro, A. E. Porsitp, —
P. A. Ruppett, D. B. O. Savitz, H. J. Scoccan, G. W. SiNcLAIR, Vv. E. F, SOLMAN. _

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Science Service Building, Ottawa, Ontario

Rogert A. Hamirton, Editor W. J. Copy, Business cs Maison -
Associate Editors: F. J. ALcock (Geology), Joun W. Arnoxp (Entomology), W. A. BE
(Paleontology), J. SHerman Bieakney (Herpetology), Austin W. Cameron (Mam
malogy), WiLL1aM G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymonp (Ichthyology), W. Earw GOoDFRE
(Onnealoe)) A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), A. LaRocqur (Conchology).

The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Naturalis
Club with the assistance of affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manuscr.
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of n
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the most
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Adverti
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACTIO
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879, 1886, and the OTTAW.
NATURALIST, 1886-1919, are obtainable from the une manager.

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION :

The annual membership fee of $3.00 covers subscription to the journal. Instituti
however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current numbe
of regular issues are ninety cents. Money orders should be made payable to the Ott
Field-Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of change of address a d
also be sent to the treasurer. a

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario

i.
}

?

The @anadian Field ae

VOLUME 72 JULY-SEPTEMBER 1958 Number 3

STUDIES OF THE BYRON BOG IN SOUTHWESTERN
ONTARIO

Il. THE SUCCESSION AND DURATION OF
BLOOMING OF PLANTS’

Wiiiiam W. Jupp

Department of Zoology, University of Western Ontario
London, Ontario

Tue Byron Bog near London, Ontario, has been described by Judd (1957)
and included in that description is an account of the zonation and distribution
of the vegetation. During 1956 a study of the succession and duration of the
blooming of twenty of the predominant plants in the bog was undertaken.
These are all plants mentioned by Judd (1957) and represented by sheets in
the herbarium of the writer and in the herbarium of the Department of Botany,
University of Toronto. The method used in the study was to select plants
of each species and to make a count each day of the number of flowers in bloom
on the selected plants. The plants were selected while the flowers were still
in bud except for a few cases when the species was not discovered until
blooming had begun. The sample and number of plants chosen for use in
counting flowers, as well as the definition of blooming of flowers of each
species, are indicated in the following account.

The results of the study are presented in Figure 1, showing the period of
blooming and the date of appearance of the maximum number of blooms for
each species. The series of three dates, mentioned for each species in the
following account, are those of the first blooming, the maximum blooming and
the last blooming respectively. The figure in brackets following the date of
maximum blooming is the number of flowers in bloom, on the selected plants,
on that date.

LEATHERLEAF Chamaedaphne calyculata (L.) Moench. Flowers on three
_ branches of shrubs; opening of corolla to eae or dropping of corolla:
?>—May 21 (68) atime ile

BOG ROSEMARY Andromeda glaucophylla Link. Flowers on three branches
of shrubs; opening of corolla to withering or dropping of corolla: May 25—May
30 (Gains We

BLACK HIGH-BUSH BLUEBERRY Vaccinium atrococcum (Gray) Heller.
Flowers on three branches of shrubs; opening of corolla to withering or drop-
ping of corolla: May 26—May 30 (35)—June 8.

1A project supported by funds from the government of Ontario granted through the Ontario Research

Foundation. The data were assembled while the writer held a Summer Research EISBN SY of the
National Research Council in 19!

Mailing date of this number: 1 August 1958

120 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NaATURALIST Vol. 72

BOG LAUREL Kalmia polifolia Wang. Flowers on three branches of shrubs;
opening of corolla to dropping of corolla: June 1—June 7(18)—June 20.

PURPLE CHOKEBERRY Pyrus floribunda Lindl. Flowers on three branches
of shrubs; opening of corolla to dropping of petals: June 1—June 7(22)—June 11.

CHAIMAE DAP EINE. ore Aleyae@ UnevAlTaA
e\ole eA te
AN DROMEIDIAN. GLAU GORE Wik LA
ge
VVEGCUNIUM AER OC COEICUM
j SRY Nee ee
RIM Mi A POLS OL TA
{ Cea Warat eeens }
PVRS. oil OR) BU NDA
[ee nes)
GA YiIswS5S WGA BAGG Anz
La«a Jj p
RHAMNUS FRANGULA
(eS EE |
SARRAGENIA, PURPUREA
Lad)
NUPHAR ADVENA
ARETHUSA -BULBOSA
AOC pee! wea)
VX CElNIUMe OS7EOCCOS
| EE) Wi aca ee |
2S VER SiC OL OF
ey ee
POGONIA OPRHIOGL OSS OIDES |
UPRICULA RIA =COR NUIT A
CAL OPSOGON PULCHELLUS
VACCINIUM MACROCARPON
DROSERA INTERMEDIA
WERIC UL ARIA.“ ViUIEGA RIS
DROSER A | RO TUN DIORA

eR EyRilG Oso VIRGINICUM
MAY JUNIE Sie

Ficure 1. Succession and duration of blooming of twenty plants in the Byron Bog in 1956.

A series of dots precedes the solid line on the graph for those species for which counts were

started after blooming had begun and the black triangle on each line indicates the day on
which maximum blooming occurred.

1958 Jupp: Srupies oF THE Byron Bos, II 121

BLACK HUCKLEBERRY Gaylussacia baccata (Wang.) K. Koch. Flowers on
three branches of shrubs; opening of corolla to withering or dropping of
corolla: June 9—June 13 (45)—June 18.

ALDER BUCKTHORN Rhamnus frangula L. Flowers on three branches of
shrubs; opening of perianth to closing of perianth around pistil: June 11—
June 13 (9)—June 26.

PITCHER PLANT Sarracenia purpurea L. Flowers on six plants; stages in
blooming were: opening of sepals, opening of petals, turning of flower to face
outward from its stalk, dropping of petals, dropping of stamens: June 13—June
17 (6)—June 22.

SPATTERDOCK Nuphar advena (Ait.) Ait. f. Flowers on plants in a small
bay of a pond south of Redmond’s Pond; opening of calyx to dropping of sepals:
June 14—June 16 (7)—August 27.

SWAMP PINK Arethusa bulbosa L. Flowers on ten plants, opening of
perianth to withering of perianth: ?>—June 18 (10)—June 27.:

SMALL CRANBERRY Vaccinium oxycoccos L. Flowers on plants growing on
one square foot of Sphagnum tussock; opening of corolla to withering or
dropping of corolla: June 20—June 27 (10)—July 9.

BLUE FLAG Iris versicolor L. Flowers on two plants, opening of corolla
and style to withering of corolla and style: June 22—June 25 (5)—July 3

BEARD FLOWER Pogonia ophioglossoides (L.) Ker. Flowers on eight
plants; opening of perianth to see of Beane June 23—July 2 (5)—
August 6.

BLADDERWORT Utricularia cornuta Michx. Flowers on seven plants; open-
ing of corolla to dropping of corolla: June 27—July 3 (8)—August 17.

GRASS PINK Calopogon pulchellus (Salisb.) R. Br. Flowers on six plants;
opening of corolla to withering of corolla: June 30—July 6 (8)—August 3.

LARGE CRANBERRY Vaccinium macrocarpon Ait. Flowers on cluster of
plants on sides of a Sphagnum tussock, opening of corolla to withering of
corolla: >—July 19 (10)—August 13.

SUNDEW Drosera intermedia Hayne. Flowers on plants growing on one
square foot of sodden Sphagnum moss; opening of corolla to withering and
closing of corolla around pistil: July 11—July 26 (29)—August 27.

BLADDERWORT Utricularia vulgaris L. Flowers on plants in a small bay of
a pond south of Redmond’s Pond (same bay as for N. advena); opening of
corolla to dropping of corolla: July 13—July 28 (4)—August 14.

ROUND-LEAVED SUNDEW Drosera rotundifolia L. Flowers on twelve plants,
opening of corolla to withering and closing of corolla around pistil: July 18—
July 30 (6)— eens pepe

MARSH ST.-JOHN’S-wort Hypericum virginicum L. Flowers on two
plants; opening of corolla to withering or dropping of corolla: July 27—July 30
(3)—August 17.

REFERENCE
Judd, W. W. 1957. Studies of the Byron Bog in southwestern Ontario. I. Description
of the bog. Can. Ent. 89:235-238.
Received for publication 18 June 1957

122 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

OBSERVATIONS ON THE LESSER SNOW GOOSE
NESTING GROUNDS :
EGG RIVER, BANKS ISLAND

Eoin H. McEwen
Canadian Wildlife Service, Department of Northern Affairs
and National Resources, Ottawa, Ontario

~ Lesser Snow Geese Chen hyperborea hyperborea (Pallas) are the commonest
of the subfamily Anserinae in the western Arctic, where also are found black
brant Branta nigricans, Canada Goose B. canadensis, White-fronted Goose
Anser albifrons, and Ross’s Goose Chen rossi. Four local nesting grounds of
Snow Geese are distributed along 180 miles of the Arctic coast, on the deltaic
islands south of Kendall Island, Cape Dalhousie, and the deltas of the Kugalik
and Anderson Rivers. North and west of those, a fifth is located along the
Egg River, Banks Island. Ground observations were made by the author on
the Kendall Island nesting ground in 1954 and on the Egg River nesting ground
in 1955.

The 1955 observations were made from June 23 to July 4 as part of a
faunal study of Banks Island. During that period the processes of incubation,
hatching, dispersal and predation were observed. Apposite features are used
in this report comparing the Kendall and Egg River areas.

DESCRIPTION OF THE EGG RIVER NESTING GROUND

The Egg River nesting ground, the largest of those mentioned, is located
on both sides of the river where it joins Big River, about 16 miles from the
west coast of the island. It is six miles in length, averages one and a half to two
miles in width, and occupies an area of 10 to 12 square miles. No evidence of
nesting was found outside of the area occupied in 1955. The nests were
concentrated somewhat in the northern three-quarters of the area, especially
on the east side of the river near the mouth.

The Egg River is a clear, shallow, braided stream with a gravel bed. Four
miles south of its mouth, it divides into three branches. Four habitat types
were found in the nesting area: wet mossy grass on the western side, sparsely
vegetated gravel flats and bars in the middle section, and sloping gravel shores
and a gently sloped bank of organic material along the eastern side. Shallow
lakes are scattered throughout the area, especially near the mouth of the Egg
River and on its eastern side.

SPRING MIGRATION

In 1955, the spring migration occurred from May 17 to June 4, approxi-
mately 20 days, reaching a peak on May 30. Hohn (1954) noted that the 1953
migration extended from May 18 to mid-June, with a peak on May 29.
According to some Eskimos, the spring migration may be completed in a few
days.

4 The spring route from the interior mainland to Banks Island is partially
known. The Anderson River is the logical route to the coast, and in 1952
many goose feathers and droppings were found by the author along the river
below the forks. Soper (1949) considered that the large influx of Lesser Snow

1958 McEwen: LESSER SNow Goose Nestinc Grounps 123

Geese into the Anderson River delta for brief periods in the spring and autumn
consists of migrants of the Banks Island population.

In 1955 the migration was observed at various points from Cape Kellett
to Cape Lambton, a distance of 90 miles. ‘The geese arrived in waves of small
flocks. Some of them reached Cape Kellett and along the west coast from the
direction of Baillie Island. Others reached Cape Lambton from the direction
of Cape Parry, followed the west coast to the Masik River, and continued north
towards the Egg River.

After arriving along the west coast of Banks Island, the flocks of geese
rested and fed on the grassy coastal slopes and river banks. During the first
part of the migration, flocks of geese were seen flying randomly along the
coast and Sachs River. In late May, the geese tended to fly directly inland,
following depressions or gullies between the ridges.

NESTING DATA

Prenesting activities and associated behavior were not observed, since the
study did not start until June 23, four days before hatching commenced.
Assuming an incubation period of 21 to 22 days (Manning, 1942; Cooch, 1954),
egg laying was probably under way by June 6.

On June 24, the number of nests and eggs were counted in a strip from
the west side northeast to the channel and southwest to the west side of the
river. On June 27, a second transect was conducted along the west side from
the camp south to the end of the nesting area. In Table 1, the frequency of
occurrence of clutch sizes of 920 nests is given. The number of eggs per
clutch varied from two to nine, averaging 3.88. On the deltaic islands the
number of eggs in 186 nests averaged 3.7, and ranged from one to eight
(McEwen, 1954). On Southampton Island, Cooch (1954) recorded the
average clutch size as 4.10 for 1,726 nests in 1952 and 3.97 for 1,300 nests in
1953. ‘The reason for the lower average clutch sizes at the deltaic islands and
Egg River may be that the samples were smaller and their periods of exposure
to predation were longer.

TABLE 1. FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE OF EGGs IN 920 NEsTS

Number of Eggs
Sample __| Total Total
Strip Number} Number | Average
Number | 2 3 4 5 6 Uf 8 9 | Nests Eggs Clutch
1 63 246 302 127 36 22 D 1 799 3,102 3.88
2 3 42 oP 19 3 1 1 = 121 468 3.87
Summary | 66 288 354 146 39 23 3 1 920 3,570 3.88

The nests, in most cases, were constructed on previous nest sites and
consisted of elevated heaps of organic material lined with down. On gravel
bars, they were down-lined depressions in the gravel. Nests were found in the
crevices of polygons and organic deposits. Some nests were found near the
top of a gravel ridge about 200 feet in height, others on a grass-sedge plateau,
50 to 150 yards from the river bank.

124 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

HATCHING DATA

The first evidence of hatching was observed on June 27. The average
size of 419 broods counted between June 28 and July 3 was 3.33. Cooch (1954)
reported that hatching occurred on Southampton Island from June 30 to July
10 in 1952, and from July 5 to 16 in 1953. In Table 2, six samples of brood
counts are listed. Sample variation during the seven-day period was small.
The counts were made from elevated positions along the river as the family
groups moved freely out of the nesting area. The difference between the
average brood size and clutch size was 0.55 per clutch. This loss occurred
during the last stage of incubation and the first week of hatching. The
calculation does not include egg losses during incubation or the complete loss
of clutches.

TABLE 2. NUMBER AND AVERAGE SIZE OF 419 BRoops

Date Number of Broods | Total Number Young | Average Brood Size

June 28 21 ee 3.43
29 32 100 3.12

30 35 113 3.23

July 2 93 308 323i
3 111 SHT. 3.40

3 127 416 3.28
Summary 419 1, 386 3.33

DISPERSAL FROM THE NESTING GROUNDS

On the second day of hatching, adults and broods began leaving the area.
The dispersal was in three directions: northeast from the east side of the river,
northwest from the mouth of the river into Big River, and west-southwest from
the west side of the river towards Lennie River. By July 3, the geese had
almost completely deserted the nesting grounds. ‘The largest number moved
into the Big River flats. Snow Geese accompanied by broods have been seen
as far north as Storkerson Bay (Manning, 1956). From the Egg River, the
geese dispersed towards the coast between the Lennie River and Storkerson Bay.

FACTORS OF MORTALITY

Forces acting to reduce the goose population included animal predation
by arctic fox Alopex lagopus, wolf Canis lupus, Glaucous Gull Larus hyper-
boreus, Parasitic Jaeger Stercorarius parasiticus, Pomarine Jaeger S. pomarinus,
and Long- -tailed Jaeger S. longicaudus, human predation and adverse weather.
The last-named is considered the most important control factor on the deltaic
islands, and possibly in certain years on the Egg River nesting area. Animal
predation appears to be the least important.

Arctic foxes were believed to be the most active and successful predators.
From June 23 to July 4, 35 observations were made of foxes hunting on the
nesting area. The largest number of foxes observed in one day was nine. On
the first sample strip 42 nests or 4.8 per cent were destroyed by foxes and 32 or
3.7 per cent by unidentified agents, probably foxes; and 799 or 91.5 per cent
were occupied. No data were available for the ened sample strip.

1958 McEwen: LEssER SNow Goose Nestinc Grounps 125

Nests destroyed by arctic foxes may be found empty or with egg shells —
scattered about. When a fox locates an unattended nest it usually takes an eg
in its mouth and carries it with the ends protruding. It digs a shallow hole in
the ground, deposits the egg in it, and pushes dirt over the egg with its nose.
This operation continues until all the eggs are taken, or until the geese return
and defend their nest. The fox often recaches eggs. One fox was observed
to recache the same eggs three times in the same area during 30 minutes of
observation.

The fox retreats when attacked by the gander or a mated pair. Occa-
sionally fake attacks were made by a fox to flush a goose from the nest but this
feigning act was never successful. Because of these observations it is con-
sidered that the 26 geese whose carcasses were found partly consumed by
foxes may have died from natural causes.

Unlike terns and gulls, which are also colony nesters, the geese were not
stimulated to group defense by the presence of a fox or other intruder. Each
pair restricted its defense to its own nest or brood. Geese remained alert to the
presence of a fox at a neighboring nest but waited to attack it until it approached
them. The foxes noted also worked independently of each other.

Wolf predation appeared to have very little effect on the goose population.
Three single wolves were seen traveling amongst the nests without molesting
the adults or their eggs. Adult geese showed fear of a wolf and took to
flight, usually at four to six feet above the ground. The wolf scat found
consisted entirely of goose feathers.

Collared and Back’s lemmings frequently observed near nests, were not
considered predators. Lemmings which come too close to a nest are killed
by the geese. Three lemmings were found which had been killed by geese.

The Long-tailed was the commonest of the three species of jaegers.
Thirty-nine of them were seen, as compared to one or two of the other species.
Jaegers were continuously flying over the nesting area in search of food.
Inland from the river two Long-tailed Jaeger nests with eggs in them were
found. Predation by a jaeger can be identified by a small hole picked in the
egg, usually with beak marks around the edge of the hole. Seventeen eggs, or
0.54 per cent of the eggs counted, were destroyed by jaegers.

A colony of Glaucous Gulls nested on the area. No egg predation by
gulls was observed. Downy young geese which strayed or lagged behind the
brood were easy prey for the gulls. Only one instance of gull predation on a
young goose was observed. Unhatched eggs and partially hatched deserted
clutches also form part of the gull and jaeger diets. Cooch (1954) found that
a total of 9.6 per cent of the eggs produced in 1952 and 1953 on the Southampton
Island nesting ground were destroyed by avian predators. The amount of
avian predation on the Egg River nesting ground was not determined.

The raven population on Banks Island was small. No ravens were seen
on the nesting area.

Human predation was not a factor in 1955 because the R.C.M. Police
detachment at Sachs Harbour enforced the regulation against spring hunting
and egging. :

126 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Unfavorable weather conditions such as an early spring thaw followed by
severe cold in late May, prolonged wet rains with strong gusty winds, or
flooding of the nesting area by a combination of high tides and gale winds at
a critical phase in the life cycle can substantially lower the nesting success of
goose populations. In 1955, climatic conditions were favorable but not ideal.
Most of the snow on the land disappeared after an early thaw from May 15
to 20. The warm weather was followed by snowflurries for three days. The
month of June, an important month which included the period of nesting,
incubation, and hatching, was cold, with strong winds and snow. Up to June
21, rain or snowflurries and strong winds prevailed along the west coast. The
weather inland along the Egg River was probably just as severe. From June 23
to July 4, the temperatures remained above freezing, ranging from 1° to 16°C.
A few geese succumbed when two days of strong winds accompanied by rain
occurred during the hatching period. Two adults were found dead near their
nests. One adult female was picked up in an emaciated condition and was
destroyed. Two dead goslings and eight deserted nests, containing a total of
28 eggs, were found.

Unlike most goose nesting areas, the Egg River nesting ground is not
likely to flood. The mouth of the river is beyond the influence of tidal-gale
water fluctuations. Flooding has occurred on the deltaic islands of the Mac-
kenzie and on the Anderson River delta, resulting in heavy nest destruction.

POPULATION ESTIMATES

Population estimates for the Egg River goose population vary from 15,000
(Smith and Sutton, 1952) to 120,000 (Manning, 1956). The aerial survey
conducted by Smith and Sutton in late July along the west coast was limited
by weather conditions and considered incomplete. Hohn (1954) estimated
30,000 geese nesting along the Egg River in 1953, but predicted a total of
100,000 in some years.

An attempt was made to get a total count of the geese nesting in the Egg
River area by dividing the area into four sections and counting the geese in
each section, using a 20-power telescope and 6 X 30 binoculars, from elevated
positions on the ridges along both sides of the river. On June 25, 7,329 geese
were counted; on June 26, 12,960; and on June 28, 12,553. (No count was
taken on June 27 because of unfavorable weather.) Hatching had commenced
and a slight shifting of the geese on the area was noted, so the remaining section
was not counted. However, the geese in that section were estimated at 8,000.
The nesting populations thus totaled about 41,000. Possible sources of error
were duplication of observations at long distances, movements of geese to and
from the nesting area, birds hidden from view by depressions and elevations,
and personal error. Ho6hn’s prediction of possible nesting population of
100,000 is considered excessive as the total nesting areas were occupied in 1955.

Four Blue Geese paired with Snow Geese were seen. One of the Blue
Geese was blue-bellied and three were white-bellied. Blue Geese are rare in
the Mackenzie Delta. None was seen on the Kendall Island nesting area in
1954. Four immature snow geese were observed in the Egg River area although
immatures are rarely seen on the nesting ground.

1958 McEwen: Lesser SNow Goose Nestinc Grounps 127

Nonbreeding geese were observed on the flats of the main rivers flowing
to the west coast. A total of 8,350 was estimated, as follows: 50 at the Kellett
River on June 7; 4,000 along the Lennie River on June 28, 300 west of the Egg
River on June 23; and 4,000 on the north side of the Kellett River on July 7.
Nonbreeding and molting geese were seen by Manning (1956) between Big
and Storkerson Rivers, with a few as far north as 10 to 20 miles inland on the
Thomson River. Without allowing for these groups the total population for
the island is estimated at approximately 50,000. In a successful nesting season,

roducing an average of three young per pair, the potential production would
be about 60,000 young. Thus the autumn population might be more than
108,000.
AUTUMN MIGRATION

Discussion of the autumn migration from Banks Island to the wintering
grounds in California must be limited to generalities because of the paucity of
data. Flocks of geese fly from the Big River flats and possibly Storkerson Bay
about the end of August. Some Eskimos reported that flocks of geese have
been seen flying over Booth and Baillie islands. The migration passes over
Tuktoyaktuk during the first week in September. It is uncertain whether the
geese continue west into the Lower Mackenzie Delta or south along the east
side of the Mackenzie River. About mid-September a large concentration of
snow geese remains in the lower Mackenzie Delta for about two weeks.
These geese may be from the Kendall Island population or include some of the
geese from Banks Island. One of the 300 geese banded on the Kellett River in
1955 was taken in the Delta at Shallow Bay, Y.T., an area of autumn con-
centration.

The remaining 13 band returns were from along the Central and Pacific
Flyways as follows: Hay Lakes, Alta. (1), Oregon (3), Montana (1), Nevada
(1), California (6) and Mexico (1). Geese banded at Tule Lake National
Wildlife Refuge and the Sacramento National Wildlife Refuge, California,
have been taken at Sachs Harbour, Banks Island. A greater number of band
returns and observations of marked individuals are required before the routes
of the spring and autumn migrations of these geese are known.

REFERENCES
Coocu, F. G. 1954. Breeding grounds. Smitu, R.H.,and E.Surron. 1952. Water-
Mimeographed report in files of Canadian fowl breeding ground survey in Northern
Wildlife Service. Alberta, Northwest Territories and the
Houn, E. O. 1954. In the home of the Yukon. Jn. Waterfowl Populations and
snow goose. Beaver 285:8-11. Breeding Conditions, Summer 1952. Spec.

Mannine, T. H. 1942. Blue and _ lesser sci. Rep. Can. Wildl. Serv. and U.S. Fish
snow geese on Southampton and Baffin Wildl. Serv. 21:10-18.
Islands. Auk 59:158-175.

NR alien ele wail others 10564 mbhe Soper, J. D. 1949. Biological investigations
iad oe Beate Toland Balleenate: Mus in Northern Alberta and the Northwest

Ganidant43. and Yukon Territories. “Typewritten

McEwen, E. H. 1954. Report on white manuscript in files of Canadian Wildlife
fox, snow geese and white whales, July Service.
1954. Typewritten report in files of
Canadian Wildlife Service.

Received for publication 9 August 1957

128 Tue CANaDIAN Fie_p-NaTuURALIST Vol. 72

VARIATION IN A LITTER OF NORTHERN WATER
SNAKES FROM OTTAWA, ONTARIO

SHERMAN BLEAKNEY
Natural History Branch, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario

In view of the present trend in taxonomy of considering a large sample of a
population as the valid taxonomic unit rather than the individual specimen, it is
well to have evidence of the degree to which individuals can vary within one
population. A wide range of variation among adults in any given population
is not surprising, but when such variation occurs within the progeny of one
female, the taxonomist may experience a rude awakening. For example,
Brimly (1927) reported on two female Northern Water Snakes which had
progeny with color patterns of both Natrix sipedon sipedon and N. Ss. fasciata.
The litter described in the present paper is not comparable in that respect, but it
does surpass the degree of variation recorded for 42 adult N. s. sipedon collected
from many parts of eastern Ontario and western Quebec.

A gravid female Northern Water Snake, 41 inches in total length, was
caught on August 31, 1956, in the Ottawa River, at Brittania Bay, near Ottawa,
Ontario, On October 16, from about 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. she gave birth to 42
young. Nearly 30 of the young were born before 1 p.m. Two died soon
after birth and were preserved. ‘The remainder were kept alive for nine days,
given only water, and then killed (with ether), photographed, sexed, and
measured. The female was a typical N. s. sipedon with eight upper and ten
lower labial scales, one preocular and three postoculars, 146 ventrals, 67 caudals
and with the first five bars on the back forming complete crossbands.

Her progeny, however, exhibited a degree of variation which transcends
that shown by 42 adult N. s. stpedon taken within a 70-mile radius of Ottawa.

SEX RATIOS

Forbes (1940) reported the sex ratios found in Storeria occipitomaculata,
Crotalus, and Sistrurus as being nearly 1:1. Martof (1945) also records a 1:1
sex ratio in a litter of 85 Thammnophis sirtalis sirtalis. A litter of 32 Natrix s.
sipedon from Portland, Leeds County, Ontario (55 miles south of Ottawa)
examined by me had two malformed individuals, 14 females and 16 males again
nearly a 1:1 ratio. However, the Ottawa litter had one malformed individual,
13 females and 28 males, a sex ratio of 1 female: 2.1 males.

It is interesting to note that of the 42 adult N. s. sipedon caught in eastern
Ontario and western Quebec, the females predominate with a ratio of 1.6
females: 1 male. Admittedly this is a small sample and there are many variables,
but it does emphasize the fact that there can be a wide discrepancy between
the apparent sex ratio of the adult population as determined by random sampling
and the actual sex ratio of a litter of that species.

VARIATION IN PIGMENT PATTERN
No two specimens in the Ottawa litter have the same pattern. The pattern
in the anterior portion of the body varies from the typical vertical barred
pattern (Figure 1,4) through a broken-bar pattern (Figure 1,B), where the tip

1958 BLEAKNEY: VARIATION IN NorTHERN WATER SNAKES 129

of the bar is separate, to a condition in which the separate spots form a lateral
stripe (Figure 1,C). When the 42 specimens are arranged in a series, this
pattern change is most gradual, but it is interesting to consider that if only the
extremes had been at hand, one might have been tempted to describe a new
subspecies.

in color pattern.

Males and females are distributed rather evenly through this color pattern
series except in the 11 most aberrant examples (that is, those tending toward a
lateral stripe) of which 9 are males.

Examination of five other broods of Natrix s. sipedon from eastern Ontario
and western Quebec, totaling 134 young, resulted in the discovery of 12 with
a lateral row of spots (seven from Quebec and five from Ontario) and only 2
specimens (one from Quebec and one from Ontario) that had a lateral stripe.
In contrast, only one adult with short lateral stripes, a small male, could be
found in the collections of the National Museum of Canada. Dunn (1942)
and Inger (1942, 1943) have both shown that the frequency of occurrence of a
character in a series of juveniles and adults of the same species may be strikingly
different. ‘Their explanation for this is that only the better adapted individuals
survive the rigors of natural selection. Their work dealt with the variations
in the number of scales and they demonstrated that specimens with atypical
scale arrangement were selected against. In the case of these Ontario and
Quebec Northern Water Snakes, it is the aberrant pigment pattern of lateral
stripes which apparently has a negative survival value. It may be that the
normal barred pattern serves to break up the linear body form of young
Northern Water Snakes making them inconspicuous whereas the dark lateral
stripe adjacent to the pale ventral color only serves to emphasize the body form
and thereby makes them more conspicuous to their predators.

130 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

There is considerable variation in the number of bars which form complete
cross bands in the anterior region of each specimen. This varies from one
crossband in specimen No. 41 (deformed, sex not recorded) to 16 complete
crossbands in specimen No. 26, a male.

VARIATION IN SCALE COUNTS

The number of ventral scales in the Ottawa litter varies from 142 to 150 for
both males and females (Figure 2). In the series of 42 adults the range for 41
of them is from 144 to 150 for both males and females; the remaining specimen,
a female, has 141 ventral scales (Figure 2,sample C). Ina litter of 30 individuals
from Portland, Leeds County, Ontario, the females have 141-152 ventrals and
ae males, 143-148 (Figure 2,sample B). ‘There is no sexual dimorphism evident

elie.

Ficure 2. Ventral scale counts
of male (a) and female (bd)
Natrix s. sipedon. Each square
represents one individual. Sam-
ples A and B are litters from,
respectively Ottawa, and Port-
land, Ontario; sample C consists
of adults from Ontario and

Quebec.

1425

(s)
at

~
+
~

b =

The number of caudal scales in the Ottawa litter varies from 58 to 71 for
females and from 71 to 85 for males (Figure 3,4). Only one male and female
have 71 caudals. “The range for the 42 adult specimens is not as great and there
is no overlap (Figure 3,C). The range for the 30 young Portland is narrow and
the sexual dimorphism of the caudal scale count is even more marked (Figure
3. BI)

Figure 3. Caudal scale counts
for male (black squares) and
female (open squares) Natrix s.
sipedon from the Ottawa litter.
Note the sexual dimorphism
with an overlap (at 71) of only
one scale. Samples A, B, and C
as in Figure 2.

1958 BLEAKNEY: VARIATION IN NorTHERN WATER SNAKES 131

In the Ottawa litter the scales on the head (labials and oculars) deviate from
the usual arrangement in 14 males and in only five females. The higher per-
centage of males with aberrant scale arrangements (2.8 males: 1 female in
contrast to the sex ratio in this Ottawa litter of only 2.1 males: 1 female) is
also evident in Martof’s paper (1954) on a litter of 85 Thammnophis s. sirtalis.
In his tables I to IV, there are 46 examples of deviations by males and only 38
examples involving females. There were 42 males and 41 females in this litter.

In the case of lower labials the males show a greater deviation than the
females and in the opposite direction, that is towards fewer scales. Eleven
females had a count of 10-10, and one had 9-10. There were 15 males with
10-10, 3 with 9-10, 6 with 10-9, and 4 with 9-9. This trend is evident in
Martof’s Table IV of the lower labial counts for Thamnophis s. sirtalis in which
seven females and two males with extra scales and three females and 15 males
with a reduced number of scales are shown.

When the number of ventrals are plotted against the number of caudals for
each specimen in the Ottawa litter, there is apparent a trend in both sexes for
high scale counts in ventrals to be correlated with high caudal counts. This
is also true of the 30 specimens in the Portland, Ontario, litter. However, what -
is more interesting, is that the longest specimens (total length) do not have
the most ventral or caudal scales (except for the largest male which has the most
caudal scales). Similarly the shortest male and female do not have the least
number of ventral or caudal scales. In addition the longest specimens, both
male and female, do possess the maximum body lengths, and the shortest male
and female likewise have the minimum body lengths recorded in the Ottawa
litter. There must be, then, many specimens of the same length which do not
have the same numbers of scales. An example is male No. 20 and male No. 34,
both of which are 155.6 mm in body length, yet No. 20 has 142 ventrals and
No. 34 has 150 ventrals. This means that a snake may possess relatively large
or small scales in relation to its length. Since the number of ventral scales always
coincides with the number of vertebrae, the snakes with larger ventrals have
few vertebrae per unit of body length and therefore less flexibility of the
vertebral column. Increased flexibility is advantageous to limbless reptiles and
Inger (1943) has shown that individual snakes with the reduced number of
vertebrae are less likely to survive to maturity.

VARIATIONS IN MEASUREMENTS

The maximum body length of males and females is the same (165.1 mm) .
but 4 males are smaller (142.9 mm) than the smallest female (149.2 mm). The
difference in length between the longest and shortest male is 22.2 mm and that
for the females is only 15.9 mm. (Perhaps the larger sample of males accounts
for this).

In total length the males are somewhat longer than the females, indicating
a longer tail in the males. The difference in length between the longest and
shortest male is 38.1 mm and for females is 22.2 mm.

There is, then, a greater degree of variation in tail lengths than in body
lengths, especially in the case of the males.

132 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

STILLBORN SPECIMENS

One of the stillborn snakes, a female, appears to be normal and has 142
ventrals and 58 caudals. “The preoculars number 1-1, the postoculars 3-3, upper
Jabials 8-8, but the lower labials are 9-10.

The second specimen is crinkled its entire length. Its scales are rather
evenly hexagonal and very weakly keeled. It has 116 complete ventral scales
and 22 incomplete ones, 53 caudal scales (4 not paired), 8 under labials, 10
lower labials, 1 preocular and 3 postoculars.

SUMMARY
(1) A litter of 42 Northern Water Snakes Natrix sipedon sipedon from
Ottawa, Ontario, was analyzed as to color pattern, scale arrangements, and
linear measurements. It was compared with a litter of 30 young from Portland
and a series of 42 adults from Ontario and Quebec.
(2) The sex ratio of the Ottawa litter favors the males 2.1: 1.

(3) Variation in pigment and scale characters in the Ottawa litter surpasses
that found in the adult sample and the litter from Portland.

(4) More males than females have aberrant pigment patterns and scale counts.
(5) Sexual dimorphism is nil in the ventral scale counts but is sharply defined
in caudal scale counts.

(6) Specimens of the same body length do not have the same number of ventral
scales indicating a parallel difference in the number of vertebrae.

(7) It is concluded from the analysis of this litter of snakes that (a) in
taxonomic studies the degree of individual variation in color pattern and in
meristic factors within the species should not be underestimated, and that
(b) possession of short lateral stripes on juvenile N. s. sipedon diminishes their
chances of survival to maturity.

REFERENCES
BsrmMtey, C.S. 1927. Note on water snakes, INGER, Ropert F. 1942. Differential selec-
Raleigh, North Carolina. Copeia 162: tion in juvenile snakes. Amer. Nat. 76:
14, 15. 527-528.

Dunn, EmmetrR. 1942. Survival value of 1943. Further notes on differen-

varietal characters in snakes. Amer. Nat. tial selection of variant juvenile snakes.
76:104-109. Amer. Nat. 77:87-90.
Martor, B. 1954. Variations in a large
Forbes, T. R. 1940. A note on reptilian litter of gartersnakes, Thammnophis sirtalis
sex ratios. Copeia 2:132. sirtalis. Copeia 2:100-105.

Received for publication 12 September 1957

1958 GROVES AND OTHERS: FUNGI FROM NorTHERN Canapa, III 133

“ NOTES ON FUNGI FROM NORTHERN CANADA
I. AMANITACEAE, HYGROPHORACEAE
RHODOPHYLLACEAE, AND PAXILLACEAE*

J. Watton Groves, SHEILA C. THomson, and Maria PAntipou
Botany and Plant Pathology Laboratory, Ottawa, Ontario

Previous papers in this series, by Groves and Hoare (1954) and Groves and »
Thomson (1955), have dealt mainly with certain groups of larger fungi,
collected by members of the biological survey parties operating in the Canadian
north under the auspices of the Defence Research Board during the summers of
1948-51. The Agaricales, or mushrooms, comprise the most numerous of the
groups of larger fungi and are also the most difficult to identify. Because the
number of species of agarics collected is too large to treat conveniently in one
paper, it has been decided to adopt the classification proposed by Singer (1951)
in which the agarics are divided into a number of families, and it is intended to
group certain families and discuss them in separate papers. The grouping for
each paper is not intended to indicate relationships but is simply based on
convenience with respect to the number of species involved.

AMANITACEAE
Records of Amanitaceae from northern North America appear to be few.
Cash (1953) listed Amanita muscaria, Amanitopsis vaginata var. livida and
Pluteus cervinus as occurring in Alaska. Lange (1955) found Amanitopsis
vaginata widely distributed in Greenland and also stated that A. muscaria was
found here by Rosenvinge at Sinigtok, but he failed to find it himself.
Amanita muscaria (L. ex Fr.) Pers. ex Gray Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1:600. 1821.

Agaricus muscarius Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:16. 1821. 3 NHE ) : ;
This species is well known and not likely to be misidentified with its

characteristic stature, color, closely adhering volva, and rather large, oval,
nonamyloid spores 9.5-11.5 6.5-8.0 wu. One specimen in the Newfoundland
collection differed from typical A. muscaria in gross appearance and in the
opinion of Mrs. Thomson it was probably A. velatipes Atk. However, there
were no spores in this fruit body and its identification could not be confirmed.
Specimens examined. DAOM 25020, Goose Bay, Labrador. Coll. J. M. Gillett and
W. I. Findlay (5923). Aug. 1950. Det. J. W. Groves; DAOM 28509, St. Anthony, Nfld.
Coll. D. B. O. Savile and J. Vaillancourt (2802), Aug. 9, 1951. Det. D. B. O. S.
Amanita pantherina (DC. ex Fr.) Secr. Mycogr. Suisse 1:20. 1833.

Agaricus pantherinus Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:16. 1821.

The collection consists of one fruit body very much shriveled. The pileus
is about 4.5 cm in diameter, brown with white warts, and the stipe about 7 cm
long with bulbous base. The annulus is superior, floccose-membranous and
slightly yellowish. The spores are ellipsoid and nonamyloid, 8.0-11.0
6.5-8.0 UW.

Specimen examined. DAOM 48918, Canol Rd., Mile 222, Ross R. Valley near north end
eAereidon L., Yukon. Coll. A. E. Porsild and A. J. Breitung, Aug. 8, 1944. Det. Sheila C.
omson.

1Contribution No. 1649 from the Botany and Plant Pathology Division, Science Service, Canada
Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

134 Tue CanapiaAn Frecp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Amanita velatipes Atk. Studies of Amer.. Fung. p. 63, 1903.

This species was described by Atkinson based on specimens collected near
Ithaca, N.Y., but does not seem to have been recognized by other authors.
Specimens collected at Cantley, Que., were compared with the type by Mrs.
Thomson through the kindness of Dr. R. P. Korf. It is a large species, reaching
or exceeding the size of A. muscaria and might be mistaken for faded specimens
of this species, but it is more fragile in consistency and has a volva tightly
enclosing the bulb of the stem and forming a narrow, free collar. The spores
are ovoid to ellipsoid and nonamyloid. It might be confused with A.
cothurnata because of the type of volva, but the latter has a smaller stature with
white fruit body and more globose spores.

Two of the northern collections have been referred to this species by Mrs.
Thomson. Collector’s notes on the fresh plant of the Labrador collection are
as follows: “Pileus 12-15 cm, 0.5-1 cm thick, orange, smooth with small fibrous
flecks. Lamellae white. Veil present, delicate. Stipe cream-colored, scaly,
15-20 cm high. Volva present.” The dried specimen is about 8 cm broad,
yellowish, with numerous whitish warts on the pileus, margin striate, stipe
white, bulbous, 14:cm high, 1.2 cm thick, volva close with narrow free collar,
spores nonamyloid, 9-11.5 « 6-8 wu.

The Newfoundland collection consists of one broken fruit body, cream to
yellowish with whitish scales on the pileus, stipe with a tapering bulb, volva
close with free collar, spores nonamyloid 10-11.5 & 6.5-8 u. Savile suggested
that it was A. cothurnata in his field notes.

Specimens examined. DAOM 25026, Goose Bay, Labrador, Coll. J. M. Gillett and
W. I. Findlay (5598); Aug. 4, 1950. Det. S. C. T.; DAOM 28503, St. Anthony, Nfld.
Coll. D. B. O. Savile and J. B. Wallis (2491), July 23, 1951, Dee see

~ Amanitopsis fulva (Fr.) Fayod Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser. 7, 9:317. 1889.

Agaricus vaginatus e Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:14. 1821
Amanitopsis vaginata var. fulva Sacc. Syll, Fung. 5:21. 1887.

This common and widely distributed fungus has been reported from
Alaska by Cash (1953) and two collections were found among the material
examined.

The species included in Azanitopsis are every similar to Amanita except
that they lack an annulus. Many authors include them in Amanita and Singer
(1951) reported finding a specimen of A. fulva growing in hard gravelly soil
that did have an annulus and he suggested that the development of the annulus
was a response to pressure and of no taxonomic value at the generic level or
under certain conditions even at the specific level.

Specimens examined. DAOM 21736, Great Whale River, Que. Coll. J. R. Vockeroth,

July 17, 1949. Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 28546, St. Anthony, Nfid: Coll. D. B. O. Savile and
J. Vaillancourt (2908), Aug. 16, 1951. Det. J. W. G.

Amanitopsis vaginata (Fr.) Karst. Hattsv. 1:6. 1879.

Agaricus vaginatus b Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:14. 1821.

There are three well-known and easily recognized taxa belonging in
Amanitopsis which have been variously interpreted as forms, varieties, or
subspecies of A. vaginata, or recognized as autonomous species. They are
distinguished principally by the color, tawny brown, mouse-gray, or white,
and have been known as var. fulva, var. livida, and var. alba, respectively. The

1958 GROVES AND OTHERS: FUNGI FROM NorTHERN Canapa, III 1453)

tendency at present seems to be to regard them as distinct species and they are
so treated here. Following Lange (1935) and Kiihner and Romagnesi (1953)
the gray form is taken as the type form for the name A. vaginata.

Five collections, each consisting of a single fruit body, were among the
material examined.

Specimens examined. DAOM 27658, Icy Arm, Clyde Fjord, Baffin Island, N.W.T.
Coll. V. C. Wynne-Edwards, Aug. 5, 1950. Det. S. C. T.; DAOM 27900, Baffin Island,
N.W.T. Coll. V. C. Wynne-Edwards, July 31, 1950. Det.S.C. T.; DAOM 44996, Quebec—
Labrador height of land. 58° 06’ N, 68° 25’ W, elev. 1700 ft, Coll. J. M. Gillett (8997), Aug.
15, 1954. Det. J. W. G., DAOM 44999, Crater L., 60 miles SW of Saglek, Labrador, elev.
2000 ft, Coll. J. M. Gillett (8800), 1954. Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 45001, Crater L., 58 miles
SW of Saglek, Labrador, Coll. J. M. Gillett (8964), Aug. 11, 1954, Det. J. W. G.

Amanitopsis inaurata (Secr.) Fayod Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser. 7, 9:317. 1889.

Agaricus strangulatus Fr. Epicr. Syst. Myc. p. 6. 1836-1838.
Agaricus strangulatus Fr. Epicr. Syst. Myc. p. 6. 1836-1838.
Amanita strangulata Quél. Champ. Jura et Vosges. 1:66. 1872.
Amanitopsis strangulata Karst. Hattsvamp. p. 7. 1879

This species is characterized by the gray volva which tears in such a way
as to leave patches adhering to the pileus as gray scales and also forms sub-
annular zones on the lower part of the stipe. The pileus is dark gray-brown,
sometimes nearly black when young. The larger spores will separate it from
A. vaginata. In A. inaurata they are (9) 10-12 (14) w in diameter and in
A. vaginata they are 8-10 uw in diameter.

Specimens examined. DAOM 2/855, W of Dawson, Yukon, Coll. L. G. Billard and
J. A. Calder (4532), Aug. 14, 1949. Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 25878, Chesterfield Inlet, Keew.,
N.W.T. Coll. D. B. O. Savile, (1427), Aug. 14, 1950, Det J W. G.; DAOM 45068, Upper
N. Hebron valley, 55 miles SW of Saglek, Labrador, Coll. J. M. Gillett (8991), Aug. 14,
1954. Det. S.C. T., DAOM 45069, Quebec—Labrador height of land, 58° 06’ N, 64° 25’ W,
elev. 1700 ft, Coll. J. M. Gillett (8995), Aug. 15, 1954. Det. S.C. T., DAOM 45070, Upper
N. Hebron valley, 50 miles SW of Saglek, Labrador, Coll. J. M. Gillett (8989), Aug. 14,
1954, Det. S. C. T.

Pluteus cervinus (Schaeff. ex Fr.) Quél. Champ. Jura et Vosges p. 115. 1872.

Agaricus cervinus Fr. Enpicrisis Syst. Mycol. p. 140. 1836-1838.

This well-known species is common and widely distributed. It was
reported from Alaska by Cash (1953). Five collections with a total of eight
fruit bodies were among the northern collections examined.

Specimens examined. DAOM 21938, Moosehide Mt., Dawson, Yukon, Coll. L. G.
Billard and J. A. Calder (3799), July 19, 1949, Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 25198, Fort Smith,
N.W.T., Coll. C. C. Loan (L225), Aug. 13, 1950, Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 25865, Fort Smith,
N.W.T., Coll. C. C. Loan (L235, Aug. 15, 1950, Det. S. C. T.; DAOM 25870, Fort Smith,
N.W.T., Coll. C. C. Loan (L221), Aug. 13, 1950, Det. S. C. T.; DAOM 26125, Fort Smith,
N.W.T., Coll. C. C. Loan (L222), Aug. 13, 1950, Det. J. W. G.

Pluteus chrysophlebius (Berk. & Rav.) Sacc. Syll. Fung. 5:678. 1887.

Agaricus chrysophlebius Berk. & Rav. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. III, 4:289. 1859.
Pluteus admirabilis Peck. N.Y. St. Mus. Rep. 24:64. 1872.

The collection consists of one specimen which in the dried condition is
2.5 cm broad, rugose, yellow, with stipe 3 cm long and 2 mm thick, yellow.
The spores are almost globose, 6.5-8 < 5-6.5 u. A few vesiculose cystidia are
present.

This fungus has been better known in North American literature as Pluteus
admurabilis (Peck) Peck, but Singer (1956) has claimed that P. admirabilis is
a synonym of the older name P. chrysophlebius.

136 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

Specimen examined. DAOM 28052, Fort Smith, N.W.T., Coll. C. C. Loan (L223),
feXiutes 1B}, MLX0), 1D Sh (On 48

V olvariella speciosa (Fr.) Sing. Lilloa 22:401. 1951.

Agaricus speciosus Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:278. 1821.

There was one specimen consisting of a fruit body collected in sawdust.
The spores are ovoid, 15-19 8.5-11 u. The identification has been checked
by Dr. R. L. Shaffer.

Specimen examined. DAOM 21732, Dawson, Yukon. Coll. L. G. Billard and J. A.
Calder (3709), July 14, 1949. Det. J. W. G.

HYGROPHORACEAE
The genus Hygrophorus has usually been divided into three sections,
Limacium, Camarophyllus, and Hygrocybe. Some authors have raised these
sections to the rank of genera and this has been done by Singer (1951) in
recognizing the Hygrophoraceae as a family. However, for our purposes all
the species are referred to Hy grophorus.

Several species of Hygrophorus have already been reported from far
northern territories. Dearness (1923) reported H. cantharellus (Schw.) Fr.
from Camden Bay and an unidentified species from Bernard Harbour, N.W.T.
Linder (1947) reported H. miniatus Fr. from Burwell, N. Labrador. Saccardo,
Peck and Trelease (1904) reported H. limacinus Fr. from Alaska, and Cash
(1953) added H. ceraceus Fr., H. laetus Fr. and H. conicus Fr. in her list of
Alaskan fungi. Lange (1955) collected H. pratensis Fr., H. turundus Fr.,
H. coccineus Fr., H. marchii Bres., H. vitellinus Fr. sensu Moller, H. violeipes
Lange, and another unidentified species in Greenland.

Five species were identified among the Canadian collections, all of which
belong in the section Hygrocy be.

Hy grophorus cantharellus (Schw.) Fr. Epicr. Syst. Mycol. p. 329. 2836-1838.

Agaricus cantharellus Schw. Naturf. Gesell. Leipzig Schrift 1:88. 1822.

The single collection consists of several small fruit bodies considerably
broken up. They are reddish orange, and furfuraceous-squamulose with
yellowish, decurrent lamellae. The spores are 9.5-10.5 >< 5-6.5 uu.

Specimen examined. DAOM 26868, St. Anthony, Nfld. in sphagnum, Coll. D. B. O.
Savile and J. Vaillancourt (2520), July 24, 1951. Det. J. W. G.

Hygrophorus conicus (Fr.) Fr. Epicr. Syst. Myc. 331. 1836-1838.

Agaricus conicus Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:103. 1821.

This species is easily recognized by the conical pileus and blackening flesh.
The spores are 9-12 X 5.7 wu.

Specimens examined. DAOM 21848, Moosehide Mt., Dawson, Yukon, Coll. L. G.
Billard and J. A. Calder (3212), June 21, 1949, Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 21866, West Dawson,
Yukon, Coll. W. W. Judd, 1949, Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 21872, Dawson, Yukon, Coll. J. A.
Calder and L. G. Billard (3197), June 21, 1949, Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 25877, Gillam, Man.,
Coll. W. B. Schofield (1071), July 10, 1950, Det. J. W. G.; DAOM 28537, St. Anthony,
Nfid., Coll. D. B. O. Savile and J. Vaillancourt (2812), Aug. 9, 1951, Det. J. W. G.

Hy grophorus miniatus Fr. var. sphagnophilus Peck N.Y. St. Mus. Bull. 116:61.
1907.
There is some doubt concerning the identity of this species. Lange
(1955) thinks it is the fungus he reported as H. turundus Fr. and suggests that

1958 - GROVES AND OTHERS: FUNGI FROM NorTHERN Canapa, III 137

H. cantharellus reported by Dearness (1923) may be the same species. Smith
and Hesler (1942) use the name H. turundus Fr. for a fungus that seems to be
closer to H. cantharellus. The collection referred here seems sufficiently
distinct from H. cantharellus but might well be the same fungus that Lange
called H. turundus. ‘The spore size 10-13 X 6.5-8 w agrees very well with the
measurements given by Lange.

Specimen examined. DAOM 28523, St. Anthony, Nfld., Coll. D. B. O. Savile and J.
Vaillancourt (2856), Aug. 12, 1951. Det. S.C. T.

Ay grophorus nitidus Berk. & Curt. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. II, 12:424. 1953.

This species is characterized by the waxy yellow color, soon fading to
whitish, the umbilicate pileus and long decurrent lamellae. The spores are
6.5-8 3-4 uw. Smith and Hesler (1942) consider it to be a synonym of
A. vitellinus Fr., but Lange (1955) appears doubtful and the plants figured by
him as H. vitellinus do not have the characteristic umbilicate pileus of H. nitidus.

Specimen examined. DAOM 28536, St. Anthony, Nfld., Coll. D. B. O. Savile and J.
Vaillancourt (2878), Aug. 14, 1951, Det. S. C. T.

Aygrophorus puniceus (Fr.) Fr. Epicr. Syst. Myc. 331. 1836-1838.

Agaricus puniceus Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:104. 1821.

From the discussion by Smith and Hesler (1942) it is evident that this
species and H. coccineus Fr. sensu Ricken have been frequently confused and
are difficult to distinguish. The chief distinguishing character is the presence
of a viscid pellicle in H. pumniceus and its absence in H. coccineus. Lange
(1955) stated that this pellicle was absent in the specimen he referred to
H. coccineus but the specimens collected by Savile have a distinctly viscid
pellicle. The spores are 8-10 X 5-6 u.

Specimen examined. DAOM 2/847, Great Whale River, Que., Coll. D. B. O. Savile,
July 27, 1949, Det. J. W. G.

RHODOPHYLLACEAE

The family Rhodophyllaceae includes the mushrooms with pink, angular
spores. Formerly a number of genera were recognized in this group such as
Entoloma, Leptonia, Nolanea, Eccilia, and Clitopilus, but the modern tendency
appears to be to reserve Clitopilus for those species with longitudinally striate
spores and group the remaining Clitopilus species and those of the other genera
under the generic name Rhodophyllus. The species in this group are difficult
to identify and are not well known.

Three of the northern collections have been identified as species of
Entoloma and since there seems to be some doubt as yet regarding the legitimacy
of the name Rhodophyllus, the genus Entoloma is retained here.

Entoloma griseum Peck Bull. N.Y. St. Mus. 75:14. 1904.

The collection consists of eight fruit bodies about 3-9 cm broad according
to the collector’s notes. The largest one in the dried material is now 5.5 cm.
They were described as light to dark tan and the dried material agrees very well
with specimens in DAOM 16838 from Tourville, Que. det. by A. H. Smith.
The spores are pink, tuberculate-angular, spheroid, 8-9 (10) 7.5-8 (9) u.

Specimen examined. DAOM 28950, St. Anthony, Nfld., Coll. D. B. O. Savile (2958),
RIED Ose Det. 9.1. ale

138 Tue CANapIAN Fretp-NaTURALIST Vol. 72

Entoloma strictius (Peck) Sacc. Syll. Fung. 5:698. 1887.
Agaricus strictius Peck Ann. Rep. N.Y. St. Mus. 23:88. 1869.

Two collections, both from St. Anthony, Nfld., appear to be this species.
The large, elongated-angular spores, often with a curving apiculus seem to be
characteristic and in this and other respects they agree well with specimens
in DAOM 17414 from the Petawawa Forest Experiment Station, Ont., deter-
mined by A. H. Smith. The spores measure (8) 10-12 (13.5) X 6-9 uw.

Specimens examined. DAOM 28972, St. Anthony, Nfld. Coll. D. B. O. Savile and J.
Vaillancourt (1929), June 24, 1951, Det. S. C. T.; DAOM 28973, St. Anthony, Nfld., Coll.
D. B. O. Savile and J. Vaillancourt (2049), July 4, 1951, Det. S. C. T.

PAXILLACEAE
Paxillus mvolutus (Batsch ex Fr.) Fr. Gen. Hym. 8. 1836.

Agaricus involutus Fr. Syst. Myc. 1:271. 1821.

There was one collection of this common and easily recognized species.
Together with P. panuoides (Fr. ex Fr.) Fr. it was listed from Alaska by Cash
(1953), and Singer (1951) stated that it was known in both eastern and western
hemispheres from the subarctic to the subantarctic regions.

Specimen examined. DAOM 21735, Dawson, Yukon, Coll. L. G. Billard and J. A.
Calder (3420), 1949, Det. J. W. G.

REFERENCES
Casu, Epira K. 1953. A check list of Lance, M. 1955. Den Botaniske Ekspedi-

Alaskan fungi. Plant Dis. Reptr., Suppl. tion til Vestgrgnland 1946. Macromycetes,
219:1-70. Part II. Greenland Agaricales. Medd.

Dearness, JoHN. 1923. Report of the Can- Grgnland 147:1-69. :
adian Arctic Expedition 1913-18. Vol. 4, Linver, D. H. 1947. Fungi. Jn Botany of

Botany. Part C, Fungi. Ottawa, King’s the Canadian eastern Arctic, Part II.
Printer. Thallophyta and Bryophyta. Comp. and

Groves, J. W., and Suema C. Hoare. 1954. ed. by Nicholas Polunin. Bull. nat. Mus.
Notes on fungi from northern Canada. I. Canada 97:234-297.

: Saccarpo, P. A., C. H. Peck, and W. TReE-

Hypocreales and Discomycetes. Can. ; ae
ORL Nee eae tease. 1904. The fungi of Alaska. In
A aGEeTEA - Go scISHGNtsone 1055 Alaska (Harriman Alaska Expedition).
Notes on fungi from northern Canada. II. Ed. by C. Hart Merriam. Part 5, p. 13-64.

New York, Doubleday, Page.

Boletaceae. Can. Field Nat. 69:44-51. Sincrn, Rosi dike, Apacs ane

KUHNER, R., and H. RoMaGNESI. 1953. rooms) in modern taxonomy. Lilloa 22:
Flore analytique des champions supérieurs. 1-832.
Paris, Masson et Cie. SmitH, A. H., and L. R. Hester. 1942.
Lance, J. E. 1935. Flora Agaricina Danica. Studies in North American species of
Vol. 1. Copenhagen. Hygrophorus. Il. Lloydia 5:1-94.

Received for publication 5 September 1957

1958 Tuck: THE STARLING IN NEWFOUNDLAND 139

“PRESENT DISTRIBUTION AND POPULATION OF THE
STARLING IN NEWFOUNDLAND
Lestiz M. Tuck
Canadian Wildlife Service, St. John’s, Newfoundland

Since Starlings (Sturnus vulgaris vulgaris) reached Ontario some 40 years ago

(Lewis, 1954), they have spread across the continent, being recently recorded
from Churchill (Beckett, 1953), Fort McKenzie (Bleakney, 1953), Fort Smith
(Fuller, 1955), and Vancouver Island (Pearse, 1953). On August 26, 1955,
I observed a total of 37, mostly juveniles, at the Air Base at Goose Bay,
Labrador. Goose Bay may be a recently established outpost for the species,
as Wynne-Edwards (1956) did not record it at that locality during the summer
of 1953. It is possible that Starlings also breed at or near Davis Inlet, 180 miles
due north of Goose Bay. Mr. Roy Hammond, depot manager, reported
Starlings at Davis Inlet during the summers of 1955 and 1956.

_ The success of the species in those outposts is but another indication of its
ability to survive and increase in new and sometimes hostile territory. The
purpose of this paper is to document the spread of the Starling in Newfoundland,
an island which has many subarctic features.

The Starling was first recorded in Newfoundland on June 9, 1943, when
a female was collected near Tompkins, on the west coast of the island. Another
Starling was seen in that locality at the same time (Peters and Burleigh, 1945).
The female collected had a distinct brood patch and had apparently bred
(Peters, inaletter). Peters and Burleigh carried out extensive field work on the
island of Newfoundland during the subsequent four years but recorded only a
flock of some 25 from January 10 to February 10, 1947, at St. John’s, and two
individuals near Doyles (in the vicinity of Tompkins) on May 15, 1947. In
addition, A. W. Cameron, National Museum of Canada, located a nest in a
dead poplar at South Brook (in the vicinity of Tompkins) on July 2, 1949, and
a flock of adults and juveniles in that locality on August 7, 1949 (Peters and
Burleigh, 1951).

Thus it appears that up to 1949 Starlings were known to breed only on the
west coast of the island and to winter in small numbers at St. John’s (on the
southeast coast) and were nowhere common.

Since 1949, I have kept regular records of the occurrence of this species
in new localities in Newfoundland and have recorded its gradual spread. This
paper is based on those records and on valuable observations by members of
the Natural History Society of Newfoundland.

DISTRIBUTION AND SPREAD

The distribution and spread of Starlings on the island of Newfoundland
is summarized below and illustrated in the accompanying map (Figure 1):
West coast
1950. Bred at Tompkins and Doyles.
1952. Bred at Cormack in the Humber Valley.
1953. Bred at St. George’s and Stephenville.
1954. Bred at Deer Lake and Corner Brook.
1955. Bred at Humbermouth.

140 Tue CaANapIAN Fietp-NaTuRALIST Woli2

@ — BREEDING RECORDS ONLY

9383n0

~~ yoavueva

@=sreevns AND WINTERING

A — TRANSIENT

= "BARRENS’, i.e. CARIBOU RANGE

ied

ZL oN H
f EX

60° 30 59° 30 58° 30 57° 30" 56° 30 55° 30 54° 30 53° 30° 52°

Figure 1. Present distribution of the Starling in Newfoundland.

1956. At least 1,000 square miles extending from St. Andrews to Bonne Bay
occupied.

Notre Dame Bay

1950. A single bird captured in a pigeon cote at Norris Arm on May 15.

1951. Six, including juveniles, at Benton on August 22.

1952. Bred at Norris Arm and at Twillingate.

1953. Bred at Lewisporte.

1954. Possibly bred at Botwood.

1955. Bred at Botwood. A flock of 210 recorded at Botwood on January 2,
1956.

1956. Reported to be spreading in the Twillingate area.

1958 Tuck: THE Startinc IN NEWFOUNDLAND 141

Bonavista Bay

1950. A small flock reported from Badger’s Quay in February.

1951. Small flocks reported overwintering at Bonavista but no proved breeding.
A flock of 19, including juveniles, observed at Badger’s Quay on July 16.

1952. Bred at Bonavista.

1954. A flock of 11 at Happy Adventure in February and March.

1955. Bred at Musgravetown, Lethbridge, and Southern Bay.

1956. Localities mentioned above. extended. About 100 square miles of
coastal localities now occupied.

Trinity Bay

1952. A flock of 40 recorded at Clarenville from December 1952 to late spring
1953.

1953. Bred at Heart’s Content and possibly at Clarenville.

1954. Bred at Clarenville and Shoal Harbour.

1955. Bred at Milton, George’s Brook, and Port Rexton.

Fortune Bay

1950. A flock of 41 at Garnish on November 11.

1951. Bred at Garnish and Grand Bank.

1954. Bred at Fortune.

Avalon Peninsula

1950. Bred at several farms in the vicinity of St. John’s and at the Air Force
Base, Fort Pepperrell. A flock of 240 counted at St. John’s on
December 2.

1951. Bred at Witless Bay about 20 miles from St. John’s on the Southern
Shore. Winter count at St. John’s on December 26, 1951, was 610.

1952. Increasing in the St. John’s area. A flock wintered at Trepassey on the
Southern Shore, some 60 miles from St. John’s. Count at St. John’s on
January 3, 1953, was 800.

1953. Increasing in the St. John’s area. Bred at Ferryland and Trepassey on
the Southern Shore, at Bay Roberts and Harbour Grace in Conception
Bay, and at Placentia Bay.

1954. No new breeding localities known but small flocks wintered at Whit-
bourne and a flock of 900 recorded at Belle Island on November 18.

1955. Now breeding in the business section of the city of St. John’s and along
the Southern Shore as well as at most settlements in Conception Bay.

1956. Nearly all the coastline of the Avalon Peninsula now occupied.

Up to the end of 1949, six years after the first Starling was recorded in the
island of Newfoundland, the species had not been recorded outside the
Tompkins area on the west coast and the St. John’s area on the east coast.
The first evidence of migration from those two points was in the following year
(1950) when a single bird was recorded at Norris Arm on Notre Dame Bay,
a small flock at Badger’s Quay on Bonavista Bay, and a fairly large flock (41)
at Garnish on Fortune Bay. In 1952, Starlings bred at those three localities
and had extended their breeding range to Twillingate (an outer island) in
Notre Dame Bay and to the town of Bonavista on Bonavista Bay. In 1952, also,
the Starlings had increased on the Avalon Peninsula, spreading coastwise, and
for the first time were recorded breeding outside the Codroy Valley on the

142 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

west coast of the peninsula. Nearly as spectacular at migration was recorded
in 1953. In that year, Starlings bred at Placentia in Plancentia Bay, at several
localities in Conception Bay and at Heart’s Content in Trinity Bay. Thus by
the summer of 1953 Starlings were breeding on all sides of the Avalon
Peninsula.

More than half the human population of Newfoundland resides on the
Avalon Peninsula and there are many farms and pasture lands which are
attractive to Statlings and can support them. Starlings were first recorded
breeding in the vicinity of St. John’s in 1950 but it is almost certain that they had
been doing so undetected for several years previously. The first immigration
from St. John’s was noticeable in 1951 when Starlings bred at Witless Bay on
the Southern Shore, some 20° miles from St. John’s. Within the next two
years they gradually spread along the southern shore and had reached Trepassey
some 100 miles from St. John’s. In 1953, also, as recorded above, they had
settled at localities in Conception Bay, Trinity Bay, and Placentia Bay. By the
end of 1956, they were breeding at all the larger settlements along the coast
of the Avalon Peninsula and at many of the smaller ones, in all, some 700 lineal
miles of coastline were occupied.

In general, Starlings appear to avoid the interior of the island which may,
except for Gander Valley, be described as mainly subalpine in character (map,
Figure 1). Persons who know the species well have watched in vain for them
at the larger inland towns such as Gander, Badger, and Grand Falls. However,
I saw a pair at Buchan’s on April 26, 1955, but could not determine whether
they were breeding or transient.

The only coastal areas in Newfoundland from which Starlings are now
absent are some 150 lineal miles of the south coast and all the northern
peninsula. That there is prospecting in the northern peninsula is already
evident. Mr. Melvin McNeil recorded a single Starling at St. Anthony on
May 1, 1954, and he has since reported that in 1957 a pair of Starlings nested in
a crevice under the eaves of an old building at St. Anthony.

NESTING

Nests examined at Ferryland, Badger’s Quay, and Twillingate were
situated in the walls of old buildings and in or under fishing stages. In St.
John’s, which is the oldest city in North America, most of the buildings are
constructed of wood and a large number are very old. There, Starlings have
found ideal nesting sites under the eaves and in the walls of some of those
buildings. Loose bricks in the walls of some of the warehouses have provided
additional nesting sites in the main part of the business section. Starlings are
now nesting on Water Street, Duckworth Street, and Gower Street in the
business section as well as on all the old residential streets.

Along the coast, Starlings are nesting in old abandoned buildings or in the
more dilapidated fishing premises, and especially under fishing flakes, which
are elevated wood structures for drying fish.

Perhaps the most unusual nesting sites are (or were) provided at the air °

1958 Tuck: THE STARLING IN NEWFOUNDLAND 143

force base, Fort Pepperrell, near St. John’s. Many of the buildings there have
ventilation holes under the eaves of the roofs. “These vents are about 24 inches
in diameter and six feet apart. On a visit there in the spring of 1954, I noticed
that several Starlings were carrying nesting material into the vents. On inquiry
on May 9, 1957, I learned from the authorities at the base that Starlings were
using the vents so much that the accumulated nesting material on the rafters
under the roofs constituted a serious fire hazard. 'Workmen were then in the
process of screening all the vents to prevent Starlings from nesting in the
buildings. ‘Thus, within seven years from its first reported nesting in the St.
John’s area, the Starling had become a nuisance.

POPULATIONS

As the map will show, Starlings overwinter at all the larger centers of
population. Small flocks also may be encountered almost anywhere along the
Coast in winter, especially on the Avalon Peninsula. The pattern of coloniza-
tion is very consistent. Small flocks appear at a new area in the winter and
breed that spring, or at least the following spring.

The Starlings on the west coast appear to retreat slightly westward in
the winter to the St. George’s Bay coast, especially to Stephenville and St.
George’s. No winter counts have been obtained from those localities but
approximately 300 were recorded at Humbermouth in mid-December 1954.

St. John’s has remained the most important locality for wintering con-
centrations. “This may be explained partly because the area is milder in winter
and there is less snowfall than in most other sections of the island (Hare, 1954).
Apart from usually snow-free fields, the Starlings have an additional source of
food at St. John’s in the berries of the mountain ash (Sorbus americanus) which
remain on the trees late in the winter. [hose trees are rather common orna-
mentals in the suburbs of the city and have helped to support a wintering
population of Robins (Turdus migratorius). The first evidence of competition
between Starlings and Robins was recorded during the winter of 1956-57. The
1956 crop of mountain ash berries was a poor one. Starlings and Robins
together had finished the entire supply by late December. Early in January
seven Robins were examined by me; all of them had died of starvation. No
Robins were seen at St. John’s that winter after January 20, 1957, that had not
happened since 1936.

The following are high counts of Starlings at the city of St. John’s:

December 2, 1950 240
December 26, 1951 610
January 3, 1953 800
February 12, 1954 1,000
December 27, 1954 1,545
December 23, 1955 1,600
December 26, 1956 847

It will be noted from the above that the city of St. John’s can support only
a small wintering population of Starlings and that the population may vary
with the winter conditions.

The sole attempt to estimate the total wintering population was in 1954,

144

THe CANADIAN FIeLD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

~

when in late December, 2,245 Starlings were reported from various areas,

including 1,545 at St. John’s.

The areas reported from were less than half
those which were known to be occupied by Starlings in the summer.

The

Christmas count at St. John’s (847) in 1956 was the lowest in three years; but
that December was an exceedingly cold one and Starlings had spread out in

small groups along the coast.

On October 27, 1956, a single flock estimated at

2,300 at St. John’s was the largest flock recorded so far.

Some idea of the spread of Starlings in the island of Newfoundland since
1949 may be obtained from the fact that by 1956 they were bree in at least

2,000 square miles of the island.

REFERENCES

Beckett, Mrs. Eva. 1953.
at Churchill, Manitoba.
67:44.

BLEAKNEY, SHERMAN. 1953. Starlings in the
Ungava District, Quebec Province. Can.
Field Nat. 67:44-45.

Hare, F. Kennetu. 1952. The climate of
the Island of Newfoundland: a geographi-
cal analysis. Geogr. Bull. 2:36-88.

Fuiier, W. A. 1955. First record of the
starling in the Northwest Territories.
Can. Field Nat. 69:27.

Lewis, Harrison F. 1954. Game or pest?
Hunting and Fishing in Canada. 20(4):
14, 15.

Starling nesting
Can. Field Nat.

Pearse, THEED. 1953. European starling on
Vancouver Island, B.C. Can. Field Nat.
67:94.

Peters, Harorp S., and THomas D. Bur-
LEIGH. 1945. Some new records from
Newfoundland. Auk 62:565.

. 1951. The birds of Newfound-
land. St. John’s, Nfld. Dept. Nat. Res.
p. 335-337.

Wywnne-Epwarps, V. C. 1956. Birds ob-
served at Goose Bay and elsewhere in
Labrador. Can. Field Nat. 70:76-77.

Received for publication 12 August 1957

NOTES

Observation of a Short-tailed
Weasel Capturing a Chipmunk

On May 5, 1954, near Springbank Bridge
on the Madawaska River in Renfrew
County a short-tailed weasel Mustela
erminea cicognanii was observed as it
leisurely crossed a logging road. I
watched it search around a large moss-
covered log and then disappear in the
woods. In a few minutes, one hundred
and fifty feet in the direction that the
weasel appeared to be traveling my at-
tention was attracted by the noise of the
claws of two small animals as they
spiraled in close pursuit up a large elm
tree, moving much too rapidly for easy
identification. The pursued animal on
reaching the topmost branches unhesi-
tatingly leaped to the ground. When the
pursuing animal halted and then slowly

descended the tree I could see that it
was a weasel.

Without moving from my _ standing
position I noticed a chipmunk pass on the
ground about twenty feet away and then
start to rapidly climb another large elm
tree. I suspected this to be the pursued
animal that had jumped from a treetop
a few minutes before. It appeared to be
in haste, steadily climbing until it got
into the top of the tree and out onto one
of the smallest twigs there to hunch itself
into a roundish spot against the sky. The
trees were bare of leaves at this date.

The chipmunk was already settled in
the treetop before a weasel appeared on
the same general course as the chipmunk
had taken. The weasel slowly meandered
to the base of the tree and started to
ascend.

1958

The tree was a typical, many-branched
American elm about fifteen inches in
diameter at the butt. Several times in
ascending the lower and larger branches
the weasel followed a branch that did not
carry the chipmunk but it never went
more than a few feet before it would re-
trace to pick up again the chipmunk’s
course. In the upper portion of the tree
where the branches were much smaller
in diameter the weasel became sure of the
trail making no errors in going directly
to the site of the chipmunk. The chip-
munk allowed the weasel a distance of
about three feet when it jumped clear,
landing hard on its belly in the old leaves.
It lay motionless, momentarily, appearing
to be stunned. I was tempted to go over
and pick it up if possible but did not move
from my original position of observation.

Again the weasel retraced its course
down the tree in the same leisurely man-
ner. When it reached the main trunk of
the tree the chipmunk began to move
and slowly made its way to another large
tree on the other side of where I stood.
It passed close to me and the weasel came
within a yard of my feet, rose on its hind
legs and looked me over to the top of my
head. I could plainly see the twitching of
its nostrils as it paused to make this in-
spection. It continued on the trail. By
this time the chipmunk had reached the
base of the tree but had not ascended
three feet when the weasel in a few un-
dulating leaps reached the tree and very
quickly spiraled up the trunk in pursuit
of its victim. The chipmunk was about
twelve feet from the ground when the
weasel seized it; both fell and rolled to-
gether on the ground. The chipmunk
gave one short squeal and became rigid.
The weasel holding its head high, easily
carried the curled chipmunk some dis-
tance over rough ground to take shelter
under a pile of logs.

Dr. Norman Guiou was also a witness
to this incident.

Row ey Fritu
65 Acacia Avenue
Ottawa 2, Ontario
24 July 1957

Notes

145

Observations of the Mocking-bird
in Eastern Ontario

On May 29, 1957, while driving with
Dr. and Mrs. Norman Guiou and Mrs.
Frith near the point where the Stewart-
ville side road joins Highway 17 in
Renfrew County (about ten miles west
of Arnprior), I stopped the car within
forty feet of a Mockingbird Mzmus
polyglottos which was perched on a wire
fence. During the period of our observa-
tion which lasted more than ten minutes
the bird was quite active making frequent
short flights to the ground and to nearby
brush piles in search of food. Dr. Guiou
approached it on foot sometimes within
thirty feet as it made short erratic flights
along the fence. During our observations
this bird remained silent.

On June 9, 1957, the same group as
mentioned above observed at the south-
easterly corner of Torbolton Township,
Carleton County (about three miles
southwest of Dunrobin) a singing Mock-
ingbird perched on the high transmission
wires of a powerline. This bird when
approached would move along the
powerline or to tall trees of the vicinity
and seemed cautious to keep a distance
of roughly two hundred feet between it
and its observers who were each equipped
with binoculars. During the period of
observation, exceeding fifteen minutes,
this bird sang intermittently and was
heard to clearly imitate several species of
the vicinity: Crested Flycatcher, Robin,
Catbird, Rose-breasted Grosbeak, Brown
Thrasher and probably others. On one
occasion it was observed to continue its
song while in flight.

Row ey FRitH
65 Acacia Avenue
Ottawa 2, Ontario
24 July 1957

Cedar Waxwings at. Churchill

Manitoba

On June 26, 1957, I had a long and care-
ful observation of two Cedar Waxwings
here. Waxwings are rare in the Churchill

146

area and any that I had previously seen
here were Bohemian Waxwings. When I
first saw these two, they were feeding
among some weed stalks at the foot of
my yard. Later they flitted about among
other plants and bushes in the yard, and
eventually perched in plain view, one on
an aerial wire about 18 feet from my
point of observation, and the other on
the top of a pole a little farther distant.
The light was excellent and with my
field glasses I was able to clearly note
every feature of identification. I had
them under observation for a full half-
hour.

Eva Beckett
Churchill, Manitoba
9 September 1957

Distribution of the Harvest Mouse
in British Columbia

In May 1942 Mr. George P. Holland
trapped two harvest mice Reithrodon-
tomys megalotis in the southern Okana-
gan Valley, British Columbia, one at
Osoyoos Lake and one near the end of
Dog Lake, which is about 29 miles north
of Osoyoos Lake. These captures repre-
sent the first Canadian records for the
species (Holland, 1942). Subsequent
trapping in the region produced only a
few additional specimens: two at Osoyoos
Lake taken by Dr. G. C. Carl in 1944,
another on October 13, 1949, and two
half-grown young at Vaseaux Lake, 22
miles to the north, on October 13, 1947.
The last three were taken by myself in
snap traps. These are the only records
from the southern Okanagan Valley
known to me.

Dog Lake continued to represent the
most northerly station until May 1956,
when I trapped six adult specimens near
Okanagan Landing, five at the tree line
on the shore of Okanagan Lake, one on
open grassland 200 feet above and 300
yards east of the lake, a habitat occupied
also by the pocket mouse Perognathus
parvus and meadow mouse Microtus
montanus. During September 1957 I
trapped two additional specimens in

THe CaNnapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

heavy roadside weed growth two miles

to the north.

The question of whether this series of
captures indicates a recent invasion of
harvest mice or if, on the other hand,
the species had remained undetected until
Holland captured specimens in 1942 is
probably impossible to answer. To sup-
port the invasion theory there are reports
of trapping in the lower Okanagan region
in earlier years. William Spreadborough
in 1905 (R. M. Anderson, 1932), Ander-
son and Garrett in 1913 (E. M. Anderson,
1915), myself in 1930 and 1931, and sub-
sequently others failed to capture the
species. That a harvest mouse population
may have expanded rapidly northward
through the valley bottom of the lower
Okanagan, where suitable habitat is con-
tinuous or nearly so, seems likely enough,
but its sudden appearance at Okanagan
Landing is not so likely. From the north
end of Dog Lake, by the most direct land
route and ignoring all physical obstacles,
the distance is some 54 miles. So also the
intervening habitat is largely unsuited to
this animal’s needs. It is difficult to con-
ceive of the small, delicate harvest mouse
moving so great a distance in so short a
time, even though a number of genera-
tions might be involved. On the other
hand these particular areas at Okanagan
Landing have been trapped at intervals
since 1911. The harvest mouse is easily
trapped and had it been present it seems
doubtful that none would have been
taken. And so the question remains un-
answered.

REFERENCES

Anperson, E. M. 1915. Revised list of
mammals collected in the Okanagan Val-
ley in 1913. Rep. prov. Mus. nat. Hist.
B.C. 1914.

AnpberSon, R. M. 1932.
from British Columbia.
Canada 70:102.

Ho.ianp, Georce P. 1942.
rence. of Reithrodontomys
Columbia. Murrelet 23:60.

James A. Munro

Five new mammals
In Bull. nat. Mus.

On the occur-
in British

Okanagan Landing
British Columbia
13 September 1957

1958

Impaction of the Gullet of a
Starling with a Lepidopteran
Pupal Case

Ficure 1. Pupal case fragment in throat

of Starling.
Insert: Pupal case fragment removed.

Nores—ReEviews

epi

Sixty-Four Starlings Sturnus vulgaris L.
(46 males, 17 females, one unsexed) were
found dead on 21 March 1957 in a city
park in Hamilton, Ontario, by Mr. V.
Bruce Collins of this department. One of
the Starlings, a male, was observed to
have a swelling in the throat region.
When the area was laid open, the pos-
terior sixth of a lepidopteran pupal case
was found blocking the upper end of the
esophagus (Figure 1). Autopsy revealed
that the crop was empty and normal in
appearance; the intestine contained frag-
ments of one or more tapeworms, two
nematodes, and possibly the partially
digested remains of a part of the lepidop-
teran pupa. Identification of the lepi-
dopteran involved is not certain, but the
fragment of the pupal case resembles in
size and appearance the posterior end of
the pupal case of the tomato hornworm
Protoparce quinquemaculata. Some of
the birds in this group, when examined
at the Ontario Veterinary College, were
determined to have strychnine in their
tissues.

E. I. Smmpman
Department of Entomology and Zoology
Ontario Agricultural College
Guelph, Ontario
18 June 1957

REVIEWS

Flora of Manitoba
By H. J. Scocean. Ottawa, Queen’s Printer,

1957. 619 p. $5.00. (National Museum of

Canada Bulletin No. 140)

An acute need has been met by the
appearance of a flora for the Province of
Manitoba. This is the first flora to be
published for the entire region, and more
than replaces the erroneous and inade-
quate lists which have long served as the
sole floristic record for the area. All
those whose interests, directly or in-
directly, are related to what is known of

the complement of vascular plants of
Manitoba, and of Central Canada in
general, will be gratified by the printing:
of this National Museum of Canada bul-
letin. To the small band of botanists
whose professional interests include the
area covered by the flora, it will serve as
a reliable repository of information and a
framework for extended enquiry. To the
naturalist and student botanist, it will
rovide a serviceable guide to the native
and introduced plants of the province.

And for those in the applied sciences—

148

foresters, agriculturists, conservationists
and others—it will be indispensable both
in the field and in the laboratory.

That Dr. Scoggan has eliminated a vast
lacuna in our floristic inventory is shown
clearly by the fact that his flora includes
204 entities for which no published report
had existed, although many of these
plants scarcely qualify as rarities.

The flora is introduced by a short ac-
count of the early collecting and records,
with references to more recent reports
and collectors. This is followed by an
account of the main geological features of
the area, a section which would have been
enhanced by the inclusion of a map. It
seems rather inadequate, but probably in
the tradition of many floras and manuals,
to present little more than the bald facts
of surface geology of a region. The next
step might have been taken, and some
indication made that the major physio-
graphical regions do, in fact, bear charac-
teristic flora, and that in this area the
nature of the substratum is probably im-
portant in determining relative floristic
diversity. The section on vegetation
under “Climate and Vegetation” is based
on the old and in some ways dated sys-
tem of Halliday. An unfortunate feature
here is the inclusion of tediously long
lists of species with no indication of rela-
tive abundance or exclustveness. The
heading is “Vegetation,” but the treat-
ment is really floristic.

There follows a short section on the
geographical affinities of the flora. Again,
the treatment is rather traditional, but
perhaps of necessity in this first compre-
hensive publication. Many of the in-
teresting and critical phytogeographical
aspects of the flora of the area are masked
by the breakdown adopted here, and
future strictly phytogeographical treat-
ments will certainly result in a more
meaningful and illuminating account.

The main part of the flora consists of
artificial keys to the 113 families, 495
genera and 1541 species, subspecies and
varieties which are included in the in-
digenous and introduced flora of the pro-
vince. For each entity commoner synony-

Tue CANnapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Voliz72

my is indicated, together with a few
cryptic comments on ecology, notes on
distribution in the province and other
published reports, followed by an account
of the general distribution. A useful and
helpful feature of the keys is the inclu-
sion of plants which have not actually
been recorded for the province but which
might be expected to be added to the
flora. Of necessity, the keys are relatively
technical, and they will bring about the
early eclipse of all but the most ardent
amateur botanist.

Taxonomically, the flora conforms to
the standard North American approach,
with but a few inconsistencies. Dr.
Scoggan has made no attempt to align the
treatment with modern taxonomy, and
his species and genus concepts seem to
follow those of Gray’s Manual. Peculiar
exceptions are his acceptance of Parnas-
sta multiseta and Galium septentrionalis.
But the complete absence of nomen-
clatural innovations, while it postpones
again a taxonomic (and agonizing?) re-
appraisal, is consistent with the conserva-
tive approach. However, it is more sur-
prising that this work, on a large and
poorly known area, should include not a
single description of a new entity. Cer-
tainly Dr. Scoggan has set the stage for
extended and detailed investigation, both
floristic and taxonomic.

The bulletin is well printed with few
errors, but a more substantial cover and
spine would have increased the life
expectancy of the book.

J. C. Rircuir

Assistant Professor of Botany
University of Manitoba

The New Way of the Wilderness
By Carvin Rutstrum. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1958. 272 p., illus. $4.50.

Although the word new appears in the
title, Rutstrum’s book stresses the time-
tested methods of the successful camper
which are based on good equipment
properly used by an experienced hand.
At the same time the author points out
how new developments are applied to
those basic methods.

1958

There have been many books on
‘camping and woodcraft’ since Kep-
hart’s classic of that name first appeared
in 1916, but few of them show such
breadth of experience as this volume does.

Rutstrum believes that there is no need
to be uncomfortable in the wilderness.
He describes how to use modern equip-
ment to achieve comfort and real pleasure
in the field. Although aware of all the
classical techniques he is thoroughly
practical in his praise of the aluminum
canoe, the modern outboard motor and
the flashlight as basic tools. He likes the
fragrance of a spruce bough bed but
achieves the desired effect by putting a
few boughs near his air mattress on which
he sleeps more comfortably after less
preparatory work.

He discusses wilderness cooking by
several methods and believes in a good
well-balanced diet and a widely varied
menu but shies away from such fads as
foil cookery which he considers a novelty
of limited use in real camping.

Rutstrum’s experience is wide and his
suggestions on camping in connection
with summer travel on foot, and by
horse, canoe, and auto, as well as on
winter travel and camping, are the result
of many first-hand tests under field con-
ditions. His chapters on location finding
and survival, if carefully followed.
would do much to lessen the annual toll
of lost hunters and fishermen. His sug-
gested use of easily caught minnows as
readily available survival food deserves
careful attention. He also suggests the
use of a light weight gill net for taking
larger fish under emergency conditions.

The author’s section on the use of the
aluminum canoe for travel on ice and
water at break-up and freeze-up times
is the first published reference to that
new art that has come to this reviewer’s
attention. His suggestion, however, of
using an outboard motor, in reverse, to
slow downstream travel through rapids
may lead to damage of both motor and
boat if an obstruction is encountered
since in reverse the motor cannot tip up
to pass over the obstruction.

REVIEWS

149

In some sections of the book, inex-
perienced readers may wish for a little
more detailed explanation of items that
are treated well but briefly. Experienced
campers will not agree with all of the
author’s suggestions. A great wealth of
useful information is compressed into the
272-page text. While much of this is well
suited to the needs of the user of modern
well-equipped campgrounds, it will be of
even greater value to the real wilderness
traveler.

Typographical and factual errors are
few; the type though small is easily read.
The book will find its place in many

_campers’ libraries where its value will

increase with familiarity. The author has
performed a great service to the growing
number of outdoor enthusiasts.

V.E. F. Somman

Assistant Chief
Canadian Wildlife Service

The Snakes of Ontario
By E. B. S. Locmr. Toronto, Univ. of
Toronto Press [1958]. 94 p., illus. $4.95.
This book was written expressly for
children because, as Mr. Logier observes
in his introduction, “it has long been
apparent that any attempt to educate the
public into reasonable thinking about
snakes, if it is to be successful, must start
with the children, whose minds are still
open to receive the truth.” However, it
will also serve as a valuable reference for
adult naturalists throughout eastern
Canada for the snake species treated also
occur in Quebec, New Brunswick, Nova
Scotia and Prince Edward Island.

The book contains a wealth of informa-
tion and the organization and presenta-
tion are excellent. There are twenty pages
devoted to such topics as feeding, repro-
duction, hibernation, usefulness of snakes
and other related subjects. Pages 23 to 62
present a description of Ontario’s sixteen
species of snakes. The account of each
species is neatly limited to two facing
pages, and includes an illustration of the
animal, a small map depicting its entire
range in North America and a detailed
one showing its distribution in Ontario.

150

The accompanying and carefully pre-
pared text covers the size and structure,
color, habits and habitat, and distribution
of snakes in Ontario. Except for two
photographs of rattlesnakes, all the illus-
trations, both color and black-and-white,
are from Mr. Logier’s own brush and
drawing board. For clarity and detail
these drawings surpass the hazy photo-
graphic reproductions so often seen in
books about snakes.

The titles of the eight appendices are
as follows: Synoptic List of Ontario
Snakes, The Scientific Name, Key to
Ontario Snakes, Determination of Sex,
Keeping Snakes as Pets, Collecting and
Preserving of Specimens, Glossary and
Rattlesnake Bite. The last appendix
should be read by children, parents, and
doctors alike. Mr. Logier has condensed
this subject into an authoritative 11-page
treatise on rattlesnake bite. One reading
of the gruesome developments which
follow rattlesnake bite should convince
readers that one should learn to recog-
nize rattlesnakes and leave them alone.
All cases of fatalities in Canada have been
due to persons who deliberately at-
tempted to handle a rattlesnake.

SHERMAN BLEAKNEY
Herpetologist, National Museum

The BBC Naturalist
Edited by Desmonp Hawkins. London,
Rathbone Books, 1957. 93 p., illus. $2.50.
This little volume is not at all a scien-
tific work. It roams over a wide field
without being either thorough or inclu-
sive. What it does present (and very
successfully) is the scientific naturalist
being popular—not always an engaging
sight. The book is a sort of distillation of
the wonderful “Naturalist” broadcasts
the BBC has been doing with unex-

THe CANADIAN FIeELp-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

pectedly great success. A point of view
does emerge: an attitude combining
respect for scientific thoroughness with
pure human delight.

The approach varies with the authors
of the brief contributions, starting with
Peter Scott’s thoughts on the painting of
birds and ending with a half page by
Field Marshal Lord Alanbrooke on some
waders he saw. Between are equally
diverse items. James Fisher has a report
on the great avian crime wave in Britain
which outlines a painstaking and pro-
longed detective job. The guilt of the
tits, great and small, is beyond doubt in
this mounting series of milk thefts.
Feathered Fagins have been spreading
the technique of prying off bottle tops
for a couple of decades. In contrast is
Frances Pitt’s frankly sentimental ac-
count of her furred and feathered friends,
she being one of those people who in-
variably have squirrels poking through
their pockets.

The illustrations, photographs in both
color and black and white, are numerous;
in fact they are half the book in both
space and interest. They are outstand-
ingly good, considered as photography,
printing, art or scientific record. Like
the text, they are selected examples
rather than a series bringing evidence to
support a theory.

Most of the creatures considered are,
naturally, British and do not occur in
Canada. The methods of observation
will be news to no Canadian naturalist,
but I think many an observer in this
country will enjoy an unusual and
pleasant sense of kinship with his English
colleagues.

STEPHEN DALE

Presentation Officer
Station CBO, Ottawa

British Columbia Bird and Mammal

: Society
esident, M. D. F. Upvarpy, Dept. of Zoology,
versity ian British Columbia, Vancouver 8, B.C.

_ Edmonton Bird Club

President, A. Attan; Vice-President, W. R. Sat;
etary-Treasurer, W. G. L. Twicce; Field Secre-
ry, K. Batt; Audubon Representative, R. Heats;
ditor, E. O. Houn; Librarian, G. Bau.

-Mellwraith Ornithological Club,

Wee London, Ont.

ast President, F. Howarpv Keast; Preadeni.
W. W. Joop; Vice-President, F.S. Cook, Recording
retary, D. Dow; Treasurer, Miss G. Lawton;
orresponding Secretary, Mrs. M. E. Leany, 682
uron St., London, Ont.; Migration Secretary,
. Leacu, 376 Platts Lane, SS 3, London, Ont.

_ Natural History Society of Manitoba
President, Dr. J. C. Rircum; Treasurer, Haroip
OSSOP; General Secretary, E. Downron, 47
nnington Ave., Winnipeg 8, Manitoba.

Nova Scotia Bird Society .
President, C. R. K. Aten; Vice-President, Dr.
ARRISON F. Lewis; Secretary-Treasurer, Carr.
o/s) Pa Be Mancanp, 6/0 Iowa Scans Museum of
Science, Spring Garden Road, Halifax, N.S.;
Editor, Dr. Liuoyp B. MacPHERson.

anuscripts

Manuscripts should be typewritten on one side
of nontransparent paper measuring 84 by 11 inches.
\uthors are requested to use at least one given
e. All text matter, including quotations, foot-
lotes, tables, literature references, and legends for
gures should be double-spaced. Only those words
eant ta appear in italics should be underlined.
ry sheet of the manuscript should be numbered.

Webster's New International Dictionary is the
ithority for spelling.

References are made by the auchor-date system.
y should be listed alphabetically and typed
he end of the main body of text. For titles in
rence matter, abbreviations follow the rules in
he International Code for the Abbreviation of
Titles of Periodicals and the World List of
cientific Periodicals.

Other abbreviations should be used sparingly.
e better-known terms of measurement follow
SA Specification Z85-1943 Abbreviations for
cientific and Engineering Terms or the equivalent
_ of the American Standards Association (Z10.1-

941).

_ Tables should be titled and numbered consecu-
ly in arabic numerals. Tables and legends for
figures should be placed after the list of

4

. references. Each table and all the legends should

628 Fraser St.,

AFFILIATED SOCIETIES

Provancher Society of Natural History
of Canada
President, J. KENNEDY Hitx; First Vice-President,
Francois Hamen; Second Vice-President, RonaLp
E. Biamr; Secretary-Treasurer, Grorces A. LECLERC,
Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds
President, C. C. Sait; Vice-Presidents, J. DEta-

FIELD, Miss R. B. BLancuarp; Treasurer, Miss G. E.

Hisparp; Secretary, Miss RutH S. Assotr, 164
Senneville Road, R.R. 1, Ste. Anne de Bellevue,
Que.; Librarian, Mrs. P. H. pu Boutay.

Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club
President, Dr. Water ToweE.i; Vice-President,
Frep BopswortH; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. J. B.
Stewart, 21 Millwood Road, Toronto 7, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

Honorary President, N. A. M. MacKenzir; Past
President, A. R. Wootton; President, J. J. PLom-
MER; Vice-President, FRANK SANFoRD; Honorary
Secretary, J. Y. Nemp; Recording Secretary, Miss
Exner Fucier; Program Secretary, JouHN GARDNER;
Honorary Treasurer, FRANK Sanrorp; Librarian,
Mrs. S. F. Braptey; Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W.
Rocers.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS

and references in notes should be incorporated

directly in the text.

Illustrations

All figures, including each figure of the plates,
should be numbered consecutively in arabic
numerals. The author’s name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower
left corner of the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated
in the figure.

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines
that are to appear in the reproduction should be
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (43 by 74 inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend. ©

Reprints
Reprints, with or without covers, may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form which

is attached to the galley proofs.

THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB

FouNDED IN 1879

' The objects: of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of na
encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observ:
all branches of natural history. The patron is His Excellency, the Right Honorabl
cent Massey, C.H., Governor General of Canada. The club is a corporate membx
the Federation of Grcue Naturalists. Pee ome si

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL

Loris S. Russi, President, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario
Epwarp L. Bousrietp, First Vice-President

J. SHermMan Bieakney, Second Vice-President : oe
Raymonp J. Moore, Treasurer, Science Service Building, Ottawa, Ontate
A. W. F. BaNriexp, Secretary, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario ie
I. L. Conners, C. FRANKTON, Auditors
Mrs. Joun W. Arnotp, Miss ANNE Bannine, Miss AnnA Brown, Miss Cua TT
Ditt, Mrs. JoHN Hawkxeserwee, Miss ViI0oLET Humpurirs, Miss PauLINE ‘SNURE, . Ais
Mary Stuart, THE REVEREND F. E. Bantm, Messrs. R. M. ANDERSON, J. W. ARNO
W. K. W. Batpwny, D. R. Beckett, B. Borvin, A. E. Bourcuienon, K. Bow es,
Cameron, W. J. Copy, I. L. Conners, W. G. Dore, C. Frankton, R. Fritu, J
GILLETT, W. E. Goprrey, H. Grou, i W. Groves, R. A. Hamutton, W. iL. Th
W. H. ‘LANCELEY, H. Lioyn, W. W. Marte, H. MARSHALL, D. A. Munro, A. E. P
P. A. RuppELL, D. B. O. SAVILE, Hy: Scoccan, G. W. Suvotam, V. E, FB Sous

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Science Service Building, Ottawa, Ontario

Rosert A. Hamitton, Editor — W. J. Copy, Business Means
Associate Editors: F. J. Atcock (Geology), Joun W. ArNotp (Entomology), W. A. Bgl
(Paleontology), J. SHERMAN Bieakney (Herpetology), Austin W. Cameron (
malogy), Wittiam G. Dore (Botany), J. R. Dymonp (Ichthyology), W. Farr Go
(Ornithology), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), A. LaRocqur (Conchology).

The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Natur
Club with the assistance of affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manu:
representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch
tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the mos
recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advert
rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors, TRANSACT
OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, 1879-1886, and the OTF
NATURALIST, 1887-1919, are obtainable from the fiche manager.

MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION —

The annual membership fee of $3.00 covers subscription to the journal, Institutio
however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current nu

of regular issues are ninety cents. Money orders should be made payable to the O

Field-Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Notice of change of address

also be sent to the treasurer.

Beginning with 1959, membership and subscription will be $4. 00.

Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario

The jGaadian Field-Naturalist

VOLUME 72 OCTOBER-DECEMBER 1958

ALBERT EDWARD ATTWOOD — A REMEMBRANCE

Hersert Grow
472 Highcroft Avenue, Ottawa 3, Ontario

‘Tue peat of A. E. Attwood on September 30, 1957, at the age of 92, would pass
unnoticed by most members of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, since it is
just short of 50 years ago that he guided its activities as President for two years.
He had already served for nearly ten years on the Council of the Club. It was
early in his term of office that J came to Ottawa and became a member. Deeply
appreciating his fine qualities, I consider it a privilege to bring to later members
_a few particulars of his long and active career.

Mr. Attwood was a son of A. C. Attwood, a farmer near London, Ontario,
whose interests evidently extended beyond the growing of good crops, for a
letter preserved relates his submitting plant specimens for identification. “The
son attended Strathroy Collegiate Institute and attained exceptional scholarship
in the entrance examinations. In 1889 he came to Ottawa Normal School from
which he emerged as a gold medalist. As an interlude from teaching in Ottawa
schools he went to Queen’s University, graduating M.A. with first class honors,
and with specialist standing in natural science. For some years he paid close
attention to the botany of the Ottawa district. On the excursions of the Club
he was an enthusiastic leader.

As a successful teacher and later Principal for 26 years of Osgoode Street
Public School, Mr. Attwood also delved into the psychology of his field, as
revealed in an address before the Field-Naturalists’ Club on January 4, 1910
(abstracted in the next Ottawa Naturalist) on the subject ‘Instinct and Educa-
tion.” One of my abiding recollections of him is of his chairmanship of a
lecture at Lisgar Collegiate institute delivered by Prof. R. G. Moulton on “The
Book of Job”; and his really exuberant thanks to the eminent lecturer at its close.
| remember, too, his transfer of the early Club library from the Osgoode Street
school to custody of the Carnegie Library, and his invitation to me to cull over
such ‘leavings’ as had any interest for me. Some of these have since been
returned to the stockpiles of the Naturalist as of more value in completing sets
for sale than some later issues wanted in exchange.

During late years Mr. Attwood was occasionally interviewed by Ottawa
papers, at which times he was able to remark significantly on changes in his
time. Intriguing memories would be recalled. When once he had before him
the daughter of a former pupil’s daughter (also a pupil) he “thought it must
be getting near time to retire.” Among other former pupils were the future
Mayor Stanley Lewis, H. Stanley Higman, Rev. Llewellyn Graham, and
Harold Short, President of Kenwood Mills, Arnprior.

In retirement he kept well abreast of the times and, to indulge his urge for
activity, conducted for a time a newspaper column, “Educational Recreation,”
which was essentially a test of broad reading and information on the part of his

Mailing date of this number: 28 November 1958
151

152 Tue Canapian Fievp-NatTurAList Vol. 72

readers, to be checked against answers below. Indicating also the breadth of Cj

his interests was his attendance at a dinner of the Agricultural Institute, where
he indulged, perhaps, nostalgic memories of his own early identiteaciae with

agriculture. This dinner proved to be the scene of my last personal meeting — |

with him.

In 1899 Mr. Attwood married the former Margaret Kee of Ormstown,
Quebec, who came to the staff of the Ottawa Ladies College in 1892. She
died in 1947. Their three daughters are: Mrs. George Troop, Toronto; Mrs.
W. H. Troop, Ottawa and Mrs. John A. Chivers, Winnipeg.

As lately as May 24, 1956, Mr. Attwood wrote in the clear, flowing hand
which was always his, thanking me for a copy of the 75th Anniversary issue
of the Canadian Field- area? He closed with the observation that “of the
list of Past Presidents I was personally acquainted quite intimately with 26
of them.”

It is well that the members of the Club should know and retain memories
of those stalwarts who have gone before. Too many of them have slipped
away already almost forgotten. ‘They served us truly in their day; we reap
from their labors.

DIAPTOMUS (MIXODIAPTOMUS) THEELI LILLJEBORG
(COPEPODA, CALANOIDA) FROM ARCTIC ALASKA?

Epwarp B. REED

Department of Biology, University of Saskatchewan,
Saskatoon, Saskatchewan

On Aveusr 14, 1955, during an investigation of the entomostracan fauna of
the Colville River drainage, a small number of diaptomids referable to Diaptomus
theeli Lilljeborg were collected from a small tundra pond near the confluence
of the Colville and Itkillik Rivers on the Arctic Coastal Plain at about 70°11’
north latitude. The plain is a tundra area of low relief dotted with many
water bodies ranging from a few feet to a mile in diameter. The pond from
which about a dozen adult males and ovigerous females of D. theeli were taken
was 20 feet long by 10 feet wide and half a foot in depth. Surface temperature
was 57°F. Other crustaceans taken in the same tow included: Cyclops vernalis
Fischer, Cyclops capillatus Sars, Heterocope septentrionalis Jaday & Mutt-
kowski, Daphnia middendorffiana Fischer, Polyartemiella hazeni (Murdoch)
and Branchinecta paludosa (O. F. Miller).

Since this appears to be the first record of D. theeli from North America
it seems desirable to present a short description of the Alaskan form and to
compare it with descriptions of the species from other areas.

FEMALE
Antennules reaching to about the middle of the genital somite, with two
setae on segments 11, 15, 16, and 17; one on segments) 125 laste Ge and 19.
Seta of segment 1 greatly enlarged, reaching about to segment 11, Gee seta
1These studies were made possible by a contract between the United States Government and the

Arctic Institute of North America. Reproduction in whole or in part is permitted for any purpose by
the United States Government.

1958 REED: Diaptomus theeli FROM ALASKA 153

of segment 2 also enlarged reaching nearly to end of segment 7. Metasome
segment 6 with posteriorly directed wings which are distinctly separated
from segment 5, which bears laterally one small cuticular flap on the left
posterior corner and two on the right. Genital segment symmetrical, exceeding
the following two segments. Second urosome segment extremely abbreviated.
Exopodite of fifth legs distinctly three-segmented, the third bearing two
slender spines, the shorter about one third the length of the other which is
finely spinulate on both margins (Figures 6 and 7). Smirnov (1929) calls
attention to a small spine on the inner distal angle of the third exopodite, which
he said had not been noted previously. This spine was not found on the
Alaskan specimens. Lateral seta of second exopodite segment slightly exceed-
ing length of third segment. Endopodite much shorter than first segment
of excpodite, indistinctly two-segmented and somewhat constricted at
midlensth. Smirnov states that the endopodite may be either one- or two-seg-
mented and Lilljeborg (1889) figures both conditions. Both authors indicate
the joint at about midlength of the ramus. Grochmalicki (1921), however,
indicates a joint very near the distal end. Sars (1898) and Rylov (1930) show
the endopodite to be of a single segment. The oblique tip of the endopodite
bears an inner spinous protrusion and a crosswise row of coarse, short hairs.
Total length without terminal setae 1.5 mm.

MALE

Setation of left antennule same as that of the female. Spines on segments
10 and 11 of the right antennule are weakly developed, that of segment 13
about equal in length to segment 14 (Figure 4), segment 23 unarmed. Left
leg of fifth pair extending to about the middle of right second exopodite
segment (Figure 1). Left basipodite bearing a posteriorly and somewhat
mesially directed protrusion (Figures 2 and 3), of which the proximal surface
is rather scalloped or crenulate; a subquadrangular hyaline lamella projects
from the posterior surface of the major protrusion. The margins of this lamella
are variable; in the six animals examined, the condition ranged from completely
smooth to a fine, uniform serration. Lilljeborg depicts this lamella with a
smooth margin as does Grochmalicki. Sars does not show the lamella at all.
Smirnov re-examined some of Sars’ material and found a lamella with crenulated
margins. Specimens examined in glycerine exhibited a smooth or at most fine
serration, whereas the serration was more evident in the mounted material. It
seems probable that distortion in mounting intensifies the serrated appearance.
The left first exopodite segment is strongly curved and tapers to the noticeably
rounded second segment. Processes of the second segment are subequal, the
proximal slender, spinelike and finely denticulate, the distal heavier, blunter and
more coarsely denticulate. Endopodite about equal to first segment of exopo-
dite, terminating in a sharp point and bearing a few short, coarse hairs. The
inner proximal portion of the right basipodite has a posteriorly directed
rounded protrusion and bears on its inner surface a small hyaline lamella.
The inner and outer distal corners of exopodite segment 1 are produced
slightly. Lateral spine of exopodite 2 is small, terminal claw swollen at base,
rather slender, and denticulate. The liguiform endopodite exceeds the first

154 Tue CANabIAN FieLtp-NaATuRALIST Vol. 72

Diaptomus theeli. Figure 1. Male fifth legs, posterior view. Figure 2. Male left fifth
leg, postero-lateral. Figure 3. Male left fifth leg, antero-lateral. Figure 4. Male
right antennule segments 13, 14, 15, 16. Figure 5. Endopodite male right fifth leg,
lateral view. Figure 6. Female fifth leg. Figure 7. Female fifth leg, exopodite
segments 2 and 3.

1958 Reep: Diaptomus theeli rRoM ALASKA 155
exopodite segment, terminates in a sharp point and is armed with a few coarse,
short hairs (Figure 5).

Since the original description in 1889 by Lilljeborg, D. theeli has been
infrequently reported. Smirnov (1930) summarized its distribution thus:
northern Siberia, a series of localities in European USSR, and Poland.

Smirnov (1930) supports Rylov (1928) in considering D. theeli var.
lithuanica Grochmalicki to be identical with the typical form and points out
that theeli is subject to considerable individual variation in several somatic
characters. Perhaps this accounts for the differences in degree of crenulation
of the lamella on the left basipodite.

D. theeli joins a growing list of diaptomids which are known to have wide
distribution in Europe and Asia but appear in North America to be restricted
to the far northern regions. Other species of this pattern of distribution
collected along the Colville River include Diaptomus gracilis Sars, Diaptomus
bacillifer Koebel, Diaptomus glacialis Lilljeborg. Further affinities between
the diaptomid faunas of Asia and North America are furnished by Diaptomus
arcticus Marsh, Diaptomus pribilofensis Jaday & Muttkowski and Diaptomus
alaskaensis M. S. Wilson. ‘The relationships of D. alaskaensis and D. pribilo-
fensis to Asiatic species have been pointed out by Wilson (1951 and 1953).
Diaptomus eiseni occidentalis Rylov reported from Siberia is presumed to be
a synonym of D. arcticus (Wilson, in press). These three species were also
frequently collected along the Colville.

Two diaptomid species recorded as occurring in Alaska and Eurasia but
not collected along the Colvile are Diaptomus kurilensis (Kiefer) and
Acanthodiaptomus denticornis (Wierze}jski).

The writer wishes to thank Mrs. Mildred S. Wilson of Anchorage, Alaska,
for the loan of literature, for criticizing the manuscript, and for invaluable aid,
generously given in the study of these copepods.

REFERENCES

GrocHMatickt, JAN. 1921. Contribution 4 Smirnov, Sercius. 1929. Beitrage zur Euco-
létude de la fauna des Copepodes et Ostra- pepoden-Fauna Mittlerusslands. Arb. biol.
codes de la Polone. Trav. Comm. Sci. Sta. Kostroma 1:1-12. (Russian text, Ger-
Math. et Natur., Soc. Sci. Poznan. Ser. man summary).

B. 1: 49-55. 1 pl. (Polish text, French 1930. Uber einige bemerkens-
résumé). werte Copepoden aus dem Nord-ural.

Zool. Anz. 87 (7/8) :159-170.

Liryeporc, W. 1889. In Revision de Wuson, Miprev S. 1951. A new sub-

Calanides d’eau douce. By J. de Guerne

and J. Richard. Mem. Soc. zool. Fr. 2:
53-181, pl. 1-4.

Rytov, W. M. 1928. Contribution a la

faune des Copepodes libres d’eau douce de.

la Siberie septentrionale. Trav. Comm.
Rép. S. S. Jakoute 11. .

Sars, GeorG Ossian. 1898. The Cladocera,
Copepoda and Ostracoda of the Jana ex-
pedition. Annu. Mus. zool. Acad. St.
Pétersb. 3:324-359, pl. 6-11.

genus of Diaptomus (Copepoda: Cala-
noida), including an Asiatic species and a
new species from Alaska. J. Wash. Acad.
Sci. 41:168-179.

1953. New and inadequately
known North American species of the
copepod genus Diaptomus. Smithson.
misc. Coll 122 (2) :1-30.

In press. Copepoda. The Cala-
noida: Im Freshwater Biology by H. B.
Ward and G. C. Whipple. Revised Edi-
tion.

Received for publication 20 January 1958

156 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 72

DOLPHINS IN NEWFOUNDLAND WATERS

Davip E. SERGEANT
Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Arctic Unit
505 Pine Avenue West, Montreal 18, Quebec

SERGEANT and Fisher (1957) recorded the presence of common dolphins
Delphinus delphis L. on the offshore banks of Nova Scotia in late summer and
autumn 1954, the species apparently being common at this time of year in the
region of ‘slope’ water which lies between the Gulf Stream and the colder
waters of the Nova Scotian coast. Sea surface temperatures recorded at the
localities of sighting were between 13 and 17°C.

The records described below extend the distribution of Delphinus north-
ward in the northwest Atlantic to the region of Newfoundland.

(a) A male common dolphin was shot in Dildo Arm, Trinity Bay,
Newfoundland (47° 32’ N., 53° 33’ W.), on July 22, 1957, by the crew of the
whaling vessel Arctic Venture owned by the Department of Fisheries of the
Province of Newfoundland. The ship was at the time engaged in driving to
shore a herd of some 155 pilot whales Globicephala melaena (Traill), and the
dolphin though evidently alone of its kind was associating with the pilot
whales. The pilot whales were the first to be seen and captured in 1957 in
Trinity Bay, the site of an extensive fishery for this species. For a description _
of the fishery for pilot whales in Newfoundland and their migrations, reference
is made to the paper mentioned above.

The dolphin was examined by the writer a few hours after capture (Figure
1), and circumstances permitted rather full examination of external and internal
characteristics. Measurements, given in centimeters, were as follows, total
standard length 190 (6 ft 3 in.); projection of lower jaw beyond tip of snout
1.3; tip of snout to center of eye 34, to blowhole 34, to angle of gape 25, to
tip of flipper 79; flipper length, axilla to tip 23, maximum flipper width 11,
length at base of dorsal fin from anterior end of ridge to immediately below
apex 28; vertical height of dorsal fin 22; span of flukes 47, notch of flukes to
anus 53; anus to penis 18; penis to umbilicus 36. The weight of the freshly
killed animal was 80 kg (175 lb). The number of teeth visible in the intact
animal, on the right side, was 41 in the upper jaw and 42 in the lower; in the
boiled-out jaws, the left side showed 42/44 and the right 43/44. The first
chamber of the stomach contained remains (beaks and pens) of at least twenty
small squid Ilex illecebrosus Lesueur, which are abundant in this region in
summer and form the principal food of the pilot whales. ‘The testes weighed
each some 37.5 grams, and histological examination of testis and epididymis
showed no spermatogenic activity, though sexual maturity had evidently been
attained. According to Kleinenberg (1956) male Delphinus attains sexual
maturity at a mean length of 170 cm in the Black Sea.

Externally, the sides of the body showed rows of parallel scratches, these
being fine and closely set, and so judged to have been made by other dolphins
and not by the pilot whales. There was a single external parasite, a specimen
about 15 mm long of the aberrant sessile barnacle Xenobalanus globicipitis

1958 SERGEANT: DOLPHINS IN NEWFOUNDLAND WATERS IS 7

Ficure 1. Head of Delphinus delphis, male, length 190 cm, captured in
Dildo Arm, Trinity Bay, Newfoundland, on July 22, 1957.

Ficure 2. Common dolphins breaching in the bow wave of the ship.
Flemish Cap, 47°00/N., 44°327W., August 1, 1957.

158 Tue CANADIAN FieLp-NaATURALIST Vol. 72

Steenstrup, attached to the dorsal surface of the right tail fluke. The skull
having been broken by heavy bullets could not be saved, however the jaws are
now in the collection of the Arctic Unit of the Fisheries Research Board of
Canada, in Montreal.

In observations of Cetacea made in Trinity Bay for varying periods each
year from 1952 through 1956, the writer had obtained no previous record of
Delphinus, although the dolphins Lagenorbynchus acutus and L. albirostris
were both encountered (Sergeant and Fisher, as above). The animal was
strange also to the whaling captain and mate, who have a lifetime’s experience
of hunting in the bay and some ten years of whaling there. Delphinus 1s
known to be an inhabitant of tropical and warm temperate seas, a social species
and a fish-eater. The circumstances of the present record—the solitary young
male with atypical food—combine to suggest that the animal was a wanderer
outside the normal range of the species. “The sea surface temperature close to
the place of capture on the same day was 11.3°C. The writer is indebted to
Capt. Clarence George and to Arctic Fishery Products Ltd., South Dildo,
Newfoundland, for allowing examination and collection of specimens from
this animal.

(b) A school of Delphinus was identified by the writer at approximately
47° N., 44° 32’ W. (over the east side of the bank known as Flemish Cap, east
of the Grand Bank).on August 1, 1957. He was then taking part in a hydro-
graphic cruise of the M.V. Investigator II operated by the Biological Station
of the Fisheries Research Board at St. John’s, Newfoundland. ‘The school was
estimated to contain 30 to 40 individuals, which approached the ship for about
20 minutes, alternately swimming alongside, ‘riding the bow wave’ (Figure 2)
and racing ahead, with the ship traveling at about 9 knots. Having examined
the dead specimen only 9 days previously, the writer found sight identification
easy, recognition characters in the water including: the black stripe from eye to
beak, the buff-gray patch on the anterior flanks, the two gray streaks on the
posterior flanks, and the dark brown color of the back. “The upper side of the
flipper in all animals appeared white, which was surprising in view of the fact
that the flipper of the specimen, agreeing with the customary description, had
been black. However, it was noted that the top of the beak and part of the
caudal peduncle also appeared white, the extent of the white varying with
time in any one individual. It was therefore deduced that the white color was
the result of cavitation of water round these body areas. These observations
show that the apparent color pattern of dolphins seen in the water may not
always be the true pattern. ae

Temperature studies carried out on this cruise showed that the area of the
sighting lay in water of intermediate temperature between the cold Labrador
Current covering most of the Grand Bank and the warm North Atlantic Drift
to the eastward. ‘The surface temperature at the station nearest to the position
of sighting, at 47°00’ N., 45°00’ W., was 11.38°C. Although temperatures
close to the coast in the vicinity of St. John’s were similar (11.53°C at 47°
32’50”N., 52° 35710”W.) on July 29, surface temperatures over the main mass
of the intervening Labrador Current were as low as 9°C.

1958 SERGEANT: DOLPHINS IN NEWFOUNDLAND WATERS 159

(c) The species was not met with elsewhere on this cruise, which extended
northward from the 47°N. parallel as far as the mid-Labrador coast. However,
observations on Cetacea were made by the officers and scientific personnel of
the Investigator II on a subsequent cruise which extended over the southern
part of the Grand Bank and over St. Pierre Bank. A school of eight to ten
dolphins was recorded at 42° 50’ N., 50° 05” W. (over the Tail of the Grand
Bank) on August 23, 1957. A photograph taken by Mr. C. A. Rose of one of
these animals shows the unmistakeable convergence of the dark and light
markings on the side of a common dolphin. The surface temperature close to
this locality at 42° 56’30”"N., 50° 16’45”W. was 11.10°C.

I am indebted to Dr. W. Templeman, Director of the Biological Station
of the Fisheries Research Board at St John’s, Newfoundland, for the oppor-
tunity to travel on the Investigator II and for permission to use these temperature
data; to Mr. E. L. Rowe of the same Station for an enlargement of Mr. Rose’s
photograph, and to Dr. D. A. Parry of Cambridge University, England for
pointing out the difference between turbulence and cavitation.

Sergeant and Fisher (as above) recorded billfish Scomberesox saurus
(Walbaum) in the stomach of one of two common dolphins captured off Nova
Scotia. This fish extends north to Newfoundland in numbers at the height
of summer warming of the surface waters.

SUMMARY
Delphinus delphis is recorded from the southern edge of the Grand Bank,
and from Flemish Cap, off Newfoundland, in late July and August. A single
specimen is recorded from the coast of eastern Newfoundland in late July.
All three records come from water of surface temperature between 11 and
12°C. These records extend the known distribution of the species northward
in the northwest Atlantic in summer. .

REFERENCES

KLeINeNBERG, S E. 1956. Mammals of the Black and Azov seas. (Russian). Moscow,
Publishing House of Acad. Sci. USSR.

SerceantT, D. E., and H. D. Fisoer. 1957. The smaller Cetacea of eastern Canadian waters.
J. Fish. Res. Bd Canada 14:83-115.

Received for publication 6 February 1958

THE NEWFOUNDLAND RACE OF THE
GRAY-CHEEKED THRUSH

W. E. Crypve Topp

Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

One oF the most painstaking and thorough accounts of any North American
bird is the monograph of Bicknell’s Thrush by George J. Wallace (1939), who
in this paper discussed the taxonomy, distribution, migration, and home life
of this heretofore little-known bird.

160 Tue CANADIAN FieLtp-NaTuRALIST Vol. 72

Dr. Wallace’s paper, based on extensive research in the field and in the
laboratory, is a model of what such a paper should be, and his conclusions are
so well worked out that they have won general acceptance. From an inde-
pendent study I am fully convinced of the correctness of the facts in the case
which he so ably presents, but I would suggest that we may now be justified
in taking some further steps along the lines he laid down.

Dr. Wallace adduced fairly conclusive evidence to show that Lafresnaye’s
type specimen of Turdus minimus, assamed by Bangs and others to be an
example of Bicknell’s Thrush, could not actually be that form, but must belong
to the larger race, the Gray-cheeked Thrush, long known as T. aliciae Baird.
He went on to show that while Newfoundland birds differed from mainland
examples in coloration (but not in size) the difference was, in his opinion, not
sufficient to entitle them to formal separation as a subspecies. He preferred
to think of the Newfoundland bird as a color phase, but admitted that
Lafresnaye’s type specimen appeared to belong in that group.

I have examined the specimens from Newfoundland which Dr. Wallace
handled, and also a series of twenty-six adult specimens collected in that country
between the years 1942 and 1945 by Harold Peters and Thomas D. Burleigh,
authors of The Birds of Newfoundland (1951). In my opinion the New-
foundland specimens represent a separable race, easily recognizable by the
browner, less olivaceous color of the upperparts and wings externally (this
variable within limits), by the more decided buffy suffusion of the breast, by
the more brownish (drab or light drab) shading of the sides and flanks instead
of dull grayish olive as in the mainland race, and by the greater extent of the
pale color on the mandible. Viewed from below, the bills of northern main-
land birds appear to be mostly blackish, only the base of the lower mandible
being light-colored, but in Newfoundland examples this light-colored area is
markedly more extensive. ‘This difference must be even more obvious in the
living birds. If Newfoundland birds represent a color phase, as Dr. Wallace
contends, it is certainly a localized color phase, which is the equivalent of a
subspecies.

In all the respects pointed out above, the type specimen of Turdus minimus
Lafresnaye agrees with the Newfoundland series rather than with specimens of
mainland birds, as Dr. Wallace has already indicated. While we thus agree
as to the facts in the case, we differ in our interpretation of the facts. I agree
further with Dr. Wallace in referring winter-taken birds from the Santa Marta
region of Colombia to the Newfoundland race. The end result of the reidenti-
fication of Lafresnaye’s type will be to restrict his name minimus to the Gray-
cheeked Thrush of Newfoundland, and to restore the name aliciae of Baird
(in a subspecific sense) to the bird of the mainland north and west of the Gulf
of St. Lawrence. It is only fair to add that Dr. Wallace had anticipated such a
possibility. Thus I submit that there are three rather than two races of the
Gray-cheeked Thrush: minimus of Newfoundland, aliciae of the mainland,
Labrador to Alaska and Siberia; and bicknelli, which will be discussed in my
forthcoming work (See Auk 53:59, 1936).

I agree with Ripley (1952) and Dilger (1956, 1956a) in using Catharus
instead of Hylocichla. he present study of Catharus minimus was undertaken

1958 Topp: NEwFrouNDLAND GRAY-CHEEKED [THRUSH 161

by the writer in connection with his long-delayed report on the birds of the
Labrador Peninsula, but in view of the special interest attaching to the case,
earlier publication has been suggested. ‘The work was made possible largely
through the courtesy of other institutions in the loan of specimens and in this
regard thanks are due to the authorities of the U.S. National Museum, the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, and Cornell University. The privilege of
rehandling and comparing Lafresnaye’s type of Turdis minimus was especially
helpful. In the preparation of this paper 33 specimens of this race have been
examined: 29 from various localities in Newfoundland and four from the Santa
Marta region of Colombia. For comparison I have had 40 adult specimens of
the mainland bird (June-July), from the Labrador Peninsula, Churchill, and
Northwest Territories. Topotypes of bicknelli have also been available.

REFERENCES
Dicer, WituiAm C. 1956. Adaptive modi- Perrers, Haron S., and THomas D. Burveicu.
fications and ecological isolating mechan- .1951. The birds of Newfoundland. St.
isms in the thrush genera Catharus and John’s, Nfld. Dep. Nat. Resour. 431 p.
Hylocichla. Wilson Bull. 68:171-199. Rietey, S. Dimon. 1952. The thrushes.

1956a. Relationships of the Postilla, No. 13, p. 1-48.
thrush genera Catharus and Hylocichla. Wat.iace, Gerorce J. 1939. Bicknell’s

Syst. Zool. 5:174-182. Thrush, its taxonomy, distribution, and
life history. Proc. Boston Soc. nat. Hist.
41:211-401.

Received for publication 7 March 1958

THE LEECHES (HIRUDINEA) OF SASKATCHEWAN

D. R. OLIVER
Zoology Department, McGill University, Montreal, Quebec

INTRODUCTION

Durine the past 30 years leeches have been collected from 47 localities (Fig. 1)
in Saskatchewan. Lists of species found in some of these areas have been
published in papers by Meyer (1946), Moore and Meyer (1951), and Rawson
and Moore (1944). This paper includes those previously published and many
additional records. “Iwenty species are now known to occur in Saskatchewan,
of which only the ranges of six were found to extend into the northern part
of the province covered by the Canadian Shield.

The chief sources for the present material include the early work in the
Prince Albert National Park by D. S. Rawson, investigations of the saline lakes
of Saskatchewan by D. S. Rawson, J. E. Moore and J. S. Thompson, various
lake surveys supervised by D. S. Rawson and F. M. Atton, studies of reservoirs
in the southern half of Saskatchewan by J. R. Nursall and R. A. Ruttan; and
collections from Amisk Lake and Lac la Ronge by the writer.

ANNOTATED LIST OF SPECIES
The following is a list of the species of leeches and the localities in which
they were collected in Saskatchewan. ‘The system of classification is that
of Pennak (1953). The numbers represent a reservoir or dugout, located in
the area of the municipality preceding the brackets.

162

Figure 1. Outline map
of Saskatchewan

showing the

locations where
collections of
leeches were made.

Tue CanapiAN Firitp-NaTurALIst Vol. 72

ce Lake Athabaska

Cc)
,
Wollaston L.
ee bes
Y
Broe sheet sh Reindeer L.
Chy Qu [le
ce Peter
Pond L. is ; a
| L. He-a-le
Vy? Crosse ee is ai
a m Ronge
< & BigstoneL,
> Yj
Amisk L?
yy
Nesslin Montreal L,
\\\ had ee
Turtle L. C\WWaskesiuL.
Fstoney
SturgeonL.
QoJackfishL.
urray L,
RedberryL. O Owain
WilsonL.*
Kindersley “Biggar
g Pike L. ( f Y,
Cae eHanley Madge L. ©
Kerrobert

Last
LuckyLe Elbow Mountain

\ Matador lee ae -Echo [L,

'Appelle RP
@ RushL, oe ination Round I.

PRense

AL. Pelletier es) Tyvan: ) epoadeworn

Admiral * Trossachs

*Assiniboia

Ferland
eL. Alma

1958

Order RHYNCOBDELLIDA

Family GLossIPHONIDAE

Genus Glossiphonia Johnston
Glossiphonia complanata (Linn.)

Amisk L., L. Athabaska, Big Peter Pond
L., Bigstone L., Churchill L., Echo L., Elbow
(#26), Frobisher L., Jackfish L., L. la Ronge,
L. Ile-a-la-Crosse, Last Mountain L., Little
Peter Pond L., Murray L., Qu’Appelle River,
Sturgeon L., Turtle L., Wakaw L., Waskesiu
L., Wollaston L.

Genus Helobdella Blanchard
Helebdella stagnalis (Linn.)

Amisk L., L. Athabaska, Big Peter Pond
L., Bigstone L., Churchill L., Cree L., Echo
L., Frobisher L., Jackfish L., Kerrobert
(#58), L. la Ronge, L. Ile-a-la-Crosse, L.
Pelletier, Last Mountain L., Little Peter Pond
L., Matador (#42), Murray L., Redberry L.,
Rush L., Stoney L., Sturgeon L., Turtle L.,
Wakaw L., Waskesiu L.

Genus Hemiclepsis Vejdovsky
Hemiclepsis occidentalis (Verrill)

Stoney L., Redberry L.

Genus Placobdella Blanchard
Placobdella montifera Moore

Amisk L.

Placobdella parasitica (Say)

Last Mountain L., Qu’Appelle River,
Turtle L.

Genus Theromyzon (Vejdovsky)
Theromyzon occidentale (Verrill)

Jackfish L., Murray L., Qu’Appelle
River, Turtle L., Waskesiu L.

Theromyzon rude (Baird)

Admiral (#50), L. Alma, Hanley
(#25), Murray L., Matador (#42), Nesslin
L., Tyvan (#33).

Theromyzon tessulatum (O.F.M.)

Assiniboia (#52), Biggar (#97).

Family PIScICOLIDAE

Genus Cystobranchus Meyer
Cystobranchus sp.

Murray L.

Genus I/linobdella Meyer
Illinobdella moorei Meyer

Last Mountain L.

Genus Piscicola Blainville

OLiver: LEECHES OF SASKATCHEWAN 163

Piscicola geometra (Linn.)

Bigstone L., Frobisher L., L. Ile-a-la-
Crosse, Little Peter Pond L., Sturgeon L.,
Waskesiu L.

Piscicola milneri (Verrill)

Amisk L.

Piscicola punctata (Verrill)

L. la Ronge, Round L.

Order ARHYNCHOBDELLIDA
Family HIRUDIDAE

Genus Haemopis Savigny
Haemopis grandis (Verrill)

Amisk L., Cree L., L. la Ronge, Was-
kesiu L.
Haemopis marmorata (Say)

Amisk L., Madge L., Murray L., Stoney
L., Waskesiu L., Wilson L.

Family ERPOBDELLIDAE

Genus Erpobdella Blainville
Erpobdella punctata (Leidy)

Amisk L., Big Peter Pond L., Bigstone
L., Churchill L., Cree L., Echo L., L. la
Ronge, L. Ile-a-la-Crosse, Last Mountain L.,
Little Peter Pond L., Montreal L., Murray
L., Qu’Appelle River, Redberry L., Sturgeon
L., Trossachs (#2), Turtle L., Wakaw L.,
Waskesiu L.

Genus Nephelopsis Verrill
Nephelopsis obscura Verrill

Amisk L., Assiniboia (#52), Big Peter
Pond L., Churchill L., Dodsland (#49),
Echo L., Ferland (#101), Handsworth (#
11), Jackfish L., Kindersley (#5), L. la
Ronge, L. Ile-a-la-Crosse, Little Peter Pond
L., Lucky L., Murray L., Pense, Pike L.,
Sturgeon L., Turtle L., Wakaw L., Was-
kesiu L., Wollaston L.

Genus Dina Blanchard
Dina dubia Moore

Matador (#42), Waskesiu L.
Dina fervida (Verrill)

Murray L., Turtle L.
Dina parva Moore

Echo L., Elbow (#26), Jackfish L.,
Murray L., Reindeer L., Turtle L., Waskesiu
L.

DISCUSSION

Of the 20 species of leeches collected in Saskatchewan (Table 1) only four,
Glossiphonia complanata, Helobdella stagnalis, Erpobdella punctata and
Nephelopsis obscura are distributed over most of the province. In the Canadian
Shield region two additional species occur: Haemopis grandis and Dina parva.
The ranges of all species (except Dina dubia) extend southward into the United
States (Bere, 1931; Meyer, 1940, 1946; Moore, 1898, 1912). Dina dubia appears

164 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol.. 72

TABLE 1. HIRUDINEA: NUMBER COLLECTED AND NUMBER OF LOCALITIES IN
WHICH A SPECIES OCCURRED

Species Number Localities
Glossiphonia complanata (Linn.)................-2.0.0-- 161 20
iEiclopdellanstacnalisy @leiminy) ener a eee ec c eee 320 24
Hemuclepsis occidentalis)(Wernill)r 25 oe) ee eee = 2
Placobdellasmontijera@sNloonels son see ee ie ae 1 1
(Rlacobdellaxparasiicay (Savy) ee ess a ee ee 29 3
Eheromyzon occidentale (Verrill). 9. 35.252 ee 12 5
itheromyzon ude (baigd) penance cee 8 7
Eheromyzon tessulatum (OW Me) ss ae ee ea 2 2
Cy Stoo ran Chas: Spree eh Ay etal Me aie Fe teae cl lente Stones 1 1
ilunovdella noonerv=Nleyetias = 2 oes eee ee 1 1
JDisencalo: geome, (UiniNG \o-k 6 3.05 Aedes 66 Ba Heeler e eh Ae cae os 18 6
RAscicolasmunent Nene. 44 ecie a aia 5 1
ascicile macaw. (acolo. ee aes sedechacansonekcssnos: 5 2
Higemo pisenanaush (Nettle isan eee ie eile nee 12 4
Haemopis marmorata (Say)........-.-.0.5 08.2... s ee. 6 6
By nondaiio poMmonoe (WESC Ne cea og oak secs obeose coer es 90 19
INGO PSES CDSEO NOCH Oo nage soca cbleu seosgeRoepo 5 o19 6 121 23
Ding dubia MOOKe ss sae Maite ee ele Seah = Breet 8 2
Dina fervida: (Vermillion ee enna © ebcha i bswaeie ake ays eval Mos 13 2
Dinar pargacNiooreee sn BOO eo ee ee 40 7

to be a more northern species as it has been only previously reported from Great
Slave Lake, N.W.T. (Moore and Meyer, 1951). As most of the specimens
have been collected from the area south of the Canadian Shield, it is not possible
at present to state for certain that this survey shows the northern limits of the
various species.

Glossiphonia complanata, Helobdella stagnalis, Erpobdella stagnalis, Nephe-
lopsis obscura, Piscicola geometra and Theromyzon tessulatum occur in Europe
(Bennike, 1943, Mann, 1955; Pawlowski, 1936). Except for the last two
species, these are the common leeches in Saskatchewan (see Table 1).

The number of species found in Saskatchewan compares very well with the
21 species recorded from Minnesota (Moore, 1912); 18 species from Wisconsin
(Bere, 1931); and 14 species from Illinois (Moore, 1898). It is not expected
that many more species will be found in Saskatchewan.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Thanks are extended to Dr. D. S. Rawson for his assistance in the prepara-
tion of this paper and for the provision of specimens. The writer also wishes
to thank the following persons who identified leeches and checked some of the
writer’s identifications: Miss Ruby Bere, Dr. R. J. Meyers, Dr. M. C. Meyers,
Dr. J. P. Moore.
REFERENCES

Bennike, S. A. B. 1943. Contributions to Mann, K. H. 1955. The ecology of the
the ecology and biology of Danish fresh- British freshwater leeches. J. Anim. Ecol.

water leeches. Folia limnol. scand. 2: 24:98-119.

1-109. Meyer, M. C. 1940. A _ revision of the
Bere, R. 1931. Leeches from the lakes of leeches (Piscicolidae) living on fresh-water

northeastern Wisconsin. Trans. Wis. fishes of North America. Trans. Amer.

Acad. Sci. Arts Lett. 26:437-440. micr. Soc. 59:354-376.

1958 OLiver: LEECHES oF SASKATCHEWAN 165
1946. Further notes on the pT oI and M. C. Meyer. 1951. lLeeches
leeches (Piscicolidae) living on fresh- (Hirudinea) from Alaskan and adjacent

water fishes of North America. Trans.

Amer. micr. Soc. 65:237-249.

Moore, J. P.

nois. Bull. Ill. Lab. nat. Hist. 5:479-546.

1912. The leeches of Minnesota.
Zool. Ser. geol. Surv. Minn. 5:63-143.

1898. The Hirudinea of Illi-

waters. Wasmann J. Biol. 9:11-77.

Pawtowsk1, L. K. 1936. Zur Okologie der
Hirudineenfauna der Wigryseen. Arch.
Hydrob. Rybact. 1-2:1-47.

Pennak, R. W. 1953. Fresh-water inverte-
brates of the United States. New York,
Ronald Press. p. 302-320.

Rawson, D. S., and Moore, J. E. 1944.
The saline lakes of Saskatchewan. Can. J.
Res. (D) 22:141-201.

Received for publication 21 January 1958

Corrections — Volume 71

Page 168, left column, line 1. For 1200 read 200.
Page 171, left column, 9 lines from bottom. For barns read burns.

NOTES

Black-throated Blue Warbler in
Alberta

Tue Black-throated Blue Warbler
Dendroica caerulescens has been ob-
served in Alberta on only four occasions.
Since nothing has been published regard-
ing any of these observations this note is
intended to place on record what is
known of the circumstances surrounding
each.

In the collection of the University of
Alberta there is a specimen of a male
Black-throated Blue Warbler in full
breeding plumage bearing on the label
merely ‘Edmonton, 1917.’ This bird,
together with colorful skins of three
other species of warblers all bearing
exactly the same data, was purchased
with the collection of Mr. Edgar Jones.
Mr. Jones informs us that he received
these specimens from the late Mr. Wolfe,
a professional taxidermist of Edmonton,
but that he knows nothing further of
their origin. Since Mr. Wolfe was not
known to have a scientific interest in
birds it appears doubtful that he was the
collector. The name of the collector,

and with it the authenticity of the speci-
mens, therefore remains uncertain.

The first reliable record appears in a
letter dated October 21, 1928, from C. G.
Harrold of Winnipeg to P. A. Taverner
of the National Museum of Canada. Mr.
Harrold, who collected birds at Beaver-
hill Lake, Alberta, for several years,
wrote: “The Point (near Tofield, Beaver-
hill Lake) has not produced anything
exciting this fall . . . except one rather
surprising bird, a Black-throated Blue
Warbler which I collected within 50
yards of the tent.”

On June 3, 1957, an adult male Black-
throated Blue Warbler was observed by
the writer and Mr. David Boag on the
banks of the Rosebud River about five
miles east of the village of Rosebud,
Alberta. Singing repeatedly, the bird
moved through the underbrush of willow
and poplar thickets for some distance
and crossed the river on at least two oc-
casions before it was collected. Although
its gonads were well developed its be-
havior indicated that it was probably a
migrant. The specimen is in the Salt
collection.

166

The most recent and the most unusual
record was obtained through Mr. James
Robinson of Edmonton who says that,
on October 22, 1957, while on a hunting
trip near Windy Point on the North
Saskatchewan River about 12 miles south-
west of Nordegg, Alberta, he noticed a
bird which was attracted to the screen
door of their cabin by the warmth
within. It entered the cabin readily when
the door was opened but succumbed
during the night. The specimen was sent
to David Boag, Department of Zoology,
University of Alberta, and proved to be
an immature male Black-throated Blue
Warbler. This is an unusually late date
for any species of warbler in Alberta.
The bird must have survived heavy
snowfall and temperatures close to zero
which occurred earlier in October. The
specimen is in the Boag collection.

These records suggest that the Black-
throated Blue Warbler breeds in small
numbers in extreme northern Alberta or
in some adjacent region and points to the
fact that vast areas to the north of us are
as yet biologically unknown.

W. Ray Sat
Department of Anatomy
University of Alberta
Edmonton, Alberta
4 November 1957

oN Stranding of Killer Whales
in Newfoundland

A scuoot of killer whales Orcinus orca
(L.) was stranded at New Melbourne,
Trinity Bay, eastern Newfoundland (48°
02’ N., 53° 14’ W.) on April 27, 1957.
Identification was ensured by means of
the lens-shaped patch over the eye. The
animals were apparently forced ashore by
heavy ice which had drifted into the bay,
and were reported to have remained alive
on the sandy beach for three days. On
April 30 a crew from the whaling plant
at South Dildo killed some of the whales
and removed some 8,000 pounds of meat
and 9,000 pounds of blubber from the
animals. Owing to their size and awkward

Tue Canapian Fietp-NaATuRALIST

Volva?

position on the beach, however, they
could not be completely flensed.

The author visited the site of the
stranding on May 16, 1957, and recorded
nineteen animals, although newspaper re-
ports had earlier given a total of twenty-
five. The sex and measurements of those
animals which were accessible are given
in the table. The measurements are re-
garded as accurate to plus or minus six
inches.

Seven other animals were not acces-
sible; five of these were estimated to be
between 20 and 22 feet in length, and the
remaining two to be between 12 and 15
feet.

This is the largest and also the seasonal
earliest school of killer whales recorded
around Newfoundland. The large size of
the females is surprising, since it was
generally thought that they attained a
maximum length of about 15 feet. (See
Norman, J. R., and F. C. Fraser. Giant
fishes, whales and dolphins. London,
Putnam, 1937). .

SNOUT TO FLUKE-NOTCH MEASUREMENTS
OF KILLER WHALES

Males
Ft In. Cm
23 3 708
23 3 708
DD 0 670
Total 3
Females
Ft In. Cm
24 7 747
22 0 670
20 10 635
20 6 625
19 Ee ye 585
18 0 549
12 9 388
Total 7
Sex Indeterminate
Ft In. Cm
19 0 579
15 0 457
Total 2

The phenomenon of sea ice driving
cetaceans into bays and causing them to

1958

be stranded has previously been reported
by D. E. Sergeant and H. D. Fisher (The
smaller Cetacea of eastern Canadian
waters, J. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada 14:93.
1957), when a school of white-beaked
dolphins Lagenorhynchus albirostris was
stranded at Seal Cove, Conception Bay,
eastern Newfoundland, in March 1953.
J. C. DEARDEN
Memorial University of Newfoundland
St. John’s, Newfcundland
26 July 1957

Blue Jay Flyway Near Ottawa

In tHe Ontario Field Biologist, No. 11,
May 1957, appears a paper by D. E.
Burton relating to a Toronto Blue Jay
Cyanocitta cristata flyway. As a result
of that account attention has been drawn
to what appears to be another such in-
stance along the Ottawa River.

On September 7 and 8, 1957, many
hundreds of these birds were seen in
flight at Woodland Boys’ Camp between
Luskville and Beechgrove, Que. The
direction of travel was roughly from east
to west, up the river, and just over the
trees close to shore. Flights were inter-
mittent. No attempt was made to secure
counts.

On Labor Day weekend in 1955, just
a week earlier, a similar movement was
seen under way, over the trees, a little
inland from Black Bay marsh off the
river near Luskville. The direction was
the same and would no doubt lead on
over the camp grounds less than two
miles ahead. Observations did not extend
in either year beyond the weekend. Both
Woodland and Black Bay were visited in
1956 at about the same date but migration,
if any, did not arrest the attention.

The river at this point is wide, being
the upper reach of Lake Deschenes; and
the westward rather than southward
movement may have persisted only to a
narrower crossing of the Ottawa River.
It is comonly held that Blue Jay migra-
tion is not a great deal more than local,
and that winter residence at any point is
mainly replacement of local migrants by
others from a little to the north. The

Notes

167

passage near Luskville, earlier than at
Toronto by two to three weeks, is in
keeping with a progressive movement
southward or southwestward.

HeErsert Grou
472 Highcroft Avenue
Ottawa 3, Ontario
30 October 1957

Some Birds of Jasper Park

A uist of the birds of Jasper National
Park, Alberta, was published by I. McT.
Cowan in 1955 (Wildlife Management
Bulletin, Ser. 2, No. 8, Dept. of Northern
Affairs and National Resources, Canada).
It covers previous records for the area
except for the material in Banfield’s
“Notes on the birds of Jasper National
Park, Alberta” (Can. Field Nat. 68:9-10,
1954), which apparently appeared too
late for inclusion in Cowan’s report.
During a stay of two weeks near the town
of Jasper in August, 1957, I made a few
observations which seem noteworthy in
view of present knowledge of the local
avifauna as summarized in the above two
publications.

PrecroraL SANDPIPER Erolia melanotos.
This sandpiper has not previously been
recorded in the park. One was seen with
other shorebirds at a pool on Cotton-
wood Creek (near Patricia Lake) August
19 and 21.

StTiLt SANDPIPER Micropalama himanto-
pus. Two were seen in the same locality
on Aug. 19 and later on the 20th and
21st, there were four. There is only one
previous record, cited by Cowan (1955).

GyrraLcon Falco rusticolus. A gray
Gyrfalcon was seen in Wilcox Pass on
August 20. It was harrying a Pintail on
a small alpine lake. The falcon made
several passes at the swimming duck
which escaped on each occasion by a
short dive. At our approach the Pintail
took off and was pursued for a short
distance by the falcon which, however,
was soon left behind and it returned to
perch on a rock beside the lake. The
falcon was seen at close range. It lacked
the characteristic facial mark of a pere-

168

grine and was without anything resem-
bling the distinctive under-wing pattern
of the prairie falcon. It is curious that the
only previous record for this hawk in the
park was that of a white bird seen in July
1938 on the Columbia Icefield only about
five miles from the site of my observa-

tion. E. Orro Houn
Department of Physiology
and Pharmacology
University of Alberta
Edmonton, Alberta
1 October 1957

Red-shafted Flicker and
American Coot at Churchill
Manitoba

On June 4, 1957, a Red-shafted Flicker
Colaptes cafer collaris dropped down the
chimney of a staff residence in Churchill,
Manitoba. After fluttering there for some
time, it finally escaped into the kitchen of
the building by way of a ventilating flue,
only to meet with further misfortune
when it fell into a sink filled with hot
soapy water. It was brought to me in a
half-dead state. In spite of every effort
to revive it, the bird died.

On June 5, 1957, children playing
among rocks along the sea coast found a
dead bird which they brought to me. It
proved to be an American Coot Fulica
americana. This bird may have perished,
as a number of others did, during a severe
blizzard on May 31.

To verify the identification of these
birds, I sent the Flicker and one of the
Coot’s characteristic lobed feet to Mr.
R. W. Sutton, of the Manitoba Museum,
Winnipeg.
Churchill, Manitoba
24 June 1957

Eva BEcKETT

Clapper Rails in Nova Scotia

On 23 September 1957 a field party of
the Nova Scotia Bird Society consisting
of John Comer, Wickerson Lent and the
writer, observed a Clapper Rail Rallus
longirostris for about half an hour at

Tue CaANnabiAN Fietp-NatTurRALIstT

Voli ae:

Brier Island, Nova Scotia. We sat on the
top of a knoll overlooking a dense marsh
and small pond, back of the beach near
the main lighthouse. In the marsh were a
number of large logs that had been cast
up by heavy seas. About 70 feet from us
the Clapper Rail was standing at the end
of one of these logs. We watched it
through seven-power binoculars and, at
the same time, checked the details with
Peterson’s Field Guide. Peterson de-
scribes it as “the large gray or gray and
tan Rail,” and this was a “gray” so there
was no confusing it with the King Rail.
Besides the color we noted the strong
legs, long bill, striped markings of the
belly and white patch under the tail. This
last detail was observed by Comer and
Lent when the bird turned and slipped
down off the log into the dense vegeta-
tion with its head towards me. By this
time I was within 10 feet of it, watching
it from another log in the marsh.

A Clapper Rail was reported to the
Nova Scotia Bird Society from Sable
River, Shelbourne County, on 2 Septem-
ber 1957 by Samuel Chivers, and there
are two very old records by Harry Piers
(Trans. N.S Inst: Scio Ser 2) violas
p. 395-410, 1894), one 12 May 1892, and
one October 1893, both birds having been
killed at Lawrencetown, Halifax County,
Nova Scotia. Wiutetr J. Mits
100 Spring Garden Road
Halifax, Nova Scotia
14 November 1957

Some Additions to the List of
Birds of the Mackenzie
Delta, N.W.T.

A paper on the birds of the Mackenzie .
Delta based on observations during a
total of five years was published in 1943
by A. E. Porsild (Can. Field Nat. 57:
19-35) and some additional notes on this
area were published by Hohn and D. L.
Robinson in 1951 (Can. Field Nat. 65:
115-118). The observations below add
another seven species, one of them found
nesting, to the avifauna of this area. We

1958

have also recorded additional observa-
tions for certain species for which Porsild
had only limited data. Unless some re-
ference to his paper is made in the notes
below, the species referred to is one not
listed by Porsild. Initials indicate which
one of the undersigned is responsible for
the particular observation.

Stevens’ observations were made in the
period 1947 to 1950 while he was work-
ing as mammalogist with the Canadian
Wildlife Service at Aklavik. Hohn was
in the area for three months in 1949 as
temporary medical officer for the Indian
Health Service, and again for three weeks
in June 1955 on a journey part of which
was supported by a grant from the Bant-
ing Fund administered by the Arctic
Institute of North America.

Pigeon Hawk Falco columbarius. Two
observations of this bird in 1949 have
already been recorded (Hohn and Robin-
son, 1951). W. E. S. saw individuals of
this species on several occasions on the
East Channel in 1947-1950. E.O.H. saw a
male on two occasions at Aklavik in June
1955. It is likely that this hawk will
eventually be found nesting in the
forested portion of the delta.

KiLiypeer Charadrius vociferus. One
was seen in Aklavik June 7, 1955. E.O.H.

Least Sanppreer Erolia minutilla. A
(presumed) male was seen performing
its song flight about the town of Aklavik
on June 7, 1955, while on the following
day a pair of these birds was seen in the
same general area. A nest with four eggs
from which the bird was flushed, was
found in a damp meadow on the outskirts
of the town on June 20. E.O.H.

Great Gray Own Strix nebulosa. A
specimen was collected during the win-
ter of 1948 by Mr. Andrew Pilon at the
Reindeer Station. W.E.S.

SHorT-EARED Owt Asio_ flammeus.
Porsild gives only two records of sight-
ings of several by Dr. C. H. D. Clarke in
1942. W.E.S. found it common, indivi-
duals most often being seen along the

river channels and the shores of the delta
lakes.

Notes

169

BoreaL Ow Aegolius fumnereus.
W.E.S. saw one on September 27, 1947,
along the Husky Channel about 25 miles
above Aklavik. Its presence was made
known by a pair of Canada jays which
were diving at the bird on its perch at
the top of a white spruce. A second bird
was seen by the same observer on Octo-
ber 22, 1947, near Aklavik. It was sitting
in a willow and allowed a very close ap-

proach before taking flight.

Say’s Poorse Sayornis saya. Porsild re-
corded a pair which built a nest at Kitti-
gazuit in 1932 but observed no others in
subsequent seasons. W.E.S. found it not
uncommon in the years 1947-1950, a pair
nested for several summers at the Rein-
deer Station. A male collected there May
13, 1948, was gorged with Calliphorid
flies: which it had caught against the
windows of a building. W.E.S.

Tree Swattow Iridoprocne bicolor.
Some were seen in the vicinity of Cliff
Swallow colonies in Aklavik on June 9,
1947, and again in subsequent summers
though none was seen outside the town-
site. W.E.S.

Wueatear O6cnanthe oenanthe oe-
nanthe. This species is a summer inhabi-
tant of the Richardson Mountains on the
western edge of the Mackenzie Delta. A
male, seen July 3, 1947, at Black Moun-
tain, 35 miles above Aklavik, was col-
lected by Dr. Ian McTaggart Cowan. A
male in song was seen on June 22, 1950,
at the summit of Red Mountain about 15
miles from Aklavik. W.E.S.

NortTHERN SHRIKE Lanius excubitor. In
“My Life with the Eskimo” by V.
Stefansson (p. 436-494, 1913) R. M. An-
derson is reported to have seen one near
the northernmost spruce of the delta in
1909. Porsild did not himself see this
species but cites the report of a resident
who reported it on the Peel Branch. On
June 25, 1947, W.E.S. found a pair among
alder brush near the mouth of the Fish
River, some twenty miles below Aklavik
on the West Channel. These birds were
found to be guarding seven young which
had just left the nest. A female was col-

170 THe Canapian Frietp-NaTurRAList

lected by Mr. Pilon at the Reindeer Sta-
tion on May 13, 1948, but was destroyed
by a cat before a skin could be prepared.
W.E.S. A female was collected on the
outskirts at Aklavik on June 20, 1955, but
circumstances prevented a skin being
made. E.O.H.

WHITE-WINGED CrosspiLL Loxia leu-
coptera. This species was found as a resi-
dent of the Mackenzie Delta in areas of
heavy white spruce growth. An adult
male collected near Aklavik on March
29, 1950, was found to be in breeding
condition. W.E.S.

Harris’s Sparrow Zonotrichia querula.
Porsild reported it as a rare spring
migrant on the East Channel, one was
collected in May, 1935. W.E.S. also ob-
served it as a spring migrant and received
a desiccated adult male taken in a trap
set for small mammals on May 26, 1948,
by Mr. A. Pilon.

W. E. STEVENS
Canadian Wildlife Service
Ottawa, Ontario

E. O. Houn
Department of Physiology
University of Alberta
Edmonton, Alberta
12 May 1958

Chipmunk and Garter Snake

On April 20, 1957, Mr. K. W. Strasser
and the writer were photographing
spring wild flowers in a rich mixed woods
near Peterborough, Ontario, when we
heard a rustling in the dead leaves with
which the woods were carpeted. Upon
investigation, the rustling sound was
found to be made by a chipmunk Tamas
striatus which was worrying away at
something not immediately evident.
Upon closer examination it was dis-
covered that the chipmunk was tussling
with a perhaps somewhat sluggish but
quite alive garter snake Thamnophis
sirtalis about 14 inches long. The snake
was writhing quite vigorously and the
chipmunk was biting at its head. We
watched from about 10 feet away as the

Vol. 72

chipmunk subdued the snake and then
dragged it into a nearby hollow log. The
tail of the snake was still visible but now
inert and the chipmunk continued to
chew the head. We pulled the snake out
of the log and stood back some eight feet
to photograph the chipmunk as it came
out of the log, grabbed the snake by the
head once more, and again dragged it in-

to the log. We pulled it out a second time,

noticing that the head was now pretty
well chewed to a pulp. When we finally
had to leave, the chipmunk was still chew-
ing at the snake but whether or not to
eat It we were not able to find out. This
episode of chipmunk versus garter snake
may not be uncommon but it was new to
us and to others to whom we have men-
tioned it. We obtained clear colored
photographs of the combatants although
without a close-up lens the subjects are
fairly small.

James L. McKeever
7 Middleton Drive
Peterborough, Ontario
17 December 1957

Cowbirds Breed in
Prince Edward Island

On 5 August 1953 the writer saw an
immature Brown-headed Cowbird Molo-
thrus ater ater being fed by a pair of
Magnolia Warblers at Stanhope on the
Gulf of St. Lawrence Coast of Prince
Edward Island. On 7 August 1954 the
writer again observed an immature Cow-
bird being fed by an _ unidentified
Warbler in the same area at Stanhope.
At the time, no special importance was
attached to these observations, but later
a check of W. Earl Godfrey’s “Birds of
Prince Edward Island” (Bull. Nat. Mus.
Canada i132, 1954) revealed that the
above are the first known records for the
breeding of this species in Prince Edward
Island.

Wutetr J. Mirs
100 Spring Garden Road
Halifax, Nova Scotia
15 November 1957

1958

A Yellow-throated Warbler

at Manotick, Ontario
A YELLOw-THROATED Warbler Dendroica
dominica (Linn.) was seen on November
4, 1957, at Manotick, Ontario, by the
writer, Mrs. Terrill and Mr. H. A. C.
Jackson. It was feeding actively in small
trees and shrubbery fringing the bank of
the Rideau River about fifteen miles
south of Ottawa, in close association
with a group of Black-capped Chicka-
dees, White-breasted Nuthatches and
Downy Woodpeckers, sedentary com-
panions which would not, it is feared, lead
the stray to migrate. Obviously they were
much too slow for the warbler which
flew back and rejoined them from time
to time evidently determined to keep in
touch with them. Occasionally it flew
into the upper branches of a tall oak, but
mostly it fed 20 to 25 feet from the
ground where we had ample opportunity
to observe it from all angles in the leafless
trees. Occasionally it fed in bushes near
the ground and it was also observed
creeping along a limb in the manner of a
Black and White Warbler. Finally it
moved off with its companions in a
southwesterly direction up the river.

Apart from the extensive yellow, bib-
shaped throat patch, the broad white eye-
streak and especially the unique and
clearly defined black and white facial
markings left no doubt as to the specific
identity. As no yellow was visible in the
lores we thought it was the more westerly
Sycamore race (albilora) which is a de-
cided wanderer compared with dominica.

The only Canadian locality mentioned
in the Fifth Edition of the A.O.U.
Check-list for the Yellow-throated War-
bler is Stamford, Welland County, in
southern Ontario. This entry is listed
under albilora. A more surprising record
for this race is of a specimen taken by
Leslie Tuck in Newfoundland. This is
mentioned by W. Earl Godfrey on page
138 of the Canadian Field-Naturalist,
Volume 7, Number 3. i

L. M. Trrrit.

Ulverton, Quebec
2 December 1957

Notes tee 171

Early Meadowlark in Alberta

On March 2, 1958, at 1.00 p.m. I saw a
Western Meadowlark Sturnella neglecta
at the corner of 89th Avenue and 156th
Street in Edmonton, Alberta. I believe
this to be an early-spring record for the
meadowlark in this northern area.

The meadowlark flew across the road
in front of my car and came to rest at
the edge of a fencerow, perching on
about a foot of snow. It remained there
while I stopped about 15 feet away and
observed it for about one minute.

The average snow depth in the Ed-
monton area on March 2 was about 10
inches. The weather was mild (30° to
40° F) with variable cloudiness, and a
northwest wind of 15 mph. The weather
throughout this winter has been excep-
tionally mild.

Joun G. STELFOx
Department of Lands and Forests
Government of the Province of Alberta
Edmonton, Alberta
6 March 1958

Recoveries in Alberta of Banded
Snowy Owls

Ir was been the writer’s contention that
significant information on winter migra-
tion might be recorded for the Snowy
Owl Nyctea scandiaca if sufficient num-
bers of these birds were banded during
their winter visitations to the western
prairies. Accordingly in the winter of
1954 banding work on Snowy Owls was
commenced. This has been carried on
actively every winter since then and the
following recoveries of banded birds have
so far been noted.

1. On 10 January 1955, a female wear-
ing band No. 509-02669 was captured by
the author in the Morinville district of
Alberta. This bird had been banded
exactly one mile from the recapture loca-
tion on 4 March 1954 at the identical
weight of 4 lb 10 oz. There was no signi-
ficant color change in the plumage.

2. On 8 January 1957, a dead Snowy
Owl wearing band No. 509-2684 was
found by a farmer in the Namao district

172 Tue CANADIAN FirLp-NaATURALIST

east of Edmonton. The bird had been
banded in the same area on 29 January
1955.

3. Another female with band No.
509-02679 was shot 12 miles northwest
of Unity, Saskatchewan, on 21 January
1957. It had been banded in the Morin-
ville, Alberta, area on 20 February 1955.

4. On 30 January 1958 a large female
was captured by the author in the Beau-
mont area wearing band No. 509-
03325. It had been banded by the writer
on the identical quarter section on 15
January 1956. At that time the bird
weighed 6 lb 2 0z, which was then and
still is the record for the heaviest Snowy
Owl of over 75 birds now having been
weighed. At recapture the bird weighed
5 lb 4 oz and some of the darkness of her
plumage was fading.

Three recoveries to date indicate a
remarkable return movement to the pre-
vious winter area. Far more return in-
formation is required before a definite
pattern can be delineated. The possibility
that much completely new information
on Snowy Owl movements will be un-
folded as this study progresses is not at
all remote.

ALBERT F. OEMING

The Edmonton Zoological Society
Room 6, 10126 100th Street
Edmonton, Alberta

8 January 1958

Cardinal versus Northern Shrike

In February 1955, a female Cardinal
Richmondena cardinalis was observed at
a feeding station in Huntsville, Ontario.
On February 16 this bird was killed by a
Northern Shrike Lanius excubitor and
the body was fortunately recovered when
the Shrike flew against the windshield of
a truck, dropping its prey, which was
picked up by the truck driver. The skin is
now in the writer’s collection and as far
as is known the finding of this bird
constitutes the first authenticated record
of the Cardinal in Huntsville.

In December 1957, a male and female
Cardinal turned up at another Hunts-

Vol. 72

ville feeding station, and later in the same
month a second male was at another
station only a quarter of a mile distant,
both males being under observation at
the same time. Apart from interest in
these observations as evidence of north-
ward extension of the Cardinal’s range,
it may be worth noting that these birds
seem to be particularly harassed by
Shrikes, although up to date of writing
they have escaped. These facts seem to
suggest that predation by the Northern
Shrike in winter might have a significant
effect on attempts of the Cardinal to
establish itself in new territory.

RusseLu J. RUTTER
Huntsville, Ontario
6 March 1958 .

Nashville Warbler Winters in

New Brunswick

On November 9, 1957, a Nashville
Warbler Vermivora ruficapilla appeared
at my feeding station at Kingshurst about
seven miles from Saint John. Because of
the warm fall I thought that it was an
unusually late migrant. Mr. W. Austin
Squires of the New Brunswick Museum
suggested that it might have been in-
jured in late August or early September,
the usual migration time. After it had
remained around my feeding station for
about two weeks I realized that it might
attempt to winter in the province. Its
normal winter range is from southern
Florida and southern Texas south to
Guatemala.

Since the Nashville Warbler is thought
to be almost entirely insectivorous its diet
at my feeding station is noteworthy. It
ate fat, suet, bread crumbs, chopped raw
peanuts, several mixtures, and stale pound
cake, its favorite food. It obtained mois-
ture from grapes that I supplied regularly.
It entered into a dispute over food only
once: with a Myrtle Warbler Dendroica
coronata on November 27; neither bird
succeeded in driving the other away from
the food.

Several times I found the Nashville
Warbler traveling with five Black-capped

1958

Chickadees Parus atricapillus. On such
occasions it hunted for food on the
ground (sometimes completely out of
sight under dead grass) or very low in
the brush.

During very mild and wet periods it
disappeared, the longest time being four
days, Nov. 18 to 21. Generally, the colder
the weather the more time it spent at my
feeding station. After cold nights it would
sun itself for about a quarter of an hour
in some sheltered spot. It would first
appear at about 7.30 a.m. and disappear
about half an hour before dark. During
its stay it often uttered a ‘pseet’ call note.
I did not find out where it stayed during
the night.

From February 9 to 12 there were
below zero temperatures at night. It
must have succumbed to the cold on the
night of the 10th because I did not see it
after that.

Davw S. CnrisTIE
East Riverside P.O.
Kings Co., N.B.
4 March 1958

A Colony of the Giant Slug,
Limax maximus 1., at London,
Ontario

Ix A previous communication (Judd,
W. W., Can. Field Nat. 69: 130-131, 1955)
the writer reported on a dark specimen
of Limax maximus collected in London,
Ontario, in 1953. In June, 1957, a second
occurrence of this species of slug in
London was brought to the writer’s at-
tention, this time involving a colony of
slugs. The slugs were found by Dr. D.
Wilson in a backyard on Dufferin Street,
well within the older part of the city and
about a mile distant from the place at
which the above-mentioned specimen
was collected in 1953 (Judd, quoted
work). The yard was behind a house and
had for many years been occupied by a
lawn, flower beds and fruit trees. The
slugs were active at night and fed on
young plants of zinnia, marigold and
petunia and left glistening trails of mucus
over sidewalks, boards and brickwork.

Nores

173

Fighteen specimens were collected on
June 17 and 20. The six largest slugs,
when in active movement, measured 15.8,
15.6, 14.8, 13.0, 12.8 and 12.8 cm, respec-
tively, in length and the shortest was 3.2
cm long. Some of the slugs were dis-
sected by the writer and by Dr. J.
Oughton, Ontario Agricultural College,
Guelph, and proved to be Limax maxi-

mus as identified by keys based on

features of the digestive tract and repro-
ductive system in H. A. Pilsbry’s mono-
graph (Acad. nat. Sci. Philad., No. 3, vol.
2, pt. 2, 1948).

The color of the slugs was like that of
the specimen collected by Judd (quoted
work), the general impression being that
the animals were dark gray. The mantle
was mottled with gray and black with a
few light spots anteriorly. The dorsum
of the largest specimens was traversed
lengthwise by a dark gray stripe half an
inch wide with two parallel black stripes,
each one-eighth of an inch wide, extend-
ing along it just to each side of the mid-
dorsal line. The sides of the body were
mottled with dark gray and black. The
foot of each slug was dull white.

The specimens, preserved in fluid, are
deposited in the collection of the De-
partment of Zoology, University of
Western Ontario.

Witiiam W. Jupp
Department of Zoology
University of Western Ontario
London, Ontario
18 April 1958

Parula Warbler and Indigo
Bunting in Southwestern Alberta

Two interesting species were taken in
June 1958 while the author was collecting
avian specimens in the vicinity of the
Alberta Biological Station. This station
is situated some twenty miles west of
Turner Valley and is at the base of the
front range of the Rocky Mountains.
An adult male Parula Warbler Parula
americana in breeding condition was
taken on June 6. This bird was discovered
singing in thick partially killed spruce

174

which surrounded a beaver pond. To
my knowledge, this is the second record
of the Parula Warbler west of south-
eastern Manitoba; the other, at Fort
Qu’Appelle, Saskatchewan, was recorded
by Callin in 1956 (Blue Jay 14:90-91).

On June 23 a pair of Indigo Buntings
Passerina cyanea was seen. The male was
collected and found to be in breeding
condition. On July 4 a second male was
seen singing in the same vicinity and this
suggests that the birds may have been
breeding there. These buntings were in-
habiting aspen poplar groves, similar
to the habitat of the Lazula Bunting
Passerina amoena, a common breeding
species in this area. These birds form the
third record of this species in Alberta.
An adult male was taken at Lac la
Nonne on June 3, 1926, and there is a
sight record of an adult male from the
Cypress Hills on June 26, 1952.

Both specimens collected are now in
my private collection.

Davin A. Boac

Department of Zoology
University of Alberta
Edmonton, Alberta
26 August 1958

Albino American Coots
Near Vermilion, Alberta

On July 12, 1957, on a lake three miles
north of Vermilion in the parklands of
Alberta, I observed by naked eye three
birds that appeared to be white coots.
On the next visit to the area on July 23,
when I was accompanied by Mr. J. K.
Lowther, we identified the birds as
immature albino American Coots Fulica
americana. They were found in a small
bay on the northwest side of the lake,
the same place where they had been ob-
served previously. The water in the bay
was about two feet deep. Scattered
emergent vegetation was identified as
soft-stem bulrush Scirpus validus, sago
pondweed Potamogeton pectinatus and
water milfoil Myriophyllum verticilla-
tum dominated the submerged vegeta-
tion.

Tue CanapiAn FIEtp-NaTurRALIStT

Volk 72

On August 3, one was captured alive
and presented to the Calgary Zoo. Mr.
Tom Baines, curator of that zoo, has
since informed me that this coot died
from undetermined causes in March
1958.

Figure 1. Albino Coot captured August 3,
1956, and donated to the Calgary Zoo.

On August 19, Mr. George Senz,
Fish and Game Officer at Vermilion, and
I captured one of the remaining albino
coots for the National Museum. At that
time the bird was almost fully feathered
although the primaries were still sheathed
and the bird was flightless.

The plumage of the two coots (Figure
1) was pure white. The eyes were pink.
The legs, feet and bill were yellow, the

bill a few shades lighter in color.

The occurrence of three albinos, ap-
parently of the same age and in the same
locality, would lead one to believe that
they belonged to the same brood.

The third albino was not seen after
the first visit to the lake. It is believed
that it succumbed to predation or some
other natural event. My impressions of
the two captured albinos were that they
were less vigorous than normal coots and
were thus easily captured.

Rosert E. Harris
Canadian Wildlife Service
728 Federal Building
Edmonton, Alberta
17 April 1958

1958

REVIEWS

175

PUBLICATION ANNOUNCEMENT

The Canada Department of Agriculture announces the
publication by its Botany and Plant Pathology Division of a

Checklist of Plants of the Ottawa District. The booklet may be
had free of charge by addressing a request to the compiler, Dr.
John M. Gillett, Botany and Plant Pathology Division, Science
Service, Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario.

REVIEWS

A Guide to Field Biology

By Jon Sankey. Toronto, Longmans,
Green and Co., 1958. 166 p., illus.
In developing a very workable and use-

ful guide, Mr. Sankey has put to good

use the experience he has gained in his

more than 10 years of teaching the field

sciences and in his own researches in

ecology.

He deals first with soils, discussing
methods of formation and means of dis-
tinguishing the various types and methods
of recording data on them.

He then describes, in excellently work-
able detail, methods for measuring and
recording qualitatively and quantitatively
the essential facts about the vegetative
cover of the soils.

A detailed study of vegetation leads
naturally to a study of animals from soil
microfauna through the larger inverte-
brates to a brief mention of some of the
smaller mammals and birds. Since animals
must be secured for examination a useful
section is devoted to methods and ap-
paratus for collecting small animals under
many conditions both in the soil and on
it. The section of animal studies, like the
one on plants, stresses ecological rela-
tions.

$1.90.

A short section deals with comprehen-
sive surveys of plants and invertebrate
animals.

Although the book deals primarily
with the terrestrial habitat, a section of
eight pages describes methods of study
adapted to seashore and estuarine condi-
tions.

A 16-page section on projects gives
helpful details on 13 types of specific pro-
jects ranging from a study of badger life
history in the field through testing color
perception in the honeybee to the study
of a wood. Reading references are pro-
vided with most of the project outlines.

Fourteen appendices greatly increase
the usefulness of the book. They cover a
variety of subjects including “Preserving
Invertebrates,” “How to Send Small
Animals by Post” and “Keeping Weather
Records.”

A comprehensive general bibliography
of 10 pages, divided by subject headings,
is followed by a good eight-page index
which supplements the five-page table
of contents.

The book is well made and the type,
though small, is quite clear and easily
read. The 49 line drawings form useful
supplements to the text.

176

Any person with an interest in field
biology, amateur or professional, will
find this a valuable source book for tech-
niques for the study of soils, plants and
animals other than vertebrates. Although
designed for use in the British Isles, the
general nature of much of the text suits
it for use in any temperate area.

We are fortunate that so much useful
information has been furnished in such
an inexpensive book which slips easily
into a jacket pocket where it is readily
available for reference in field studies.

V. E. F. Somman

Assistant Chief
Canadian Wildlife Service

The Breeding Biology of the Chimney

Swift Chaetura pelagica (Linnaeus)

By Ricuarp B. Fiscuer. Albany, New York
State Museum and Science Service, 1958.
141 p. (Bulletin No. 368)

For obvious reasons the nest life of
this species is not easily studied and has
been poorly known. This interesting
study made over a number of years,
mainly in Sullivan County, New York,
fills a need of long standing.

W. Eart Goprrey

Warblers—Songs of Warblers of
Eastern North America
Recorded by Donan J. Borrer and WILLIAM

W.H. Gunn. “Sounds of Nature” Series,

Vol. 4, 1958. Federation of Ontario

Naturalists, 187 Highbourne Road, Toron-

to 7, Ontario. $5.95.

Warblers is the fourth and latest of the
completely delightful “Sounds of Nature”
series published by the Federation of
Ontario Naturalists. The songs of 38
species of eastern warblers, skilfully re-
corded in nature by Borrer and Gunn,
are brought together on the two sides of
this long-playing record.

The songs are logically arranged so
that the most confusingly similar songs
may be readily compared and their signi-
ficant differences noted. Several examples
are chosen to show much of the variation
in one or more songs of a given species
and the two sides of the record contain
a total of 400 songs from 170 individual
birds of 38 warbler species. Each song

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

is unobtrusively but adequately identified
by the pleasing voice of Thom Benson.

This excellent record should go a long
way toward silencing that old bird-
watcher’s lament about having to learn
the warbler songs all over again each year
and which crops up annually as surely as
spring brings the return of the warblers.
Now, with this record and half a ‘musi-
cal’ ear, birdwatchers can learn at any
season the songs of all the warblers likely
to be met with in eastern North America
and be ready to recognize them when
they return in the spring. The voices of
the warblers and the half-forgotten back-
ground sounds are so startlingly lifelike
that they are sure to recall vividly many
a pleasant day afield and at the same time
stimulate anticipation of even pleasanter
ones to follow.

W. Eart Goprrey
Curator of Ornithology
National Museum of Canada

Mountain Wild Flowers of Colorado
By Ruopa N. Roserts and Ruta A. NELson.

Denver, Colorado, Denver Museum of

Natural History, 1957. 69 p. (Museum

Pictorial No. 13)

An appealing booklet with 50 superb
color close-ups of the more attractive
alpine plants, each supplied with a half-

page of interesting and accurate nature

notes. Half of the plants occur in western
Canada. W. G. Dore

Hurt Not the Earth
By E. Newton-WHite. Drawings by

Tuoreau MacDonarp. Toronto, Ryerson

Press, 1958. 188 p. $4.95.

This book, as stated on the jacket, deals
with the exploitation of our renewable
natural resources, soil, water, forests and
wildlife, in the development of Canada.
It is also, as stated on the jacket, highly
controversial.

The author, after a general and wide-
ranging introduction of his thesis, deals
with the history of and mistakes and
problems in wildlife management in
Canada. He then traces the history of
forest use and misuse from days of first
settlement to present date. He devotes a
section to the forest fire problem.

1958

Soil and water resources are then dis-
cussed, with special comment upon land
colonization policies. A plea is very pro-
perly made for maintenance, in _per-
petuity, of maximum fertility of our soils.
The author then devotes a section to the
conservation principle as he sees it, and
to the problems in maintaining such in
our present age. Finally he devotes a sec-
tion to summary and suggested remedies
for the renewable resource crisis that he
sees.

This book is so general that critical re-
view, in the space permitted, is not pos-
sible. It may suffice to say that there is
much basic truth in the history of re-
source exploitation as presented, but the
almost complete lack of factual data in
the presentation makes it impossible for
the reader to judge for himself or herself
just how wrong the actions were that
were taken in the past, and just how
serious the situation is today.

As to the present, one cannot say that
all is well with our renewable resources—
far from it. There is, as the author states,
need for urgent interest and concern on
the part of every Canadian. It is not be-
lieved, however, that the comments of
the author, and the implications thus left,
present a fair picture of the situation to-
day, or for the last ten years or more at
least. And it is hoped that few Canadians
today will agree that our conservationists,
conservation organizations and conserva-
tion policies constitute “. . . in general an
inept, inadequate, hidebound system,
completely impotent in the resource crisis
now building up.” An apparent bias on
the part of the author against government
renewable resource agencies (which he
feels are largely incompetent and
weighted down with political appointees)
and against big business, especially in the
forest industry, will further detract from
the value of his presentation to many
readers.

Study of the facts contained in wildlife
agency reports, and in reports on forestry
and soils presented to the Royal Com-
mission on Canada’s Economic Prospects
and to the Special Committee on Land

REVIEWS

177

Use in Canada, emphasizes the need for
caution in accepting too fully the
sweeping, though colorful, generaliza-
tions on resource conditions made
throughout the book. The progress of
the last ten to twenty years, in building
up resource organizations, in fact-finding,
in technological knowledge and in ac-
tion programs, will cause many to ques-
tion the comment: “The nation built out
of Canada is an achievement to boast
about; boasting which has somewhat less
point, however, because here were the
makings of something much greater than
we have or can now hope to have.” The
italics are the reviewer's.

There is much more in the book with
which one might quarrel, but some com-
ment should be given for the credit side.
Too few are willing to publicly place
responsibility for good renewable re-
source management where it belongs, but
the author consistently makes his point
that the responsibility lies with each one
of us. He is not afraid to speak of the
“love of the land trait,” and to relate con-
servation to religion. So here again is a
call for a land ethic and it is heartening
to read. The author calls for public
education and enlightenment in conser-
vation principles, and for nongovern-
mental conservation agencies, employing
their own professional scientists, to carry
the story of our resource situation to the
public as no government agency can do.

Ten remedies are suggested for the
situation, and two of these at least will
raise controversy. Economists and popu-
lation experts, of which the reviewer is
neither, will have a field day arguing the
proposal that we “gear the national eco-
nomic system to (renewable?) resource
husbandry” and “effect such a population
balance as will allow intensive home use
of the resources. .. .” The proposal that
our living resources be all returned to
small private enterprise and ownership
under regulation will raise the question,
so often discussed among conservationists,
of how far you can go, by regulations, in
forcing the private individual, who has
paid for his holdings, to use renewable

178

natural resources in a manner that will
guarantee their maintenance undiminshed
in perpetuity. Nor can one dismiss the
fact that today some of the best farm and
forest management is being as well car-
ried out by large corporations or enter-
prises as by private individuals. One can-
not generalize; there is real need for
serious thought of how the essential ob-
jective, that of resources in perpetuity,
is to be achieved.

In conclusion, here is a book directed
to much needed public information
respecting renewable resource use in
Canada. The underlying theme of need
for public interest, understanding and
action is good. It is suggested, however,
that any prospective reader have at hand
factual resource references, such as those
mentioned earlier in the review.

W. Winston Mair
Chief

Canadian Wildlife Service
Folk Names of Canadian Birds
By W. L. McArtee. Ottawa,

Museum of Canada, 1957. 74 p.

(Bulletin No. 149)

Naturalists have long been indebted to
this prolific American writer. Now, after
years of research, Mr. McAtee has pro-
vided a fascinating account of the various
names, English, Gaelic and French, by
which birds are known. To read this
book is to be at once enlightened in
folklore and etymologically entertained.

R. A. HamiLton

National
25 cents.

The Ring-necked Duck in the Northeast
By Howarp L. Menpart. Orono, Maine,

University Press, 1958. 24 pl., 16 fig., 317

p- $2.50. (University of Maine Studies,

Second Series, No. 73)

This is one of the best accounts ever
written about a single species of water-
fowl. It is broader in scope than its title
indicates and thus will be useful and in-
teresting to both research ornithologists
and game managers everywhere. This
book is written in a pleasing style and
shows the results of careful preparation.
The illustrations and figures are attrac-
tive and useful.

THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

Life history of the ring-neck is
thoroughly treated under the usual head-
ings: migration, courtship and _ pairing,
nesting, the brood season, the postbreed-
ing season, and the hunting season. There
are also chapters describing the bird in
its various plumages, its habitat, distribu-
tion, food and feeding habits, and chap-
ters on measuring populations and pro-
ductivity, and management.

Treatment of most topics is very
thorough, not only through presentation
and discussion of the data which Men-
dall obtained himself, principally in
Maine and western New Brunswick, but
also by means of skillful reference to
pertinent items of the waterfowl] litera-
ture. An outstanding feature of this work
is that throughout effort has been made
to interpret data as well as record them,
and to relate the behavior of ring-necks
to that of other ducks.

The ring-necked duck differs from
other ducks in a number of ways, and it
is these differences which make it such
an interesting object of study. A point
of particular note is that it is still actively
in the process of expanding its range.
The first recorded nesting in Maine was
in 1937, although Mendall’s enquiries
lead him to believe that the species may
have bred there half a dozen years earlier.
Now ring-necks are second in abun-
dance to the black duck in Maine and in
many parts of the Maritime Provinces,
breeding densities in favorable habitat
being as high as one pair per five acres.
Territorialism in the ring-neck is a quite
different phenomenon from that ex-
hibited by the black duck in the same
region, and by other species of waterfowl
in other regions, according to Mendall.
He concludes that although the spacing
of breeding pairs is a manifestation of
territoriality, it is achieved almost en-
tirely without indication of aggressive
behavior. Mendall’s discussion of this
important subject is most stimulating.

The chapter on management well il-
justrates the value of detailed, long-term
research. Studies of hatching success

1958

were carried on in a variety of habitats
where there is a wide range of variation
in water levels. Interpretation of the re-
sults provided ideas which were tested
on managed marshes with considerable
success. It is noteworthy that in some
areas the range of tolerance for breeding
black ducks and ring-necks was found to
be within a six-inch variation in water
level. Because of the great variety in na-
tural situations which waterfowl mana-
gers may try to improve, they will not be
able to apply Mendall’s findings directly
but they will find in this book a most
telling demonstration of the principles of
habitat management.

Some of the data which this book con-
tains were gathered during a 20-year
period, and intensive field work was car-
ried on for the 12 years between 1943
and 1955. It should not detract from the
credit due the author to suggest that his
work well points up the need for time
and continuity in wildlife research.

Davin A. MunrROoE

Chief Ornithologist
Canadian Wildlife Service

Nature Photography at Night

By Tappan Grecory. Denver, Colorado,
Denver Museum of Natural History, 1957.
62 p., illus. (Museum Pictorial No. 14)

Two other issues of these pictorials
have dealt with nature photography:
M.P. No. 1, “Nature Photography with
Miniature Cameras,” and M.P. No. 5,
“Nature Photography with the High-
Speed Flash.” The third member of the
series deals historically with the fascinat-
ing record of Mr. Gregory who pursued
the hobby of night photography of wild
life for more than fifty years and gained
wider experience than any other photo-
grapher in that field. Mr. Gregory has
traced the evolution of equipment from
open charges of magnesium flash powder
to magnetic synchronizers and flash bulbs.
The first-hand record of interesting ex-
periences in the field is illustrated with 41
of the author’s best night flash pictures of
wild life.

V. E. F. Sotman

REVIEWS

19

The Ecology of Invasions by
Animals and Plants

By Cuartes S. Erron. London, Methuen,
LOS Be STDs, illus. $6.00 (30/-).

The director of the Bureau of Animal
Population at Oxford has presented a
stimulating discussion of a problem that
has an urgent appeal to nearly all biolo-
gists. At the same time the presentation
is in simple enough terms to be clear to
the layman interested in conservation
and agricultural production. Workers in
such applied fields as plant quarantine,
plant pathology, and forest, agricultural
or medical entomology will find data on
problems analogous to their own and will
find the theoretical discussions stimulat-
ing. Workers in such disciplines as
ecology, biogeography, population dyna-
mics, -evolution and conservation will
find a rich assortment of data gathered
from many sources, Canadian included.

Slightly over half the book is given
over to a discussion of Wallace’s Realms
and their geological background, to the
vast and increasingly serious number of
plant and animal invasions into new
territories, and the resulting problems in
population dynamics. The changing food
chains that result from such invasions
are then discussed. In a chapter headed
the “Reasons for Conservation” the
author presents the view that only by
deliberately complicating, rather than
trying more and more to simplify, our
communities of economic plants and
animals can disastrous outbreaks and
fluctuations be limited. His thesis, based
on mathematical, experimental and obser-
vational data, is that the simpler the
population structure the more violent are
its fluctuations. Somewhat surprisingly
voles and lemmings are not mentioned in
this connection, but one can scarcely
overlook the fantastically violent fluctu-
ations in the populations of these ani-
mals in the arctic where prey, predator
and plant species are few, in comparison
with the much smaller fluctuations that
occur in southern Canada where all

180

elements of the community are more
varied. In a complex community, with
many competing species of hosts and
parasites, predators and prey, food plants
and cover plants, we have something
analagous to a strongly buffered fluid:
the introduction of a foreign element
produces no runaway change but only a
minor readjustment in structure. In a
tropical forest the structure is so com-
plex that such scourges and rapid
changes as we are even now experiencing
in our much simpler temperate forests
cannot occur.

The remedy proposed in the final
chapter is that we abandon our attempts
at a rigid monoculture (the author’s
term for great stands of single crops in
as nearly sterile surroundings as can be
achieved) and to turn our backs be-
latedly on the barbed-wire engineering
type of (self-styled) agricultural effi-
ciency expert. The sterile monoculture,
if it were fully realized, would be even
more poorly buffered than the arctic
fox and lemming population of the high
arctic. The author urges the retention
and extension of the hedgerow system of
farm fields that has served so well in
many parts of England. This suggestion
is not entirely original—much the same
thought was expressed by H. J. Massing-
ham in The Wisdom of the Fields; and
I do not doubt that Cobbett, who ad-
mired a good hedgerow, would have
expressed it too if anyone in his day had
had the temerity to suggest barbed wire
as an alternative. But probably no logical
and adequately reasoned support for
hedgerow farming has hitherto been pre-
sented. One of Massingham’s countrymen
remarked to him: “I likes eddicated
people but the worst of it is they be so
dommed ignorant.” It is quite clear that
Dr. Elton is exempt from this stricture;
he has kept touch with the living world.
Moreover he cites encouraging pre-
liminary findings of increased production
under the methods that he advocates.

I find great satisfaction in this pre-
sentation of reasoned support for cultural

THe Canapian Frietp-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

methods instinctively developed. I have
boyhood recollections of rich Devon
farmlands where the fields were both
hedged and banked. And I remember,
as we drank his cider after an afternoon’s
rabbiting, an old farmer, whose family
has prospered on that farm for un-
counted generations, explaining to us
that the roadside banks were broader and
unhedged because before the days of
metaled roads folks traveled on the bank
tops during winter rains. This man was
truly a part of a balanced community,
not a foreign influence wrecking its
economy for a quick return.

This stimulating and thought-provok-
ing book can be recommended unre-
servedly. I have no criticisms of the latter
part and only a few very minor ones of
the earlier chapters. I wonder whether
the uniformity of the Cretaceous fauna
was aS great as it appears. After a hun-
dred million years our perspective is
desperately shortened and animals that
seem to have occurred simultaneously in
different continents may actually have
done so a million years apart. On page
42 the author ascribes the richness of the
Oriental Realm to the mountain barriers
to the north. These mountains certainly
served to increase the distinctness of this
realm; but the richness was probably
due more to its being wholly tropical
and to the stimulus of intermittent
penetration of the sea barriers in the
Malay Achipelago. Finally I regret that
Dr. Elton did not supply balance for his
story of invasions by documenting one
or two that have occurred without
human agency; the invasion of and ex-
plosive spread within the Americas by
the Cattle Egret might have served.

I am at a loss to explain why a book
that sells in England for thirty shillings
should be listed in Canada at six dollars.
I am informed by the office concerned
that books in this class are subject to
neither duty nor sales tax.

D. B. O. SaviLE

Curator, National Mycological Herbarium
Canada Department of Agriculture

1958

Alberta Bird Report for 1957
Issued by the Edmonton and Calgary Bird
Clubs. Copies available from Mr. W. G.
L. Twigge, Department of Extension, Uni-
versity of Alberta, Edmonton, Alberta.
10 cents.
Bird watchers in Alberta, residents or
visitors, will be helped by this informa-
tive account of birds observed in 1957.

R. A. Hamitton

Outdoor Rambles
By Sruart L. THompson. Toronto, Long-
mans Green, 1958. 147 p., illus. $3.50.
Here is a book that may be recom-
mended as an excellent gift to the bud-
ding teenage naturalist. It would also
give delight to older persons who are
only now discovering the pleasure of
rambles in the great outdoors.

As indicated in the table of contents
the usual chapters are replaced by 15
rambles and under each ramble usually
two or three topics are discussed. The
arrangement of the stories in a more or
less seasonal sequence helps to blend the
contents into an effective whole, but at
times, despite the lively style, it is evi-
dent that the stories “have been repro-
duced before in some form.” The book
may be considered a pleasant introduc-
tion to more solid reading in natural
history.

The author shows considerable des-
criptive power. In his account of a canoe
trip in spring he recalls the “dainty bunch
berry or cornel.” In part he writes: “As
the camper, bowed beneath the upturned
canoe, toils over the portage he may not
see the trilliums and other beauties scat-
tered through the forest, but his moc-
casined feet are ever among the bunch-
berry plants with their four-pointed
flowers.”

The author presents interesting en-
counters with small four-footed mam-
mals, bats, insects and plants, but here he
appears to be on less familiar ground. In
fact when the author writes of the
“anaemic appearance so typical of the
fungus family,” he surely has yet to

REVIEWS

181

know his fellow naturalists’ joy in mush-
rooming.

Found in the book are many tidbits on
the origin of the common and scientific
names of plants, but it seems unnecessary
to state that the latter are “known only
to really learned people.” Also a wholly
erroneous picture is drawn of Peter
Kalm (1715-1779) and “Hugues” Jean-
Francois Gaultier (21708-1756) “as these
two old cronies of those by-gone days
strolling off into [the] Canadian forest.”
When Kalm, a pupil of Linnaeus, made
his famous journey to North America
and visited Gaultier, a “celebrated court
physician and naturalist” at Quebec, he
was under 40, and Gaultier, although
probably not as vigorous, was only a few
years older. Undoubtedly, they were
aristocrats and a truer picture would be
of two gentlemen on horseback in
powdered peruke and elegant clothes
dismounting from time to time to gather
the new plant treasures that Gaultier
pointed out to Kalm.

Despite the few misleading statements
the book is most worthwhile. It is an
attractive specimen of the printer’s art,
the typography is excellent and the 30
scratchboard drawings by Geoffrey
Goss satisfactorily complement the text.

I. L. Conners

Senior Mycologist
Department of Agriculture

Translations from the Russian

A series of translations of Russian
biological papers is being prepared by
the Canadian Wildlife Service of the
Department of Northern Affairs and
National Resources. The following
volumes have been issued, and may be
purchased from the Queen’s Printer,

Ottawa, at the prices shown below.
The general title of the Series is
“Translations of Russian Game Re-
ports.”

Vol. 1. Beaver, 1951-55. 109 p., 50c.
Vol. 2. Muskrat, 1951-55. 224 p., $1.00.
Vol. 3. Arctic and Red Foxes, 1951-:

55. 214 p., $1.00.

182

The Behavioral, Ecological and Morpho-

logical Characteristics of Two Populations

of the Alder Flycatcher, Empidonax
traillii (Audubon)

By Rosert Carrincton Stein. Albany,
New York State Museum and Science
Service, 1958. 63 p. (Bulletin No. 371)
Two song-types of Alder Flycatcher

are well known. Those breeding across

Canada and into Alaska, New England,

and northeastern United States sing

fee-bee-o; those in the United States
west of the Alleghenies sing fitz-bew.

Studies near Ithaca, New York, where

the two are sympatric, indicate that birds

singing the fitz-bew song build more
compact nests of somewhat different
materials; have slightly smaller eggs with
greater color variation; have different
habitat preferences; have slightly shorter
tarsi and longer bills than birds that sing
fee-bee-o. The possibility is suggested
that the two song-types may represent
two distinct morphologically similar

Species. W. Eart Goprrey

Fifty Years of Botany

Edited by Wiruam Campsett STEERE.
Toronto, McGraw-Hill, 1958. 638 p.
$12.00.

Fifty Years of Botany, the Golden
Jubilee Volume of the Botanical Society
of America, presents forty papers of
broad and general interest by many
prominent botanists in diverse fields.
Most of the contributions appeared as a
series of Special Papers in volumes 43 and
44 of the American Journal of Botany,
the official organ of the society. The last
six in the book were presented in the
Golden Jubilee Symposium of the Bo-
tanical Society of America during meet-
ings of the American Institute of Bio-
logical Sciences held at Storrs, Connecti-
cut, in August 1946.

To paraphrase Samuel Johnson, some
papers are to be tasted, some to be
chewed and a few to be digested. In-
dividually they reflect the personalities
and interests of the author; collectively,
they achieve the aim of the volume to an
admirable degree, an aim which is to
“enable intelligent nonbotanists to under-

THe CaNnapIAN FIELD-NATURALIST

V oli 72

stand and to appreciate what botany is
and what botanists are doing.”

The volume begins with an account of
the early history of the society by the
president, Oswald Tippo. Then follows
a list of fifty prominent botanists who
were awarded certificates of merit at
the fiftieth anniversary meeting. Dr.
Tippo has brought together a fine collec-
tion of photographs of these men which
are superbly reproduced with great
clarity.

The subjects covered by the remaining
thirty-three articles include applied
microbiology, pathology, anatomy, mor-
phogenesis, cytology, cytogenetics and
evolution, taxonomy, botanical explora-
tion, ecology, conservation, soil relation-
ships, physiology, weed control, horticul-
ture, medicine, history, algology, college
botany, economic botany and botanic
gardens. The six papers in the Golden
Jubilee Symposium cover progress and
achievement during the past fifty years
in the fields of phycology, mycology,
taxonomy, paleobotany, morphology and
physiology.

There are a few papers that are con-
spicuously out of place because they go
into too much detail and are too tech-
nical. These would be better found in a
scientific journal of their respective dis-

ciplines for they do not contribute

towards the accomplishment of the
volume’s aim. For example, the endless
lists of species of Brazilian rain forest
would interest only a small number of
professionals and would be lost upon the
nonbotanist.

As a Canadian I could not help noticing
the slightly out-of-date account of
Canadian botanical achievements in plant
exploration and the misspelling of the
names of two well-known Canadian
workers. The volume nevertheless, not
only achieves its aim but is a mine of
general information to both the amateur
and professional botanist and should find

a place on their shelves.

The quality of paper and printing is of
the finest and the prominent numbering
of the papers makes for ease in piecemeal

1958

reading. A brief but useful index is sup-
plied. The all-gold cover while in har-
mony with the Golden Jubilee theme is
a trifle gaudy, but on the shelf only the
spine will appear.

Joun M. GILLett

Plant Taxonomist
Department of Agriculture

Birds of Midway and Laysan Islands
By A.rrep M. Baitey. Denver, Colorado,
Denver Museum of Natural History,
1956. 130 p. (Museum Pictorial No. 12)
Freely illustrated with black-and-
white photographs, largely by the author,
and with a colored portrait of the extinct
Laysan Honey-eater, this book provides
much information on the birds of these
small islands of the western part of the
Hawaiian chain. Birds of casual oc-

REVIEWS

183

currence are also listed; and introductory
chapters deal briefly with the history of
the islands, their plants and mammals,
and their ornithological history.

Here is the all too familiar story of the
destruction of island endemics by
thoughtless introductions; in this case the
introduction of rabbits was the most
serious single mistake. Some of the birds
will be seen no more, and most of those
that survive will not be seen by the
majority of readers—a few, such as the
Black-footed Albatross, we may see
casually on the Pacific Coast. This excel-
lent collection of photographs is thus of
marked value in providing information
that is difficult for the amateur to obtain
about a number of unfamiliar species.

D..B. O. SaviLe

INDEX >

tea

i
ie a

“
‘2

oA i

i]

1958

INDEX

185

INDEX TO VOLUME 72
Compiled by Jonn M. Grtierr

Acanthis, 25; flammea flammea, 25

Acanthodiaptomus denticornis, 155

Accipiter cooperi, 10; gentilis atricapillus,
10; striatus velox, 10

Aetitis macularia, 13

Aegolius acadicus acadicus, 17; funereus, 169

Agaricus cantharellus, 136, 137; cerinus, 135;
chrysophlebius, 135; conicus, 136; involu-
tus, 138; muscarius, 133; pantherinus, 133;
puniceus, 137: speciosus, 136; strangulatus,
135; strictius, 138; vaginatis, 134

Agelaius phoeniceus phoeniceus, 24

Alberta, Albino American Coots near Ver-
milion, by Robert E. Harris, 174

Alberta Bird Report for 1957, reviewed by
Robert A. Hamilton, 181

Alberta, Black-throated Blue Warbler in,
by W. Ray Salt, 165

Alberta, Early Meadowlark in, by John C.

Stelfox, 171
Alberta, Parula Warbler and Indigo Bunting
in southwestern, by David A. Boag, 174
Alberta, Recoveries of Banded Snowy Owls
in, by Albert F. Oeming, 171

Albino American Coots near Vermilion, °

Alberta, by Robert E. Harris, 174

Alca torda torda, 15

Allocrangonyx, 60

Allorchestes, 57, knickerbockeri, 109

Alopex lagopus, 124

Amanita cothurnata, 134; muscaria, 133, 134;
pantherina, 133; strangulata, 135; velatipes,
133, 134

Amanitopsis fulva, 134, inaurata, 135; stran-
gulata, 135; vaginata, 135; vaginata var.
fulva, 134; vaginata var. livida, 133

Ammospiza caudacuta subvirgata, 26

Amphithoe aztecus, 109; dentata, 55, 90, 109

Anas carolinensis, 9; discors, 9; rubripes, 9

Andromeda glaucophylla, 119

Anisogammarus, 57, 58, 111; confervicolus,
55, 58, 64, 86; locustoides, 55, 58, 86;
oregonensis, 86; ramellus, 55, 58, 84, 86

Anser albifrons, 122

Anthus spinoletta rubescens, 21

Apocrangonyx, 60

Archilochus colubris, 17

Ardea herodias herodias, 8

Arenaria interpres morinella, 13

Arethusa bulbosa, 121

Arnold, John W.
Review of: Insect Life in tee Tropics, 114

Arnold, Ruth Horner
Review of: The Edge of April, a Bio-

graphy of John Burroughs, 117

Asio flammeus, 169

Attwood, Albert Edward, A remembrance,
by Herbert Groh, 151

Auk, Razor-billed, 15

Aythya collaris, 9

Bactrurus, 60
Bagg, Aaron, M., Request for information
on monotone of Chickadee, (letter), 118
Banks Island, Observation on the Lesser
Snow Goose nesting grounds, by Eoin H.
McEwen, 122
BBC Naturalist, The, reviewed by Stephen
Dale, 150
Beard Flower, 121
Beckett, Eva
Cedar Waxwings at Churchill, 145
Red-shafted Flicker and American Coot
at Churchill, Manitoba, 168
Behavioral . . . Characteristics of Two
Populations of the Alder Flycatcher, The,
_ reviewed by W. Earl Godfrey, 182
Bird, Charles D.
The distribution of the western painted
-turtle in Manitoba, 28
Birds of the Mackenzie Delta, by W. E.
Stevens and E. O. Hohn, 168
Birds of Midway and Laysan Islands, re-
viewed by D. B. O. Savile, 183
Bittern, American, 8, 41
Blackbird, Brewer’s, 45-47; Redwinged, 33-36,
40, 43, "46, 47; Rusty, 24, 43
Black-throated Blue Warbler in Alberta, by
W. Ray Salt, 165
Bladderwort, 121
Bleakney, Sherman
Review of: The Snakes of Ontario, 149
The significance of turtle bones from
archaeological sites in southern
Ontario and Quebec, 1
Variation in a litter of northern water
snakes from Ottawa, Ontario, 128
Blueberry, Black High-bush, 119
Bluebird, Eastern, 36
Blue Jay Flyway near Ottawa, by Herbert
Groh, 167
Boag, David A.
Parula Warbler and Indigo Bunting in
southwestern Alberta, 173
Bobolink, 24
Bobwhite, 39, 40
Bog, Studies of the Byron, in Southwestern
Ontario, I], by William W. Judd, 119
Bombycilla cedrorum, 21
Bonasa umbellus thayeri, 12;
gata, 12
Botaurus lentiginosus, 8
Bousfield, E. L.
Fresh-water amphipod crustaceans of
glaciated North America, 55
Branchinecta paludosa, 152
Brant, 45
Branta canadensis, 122; canadensis canaden-
sis, 8; nigricans, 122

umbellus to-

186

Breeding Biology of the Chimney Swift
Chaetura pelagica, The, reviewed by
W. Earl Godfrey, 176

British Columbia, Distribution of harvest
mouse in, by James A. Munro, 146

Bubo virginianus, 16

Bucephale clangula americana, 9

Buckthorn, Alder, 121

Bufflehead, 32, 33, 37, 38, 42, 45-47

Bufo boreaus, 64

Bulrush, Soft-stem, 174

Bunting, Lazula, 174

Bunting, Snow, 27, 32, 33, 36-44, 47; Indigo,
173

Bushtit, Common, 47

Buteo jamaicensis borealis, 10; lagopus
johannis, 11; lineatus, 11; platypterus, 11

Calidris canutus rufa, 14

Calopogon pulchellus, 121

Canachites canadensis canace, 12

Canis lupus, 124

Canvasback, 36, 38, 42, 44-46

Cape Breton Island, Birds of, by W. Earl
Godfrey, 7

Capella gallinago delicata, 13

Cardinal, 36-43, 172

Cardinal versus Northern Shrike, by Russell
J. Rutter, 172

Carpodacus purpureus purpureus, 25

Casmerodias albus egretta, 8

Catbird, 20, 34, 38

Cathartes aura septentrionalis, 10

Catharus minimus, 160 :

Catoptrophorus semipalmatus semipalmatus,
13

Cepphus grylle atlantis, 16

Certhia familiaris americana, 20

Chaetura pelagica, 17

Chamaedaphne calyculata, 119

Charadrius melodus melodus, 12; semipal-
matus, 12; vociferus, 169

Chat, Yellow-breasted, 33

Checklist of Plants of the Ottawa District,
(announcement), 175

Chelydra serpentina serpentina, 1, 28

Chen hyperborea hyperborea, 122; rossi, 122

Chickadee, Acadian Boreal, 20; Black-
capped, 20, 32-46, 172; Boreal, 32, 33, 39,
42, 44; Chestnut-backed, 45-47; Mountain,
44, 46

Chipmunk and garter snake, by James L.
McKeever, 170

Chokeberry, Purple, 120

Chordeiles minor minor, 17

Christie, David S.
Nashville Warbler winters in New Bruns-
wick, 172

Christmas Bird Census, 1956, Correction, 47;
1957, edited by W. Earl Godfrey, 32

Chrysemys marginata belli, 28; picta bellii,
28; picta marginata, 1

Churchill, Cedar Waxwings at, by Eva
Beckett, 145

THe CanapiAn Frecp-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

Circus cyaneus hudsonius, 11

Clangula hyemalis, 9

Clapper Rails in Nova Scotia, by Willett J.
Mills, 168

Clemmys gutatta, 1, insculpta, 1, 4

Clitopilus, 137

Coccyzus erythropthalmus, 16

Colaptes auratus luteus, 17; cafer collaris, 168

Colony of the giant slug, Limzax maximus L.,
at London, Ontario, A, by William W.
Judd, 173

Conners, I. L.
Review of: Outdoor Rambles, 181

Contopus virens, 19

Coot Albino American, 174; American, 42,
45-47

Coot, American, and Red-shafted Flicker at
Churchill, by Eva Beckett, 168

Cormorant, 44, 45; Double-crested, 8, 35,
44, 46, 47; Eastern, 8, Great, 32, 33;
Pelagic, 44, 46, 47

Corophiidae, 58, 111

Corophium spinicorne, 55, 57, 58, 86, 111

Correction to 1956 Bird Census, 47

Corvus brachyrhynchos brachyrhynchos, 20; |
corax principalis, 20 |

Cowbird, Brown-headed, 32, 33, 36, 40;
Eastern, 24

Cowbirds breed in Prince Edward Island,
by Willett J. Mills, 170

Cranberry, Large, 121; Small, 121

Crangonyx, 56-58, 60, 76; anomalus, 55, 60,
87; antennatus, 60; dearolfi, 60; forbest 55,
60, 87, 89; gracilis, 55, 61, 87, 89, 98, 100,
102, 103, 105, 108; gracilis gracilis, 105,
108; gracilis packardi, 108; hobbsi, 60;
minor, 55, 61, 98, 100, 102; obliquus, 55,
60, 89-91, 94, 95; occidentalis, 90, 91, 94, 95;
packardi, 60; pseudogracilis, 55, 61, 76,
102, 108; pseudolimnaeus, 102; rich-
mondensis, 55, 60, 89-91, 94; richmon-
densis laurentianus, 55, 60, 91, 94, 108;
richmondensis occidentalis, 55, 60, 91, 94;
richmondensis richmondensis, 60, 90, 95; |
rivularis, 55, 61, 100, 102; serratus, 60, 90,
109; setodactylus, 55, 61, 96, 98, 100; shoe-
makeri, 55, 61, 95, 96, 100

Creeper, Brown, 20, 32-44, 46, 47

Crocethia alba, 14

Crossbill, Red, 25, 32, 38, 43; White-winged,
25, 32, 33, 37, 38, 41, 43, 170

Crotalus, 128

Crow, Common, 32-43, 45, 47; Eastern, 20;
Northwestern, 45-47

Crustaceans, Fresh-water amphipod, of
glaciated North America, by E. L. Bous-
field, 55

Cuckoo, Black-billed, 16

Cuerrier, J. P.
Review of: The Distribution of Minne-

sota Minnows and Darters in Relation
to Pleistocene Glaciation, 52
Curlew, Hudsonian, 13, Long-billed, 13

1958

Cyanocitta cristata, 167; cristata brontia, 19
Cyclops capillatus, 152; vernalis, 152
Cystobranchus, 163

Dale, Stephen
Review of: The BBC Naturalist, 150

Daphnia middendorffiana, 152

Dearden, J. C.

A stranding of killer whales in New-
foundland, 166

Delphinus, 158; delphis, 156, 169

Dendrocopos pubescens medianus, 18; vil-
losus villosus, 18

Dendroica albilora, 171; caerulescens, 165;
caerulescens caerulescens, 22; castanea, 23,
53; cerulea, 53; coronata, 172; coronata
coronata, 22; dominica, 171; fusca, 22, 53;
magnolia, 22, 53; palmarum hypochrysea,
23; petechia amnicola, 22; pinus, 53; striata,
23; tigrina, 22; virens virens, 22

Diaptomus alaskaensis, 155; arcticus, 155;
bacillifer, 155; eisenit occidentalis, 155;
glacialis, 155; gracilis, 155; Rurilensis, 155,
pribilofensis, 155; theeli, 152, 155; theeli
var. lithuanica, 155.

Diaptomus (Mixodiaptomus) theeli (Cope-
poda, Calanoida) from arctic Alaska, by
Edward B. Reed, 152

Dickcissel, 25

Dina dubia, 163; fervida, 163; parva, 163

Dipper, American, 46

Distribution of Minnesota Minnows and
Darters in Relation to Pleistocene Glacia-
tion, The, reviewed by J. P. Cuerrier, 52

Dolichonyx oryzivorus, 24

Dolphins in Newfoundland waters, by
David E. Sergeant, 156

Dore, W. G.

Review of: A Flora of the Matches of
California, 51

Review of: Fifty Trees of Canada, 114

Review of: Flora of the British Isles—
Illustrations, Part 1, 115

Review of: Mountain Wild Flowers of
Colorado, 176

Dove, Eastern Mourning, 16; Mourning, 32,
37-41, 43, 46; Rock, 32-34, 37, 39-42, 44,
46, 47

Dovekie, 16, 32, 33

Dowitcher, Eastern, 14

Drosera intermedia, 121; rotundifolia, 121

Dryocopus pileatus abieticola, 17

Duck, 45; Black, 9, 32-43; Harlequin, 9, 46,
47, Ring-necked, 9, 38, 46, 47; Ruddy,
38, 45-47, Wood, 46, 47

Dumetella carolinensis, 20

Dunlin, 45-47

Dymond, J. R.

Review of: The Fishes of Ohio, 116

Fagle, Bald, 33, 36, 39, 43, 45-47; Golden,
46, Northern Bald, 11

Early Meadowlark in Alberta, by John G.
Stelfox, 171

Eccilia, 137

INDEX

187

Ecology of Invasions by Animals and
Plants, The, reviewed by D. B. O. Savile,
179

Edge of April, a Biography of John Bur-
roughs, The, reviewed by Ruth Horner
Arnold, 117

Egret, American, 8

Eider, American, 9; Common, 32, 33; King, 9

Empetrum nigrum, 13

Empidonax flaviventris,
traillit trailli, 18

Emys blandingi, 1, 4; geographica, 28

Entoloma, 137; strictius, 138

Eremophila alpestris, 19; alpestris praticola,
19

Ereunetes pusillus, 14

Erolia fuscicollis, 14; melanotos,
minutilla, 14, 169

Erpobdella punctata, 163, 164

Eucrangonyx forbesi, 87; gracilis, 91, 94, 95,
98, 100, 102, 105; obliquus, 89; serratus,
90; shoemakeri, 95, 96

Euphagus carolinus nigrans, 24

18; minimus, 18;

14 167;

Falco columbarius, 169; columbarius colum-
barius, 11; peregrinus anatum2, 11; rusti-
colus, 167; sparverius sparverius, 12

Falcon, Peregrine, 41, 43, 45, 46; Prairie, 44

Fauvel, Bertram A., Request for information
on Purple Martin abandoning loft, (let-
ter), 118

Fifty Trees of Canada, reviewed by W. G.
Dore, 114

Fifty Years of Botany, reviewed by John
M. Gillett, 182

Financial Statement, Ottawa Field-Natura-
lists’ Club, Dec. 2, 1957, 48

Finch, 45; Cassin’s, 46; Eastern Purple, 25;
House, 45-47; Purple, 32-34, 37, 38, 40,
41, 43, 45-47

Fishes of Ohio, The, reviewed by J. R.
Dymond, 116

Flag, Blue, 121

Flicker, Northern, 17; Red-shafted, 45-47;
Yellow-shafted, 32, 35, 37, 40, 43

Flicker, Red-shafted, and American Coot at
Churchill, by Eva Beckett, 168

Flora of Manitoba, reviewed by J. C.
Ritchie, 147

Flora of the British Isles—Illustrations, Part
1, reviewed by W. G. Dore, 115

Flora of the Marshes of California, A,
reviewed by W. G. Dore, 51

Flycatcher, Alder, 18; Least, 18; Olive-sided,
19; Yellow-bellied, 18

Folk Names of Canadian Birds, reviewed by
Robert A. Hamilton, 178

Fratercula arctica arctica, 16

Frith, Rowley, Observation of a short-tailed
weasel capturing a chipmunk, 144
Observations of the Mocking-bird in

eastern Ontario, 145

Fulica americana, 168, 174

Fungi from northern Canada, Notes on, III,
by J. Walton Groves and others, 133

188

Gallinule, Purple, 12

Gammaridae, 58, 66

Gammarus, 57, 59; acherondytes, 55, 59, 73;
confervicolus, 84, 86;.duebeni, 55, 57, 59,
72; fasciatus, 55, 57, 59, 66, 67, 69, 70, 73,
74, 76, 78, 80, 102; lacustris, 55, 59, 78, 80,
81; lacustris lacustris, 60, 80, 81, 84; lacus-
tris limnaeus, 55, 60, 81, 84; limnaeus, 55,
74, 76, 78, 80, 81; locustoides, 86; minus,
55, 59, 72, 73, 76, 78; minus var. tenutpes,
73; oceanicus, 70; propinquus, 72, 73, 78;
pseudolimnaeus, 55, 60, 70, 74, 78, 80;
pulex, 80; purpurascens, 72; ramellus, 84;
robustus, 80, 81; tigrinus, 55, 57, 58, 66, 67,
69, 70; troglophilus, 55, 60, 76, 78, 80

Gannet, 8

Gavia immer, 7

Gaylussacia baccata, 121

Geothlypis trichas brachidactyla, 23

Gillett, John M.
Review of: Fifty Years of Botany, 182

Globicephala malaena, 156

Glossiphonia complanata, 163, 164

Godfrey, W. Earl
Birds of Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia,

7

Christmas Bird Census, 1957, 32
Review of: The Behavioral, Ecological
and Morphological Characteristics of
Two Populations of the Alder Fly-
catcher, 182
Review of: The Breeding Biology of the
Chimney Swift, 176
Review of: Warblers—Songs of Warblers
of Eastern North America, 176
Goldeneye, 35, 46; American, 9; Barrows,
35, 44-46; Common, 32-47
Goldfinch, American, 32-43, 47; Eastern, 25
Goose, Atlantic Canada, 8; Canada, 32, 33,
40, 45-47
Goshawk, 33, 34, 36, 38, 39, 41, 42, 44, 46;
Eastern, 10
Grackle, Bronzed, 24, 37; Common, 34, 38, 43
Graptemys geographica, 1
Grebe, Eared, 45-47; Horned, 32-34, 36-38,
44-47: Pied-billed, 7, 36, 39, 41, 46, 47;
Red-necked, 32, 36-38, 42, 44-47; Western,
44-47
Groh, Herbert
Albert Edward Attwood—A remem-
brance, 151 é
Blue Jay flyway near Ottawa, 167
Grosbeak, Evening, 32-44; Newfoundland
Pine, 25; Pine, 32-44, 46; Rose-breasted, 24
Grouse, Canada Ruffed, 12; Canada Spruce,
12; Ruffed, 32-45; Sharp-tailed, 42-44
Groves, J. Walton, Sheila C. Thomson and
Maria Pantidou
Notes on fungi from northern Canada,
Ill. Amanitaceae, Hygrophoraceae,
Rhodophyllaceae, and Paxillaceae, 133
Guide to Field Biology, A, reviewed by
V. E. F. Solman, 175

Tuer CanapiAn Firip-NaTuRALIST

Vol. 72

Guillemot, Atlantic Black, 16; Black, 32;
Pigeon, 46, 47

Gull, Black-headed, 15, 32; Bonaparte’s, 15,
39, 40, 46, 47; Glaucous, 15, 32, 34, 35,
37-39, 42; Glaucous-winged, 45-47; Great
Black-backed, 15, 32-42; Herring, 15,
32-43, 45-47; Iceland, 32, 34-37, 39, 40;
Ivory, 15; Kumlien’s Iceland, 38; Mew,
45-47; Ring-billed, 15, 32, 35-43

Gull, Slaty-backed, Supposed occurrence
and nesting in arctic Canada, by E. Otto
Hohn, 5

Gyrfalcon, 47, 167

Haemopis grandis, 163; marmorata, 163
Haliaeeutus leucocephalus alascanus, 11
Hamilton, Robert A.
Review of: Alberta Bird Report for
1957, 181
Review of: Folk Names of Canadian
Birds, 178
Review of: Using Wayside Plants, 115
Harris, Robert E.
Albino American Coots near Vermilion,
Alberta, 174
Harvest mouse, Distribution of, in British
Columbia, by James A. Munro, 146
Houstoriidae, 58, 61
Hawk, 32; Broad-winged, 11, Cooper’s, 10,
39, 40, 42, 43, 46, 47; Duck, 11; Eastern
Pigeon, 11; Eastern Red-tailed, 10;
Eastern Sparrow, 12; Marsh, 11, 38-42,
45, 46; Pigeon, 33, 38, 41, 43, 44, 169;
Red-shouldered, 11, 38, 40; Red-tailed, 33,
36, 38-40, 42, 45-47; Rough-legged, 11, 32,
34-36, 38-40, 42-44; Sharp-shinned, 10, 32,
39, 42, 45-47; Sparrow, 33, 35-42, 45-47.
Helobdella stagnalis, 163, 164
Hemiuclepsis occidentalis, 163
Heron, Great Blue, 8, 32, 37-39, 41, 42, 45-47
Heterocope septentrionalis, 152
Hirudinea, Vhe leeches, of Saskatchewan,
by D. R. Oliver, 161
Hirundo rustica erythrogaster, 19
Histrionicus histrionicus, 9
Hohn, E. Otto
Some birds of Jasper Park, 167
The supposed occurrence and nesting of
the Slaty-backed Gull in the western
arctic region of Canada, 5
Huckleberry, Black, 121
Hummingbird, Ruby-throated, 17
Hurt Not the Earth, reviewed by W. Win-
ston Mair, 176
Hyale, 57
Hyalella, 57; azteca, 55, 58, 76, 90, 102, 109;
curvispina, 109; dentata, 55, 109; inermiis,
109; knickerbockeri, 109
Hygrophorus cantharellus, 136; ceraceus, 136,
coccineus, 136, 137; conicus, 136; laetus,
136; limacinus, 136; marchii, 136; miniatus,
136; miniatus var. sphagnophilus, 136;
nitidus, 137; pratensis, 136, puniceus, 137;
turundus, 136, 137; vitellinus, 136, 137

1958

Hylocichla, 160; guttata faxoni, 21; minima,
21; minima bicknelli, 21; ustulata swain-
soni, 21

Hypericum virginicum, 121

Illex illecebrosus, 156

Illinobdella moorei, 163

Insect Life in the Tropics, reviewed by
John W. Arnold, 114

Iridoprocne bicolor, 19, 169

Iris versicolor, 121

Jasper Park, Some birds of, by E. Otto
Hohn, 167

Jay, Blue, 32-44; Gray, 32-34, 38-43; New-
foundisnd Canada, 19; Northern Blue,
19; Szeller’s, 45, 46

Judd, William W.
Studies of the Byron Bog in southwestern

Ontario, II, 119

Junco hyemalis hyemtalis, 26

Junco, Oregon, 38, 42, 43, 45-47; Slate-
colored, 26, 32-34, 36-43, 46, 47

Kalmiua pol:folia, 120

Killer whales in Newfoundland, A stranding
of, by J. C. Dearden, 166

Killdeer, 38, 44-47, 169

Kingbird, Eastern, 18

Kingfisher, Belted, 32, 37-41, 43-45; Eastern
Belted, 17

Kinglet, Eastern Golden-crowned, 21; East-
ern Ruby-crowned, 21; Golden-crowned,
32-34, 36-47; Ruby-crowned, 40, 45-47

Kittiwake, Atlantic, 15

Knot, American, 14

Lagenorhynchus acutus, 158; albirostris, 158,
167

Lanius excubitor, 169, 172; excubitor borealis,
21

Lapwing, 12

Lark, Horned, 19, 32, 33, 40, 41, 43, 46

Larus argentatus smithsonianus, 15, dela-
warensis, 15, hyperboreus, 124, hyper-
boreus barrovianus, 5; byperboreus hy per-
boreus, 15; marinus, 15; philadelphia, 15;
ridibundus, 15; schistisagus, 5, 6

Laurel, Bog, 120

Lawrence, Louise de Kiriline
Review of: The Warblers of North
America, 52

Leatherleaf, 119

Leeches (Hirudinea) of Saskatchewan, by
D. R. Oliver, 161

Leptonia, 137

Lesser Snow Goose nesting grounds, Egg
River, Banks Island, by Eoin H. McEwen,
122

Letters to the editor, 118

Limax maximus, 173

Lininodromus griseus griseus, 14

Lobipes lobatus, 15

Lockingtonia fluviallis, 109

INDEX

189

Longspur, Lapland, 32, 33, 39

Loon, Arctic, 46, 47; Common, 7, 32-34, 36,
38, 43-47; Red-throated, 44, 46, 47

Lophodytes cucullatus, 10

Loxia curvirostra, 25; leucoptera,
leucoptera leucoptera, 25

170;

Mackenzie Delta, Birds of, by W. E. Stevens

and E. O. Hohn, 168

Magpie, Black-billed, 43-46
Mair, W. Winston
Review of: Hurt Not the Earth, 176
Mallard, 33, 35, 37-39, 41, 42, 44-47
Manitoba, The distribution of the western
painted turtle in, by Charles D. Bird, 28
McEwen, Eoin H.

Observations on the Lesser Snow Goose
nesting grounds, Egg River, Banks
Island, 122

McKeever, James L.
Chipmunk and garter snake, 170

Meadowlark, 32, 37; Eastern, 24, 36, 38-40,
43. Western, 46, 47

Meadowlark, Early, in Alberta, by John G.
Stelfox, 171

Megaceryle alcyon alcyon, 17

Melanitta deglandi, 9; perspicillata, 10

Melita confervicola, 86, parvimana, 102

Melospiza georgiana ericrypta, 27; georgiana
georgiana, 26, lincolni lincoln, 26,
melodia melodia, 27

Merganser, American, 10; Common, 32,
35-47; Hooded, 10, 38, 40, 42, 45, 46; Red-
breasted, 10, 32, 34, 38, 40-42, 45-47

Mergus merganser americanus, 10; serrator
serrator, 10

Micropalama himantopus, 167

Milfoil, 174

Mills, Willett J.

Clapper Rails in Nova Scotia, 168

Cowbirds breed in Prince Edward Island,
170

Mimus polyglottos, 145

Mniotilta varia, 22

Mockingbird, 34, 38, 40

Mockingbird, in eastern Ontario, by Rowley
Frith, 145

Molothrus ater ater, 24, 170

Morus bassanus, 8

Mountain Wild Flowers of Colorado, re-
viewed by W. G. Dore, 176

Munro, James A.

Distribution of the harvest mouse in
British Columbia, 146

Munroe, David A.
Review of: The Ring-necked Duck in
the Northeast, 178
Murre, Atlantic, 16; Common, 32, 46; Thick-
billed, 32
Murrelet, Ancient, 46, 47; Marbled, 46, 47
Mustela erminea cicognanii, 144
Mynah, Crested, 46
Myriophyllum verticillatum, 174

190

Nashville Warbler winters in New Bruns-
wick, by David S. Christie, 172

Natrix sipedon sipedon, 128, 129, 132

Nature Photography at Night, reviewed by
V. E. F. Solman, 179

Nephelopsis obscura, 163, 164

New Brunswick, Nashville Warbler winters
in, by David S. Christie, 172

Newfoundland, A stranding of killer whales
in, by J. C. Dearden, 166

Newfoundland, Present distribution of the
Starling in, by Leslie M. Tuck, 139

Newfoundland race of the Gray-cheeked
Thrush, The, by W. E. Clyde Todd, 159

Newfoundland waters, Dolphins in, by
David E. Sergeant, 156

New Way of the Wilderness, The, reviewed
by V. E. F. Solman, 148

Nighthawk, Eastern, 17

Niphargus, 56

Nolanea, 137

Northern water snakes, Variation in a litter
of, by Sherman Bleakney, 128

Numenius americanus, 13; budsonicus, 13

Nuphar advena, 121

Nutcracker, Clark’s, 46

Nuthatch, Pygmy, 46; Red-breasted, 20,
33-36, 38-44, 46, 47; White-breasted, 20,
32-43, 46

Nuttallornis borealis, 19

Nyctea scandiaca, 16, 171

Oceanites oceanicus oceanicus, 8

Oceanodroma leucorhoa leucorhoa, 8

Oeming, Albert F.
Recoveries in Alberta of Banded Snowy

Owls, 171

Oenanthe oenanthe oenanthe, 169

Oidemia nigra americana, 10

Oldsquaw, 9, 32, 33, 37, 38, 41, 42, 45-47

Olor columbianus, 8

Ontario, A colony of the giant slug, Limax
maximus L.., at London, by William W.
Judd, 173

Ontario, Mockingbird in eastern, by Rowley
Frith, 145

Ontario, Studies of the Byron Bog in south-
western, II, by William W. Judd, 119

Opororis philadelphia, 23

Orcinus orca, 166

Oriole, Baltimore, 33

Osprey, 11

Ottawa, pike Jay flyway near, by Herbert
Groh,

Ottawa eo Checklist of Plants of the,
(announcement), 175

Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, Financial
Statement, 48; Report of Council, 79th
Annual Meeting, 49

Outdoor Rambles, reviewed by I. L. Con-
ners, 181

Oven-bird, Newfoundland, 23; Northern, 23

Owl, Barred, 35; Boreal, 32, 44, 169; Great
Gray, 169; Great Horned, 16, 33, 35-40,

THe CanapiAn FIELD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

43, 44; Hawk, 43, 47; Horned, 35; Long-
eared, 38, 39, 41, 42; Northern Barred,
16; Saw-whet, 17, 38, 41, 42; Screech, 35,
38-40; Short-eared, 39-41, 46, 169; Snowy,
16, 37, 39, 42-45

Owls, Banded Snowy, Recoveries in Alberta,
by Albert F. Oeming, 171

Oystercatcher, Black, 47

Pagophila eburnea, 15

Pandion haliaetus carolinensis, 11

Paramoera, 55, 57, 58, 86; carlottensis, 55,
58, 64, 66; columbiana, 55, 58, 62, 64, 111;
fasciculata, 64, hayamaensis, 66; mobri,
62; 64; japonica, 66; Roreana, 64; yezoen-
sis, 66

Partridge, Gray, 32, 36, 38, 40, 42-44, 46

Parula americana, 22, 173

Parula Warbler sista Indigo Bunting in south-
western Alberta, by David A. Boag, 174

Parulidae, 52

Parus atricapillus, 173; atricapillus atricapillus,
20; hudsonicus littoralis, 20

Passer domesticus domesticus, 24

Passerculus sandwichensis labradorius, 25,
sandwichensis savanna, 25

Passerella iliaca iliaca, 26

Passerina amoena, 174; cyanea, 174

Paxillus involutus, 138

Perisoreus canadensis sandfordi, 19

Petrochelidon pyrrhonota pyrrhonota, 19

Pewee, Eastern Wood, 19

Petrel, Leach, 8; Wilson, 8

Phalacrocorax auritus auritus, 8,
carbo, 8

Phalarope, Northern, 15; Red, 14

Phalaropus fulicarius, 14

Phasianus colchicus, 12

Pheucticus ludovicianus, 24

Pheasant, Ring-necked, 12, 33-42, 44-47

Philohela minor, 13

Phoebe, Eastern, 18; Say’s, 169

Picoides arcticus, 18

Pinicola enucleator eschatosa, 25

Pink, Grass, 121; Swamp, 121

Pintail, 32, 35, 42, 44-47

Pipit, American, 21; Water, 47

Piscicola geometra, 163, 164; milneri, 163,
punctata, 163

Pitcher Plant, 121

Placobdella montifera, 163, parasitica, 163

Plautus alle alle, 16

Plectrophenax nivalis nivalis, 27

Plover, Black-bellied, 13, 47; Eastern Piping,
12, Semipalmated, 12

Pluteus admirabilis, 135; cervinus, 133, 135;
chrysophlebius, 135

Podilymbus podiceps podiceps, 7

Pogonia ophioglossoides, 121

Polyartemiella hazeni, 152

Pomolobus pseudoharengus, 11

Pondweed, Sago, 174

Pontogeniidae, 55, 58, 62

carbo

1958

Pontoporeia, 57; affinis, 55, 57, 58, 61, 62;
affinis var. brevicornis, 61, filicornis, 61,
62; hoyi, 61, 62; Rendalli, 61, 62

Pooecetes gramuneus, 26

Porphyrula martinica, 12

Porzana carolina, 12.

Potamogeton pectinatus, 174

Prince Edward Island, Cowbirds breed in,
by Willett J. Mills, 170

Prontonotaria citrea, 53

Protoparce quinquemaculata, 147

Puffin, Atlantic, 16

Puffinus gravis, 7; griseus, 7

Pyrus floribunda, 120

Quail, California, 45-47
Quiscalus quiscala versicolor, 24

Rail, Virginia, 12, 32

Rails, Clapper, in Nova Scotia, by Willett J.
Mills, 168

Rallus limicola, 12; longirostris, 168

Rana sylvatica, 10

Raven, Common, 32-34, 36, 38, 39, 42, 45-47;
Northern, 20

Recoveries in Alberta of banded Snowy
Owls, by Albert F. Oeming, 171

Redhead, 38, 42, 44-46

Redpoll, 25; Common, 32-44, 46; Hoary, 38,
41, 44, 46

Red-shafted Flicker and American Coot at
Churchill, Manitoba, by Eva Beckett, 168

Redwing, Eastern, 24

Redstart, North American, 24

Reed, Edward B.
Diaptomus (Mixodiaptomus) theeli Lillje-
borg (Copepoda, Calanoida) from Arctic
Alaska, 152

Regulus calendula calendula, 21; satrapa
satrapa, 21

Request for information on monotone of
Chickadee, letter by Aaron M. Bagg, 118

Request for information on Purple Martin
abandoning loft, letter by Bertram A.
Fauvel, 119

Rhammnus frangula, 121

Rhodophyllus, 137

Richmondena cardinalis, 172

Ring-necked Duck in the Northeast, re-
viewed by David A. Munroe, 178

Riparia riparia riparia, 19

Rissa tridactyla, 15

Ritchie, J. C.
Review of: Flora of Manitoba, 147

Rivulogammarus, 57, 59, 74

Robin, American, 32-35, 38-41, 43, 45-47;
Black-backed, 20; Eastern, 20

Rosemary, Bog, 119

Rutter, Russell J.
Cardinal versus Northern Shrike, 172

INDEX

191
Salt, W. Ray
Black-throated Blue Warbler in Alberta,
165

Sanderling, 14, 32, 46
Sandpiper, Eastern Solitary, 13; Least, 14,
169; Pectoral, 14, 167; Purple, 32; Rock,
47; Semipalmated, 14; Spotted, 13; Stilt,
167; White-rumped, 14
Sapsucker, Yellow-bellied, 17, 46
Sarracenia purpurea, 121
Saskatchewan, The Leeches (Hirudinea) of,
by D. R. Oliver, 161
Savile, D. B. O.
Review of: Birds of Midway and Laysan
Islands, 180
Review of: The Ecology of Invasions by
Animals and Plants, 179
Sayornis phoebe, 18; saya, 169
Scaup, Greater, 33, 35, 36, 38, 42, 45-47;
Lesser, 38, 39, 42, 46
Scirpus validus, 174
Scoter, American, 10; Common, 32, 33, 45-47;
Surf, 10, 32, 45-47; White-winged, 9, 32,
38, 42, 45-47
Seiurus aurocapillus aurocapillus, 23; auro-
capillus furvior, 23, noveboracensis nove-
boracensis, 23, 53
Sergeant, David E.
Dolphins in Newfoundland waters, 156
Setophaga ruticilla tricolora, 24
Shearwater, Greater, 7; Sooty, 7
Shoveler, 46, 47
Shrike, Northern, 21, 32, 33, 35-47, 169, 172
Sillman, E. I.
Impaction of the gullet of a Starling with
a lepidopteran pupal case, 147
Siskin, Northern Pine, 25; Pine, 32-34, 37-43,
45-47
Sistrurus, 128
Sittac canadensis, 20; carolinensis cookei, 20
Skylark, 47
Slug, A colony of the giant, Limzax maximus
L., at London, Ontario, by William W.
Judd, 173
Snakes of Ontario, The, reviewed by Sher-
man Bleakney, 149
Snipe, Common, 32, 33, 45-47; Wilson, 13
Solitaire, Townsend’s, 46
Solman, V. E. F.
Review of: A Guide to Field Biology, 176
Review of: Nature Photography at
Night, 179
Review of: The New Way of the Wil-
derness, 148
Somateria mollissima dresseri, 9; spectabilis, 9
Some additions to the list of the birds of the
Mackenzie Delta, N.W.T., by W. E.
Stevens and E. O. Hohn, 168
Some Birds of Jasper Park, by E. Otto
Hohn, 167
Sora, 12
Sorbus americanus, 143
Sorex cinereus, 10

192

Sparrow, Acadian Sharp-tailed, 26, Chipping,
33, 34, 38; Eastern Chipping, 26; Eastern
Fox, 26; Eastern Savannah, 25; Eastern
Song, 27; Eastern Tree; 26; English, 24,
36, 45; Field, 26, 38-40; Fox, 32, 45, 46;
Golden-crowned, 45-47; Harris’s, 170;
House, 32-47; Labrador Savannah, 235;
Lincoln’s, 26, 46; Northern Swamp, 27;
Savannah, 32, 33, 37; Song, 32-34, 36, 39-
43, 45-47; Southern Swamp, 26, Swamp,
32, 33, 38, 40, 41; Tree, 32-43, 47; Ves-
per, 26, White-crowned, 45-47; White-
throated, 26, 32-34, 38, 39, 41, 43

Spatterdock, 121

Sphyrapicus varius varius, 17

Spinus pinus pinus, 25; tristis tristis, 25

Spiza americana, 25

Spizella arborea arborea, 26; passerina pas-
serina, 26; pusilla, 26

Squatarola squatarola, 13

Starling, 32-46, European, 21

Starling, Impaction of the gullet of, by E. I.
Sillman, 147

Starling, Present distribution of, in New-
foundland, ty Leslie M. Tuck, 139

Stelfox, John G.

Early Meadowlark in Alberta, 171

Stercorarius parasiticus, 124; longicaudus,
124; pomarimus, 124

Sterna hirundo hirundo, 15; paradisaea, 15

Sternotherus odoratus, 1

Stevens, W. E. and E. O. Hohn
Some additions to the list of birds of the
Mackenzie Delta, N.W.T., 168

St.-John’s-Wort, Marsh, 121

Storeria occipitomaculata, 128

Strix nebulosa, 169; varia varia, 16

Studies of the Byron Bog in southwestern
Ontario, by William W. Judd, 119

Sturnella magna magna, 24; neglecta, 171

Sturnus vulgaris, 147; vulgaris vulgaris, 21,
139

Stygobromus, 60

Stygonectes, 60

Sundew, 121; Round-leaved, 121

Surfbird, 47

Swallow, Bank, 19; Barn, 19; Northern Cliff,
19; Tree, 19, 169

Swan, Whistling, 8, 37, 47

Swift, Chimney, 17

Synpleonia, 60

Synurella, 56; bifurca, 60; chamberlaini, 60,
dentata, 60; johanseni, 60

Talitridae, 58, 109

Tamias striatus, 170

Teal, Blue-winged, 9, 42; Green-winged, 9,
38, 42, 44-47

Tern, Arctic, 15; Common, 15

Terrepene carolina, 1, 2, 4

Terrill, L. M.
A Yellow-throated Warbler at Manotick,

Ontario, 171

Tue CanapIAN FIELpD-NATURALIST

Vol. 72

Thamnophis sirtalis, 170; sirtalis sirtalis, 128,
131

Theromyzon occidentale, 163; rude, 163;
tessulatum, 163, 164

Thrush, Eastern Hermit, 21; Hermit, 47;
Olive-backed, 21; Gray-cheeked, 21;
Varied, 45-47

Thrush, The Newfoundland race of the
Gray-cheeked, by W. E. Clyde Todd,

159
Todd, W. E. Clyde

The Newfoundlend race of the Gray-

cheeked Thrush, 159
Totanus flavipes, 14; melanoleucus, 14
Towhee, Rufous-sided, 38, 43, 45-47
Translations from the Russian, (notice), 181
Tringa solitaria solitaria, 13
Trionyx ferox spinifera, 1
Troglodytes troglodytes hiemzalis, 20
Tuck, Leslie M.
Present distribution and population of the
Starling in Newfoundland, 1°9
Turdus aliciae, 160; bicknelli, 169; migra-
torius, 143; migratorius migratorius, 20;
migratorius nigrideus, 20; mtinimzus, 160,
161

Turnstone, Black, 45-47; Ruddy. 13

Turtle, Blanding’s, 4; Box, 4, Wood, 4

Turtle bones, The significance of, from sites
in Ontario and Quebec, by Sherman
Bleakney, 1

Turtle, western painted, Distribution of, in
Manitoba, by Charles D. Bird, 28

Tyrannus tyrannus, 18

Uria aalge aalge, 16

Using Wayside Plants, reviewed by Robert
A. Hamilton, 115

Utricularia cornuta, 121; vulgaris, 121

Vaccinium atrococcum, 119; macrocarpon,
121; oxycoccus, 121

Vanellus vanellus, 12

Vermivora peregrina, 22, 53, ruficapilla, 172;
ruficapilla ruficapilla. 22

Vireo olivaceus, 21; solitarius solitarius, 21

Vireo, Blue-headed, 21; Red-eyed, 21

Volvariella speciosa, 136

Vulture, Turkey, 10

Warbler, A Yellow-throated, at Manotick,
Ontario, by L. M. Terrill, 171

Warbler, Bay-breasted, 23; Black and White,
22; Blackburnian, 22; Black-polled, 23,
Black-throated Blue, 22; Black-throated
Green, 22; Canada, 24; Cape May, 22;
MacGillivray’s, 45; Magnolia, 22; Mourn-
ing, 23; Myrtle, 22, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 172;
Nashville, 22, 34, 172; Newfoundland Yel-
low, 22; Orange-crowned, 46; Palm, 32,
33; Parula, 22, 173; Tennessee, 22; Wilson,
23; Yellow Palm, 23

Warbler, Black-throated Blue, in Alberta,
165

1958

Warblers of North America, The, reviewed
by Louise de Kiriline Lawrence, 52

Warblers—Songs of Warblers of Eastern
North America, reviewed by W. Earl
Godfrey, 176

Water-thrush, Northern, 23

Waxwing, Bohemian, 44, 46; Cedar, 21, 38,
43, 46, 47

Waxwing, Cedar, at Churchill, by Eva
Beckett, 145

Weasel, Short-tailed, capturing a chipmunk,
by Rowley Frith, 144

Whales, A stranding of killer, in Newfound-
land, by J. C. Dearden, 166

Wheatear, 169

Widgeon, American, 35, 37, 38, 42, 45, 46

Willet, Eastern, 13

Wilsonia pusilla pusilla, 23; canadensis, 24

Woodcock, American, 13

INDEX

193

Woodpecker, Arctic Three-toed, 18; Black-
backed Three-toed, 32, 36, 41; Downy,
32-47; Eastern Hairy, 18; Hairy, 32-47;
Lewis's, 45, 47; Northern Downy, 18;
Northern Pileated, 17; Pileated, 34-43,
45-47; Red-headed, 38; Red-bellied, 40

Wren, Bewick’s, 45-47; Carolina, 38-41, 43;
Fastern Winter, 20; Long-billed Marsh,
46; Winter, 38-41, 43, 45-47

Xenobalanus globicipitis, 156

Yellow-legs, Greater, 14; Lesser, 14, 47

Yellow-throat, Northern, 23

Yellow-throated Warbler at Manotick,
Ontario, A, by L. M. Terrill, 171

Zenaidura macroura carolinensis, 16
Zonotrichia albicollis, 26; querula, 170

CTRw

A NOTE ON THE PRODUCTION OF THIS JOURNAL

The Canadian Field-Naturalist conforms to ISO recommendations for the layout of
periodicals. Body text set to 29 picas is Jansen 10 on 11 and, in double column, 9 on 10.
Cover stock is ‘Mayfair’ by Howard Smith and text paper is Provincial Paper Company’s.

“Thriftcoat.’ Printing is by the Runge Press.

194 Tue Canapian Frectp-NATURALIST Vol. 72

A GUIDE TO THE GEOLOGY
OF THE
OTTAWA DISTRICT

By Auicre E. WiLson
$1.00

The Business Manager, Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, Science Service Building,
Ottawa, Ontario

LIBRARIES ....

@ Check your Field-Naturalist file
@ Order missing numbers from
Mr. W. J. Cody

Science Service Building

Ottawa, Ontario

eg ito ie O. Hiane eniens G. Bat.

Mellwraith Ornithological Club,

% London, Ont.

Past President, F. Howarp Keast; President,
V. Jupp; Vice-President, F.S. Cook, Recording
tary, D. Dow; Treasurer, Miss G. Lawton;
esponding Secretary, Mrs. M. E. Leany, 682
n St., London, Ont.; Migration Secretary,
: ae aM Platts Lane, Soo: ok Ont.

resident, ‘G: R. K. ae Vice-President, Dr.
RISON F, Lewis; Secretary-Treasurer, Carr.
=, Morzanp, c/o Nova Scotia Museum of
Ps Suge Garden Road, oe NS.;

S

nuseripts q

nuscfipts should be typewritten on one side
f nontrarsparent paper measuring 8} by 11 inches.
uthors are ‘requested to use at least one given
ie. All text matter, including quotations, foot-
5, tables, literature references, and legends for
should be double-spaced. Only those words
. to appear in italics should be underlined.
oe = pect of the manuscript should be numbered.

Ly o spelling.

erences are made by the author-date system.
ey should be listed alphabetically and typed
the end of the main body of text. For titles in

eenanonal Code for the Abbreviation of
yo of Periodicals and the World List of
ic Periodicals.

her abbreviations should be used sparingly.
e better-known terms of measurement follow
A Specification 7285-1943 Abbreviations for
tific and Engineering Terms or the equivalent
the American Standards Association (Z10.1-
941).
‘Tables should be titled and numbered consecu-
ly in arabic numerals. Tables and legends for
figures should be placed after the list of
neces. Each table and all the legends should
mM separate pages.

tes should bear the name of one author only

ARFILIATED SOCIETIES

Provancher Society of Natural History
of Canada
President, J. Kennepvy Hu1; First Vice-President,
FRANCOIS Hawi: Second Vice-President, Rona
E. Brat; Secretary-Treasurer, GEORGES A. LECLERC,
628 Fraser St., Quebec, Que.

Province of Quebec Society for the
Protection of Birds
President, C. C. Sarr; Vice-Presidents, J. Dreta-
FIELD, Miss R. B. Brancuarp; Treasurer, Miss G. E.
Hisparp, Secretary, Miss Ruta S. Assorr, 164
Senneville Road, R.R. 1, Ste. Anne de Bellevue,
Que.; Librarian, Mrs. P. H. pu Boutay.

Toronto Field Naturalists’ Club
President, Dr. Water Toveti; Vice-President,
Frep Bopswortn; Secretary-Treasurer, Mrs. Hitton
Rosson, 49 Craighurst Avenue, Toronto 12, Ont.

Vancouver Natural History Society

Honorary President, N. A. M. MacKenzir; Past
President, A. R. Wootton; President, J. J. Prom-
MER; Vice-President, FRANK Sanrorp; Honorary
Secretary, J. Y. Nein; Recording Secretary, Miss
Eruet Fueier; Program Secretary, Joun GARDNER;
Honorary Treasurer, Frank Sanrorp; Librarian,
Mrs. S. F. Braptey; Editor of Bulletin, C. B. W.

- Rocers.

ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS |

and reforenece in notes should be incorporated
directly in the text.

Illustrations

All figures, including each figure of the plates,
should be numbered consecutively in arabic
numerals. The author’s name, title of the paper,
and figure number should be written in the lower
left corner of -the sheet on which the illustration
appears. The legend should not be incorporated
in the figure. —

Line drawings should be made with India ink
on white drawing paper, blue tracing linen, or
blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co- oneinate lines
that are to appear in the reproduction should be
ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be
lettered, not typewritten, and all parts of the
drawing should permit easy legibility even if a
reduction is made.

Photographs should have a glossy finish and
show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com-
plete plate they should be mounted without space
between prints.

- For large drawings and mounted photographs
the ratio of height to width should conform to
that of the journal page (43 by 7+ inches) but the
height should be adjusted to allow for the legend.

Reprints

Reprints, with or without covers, may be bought.
The cost is given on the reprint order form which
is attached to the galley proofs.

ANNUAL MEETING

The annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ .
Club will be held on Thursday, December A, 1958, at o
8.15 p.m. in the Ottawa Teachers’ College, Lisgar Street.

arg

CHRISTMAS BIRD ne sUS—1 958

The editor of ie anal isd census will be od to. |

_ send submission forms to those not now on his ie a

list. Address your request, without delay, to: Mr. |

Earl Godfrey, National Museum of Caliaaa: Ottawa : 2 :

Ontario.

ween

ERNST MAYR LIBRARY

iii

4 198 096

PPE OS